Reyrolle Protection Devices 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Energy Management Contents 1. Description of Operation 2. Settings, Configuration & Instruments Appendix: Settings Appendix: Instrumentation 3. Performance Specification Appendix: Time Current Curves 4. Data Communications 5. Installation 6. Commissioning and Maintenance 7. Applications Guide Software Revision History 2008/03 2435H80011R2d-1a First Release 2008/06 2435H80011R3d-2b Loss Of Voltage 2008/10 2435H80011R4-3 Single/Triple Autoreclose function 2009/09 2435H80011R4c-3b Maintenance Release 2010/04 2435H80011R4d-4 Check Synchronising function 2010/09 2435H80011R4f-4b IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol Requires hardware BB 2012/09 2435H85010R7b-7a IEC61850 communication protocol Requires hardware CC 2012/12 2435H85010-R7c-7a File handling during shutdown 2013/12 2435H85010-R7e-7c Maintenance Release 2015/11 2435H85010-R8b-7d Support for EN100+ module added Hardware Revision History 2008/03 BB First Release 2009/09 CC RS232 & RS485 comms options added 2012/09 DD Hardware revisions to allow integration of IEC 61850 functionality. 2015/11 EE EN100+ Ethernet comms card replaces EN100. 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2009/04 Third issue 2009/09 Fourth issue 2010/04 Fifth issue 2010/05 Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand 2010/09 Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol. 2012/10 Eighth Issue. Addition of optional IEC 61850 communication protocol. 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Extended AR Deadtime range 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual. Text revisions to, inrush detector (5.7), waveform records (6.4.3) and fault data records (6.4.4). The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Contents Section 1: Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 Current Transformer Circuits................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 External Resistors ................................................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Fibre Optic Communication..................................................................................................................... 6 1.4 Front Cover ............................................................................................................................................. 6 1.5 Front Fascia ............................................................................................................................................ 6 Section 2: Hardware Description.............................................................................................................................. 9 2.1 General ................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.2 Case...................................................................................................................................................... 10 2.3 Front Cover ........................................................................................................................................... 10 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) ...................................................................................................................... 10 2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia .................................................................................................................... 10 2.6 Current Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 12 2.7 Voltage Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 13 2.8 Binary Inputs ......................................................................................................................................... 13 2.9 Binary Outputs (Output Relays) ............................................................................................................ 14 2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 15 2.11 Self Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................... 15 2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective ................................................................................................... 17 2.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser ............................................................................ 17 Section 3: Protection Functions ............................................................................................................................. 18 3.1 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67, 51, 50).............................................................................. 18 3.1.1 Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67) .................................................................. 18 3.1.2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) ............................................................................. 20 3.1.3 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51).............................................................................. 21 3.2 Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V) ................................................................................. 23 3.3 Current Protection: Measured EF (67G, 51G, 50G) .............................................................................. 24 3.3.1 Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G) ................................................ 24 3.3.2 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) ........................................................... 25 3.3.3 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) ........................................................... 26 3.4 Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF, 51SEF, 50SEF) ................................................................... 27 3.4.1 Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF) ............................................. 27 3.4.2 Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF) ........................................................ 28 3.4.3 Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF) ........................................................ 29 3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H) .................................................................... 30 3.6 Current Protection: Cold Load (51c) ..................................................................................................... 31 3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. OC (46NPS) ........................................................................ 32 3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37) ................................................................................................. 33 3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) ........................................................................................... 34 3.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59)........................................................................ 36 3.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) ......................................................... 38 3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ..................................................................................... 39 3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) ................................................................................... 40 Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ..................................................................................................................... 41 4.1 Autoreclose (79).................................................................................................................................... 41 4.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................. 41 4.1.2 Autoreclose sequences ........................................................................................................... 43 4.1.3 AUTORECLOSE PROT'N Menu............................................................................................. 44 4.1.4 AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu ............................................................................................ 44 4.1.5 P/F SHOTS sub-menu ............................................................................................................ 46 4.1.6 E/F SHOTS sub-menu ............................................................................................................ 46 4.1.7 SEF SHOTS sub-menu ........................................................................................................... 46 4.1.8 EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu ................................................................................................... 47 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.2 Manual Close ........................................................................................................................................ 49 4.3 Synchronising ....................................................................................................................................... 49 4.3.1 Reclosure Modes .................................................................................................................... 49 4.3.2 Charge Delays ........................................................................................................................ 50 4.3.3 Voltage monitoring elements................................................................................................... 50 4.3.4 Check Synchronising Mode .................................................................................................... 51 4.3.5 System Split Detector ............................................................................................................. 51 4.3.6 System Sync Reversion .......................................................................................................... 52 4.3.7 System Synchronising Mode................................................................................................... 52 4.3.8 Close on Zero Mode ............................................................................................................... 53 4.4 Live/Dead Indication ............................................................................................................................. 54 4.5 Circuit Breaker ...................................................................................................................................... 55 4.6 Hot Line In/Out ...................................................................................................................................... 56 4.7 Quick Logic ........................................................................................................................................... 57 Section 5: Supervision Functions ........................................................................................................................... 59 5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) .............................................................................................................. 59 5.2 VT Supervision (60VTS) ....................................................................................................................... 60 5.3 Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus) ................................................................................................................. 62 5.4 CT Supervision (60CTS) ....................................................................................................................... 62 5.5 Broken Conductor (46BC) ..................................................................................................................... 63 5.6 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) .......................................................................................................... 63 5.7 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ..................................................................................................................... 64 5.8 Battery Test........................................................................................................................................... 65 5.9 Capacitor Test....................................................................................................................................... 66 5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S)....................................................................................................................... 67 Section 6: Other Features ...................................................................................................................................... 68 6.1 Data Communications ........................................................................................................................... 68 6.2 CB Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 68 6.3 Output Matrix Test ................................................................................................................................ 69 6.4 Data Storage ......................................................................................................................................... 69 6.4.1 General ................................................................................................................................... 69 6.4.2 Event Records ........................................................................................................................ 69 6.4.3 Waveform Records. ................................................................................................................ 69 6.4.4 Fault Data Records ................................................................................................................. 70 6.4.5 Demand .................................................................................................................................. 70 6.4.6 Data Log ................................................................................................................................. 70 6.4.7 Energy Storage ....................................................................................................................... 70 6.4.8 Fault Locator ........................................................................................................................... 71 6.5 Metering ................................................................................................................................................ 72 6.6 Operating Mode .................................................................................................................................... 73 6.7 Control Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 73 6.8 Real Time Clock .................................................................................................................................... 74 6.8.1 Time Synchronisation - Data Communication Interface ......................................................... 74 6.8.2 Time Synchronisation - Binary Input ...................................................................................... 74 6.8.3 Time Synchronisation - IRIG-B (Optional) .............................................................................. 74 6.9 Settings Groups .................................................................................................................................... 74 6.10 Password Feature ................................................................................................................................. 75 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 3 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation List of Figures Figure 1.5-1 Figure 2.5-1 Figure 2.8-1 Figure 2.9-1 Figure 2.11-1 Figure 2.11-1 Figure 2.11-2 Figure 3.1-1 Figure 3.1-2 Figure 3.1-3 Figure 3.2-1 Figure 3.3-1 Figure 3.3-2 Figure 3.3-3 Figure 3.4-1 Figure 3.4-2 Figure 3.4-3 Figure 3.5-1 Figure 3.6-1 Figure 3.7-1 Figure 3.8-1 Figure 3.9-1 Figure 3.10-1 Figure 3.11-1 Figure 3.12-1 Figure 3.13-1 Figure 4.1-1 Figure 4.1-2 Figure 4.3-1 Figure 4.3-2 Figure 4.3-3 Figure 4.3-4 Figure 4.3-5 Figure 4.4-1 Figure 4.5-1 Figure 4.7-1 Figure 5.1-1 Figure 5.2-1 Figure 5.4-1 Figure 5.5-1 Figure 5.6-1 Figure 5.7-1 Figure 5.8-1 Figure 5.9-1 Figure 5.10-1 Figure 6.4-1 Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections.......................... 8 7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case.................................................... 10 Binary Input Logic ...................................................................................................................... 14 Binary Output Logic ................................................................................................................... 15 Start-up Counter Meter .............................................................................................................. 16 Start-up Events .......................................................................................................................... 16 Unexpected Restarts Lockout Text ............................................................................................ 16 Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67) ............................................................... 19 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element ................................................................ 20 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element.................................................................. 22 Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection ....................................................... 23 Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection .................................................... 25 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element ................................................... 25 Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G) ........................................ 26 Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF) .................................................................... 27 Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element ............................................................................. 28 Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF) ............................................................... 29 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H).............................................................................. 30 Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c) .................................................................................. 31 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) ............................................. 32 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37) ............................................................................... 33 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S) .................................................................. 35 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) .............................................................. 37 Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47)...................................................................... 38 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element ............................................................................ 40 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) ............................................................... 40 Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip................................... 43 Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram ...................................................................................... 48 Voltage Detector Operation ....................................................................................................... 50 Check Sync Function ................................................................................................................. 51 System Sync Function ............................................................................................................... 53 Close On Zero Function ............................................................................................................. 53 Close On Zero Timing ................................................................................................................ 54 Voltage Detector Operation ....................................................................................................... 54 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status ....................................................................................... 56 Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off) ............................. 58 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) .............................................................. 59 Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS) .................................................................... 61 Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS) .................................................................... 62 Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC) .................................................................. 63 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) ......................................................... 64 Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2) ................................................................... 64 Battery Test timing diagram ....................................................................................................... 65 Capacitor Test timing diagram ................................................................................................... 66 Sag and Swell Indices - IEEE 1159 ........................................................................................... 67 Energy Direction Convention ..................................................................................................... 71 List of Tables Table 1-1 Table 2-1 Table 6-1 7SR224 Ordering Options............................................................................................................ 7 Summary of Controller Relay Configurations ............................................................................... 9 Operation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 73 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Symbols and Nomenclature The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document: 1. 2. 3. 4. Setting Menu Location Setting: Setting value: Alternatives: MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU Elem name -Setting value [1st] [2nd] [3rd] Elem Char Dir Binary input signal visible to user Elem Inhibit Binary Output visible to user Elem Starter List of settings associated with a specific function Appropriate list is TRUE when setting selected. Non-Dir Forward Reverse Common setting for multiple functions Digital signal not visible to user, to/from another element Digital signal not visible to user, internal to this element Analogue signal with signal description PhaseAFwd L1 Dir Blk IL1 Common control input (c) for multiple functions. All functions are enabled when control input is TRUE. Function. Elem Reset Delay c Pickup c Operate Pickup Individual functions are enabled when associated control input (c) is TRUE. c And Gate (2 inputs shown) & 1 Or Gate (3 inputs shown) EVENT: IEC, Modbus, DNP etc. Where applicable Relay instrument Exclusive Or (XOR) Gate (3 inputs shown) Latch (Set/Reset) Operate EVENT INST. =1 S R Q Positive Edge Trigger (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 1: Introduction This manual is applicable to the following relays: 7SR224 Directional Overcurrent and Directional Earth Fault Recloser Control Relay The 7SR224 relay integrates the protection and control elements required to provide a complete recloser control relay. The `Ordering Options' Tables summarise the features available in each model General Safety Precautions ! ! 1.1 The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment. 1.2 ! Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. 1.4 ! External Resistors Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a danger of electric shock or burns, if touched. 1.3 ! Current Transformer Circuits Front Cover The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions. 1.5 Front Fascia For safety reasons the following symbols are displayed on the fascia 2 Dielectric Test Voltage 2kV 5 Impulse Test Above 5kV Caution: Refer to Equipment Documentation Caution: Risk of Electric Shock (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4 5 6 7 S R 2 2 4 | | | | | 1 ORDER-No.: 2 3 8 7 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 12 0 - 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 2 | 3 | | | | | | | | | | C D | A | | E10 case, 23 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 3 | 3 | | | | | | C D | A | | E10 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys 4 | 3 | | | | | | | | | | C D | A | | E12 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys 6 | | | | | | | | | | | | C E | A | | E12 case, 33 Binary Inputs / 30 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys 7 | | | | | | 1-4 2-3 | | C E | A | | E12 case, 43 Binary Inputs / 22 Binary Outputs, 16 LEDs + 12 keys 8 | | | | | | 1-4 2-3 | | C E | A | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | C/E | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 13 | | 0 | | | | 14 | C | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | Protection Product Family Overcurrent - Directional 5 2 Relay Type Recloser 6 4 Case, I/O and Fascia 1) | | | | | | | 7 E10 case, 13 Binary Inputs / 14 Binary Outputs, 8 LEDs + 12 keys Measuring Input 4xCT 1/5 A, 4xVT 63.5/110V 4xCT 1/5 A, 6xVT 63.5/110V 8 2 3 Auxiliary Nominal Voltage 30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 19V DC 30 to 220V DC, binary input threshold 88V DC 9 A B Region Specific Functions Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Reyrolle fascia Region World, 50/60Hz, language English, (language changeable) Siemens fascia Region USA, 60/50Hz, language English-US (ANSI), (language changeable), Siemens fascia 10 A B C Communication Interface Standard version - included in all models, USB front port, RS485 rear port Standard version - plus additional rear F/O ST connectors (x2) and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear RS485 and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear RS232 and IRIG-B Standard version - plus additional rear Electrical Ethernet RJ45 (x2) Standard version - plus additional rear Optical Ethernet Duplex (x2) 1-4 2-3 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 11 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | 1 2 3 4 7 8 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 8 8 | Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC60870-5-101 and Modbus RTU and DNP 3.0 and IEC61850 12 1-4 1-4 7-8 2 3 8 Spare Protection Function Packages Standard version - included in all models 21FL Fault Locator Under/overvoltage 27/59 Under/overvoltage, Sag/swell 27/59 37 Undercurrent 46BC Broken conductor/load unbalance Negative phase sequence overcurrent 46NPS Negative phase sequence overvoltage 47NPS 49 Thermal overload Circuit breaker fail 50BF Voltage dependent overcurrent 51V Neutral voltage displacement 59N 60CTS CT supervision 60VTS VT supervision 67/50 Directional instantaneous phase fault overcurrent 67/50G Directional instantaneous earth fault 67/51 Directional time delayed phase fault overcurrent 67/51G Directional time delayed earth fault Directional instantaneous sensitive earth fault 67/50HIZ 67/51HIZ Directional time delayed sensitive earth fault 74TC Trip circuit supervision 74BF Circuit breaker close fail 79 Autoreclose Under/overfrequency 81 81HBL2 Inrush restraint 86 Lockout Battery and capacitor test Cold load pickup Programmable logic Standard version - plus 27/59 Under/overvoltage VT supervision 60VTS Loop automation by loss of voltage Standard version - plus Single/triple pole autoreclose 2-4 3 6-8 D E Additional Functionality No additional functionality 25 A | | | A | | 15 A C Synchronising, synchronising check D | | Settings File Standard settings and standard labels for Siemens Recloser 1) 16 0 4CT is configured as 3PF + EF/SEF (user selectable setting). Table 1-1 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Ordering Options Chapter 1 Page 7 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 67/ 51 (x4) 67/ 50 (x4) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn 81 (x4) 59N (x2)* * 59N can be configured as derived or Vx Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 25 V5 & V6 voltage inputs are optional. 1x 27/59 element is provided in 4xVT variants. Figure 1.5-1 Functional Diagram of 7SR224 Relay Showing Possible External Connections (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 8 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 2: Hardware Description 2.1 General The structure of the relay is based upon the Multi-function hardware platform. The relays are supplied in a size E10 or E12 case (where 1 x E = width of approx. 26mm). The hardware design provides commonality between products and components across the Multi-function range of relays. Relay Current Voltage Binary Output Inputs Inputs Inputs Relays LEDs Function Case Keys 7SR2242-2 4 4 13 14 8 12 E10 7SR2242-3 4 6 13 14 8 12 E10 7SR2243-2 4 4 23 22 8 12 E10 7SR2243-3 4 6 23 22 8 12 E10 7SR2244-2 4 4 33 14 8 12 E10 7SR2244-3 4 6 33 14 8 12 E10 7SR2246-2 4 4 33 14 16 12 E12 7SR2246-3 4 6 33 14 16 12 E12 7SR2247-2 4 4 33 30 16 12 E12 7SR2247-3 4 6 33 30 16 12 E12 7SR2248-2 4 4 43 22 16 12 E12 7SR2248-3 4 6 43 22 16 12 E12 Table 2-1 Summary of Controller Relay Configurations Relays are assembled from the following modules: 1) Front Fascia with three fixed function LEDs, Function Keys and ordering options of configurable LEDs. 2) Processor module. 3) Analogue Input module - 4 x Current + 4 or 6 x Voltage. 4) Power Supply (PSU) and Basic Binary Input (BI) and Binary Output (BO). 5) Binary Input/Output Module. 6) Data Comms module (optional) (2x rear fibre optic serial ports + 1x IRIG-B port), (1x rear RS485 + 1x IRIG-B port), (1x rear RS232 + 1x IRIG-B port), (2x Electrical Ethernet for IEC 61850), or (2x Optical Ethernet for IEC 61850). (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 9 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2.2 Case The relays are housed in cases designed to fit directly into standard panel racks. The case has a width of 260mm (E10), 312mm (E12) and a height of 177 mm (4U). The required panel depth for wiring clearance is 242 mm and 287mm to accommodate the bending radius of fibre optic data communications cables for serial ports if fitted. Relays with IEC 61850 communications option require a depth of 261.5 mm to allow for the communication module and a clearance from devices fitted below the relay of 75 mm to accommodate fitment of the Ethernet cables. The complete relay assembly is withdrawable from the front of the case. Shorting contacts on the rear connection block in the case ensure that the CT circuits remain short-circuited when the relay is removed. For the IEC 61850 variant options the rear retaining screw must be re-fitted following re-insertion to ensure relay performance claims. External connections to the rear terminal block are made via M4 screws. Each terminal can accept two 4mm crimps. Located at the top rear of the case is a screw clamp earthing point, this must be connected to the main panel earth. 2.3 Front Cover With the transparent front cover in place the user does not have access to the push buttons. The front cover is used to secure the relay assembly in the case and must be refitted after removal for access. 2.4 Power Supply Unit (PSU) The relay PSU can be directly connected to any dc supply via a suitably rated fuse from 30V dc to 220V dc. In the event of the supply voltage level falling below the relay minimum operate level the PSU will automatically switch itself off and latch out - this prevents any PSU overload conditions occurring. The PSU is reset by switching the auxiliary supply off and on. Typically the PSU is connected to the auxiliary supply via an external HRC fuse rated at 6A (BS88/IEC60259). Isolation links may also be installed in accordance with user requirements. 2.5 Operator Interface/ Fascia The operator interface is designed to provide a user-friendly method of controlling, entering settings and retrieving data from the relay. Figure 2.5-1 7SR224 with 12 Function Keys and 3 + 8 LEDs in E10 Case NOTE: Transparent cover with pushbuttons not shown (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation The fascia is an integral part of the relay. Handles are located at each side of the relay which allow it to be withdrawn from the relay case. Relay Information Above the LCD three labels are provided, these provide the following information: 1) Product name and order code. 2) Nominal current rating, rated frequency, voltage rating, auxiliary dc supply rating, binary input supply rating, configuration and serial number. 3) Blank label for user defined information. A `template' is available within the Reydisp Evolution Help menu to allow users to create and print customised labels. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) A 4 line by 20-character liquid crystal display indicates settings, instrumentation, fault data and control commands. To conserve power the display backlighting is extinguished when no buttons are pressed for a user defined period. A setting within the "SYSTEM CONFIG" menu allows the timeout to be adjusted from 1 to 60 minutes and "Off" (backlight permanently on). Pressing any key will re-activate the display. The LCD contrast can be adjusted using a flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw located below the contrast symbol . Turning the screw clockwise increases the contrast, anti-clockwise reduces the contrast. `PROTECTION HEALTHY' LED This green LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that DC voltage has been applied to the relay power supply and that the relay is operating correctly. If the internal relay watchdog detects an internal fault then this LED will continuously flash. `PICKUP' LED This yellow LED is illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function(s) has picked up. The LED will self reset after the initiating condition has been removed. Functions are assigned to the PICKUP LED in the OUTPUT CONFIG>PICKUP CONFIG menu. `TRIP' LED This red LED is steadily illuminated to indicate that a user selectable function has operated to trip the circuit breaker. Functions are assigned to the `Trip' LED using the OUTPUT CONFIG>Trip Contacts setting. Operation of the LED is latched and can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). Indication LEDs Relays have either 8 or 16 user programmable LED indicators depending upon the variant ordered. Each LED can be programmed to be illuminated as either green, yellow or red. LEDs can be designated to indicate operated states of protection elements or binary conditions or to indicate the starter pickup of protection elements Configuration options are: Self Reset LEDs - automatically reset upon loss of initiating condition. PU LEDs - illuminate for element pickup before the associated time delay expires Green LEDs - illuminate green Red LEDs - illuminate red Yellow LEDs - illuminate yellow (when both red and green are selected) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation PU Green LEDs - illuminate green response to the detection of a pickup condition PU Red LEDs - illuminate red in response to the detection of a pickup condition Colour selection is achieved by checking (ticking) the appropriate box i.e. red or green. To select yellow, check both red & green boxes. Functions are assigned to the LEDs in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu. A single LED can be used to indicate operation of a protection element with one colour whilst also providing indication of pickup of the element as a different colour. Each LED can be labelled by withdrawing the relay and inserting a label strip into the pocket behind the front fascia. A `template' is available to allow users to create and print customised legends. This can be found in: -Reydisp Evolution\Help\Open Relay LED Template\Open RM LED Template Each LED can be user programmed as hand or self -resetting. Hand reset LEDs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). The status of hand reset LEDs is stored by a back up storage capacitor in the event of an interruption to the d.c. supply voltage so that when the supply is restored the previous indication is repeated. Standard Keys The relay is supplied as standard with five navigation / control pushbuttons and 12 programmable function keys. The navigation / control buttons are used to navigate the menu structure and control relay functions. They are labelled: Increases a setting or moves up menu. Decreases a setting or moves down menu. TEST/RESET Moves right, can be used to reset selected functionality and for LED test (at relay identifier screen). ENTER Used to initiate and accept settings changes. CANCEL. Used to cancel settings changes and/or move up the menu structure by one level per press. NOTE: All settings and configuration of LEDs, BI, BO and function keys can be accessed and set by the user using these keys. Alternatively configuration/settings files can be loaded into the relay using `Reydisp'. Function Keys/ LEDs The 12 programmable function keys can be configured by the user to initiate selected functions from the Control menu (INPUT CONFIG > FUNCTION KEY MATRIX). Each programmable function key has an associated LED. These can be programmed as hand or self reset and can be illuminated as green, yellow or red (OUTPUT CONFIG > LED CONFIG). Function keys can be used with Quick Logic. 2.6 Current Inputs Four current inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module. Terminals are available for both 1A and 5A inputs. Current is sampled at 1600Hz for both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. Protection and monitoring functions of the relay use either the Fundamental Frequency RMS or the True RMS value of current appropriate to the individual function. The waveform recorder samples and displays current input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at 50Hz). All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A, Phase B and Phase C. The three current inputs I 1 , I 2 and I 3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase references A, B and C by user settings. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation. 2.7 Voltage Inputs Four voltage inputs are provided on the Analogue Input module as standard. V 1 , V 2 and V 3 inputs are typically used for the main three phase voltage measurement with the additional input V 4 (V X ) used for single phase voltage detection, measurement and the option Check Synchronising function, on the other side of the primary switching device. Six voltage input models are also available to provide three phase voltage measurement on both sides of the primary equipment. Voltage inputs V 4 , V 5 and V 6 of the 6 VT models are provided mainly for detection and measurement of voltage and have reduced operating range. Voltage is sampled at 32 samples per cycle (1600Hz) both 50Hz and 60Hz system frequencies. Protection and monitoring functions of the relay use fundamental frequency voltage measurement. The waveform recorder samples and displays voltage input waveforms at 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at 50Hz). All phase segregated protection elements and instruments provide output reporting by phase reference Phase A, Phase B and Phase C. The three voltage inputs V 1 , V 2 and V 3 can be allocated to any arrangement of the phase references A, B and C by user settings. Any phase segregated binary inputs and outputs must also be mapped to suit in the programmable input matrix and output matrix user settings. This flexibility allows the 7SR224 to be prewired to the circuit breaker hardware without prior knowledge of the customers phase reference allocation. NB: The Relay has a flat frequency response measuring harmonic currents up to and including the 50th Harmonic th nd but does not measure the content at the aliasing frequencies i.e. 800 Hz (16 harmonic) + 1600 Hz (32 th harmonic) + 2400 Hz (48 harmonic). 2.8 Binary Inputs The binary inputs are operated from a suitably rated dc supply. Relays are fitted with 13, 33 or 43 binary inputs (BI) depending on the variant. The user can assign any binary input to any of the available functions (INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX). The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O incorporating 3 x BI and 6 x BO. Pick-up (PU) and drop-off (DO) time delays are associated with each binary input. Where no pick-up time delay has been applied the input may pick up due to induced ac voltage on the wiring connections (e.g. cross site wiring). The default pick-up time of 20ms provides ac immunity. Each input can be programmed independently. Each input may be logically inverted to facilitate integration of the relay within the user scheme. When inverted the relay indicates that the BI is energised when no d.c. is applied. Inversion occurs before the PU & DO time delay, see fig. 2.8-1. Each input may be mapped to any front Fascia indication LED and/or to any Binary output contact and can also be used with the internal user programmable logic. This allows the relay to provide panel indications and alarms. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 13 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Inverted Inputs BI 1 P/U Delay BI 1 inverted BI 1 D/O Delay BI 1 Event =1 Binary Input 1 INPUT CONFIG> BINARY INPUT CONFIG Binary Input 1 (Or gates) BI n P/U Delay BI n inverted Binary Input n INPUT CONFIG> INPUT MATRIX BI n D/O Delay BI n Event =1 Binary Input n Logic signals, e.g. '51-1 Inhibit' Figure 2.8-1 Binary Input Logic 2.9 Binary Outputs (Output Relays) Relays are fitted with 14, 22 or 30 binary outputs. All outputs are fully user configurable and can be programmed to operate from any or all of the available functions. The Power Supply module includes the relay basic I/O. The module includes six binary outputs each fitted with 1 contact - providing in total 1 x normally closed (NC), 2 x change-over (CO) and 3 x normally open (NO) contacts. In the default mode of operation binary outputs are self reset and remain energised for a user configurable minimum time of up to 60 seconds. If required, outputs can be programmed to operate as `hand reset'. Alternatively, outputs can be programmed as `Pulsed' outputs. When operated, these outputs will reset automatically after a delay of the minimum operating time. The binary outputs can be used to operate the trip coils of the circuit breaker directly where the trip coil current does not exceed the 'make and carry' contact rating. The circuit breaker auxiliary contacts or other in-series auxiliary device must be used to break the trip coil current. Any BO can be assigned as a `Trip Contact' in the OUTPUT CONFIG>TRIP CONFIG menu. Operation of a `Trip Contact' will operate any LED or virtual assigned from the trip triggered feature in the same menu and will initiate the fault record storage, actuate the `Trip Alert' screen where enabled and CB Fail protection when enabled. When the relay is withdrawn from the case all normally closed contacts will be open circuited. This should be considered in the design of the control and protection circuitry. Notes on Pulsed Outputs When operated, the output will reset after a user configurable time of up to 60 seconds regardless of the initiating condition. Notes on Self Reset Outputs Self reset operation has a default minimum reset time of 100ms. This can be configured for each Binary Output individually by user settings. With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow is interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised in the primary system Notes on Hand Reset Outputs Hand reset outputs can be reset by either pressing the TEST/RESET button, by energising a suitably programmed binary input, or, by sending an appropriate command over the data communications channel(s). (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 14 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation On loss of the auxiliary supply hand-reset outputs will reset. When the auxiliary supply is re-established the binary output will remain in the reset state unless the initiating condition is still present. Binary Output Test The MAINTENANCE>OUTPUT MATRIX TEST menu includes a facility to test output relays from the relay fascia without the need for a secondary injection test set. Binary outputs can also be energised from the Reydisp Evolution software package where PC facilities are available. For both methods the output contact is energised for the duration of the `OUTPUT CONFIG > BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG > Min Operate Time' setting. Logic signals, e.g. '51-1' Reset LEDs & Outputs (TEST/RESET key, Binary Input, Data Comms) BO 1 S R Hand Reset 1 Min Operate Time & 1 OUTPUT CONFIG> OUTPUT MATRIX Event & & BO 1 hand reset Output 1 Q (Or gates) OUTPUT CONFIG> BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT CONFIG> BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG BO n Output n S R Event & & BO n hand reset Q 1 1 & Figure 2.9-1 Binary Output Logic 2.10 Virtual Input/Outputs The relays have 16 virtual input/outputs, these are internal logic states. Virtual I/O is assigned in the same way as physical Binary Inputs and Binary Outputs. Virtual I/O is mapped from within the INPUT CONFIG > INPUT MATRIX and OUTPUT CONFIG > OUTPUT MATRIX menus. 2.11 Self Monitoring The relay incorporates a number of self-monitoring features. Each of these features can initiate a controlled reset recovery sequence. Supervision includes a power supply watchdog, code execution watchdog, memory checks by checksum and processor/ADC health checks. When all checks indicate the relay is operating correctly the `Protection Healthy' LED is illuminated. If an internal failure is detected, a message will be displayed; also an event will be generated and stored. The relay will reset in an attempt to rectify the failure. This will result in de-energisation of any binary output mapped to `protection healthy' and flashing of the protection healthy LED. If a successful reset is achieved by the relay the LED and output contact will revert back to normal operational mode, and the relay will restart. A Start-up Counter Meter is provided to display the number of start-ups the relay has performed. Once the number of start-ups has exceeded a set number, an Alarm output can be given. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 15 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 2.11-1 Start-up Counter Meter Reset of the counter can be done from the meter or via a binary input or a command. Various types of start-up are monitored by the relay: 1. power-on starts 2. expected starts (typically user initiated or due to change of some settings such as language) 3. unexpected starts (caused by the relay failure detection such as watchdog) The following screen-shot from Reydisp Evolution shows the events which are generated when the relay re-starts. The highlighted events show the cause of the re-start. The event which comes next shows the type of restart followed by the relay: Warm, Cold or Re-Start. Figure 2.11-2 Start-up Events As a further safeguard, if the Relay performs a number of unexpected starts SYSTEM CONFIG>Unexpected Restart Count in a given time SYSTEM CONFIG>Unexpected Restart Period, it can be configured using the SYSTEM CONFIG>Unexpected Restart Blocking setting to remove itself from service. In this case the Relay will display an error message: -------------------|UNEXPECTED RESTART | |COUNTS EXCEEDED! | |DEVICE LOCKED OUT | -------------------Figure 2.11-3 Unexpected Restarts Lockout Text (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 16 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation and enter a locked-up mode. In this mode the Relay will disable operation of all LED's and Binary Outputs, including Protection Healthy, all pushbuttons and any data communications. Once the Relay has failed in this manner, it is non-recoverable at site and must be returned to the manufacturer for repair. A meter, Miscellaneous Meters>Unexpected Restarts, is provided to show how many Unexpected Restarts have occurred during the previous Unexpected Restart Period. This is resettable from the front fascia. 2.11.1 Protection Healthy/Defective When the relay has an auxiliary DC supply and it has successfully passed its self-checking procedure then the front facia Protection Healthy LED is turned on. A normally open contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection healthy signal. A normally closed contact can be mapped via the binary output matrix to provide an external protection defective signal. With the `Protection Healthy' this contact is open. When the auxiliary DC supply is not applied to the relay or a problem is detected within the relay then this output contact closes to provide external indication. A shorting contact in the case at positions 25-26 of the PSU module can be used to provide an external indication when the relay is withdrawn. 2.12 Battery And Capacitor Test Facility Of The Recloser The quiescent battery voltage V AUX is constantly monitored to ensure that the charging system is connected and operating correctly. The capacitor voltage is monitored externally by the Switch Unit Driver and Monitor. The healthy condition of the capacitor is indicated to the Controller by the state of two binary signals. These signals are constantly monitored and used to provide alarms and operation blocking for quiescent capacitor voltage levels which are out of limits. Battery and capacitor tests are initiated at user set intervals - typically once per week/month. The condition and state of the Recloser battery and Recloser capacitor are assessed; any unhealthy states are identified and can be alarmed. Battery and capacitor tests are not carried out at the same time. The battery test is initiated first to avoid any possible interaction with the capacitor test which is performed 30 minutes afterwards. This functionality is described in further detail in section 5.8 and 5.9 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 17 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 3: Protection Functions 3.1 Current Protection: Phase Overcurrent (67, 51, 50) All phase overcurrent elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS or True RMS current: True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental 3.1.1 Directional Control of Overcurrent Protection (67) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with overcurrent elements. These outputs can then be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous over-current element. If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector. However, if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. Conversely, if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone. Typically the forward direction is defined as being `away' from the busbar or towards the protected zone. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the phase-fault elements using the quadrature voltage i.e. at unity power factor I leads V by 90 . Each phase current is compared to the voltage between the other two phases, i.e for normal phase sequence A-B-C: I A ~ V BC I B ~ V CA I C ~ V AB When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks, i.e. A-C-B, the polarizing is corrected internally by the Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu. The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67 Char Angle setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (V ref ) and the 67 Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. The centre of the forward zone is set by (V ref Angle + 67 Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with I fault Angle for maximum sensitivity i.e. For fault current of -60 (I lagging V by 60 ) a 67 Char Angle of +30 is required for maximum sensitivity (i.e. due to quadrature connection 90 - 60 = 30 ). OR For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45 ) a 67 Char Angle of +45 is required for maximum sensitivity (i.e. due to quadrature connection 90 - 45 = 45 ). Two-out-of-three Gate When the 67 2-Out-Of-3 Logic setting is set to Enabled, the directional elements will only operate for the majority direction, e.g. if I A and I C are detected as forward flowing currents and I B is detected as reverse current flow, phases A and C will operate forwards, while phase B will be inhibited. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 18 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67 Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present. 67 67 Charact. Angle 2-Out-Of-3 Logic 67 Min. Voltage VBC fwd IA rev VCA fwd IB rev VAB fwd IC rev PhA Fwd 2-out-of-3 logic PhB Fwd (fwd) PhC Fwd PhA Rev 2-out-of-3 logic PhB Rev (rev) PhC Rev Figure 3.1-1 Logic Diagram: Directional Overcurrent Element (67) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 19 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.1.2 Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection (50) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. Each instantaneous element (50-n) has independent settings. 50-n Setting for pick-up current and 50-n Delay follower time delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50-n element. Operation of the instantaneous overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 50-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector function. 50-n VTS Action: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 50-n User 50-n A Pickup Enabled Disabled AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 50-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed User 50-n B Pickup & & User 50-n C Pickup Inhibit 50-n 50-n Setting User Inhibit 50-n 50-n Inrush Action A 81HBL2 & A Dir En & Enable Off Inhibit B 81HBL2 C 81HBL2 1 Enable General Pickup 50-n Delay > User 50-n & B Dir En & C Dir En & Enable > & Enable 1 > 50-n User 50-n A 50/51 Measurement User 50-n B User 50-n C IA IB IC 50-n Dir Control 50-n VTS Action Non-Dir Off Forward Non Dir Reverse Inhibit If directional elements are not present this block is omitted and all 'Lx Dir En' signals are set TRUE. & & VT Fail & IA Fwd 1 & IA Rev & IB Fwd 1 & IB Rev & IC Fwd & IC Rev 1 & & & 1 A Dir En 1 B Dir En 1 C Dir En Figure 3.1-2 Logic Diagram: Instantaneous Over-current Element (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 20 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.1.3 Time Delayed Overcurrent Protection (51) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. 51-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. Where the voltage controlled overcurrent function (51VCO) is used a multiplier is applied to this setting where the voltage drops below the setting VCO Setting, see section 3.2. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC, ANSI or manufacturer specific curves using 51-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 51-n Char. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The full list of operating curves is given in section 2 - `Settings, Configuration and Instruments Guide'. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in section 3 - `Performance Specification'. The 51-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51-n Follower DTL setting. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51-n element. Operation of the time delayed overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 P/F Inst Trips: 51-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 51c Activation of the cold load settings (see section 3.7). 51-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector 51-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited function. Chapter 1 Page 21 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation See Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) A B C 51-n Element Enabled AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 51-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed 51-n Setting & Disabled 51-n Charact & 51-n Time Mult Inhibit 51-n 51-n Delay (DTL) 51-n Min. Operate Time User Inhibit 51-n 51c 51-n Inrush Action A 81HBL2 B 81HBL2 User 51-n B Pickup 51-n Reset Enable & A Dir En & Enable Off Inhibit User 51-n A Pickup 51-n Follower DTL User 51-n C Pickup 1 Pickup General Pickup trip & B Dir En & Enable User 51-n Pickup Pickup trip C 81HBL2 & C Dir En & Enable 1 Pickup 51-n trip User 51-n 50/51 Measurement User 51-n A IA User 51-n B IB User 51-n C IC 51-n Dir Control 51-n VTS Action Non-Dir Off Forward Non Dir Reverse Inhibit & & VT Fail & IA Fwd 1 & IA Rev & IB Fwd 1 & IB Rev & IC Fwd & IC Rev 1 & & & 1 1 1 A Dir En B Dir En C Dir En Figure 3.1-3 Logic Diagram: Time Delayed Overcurrent Element (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 22 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.2 Current Protection: Voltage Controlled OC (51V) Each shaped overcurrent element 51-n Setting can be independently controlled by the level of measured (control) input voltage. For applied voltages above VCO Setting the 51-n element operates in accordance with its normal current setting (see 3.1.3). For input Ph-Ph control voltages below VCO Setting a multiplier (51-n Multiplier) is applied to reduce the 51-n pickup current setting. 51-n Multiplier is applied to each phase independently when its control phase-phase voltage falls below VCO Setting. The voltage levels used for each phase over-current element are shown in the table below. Relays with a Ph-N connection automatically calculate the correct Ph-Ph control voltage. Current Element Control Voltage IA V AB IB V BC IC V CA The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function (51V) can be inhibited from: VCO VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 51V Element Enabled Disabled 51V VTS Action Off Inhibit & & VT Fail 51V Setting Enable VA VB VC VAB VBC VCA 51-n Multiplier Enable < < < Enable x IA 51-n Setting Enable x IB 51-n Setting Enable x IC 51-n Setting A B C See Delayed Overcurrent (51-n) Figure 3.2-1 Logic Diagram: Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Protection (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 23 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.3 Current Protection: Measured EF (67G, 51G, 50G) The earth current is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input. All measured earth fault elements have a common setting to measure either fundamental frequency RMS, True RMS current or the derived sum current: True RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = RMS Fundamental Frequency RMS current: 51/50 Measurement = Fundamental Additionally these elements can be selected to operate on a Fundamental Frequency current which is calculated from the sum of the phase currents, i.e. a Derived quantity. This option should only be used when the fourth current input is required for connection of a Core Balance Current Transformer to achieve very low earth fault sensitivity using the 50/51SEF elements. 51/50 Measurement = Calculated 3.3.1 Directional Control of Measured Earth Fault Protection (67G) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with measured earth fault elements. These outputs can be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element. If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector. However, if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. Conversely, if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone. Typically the forward direction is defined as being `away' from the busbar or towards the protected zone. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone. The measured directional earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its equivalent voltage: I0 ~ V0 The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67G Char Angle setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (V ref ) and the 67G Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. The centre of the forward zone is set by (V ref Angle + 67G Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with I fault Angle for maximum sensitivity e.g. For fault current of -15 (I lagging V by 15 ) a 67G Char Angle of -15 is required for maximum sensitivity, OR For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45 ) a 67G Char Angle of -45 is required for maximum sensitivity. Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67G Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. Operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 24 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 67G 67G Charact. Angle VA VB VC IA IB IC Sequence Filters V0 Sequence Filters I0 67G Min. Voltage fwd 67G Fwd rev 67G Rev Figure 3.3-1 Logic Diagram: Measured Directional Earth Fault Protection 3.3.2 Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Protection (50G) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50G-n Setting and a follower time delay 50G-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50G-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50G-n element. Operation of the instantaneous measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50G-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 E/F Inst Trips: 50G-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 E/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 50G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the current inrush detector function. 50G-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 50G-n Element Disabled & Enabled 50G-n Inrush Action Inhibit 50G-n Off User Inhibit 50G-n Inhibit & User 50G-n Pickup 81HBL2 General Pickup AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 50G-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed 50G-n Dir En & 50G-n Setting 50G-n Delay 51G/50G Measurement Enable > IG 50G-n I1 I2 I3 User 50G-n 50/51G Measurement 50G-n VTS Action 50G-n Dir. Control Non-Dir Off Non Dir Inhibit Forward Reverse 67G Fwd 67G Rev & & VT Fail & 1 1 & 50G-n Dir En & Figure 3.3-2 Logic Diagram: Measured Instantaneous Earth-fault Element (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 25 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.3.3 Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault Protection (51G) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. 51G-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51G-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51G-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51G-n Char. When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51G-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The full list of operating curves is given in section 2 - `Settings, Configuration and Instruments Guide'. Operating curve characteristics are illustrated in section 3 - `Performance Specification'. The 51G-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51G-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51G-n Follower DTL setting. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51G-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51G-n element. Operation of the time delayed measured earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51G-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 E/F Inst Trips: 51G-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 E/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 51G-n Inrush Action: Inhibit Operation of the inrush current detector function. 51G-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 51G-n Element Disabled & Enabled 51G-n Inrush Action Inhibit 51G-n Off User Inhibit 51G-n Inhibit 51G-n Setting & 51G-n Charact 51G-n Time Mult 81HBL2 51G-n Delay (DTL) AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 51G-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed 51G-n Min Operate Time 51G-n Dir En & 51G-n Follower DTL User 51G-n Pickup 51G-n Reset 51G/50G Measurement Enable IG General Pickup Pickup I1 I2 I3 51G-n trip User 51G-n 50/51G Measurement If directional elements are not present this block is omitted and the '50G-n Dir En' signal is set TRUE. 51G-n VTS Action 51G-n Dir Off Non Dir Non-Dir Inhibit Forward Reverse 67G Fwd 67G Rev & & VT Fail & 1 1 & 51G-n Dir En & Figure 3.3-3 Logic Diagram: Measured Time Delayed Earth Fault Element (51G) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 26 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.4 Current Protection: Sensitive EF (67SEF, 51SEF, 50SEF) Current for the Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) elements is measured directly via a dedicated current analogue input. SEF elements measure the fundamental frequency RMS current. 3.4.1 Directional Control of Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (67SEF) The directional element produces forward and reverse outputs for use with SEF elements. These outputs can be mapped as controls to each shaped and instantaneous element. If a protection element is set as non-directional then it will operate independently of the output of the directional detector. However, if a protection element is programmed for forward directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the forward operate zone. Conversely, if a protection element is programmed for reverse directional mode then operation will occur only for a fault lying within the reverse operate zone. Typically the forward direction is defined as being `away' from the busbar or towards the protected zone. The Characteristic angle is the phase angle by which the polarising voltage must be adjusted such that the directional detector gives maximum sensitivity in the forward operate zone when the current is in phase with it. The reverse operate zone is the mirror image of the forward zone. The directional sensitive earth fault elements use zero phase sequence (ZPS) polarising. Voltage polarisation is achieved for the earth-fault elements by comparison of the appropriate current with its equivalent voltage: I0 ~ V0 The characteristic angle can be user programmed to any angle between -95 and +95 using the 67SEF Char Angle setting. The voltage is the reference phasor (V ref ) and the 67SEF Char Angle setting is added to this to adjust the forward and reverse zones. The centre of the forward zone is set by (V ref Angle + 67SEF Char Angle) and should be set to correspond with I fault Angle for maximum sensitivity i.e. For fault current of -15 (I lagging V by 15 ) a 67SEF Char Angle of -15 is required for maximum sensitivity. OR For fault current of -45 (I lagging V by 45 ) a 67SEF Char Angle of -45 is required for maximum sensitivity. For application of 67SEF protection to networks with compensation (Peterson) coils fitted, an additional setting, 67SEF Compensated Networks is available which when set to Enabled will increase the directional boundary to closer to 90 to suit this application. This setting should be set to Disabled for application on networks with other earthing arrangements. Minimum Polarising Voltage The 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting defines the minimum polarising voltage level. Where the measured polarising voltage is below this level no directional output is given and. Operation of protection elements set as directional will be inhibited. This prevents mal-operation under fuse failure/MCB tripped conditions where noise voltages can be present. 67SEF 67SEF Charact. Angle VA VB VC IA IB IC Sequence Filters V0 Sequence Filters I0 67SEF Min. Voltage fwd 67SEF Fwd rev 67SEF Rev Figure 3.4-1 Logic Diagram: SEF Directional Element (67SEF) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 27 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.4.2 Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (50SEF) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. Each instantaneous element has independent settings for pick-up current 50SEF-n Setting and a follower time delay 50SEF-n Delay. The instantaneous elements have transient free operation. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 50SEF-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 50SEF-n element. Operation of the instantaneous earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50SEF-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 SEF Inst Trips: 50SEF-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 SEF Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 50SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0 ) is above the 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting i.e. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the Forward/Reverse operating range. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled, the calculated residual real power must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. The residual power P res is equal to the wattmetric component of 3V 0 I SEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V 0 I 0 50SEF-n Element Disabled Enabled Inhibit 50SEF-n AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 50SEF-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed User 50SEF-n Pickup User Inhibit 50SEF-n & General Pickup & 50SEF-n Setting 50SEF-n Delay 50SEF-n Dir En Enable > 50SEF-n I4(ISEF) User 50SEF-n 50SEF-n VTS Action 50SEF-n Dir. Control Off Non-Dir Non-Dir Inhibit Forward Reverse 67SEF Fwd 67SEF Rev & & VT Fail & 1 1 & 50SEF-n Dir En & Figure 3.4-2 Logic Diagram: SEF Instantaneous Element (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 28 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.4.3 Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (51SEF) Four elements are provided e.g. giving the option of using two elements set to forward and two to reverse. 51SEF-n Setting sets the pick-up current level. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 51SEF-n Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 51SEF-n Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag (DTL) can be chosen using 51SEF-n Char. When DTL is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 51SEF-n Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 51SEF-n Reset setting can apply a definite time delayed reset, or when configured as an ANSI characteristic an ANSI (DECAYING) reset. If ANSI (DECAYING) reset is selected for an IEC characteristic, the reset will be instantaneous. The reset mode is significant where the characteristic has reset before issuing a trip output - see `Applications Guide'. A minimum operate time for the characteristic can be set using 51SEF-n Min. Operate Time setting. A fixed additional operate time can be added to the characteristic using 51SEF-n Follower DTL setting. For the directional elements the direction of operation can be set using 51SEF-n Dir. Control setting. Directional logic is provided independently for each 51SEF-n element. Operation of the time delayed earth fault elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 51SEF-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 79 SEF Inst Trips: 51SEF-n When `delayed' trips only are allowed in the autoreclose sequence (79 SEF Prot'n Trip n = Delayed). 51SEF-n VTSAction: Inhibit Operation of the VT Supervision function. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) If the I 4 input is used for SEF, REF cannot be used. Directional elements will not operate unless the zero sequence voltage (V 0 ) is above the 67SEF Minimum Voltage setting i.e. the residual voltage is greater than 3 times this setting and the phase is in the Forward/Reverse operating range. If 67SEF Wattmetric is set to Enabled, the calculated residual real power must be above the 67SEF Wattmetric Power setting for any SEF element operation. The residual power P res is equal to the wattmetric component of 3V 0 I SEF and therefore the wattmetric component of 9V 0 I 0 51SEF-n Element Disabled 51SEF-n Setting Enabled 51SEF-n Charact 51SEF-n Time Mult Inhibit 51SEF-n AUTORECLOSE 79 P/F Inst Trips = 51SEF-n 79 P/F Prot'n Trip n = Delayed User Inhibit 51SEF-n 51SEF-n Delay (DTL) & & 51SEF-n Min Operate Time 51SEF-n Follower DTL User 51SEF-n Pickup 51SEF-n Reset 51SEF-n Dir En Enable General Pickup Pickup 51SEF-n trip I4 (ISEF) User 51SEF-n 51SEF-n VTS Action 51SEF-n Dir Control Off Non-Dir Non-Dir Inhibit Forward Reverse 67SEF Fwd 67SEF Rev & & VT Fail & 1 1 & 51SEF-n Dir En & Figure 3.4-3 Logic Diagram: SEF Time Delayed Element (51SEF) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 29 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.5 Current Protection: High Impedance Restricted EF (64H) One high impedance Restricted Earth Fault (REF) element is provided. The relay utilises fundamental current measurement values for this function. The single phase current input is derived from the residual output of line/neutral CTs connected in parallel. An external stabilising resistor must be connected in series with this input to ensure that this element provides a high impedance path. If I 4 is utilised for this purpose, SEF protection cannot be used. 64H Current Setting sets the pick-up current level. An output is given after elapse of the 64H Delay setting. External components - a series stabilising resistor and a non-linear resistor - are used with this function. See `Applications Guide' for advice in specifying suitable component values. Operation of the high impedance element can be inhibited from: Inhibit 64H A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 64H Element User 64H Pickup Enabled Disabled & 64H Current Setting Inhibit 64H Enable User Inhibit 64H I4 (IG) > 64H Delay 64H Enable User 64H Figure 3.5-1 Logic Diagram: High Impedance REF (64H) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 30 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.6 Current Protection: Cold Load (51c) The setting of each shaped overcurrent element (51-n) can be inhibited and alternative `cold load' settings (51c-n) can be applied for a period following circuit switch in. The Cold Load settings are applied after the circuit breaker has been open for longer than the Pick-Up Time setting. Following circuit breaker closure the `cold load' overcurrent settings will revert to those defined in the Phase Overcurrent menu (51-n) after either elapse of the Drop-Off Time setting or when the measured current falls below the Reduced Current Level setting for a time in excess of Reduced Current Time setting. During cold load settings conditions any directional settings applied in the Phase Overcurrent menu are still applicable. A CB `Don't Believe It' (DBI) condition is not acted on, causing the element to remain operating in accordance with the relevant 51-n settings. Where the Reduced Current setting is set to OFF reversion to 51-n settings will only occur at the end of the Drop-Off Time. If any element is picked up on expiry of Drop-Off Time the relay will issue a trip and lockout. If the circuit breaker is re-opened before expiry of the Drop-Off Time the drop-off timer is held but not reset. Resetting the timer for each trip could result in damaging levels of current flowing for a prolonged period during a rapid sequence of trips/closes. Cold load trips use the same binary output(s) as the associated 51-n element. Cold Load Enabled Disabled CB Open Pick-up Time CB Closed & & CB Open User 51c Active Drop-off Time & 51c See Delayed Overcurrent (51-n) CB Closed S 1 Q 51c-n Setting R 51c-n Charact 51c-n Time Mult 51c-n Delay (DTL) Reduced Current Enabled Reduced Current Level Enable Disabled 51c-n Min. Operate Time Reduced Current DTL 51c-n Follower DTL & 51c-n Reset Enable IA < Pickup A Dir En IB < trip 1 General Pickup 1 51-n Pickup B Dir En IC Enable Enable < trip Pickup C Dir En Enable trip Figure 3.6-1 Logic Diagram: Cold Load Settings (51c) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 31 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.7 Current Protection: Negative Phase Seq. OC (46NPS) The negative sequence phase (NPS) component of current (I2) is derived from the three phase currents. It is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced current in the system. When the device is applied to reverse sequence networks, i.e. 1-3-2, the NPS/PPS sequence is corrected automatically by the Gn Phase Rotation setting in the CT/VT ConfigI menu. Two NPS current elements are provided - 46IT and 46DT. The 46IT element can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), 46IT Setting sets the pick-up current level for the element. A number of shaped characteristics are provided. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic is selected from IEC and ANSI curves using 46IT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 46IT Time Mult setting. Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 46ITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 46IT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. The 46IT Reset setting can apply a, definite time delayed or ANSI (DECAYING) reset. The 46DT element has a DTL characteristic. 46DT Setting sets the pick-up current and 46DT Delay the follower time delay. Operation of the negative phase sequence overcurrent elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 46IT A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. Inhibit 46DT A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 46IT Setting 46IT Char 46IT Element 46IT Time Mult Enabled 46IT Delay (DTL) Disabled User 46IT Pickup 46IT Reset & Inhibit 46IT General Pickup Pickup Enable 46IT trip User Inhibit 46IT User 46IT IL1 NPS IL2 I2 IL3 User 46DT Pickup General Pickup 46DT Element 46DT Setting Enabled 46DT Delay Disabled > Inhibit 46DT & User Inhibit 46DT Enable Enable 46DT User 46DT Figure 3.7-1 Logic Diagram: Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 32 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.8 Current Protection: Under-Current (37) Two under-current elements are provided. Each phase has an independent level detector and current-timing element. 37-n Setting sets the pick-up current. An output is given after elapse of the 37-n Delay setting. Operation of the under-current elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 37-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 37-n Enabled & User 37-n Pickup Disabled 37-n Setting Inhibit 37-n 37-n Start Option Enable 37-n Delay User Inhibit 37-n IA < IB < IC < Any (1) All (&) 37-n User 37-n Figure 3.8-1 Logic Diagram: Undercurrent Detector (37) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 33 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.9 Current Protection: Thermal Overload (49) The relay provides a thermal overload suitable for the protection of static plant. Phase segregated elements are provided. The temperature of the protected equipment is not measured directly. Instead, thermal overload conditions are calculated using the measure True RMS current. Should the current rise above the 49 Overload Setting for a defined time an output signal will be initiated. Operate Time (t):- I2 - IP2 t = x ln 2 2 I - (k x IB ) Where T = Time in minutes = 49 Time Constant setting (minutes) In = Log Natural I = measured current I P = Previous steady state current level k = Constant I B = Basic current, typically the same as In k.I B = 49 Overload Setting (I ) Additionally, an alarm can be given if the thermal state of the system exceeds a specified percentage of the protected equipment's thermal capacity 49 Capacity Alarm setting. For the heating curve: = I2 I 2 (1- e -t ) x 100% Where: = thermal state at time t I = measured thermal current I = 49 Overload setting (or k.I B ) The final steady state thermal condition can be predicted for any steady state value of input current where t >, F = I2 I2 x 100% Where: F = final thermal state before disconnection of device 49 Overload Setting I is expressed as a multiple of the relay nominal current and is equivalent to the factor k.I B as defined in the IEC255-8 thermal operating characteristics. It is the value of current above which 100% of thermal capacity will be reached after a period of time and it is therefore normally set slightly above the full load current of the protected device. The thermal state may be reset from the fascia or externally via a binary input. Thermal overload protection can be inhibited from: Inhibit 49 A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 34 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 49 Overload Setting 49 Therm. Overload 49 Time Constant Enabled Disabled 49 Capacity Alarm & Inhibit 49 User Inhibit 49 User 49 B Alarm Enable cap alarm IA User 49 A Alarm trip User 49 C Alarm 1 cap alarm IB User 49 Alarm trip cap alarm IC 49 Alarm 1 49 Trip User 49 Trip trip User 49 A Trip User 49 B Trip User 49 C Trip Figure 3.9-1 Logic Diagram: Thermal Overload Protection (49S) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 35 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.10 Voltage Protection: Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59) Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the `Phase' Voltages from the main a, b & c inputs. One under/over voltage elements is provided for the `Auxiliary' input voltage Vx in the four voltage input devices. Four under/over voltage elements are provided for the three additional x, y & z voltage inputs in the six voltage input devices The relay utilises fundamental frequency RMS voltage for this function. Under/over voltage elements have common settings to measure phase to phase (Ph-Ph) or phase to neutral (PhN) voltage using the Voltage Input Mode and Vx Voltage Input Mode settings respectively. Voltage elements can be blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 27/59 U/V Guard or the Vx 27/59 U/V Guard settings respectively. 27/59-n Setting (Vx 27/59- n Setting) sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. The sense of the element (undervoltage or overvoltage) is set by the 27/59-n Operation (Vx 27/59-n Operation) setting. The 27/59-n O/P Phases (Vx 27/59-n O/P Phases) setting determines whether the time delay is initiated for operation of any phase or only when all phases have detected the appropriate voltage condition. An output is given after elapse of the 27/59-n Delay (Vx 27/59-n Delay) setting. The 27/59-n Hysteresis (Vx 27/59-n Hysteresis) setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. Operation of each of the a, b, c under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 27/59-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes Operation of the VT Supervision function. 27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Operation of each of the x, y, z under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit Vx 27/59-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. Vx 27/59-n VTSInhibit: Yes Operation of the VT Supervision function. Vx 27/59-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) Phase segregated outputs are provided for each voltage input, these are common to all applicable 27/59 under/over voltage elements: 27/59 PhA, 27/59 PhB, 27/59 PhC; Vx 27/59 (4 voltage input models); Vx 27/59 PhA, Vx 27/59 Ph B &, Vx 27/59 PhC (6 voltage input models). (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 36 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Phase ABC elements: 27/59-n Enabled Disabled Inhibit 27/59-n User Inhibit 27/59-n 27/59-n VTS Inhibit & Yes & VT Fail 27/59 U/V Guarded & Yes User 27/59-n UV Guard User 27/59-n A Pickup 27/59 U/V Guard Setting User 27/59-n B Pickup < User 27/59-n C Pickup 27/59-n Operation & < 27/59-n Setting < Voltage Input Mode Va Vb Vc Any (1) All (&) 27/59-n Hysteresis Enable PH-PH Or PH-N 27/59-n O/P Phases General Pickup User 27/59-n Pickup 27/59-n Delay > or < > or < > or < 27/59-n O/P Phases Any (1) All (&) 27/59-n User 27/59-n User 27/59-n A Vx element for 4 Voltage input models User 27/59-n B 27/59-Vx User 27/59-n C 27/59-Vx Operation Enabled 27/59-Vx Setting Disabled General Pickup 27/59-Vx Hysteresis 1 Enable 27/59-Vx Delay Inhibit Vx 27/59 User Inhibit Vx 27/59 Vx > or User 27/59-Vx Pickup < Vx 27/59 User 27/59-Vx Vx elements for 6 Voltage input models Vx 27/59-n Enabled Disabled Inhibit Vx 27/59-n User Inhibit Vx 27/59-n Vx 27/59-n VTS Inhibit & Yes & VT Fail User Vx 27/59-n A Pickup User Vx 27/59-n B Pickup Vx 27/59 U/V Guarded & Yes Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Vx 27/59-n Setting Enable Vx Voltage Input Mode PH-PH Or PH-N General Pickup User Vx 27/59-n Pickup Vx 27/59-n Delay & < Vx 27/59-n O/P Phases Any (1) All (&) Vx 27/59-n Hysteresis < < Vx Vy Vz Vx 27/59-n Operation User Vx 27/59-n C Pickup > or < > or < > or < Vx 27/59-n O/P Phases Any (1) All (&) Vx 27/59-n User Vx 27/59-n User Vx 27/59-n A User Vx 27/59-n B User Vx 27/59-n C Figure 3.10-1 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Voltage Elements (27/59) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 37 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.11 Voltage Protection: Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) Negative phase sequence (NPS) voltage (V2) is a measure of the quantity of unbalanced voltage in the system. The relay derives the NPS voltage from the three input voltages (V A , V B and V C ). Two elements are provided. 47-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. The 47-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. An output is given after elapse of the 47-n Delay setting. Operation of the negative phase sequence voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 47-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 47-n Element Enabled Disabled & Inhibit 47-n 47-n Setting General Pickup 47-n Hysteresis User 47-n Inhibit 47-n Delay User 47-n Pickup Enable VA VB VC NPS Filter V2 > 47-n User 47-n Figure 3.11-1 Logic Diagram: NPS Overvoltage Protection (47) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 38 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 3.12 Voltage Protection: Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Two Neutral Overvoltage (or Neutral Voltage Displacement) elements are provided. 59N Voltage Source setting selects the source of the residual voltage to be measured. The voltage is measured directly from the Vx input or derived from the line voltages where suitable VT connections are present. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. One of the elements can be configured to be either definite time lag (DTL) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), 59NIT Setting sets the pick-up voltage level (3V 0 ) for the element. An inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) can be selected using 59NIT Char. A time multiplier is applied to the characteristic curves using the 59NIT Time Mult setting (M): M t op = 3Vo s [ Vs ] - 1 Alternatively, a definite time lag delay (DTL) can be chosen using 59NITChar. When Delay (DTL) is selected the time multiplier is not applied and the 59NIT Delay (DTL) setting is used instead. An instantaneous or definite time delayed reset can be applied using the 59NIT Reset setting. The second element has a DTL characteristic. 59NDT Setting sets the pick-up voltage (3V 0 ) and 59NDT Delay the follower time delay. Operation of the neutral overvoltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 59NIT A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. Inhibit59NDT A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) It should be noted that neutral voltage displacement can only be applied to VT arrangements that allow zero sequence flux to flow in the core i.e. a 5-limb VT or 3 single phase VTs. The VT primary winding neutral must be earthed to allow the flow of zero sequence current. 59NIT Element 59NIT Setting Disabled 59NIT Charact Enabled 59NIT Time Mult & Inhibit 59NIT 59NIT Delay (DTL) 59NIT Reset User 59NIT Inhibit Enable User 59NIT Pickup trip Vn Vx General Pickup Pickup 59N Voltage Source 59NIT Enable VA VB User 59NIT ZPS Filter VC 3Vo User 59NDT Pickup Enable General Pickup Vx 59NDT Setting 59NDT Element 59NDT Delay Disabled Enabled Inhibit 59NDT & Enable > 59NDT User 59NDT User Inhibit 59NDT (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 39 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Figure 3.12-1 Logic Diagram: Neutral Overvoltage Element 3.13 Voltage Protection: Under/Over Frequency (81) Four under/over frequency elements are provided. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. The frequency calculation is based on the highest input voltage derived from the voltage selection algorithm. Frequency elements are blocked if all phase voltages fall below the 81 U/V Guard setting. The sense of the element (under-frequency or over-frequency) is set by the 81-n Operation setting. 81-n Setting sets the pick-up voltage level for the element. An output is given after elapse of the 81-n Delay setting. The 81-n Hysteresis setting allows the user to vary the pick-up/drop-off ratio for the element. Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 81-n A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. 81-n U/V Guarded Under voltage guard element. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 81-n Element Enabled Disabled Inhibit 81-n User 81-n Inhibit & 81-n U/V Guarded & Yes 81 U/V Guard Setting 81-n Operation 81-n Setting < < & User 81-n Pickup 81-n Hysteresis User 81 UV Guard General Pickup < Enable 81-n Delay VA Voltage Selection VB VC F > or < 81-n User 81-n Figure 3.13-1 Logic Diagram: Under/Over Frequency Detector (81) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 40 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4.1 Autoreclose (79) 4.1.1 Overview A high proportion of faults on an Overhead Line (OHL) network are transient. These faults can be cleared and the network restored quickly by using Instantaneous (Fast) Protection trips followed by an automated sequence of CB reclosures after the line has been dead for a short time. This `deadtime' allows the fault current arc to fully extinguish. Typically, this autoreclose (AR) sequence of Instantaneous Trip(s) and Reclose Delays (Dead times) followed by Delayed Trip(s) provides the automatic optimum method of clearing all types of fault i.e. both Transient and Permanent, as quickly as possible and achieving the desired outcome of keeping as much of the Network in-service as possible. The AR function, therefore, has to: Control the type of Protection trip applied at each stage of a sequence Control the Autoreclose of the Circuit Breaker to provide the necessary network Dead times, to allow time for Arc extinction Co-ordinate its Protection and Autoreclose sequence with other fault clearing devices. A typical sequence would be - 2 Instantaneous+1Delayed+HighSet Trips with 1 sec & 10 sec dead times. The Autoreclose feature can be switched off if it is not required by the setting: 79 Autoreclose ENABLE/DISABLE (AUTORECLOSE CONFIG menu) When the Autoreclose feature is enabled by the above setting, it may be switched in and out of service by a number of methods, these are: A keypad change from the CONTROL MODE Customer programmed function key (using Quick Logic) Via the data communications channel(s), From a 79 OUT binary input. Note the 79 OUT binary input has priority over the 79 IN binary input - if both are raised the autoreclose will be Out of Service. Knowledge of the CB position status is integral to the autoreclose functionality. CB auxiliary switches must be connected to CB Closed and CB Open binary inputs. A circuit breaker's service status is determined by its position i.e. from the binary inputs programmed CB Open and CB Closed. The circuit breaker is defined as being in service when it is closed. The in service status has a drop-off delay of 2 sec, this delay is known as the circuit memory time. This functionality prevents autoreclosing when the line is normally de-energised, or normally open. Autoreclose (AR) is started by a valid trip relay operation while the associated circuit breaker is in service. The transition from AR started to deadtime initiation takes place when the CB has opened and the protection pickups have reset and the trip relay has reset. If check synchronising feature is included, the line or bus voltage must be detected as dead, unless the Live Line Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled. If any of these do not occur within the 79 Sequence Fail Timer setting the relay will Lockout. This prevents the AR being primed indefinitely. 79 Sequence Fail Timer can be switched to 0 (= OFF). Once an AR sequence has been initiated, up to 4 reclose operations can be attempted before the AR feature is locked-out. Number of recloses is determined by 79 Num Shots. Each reclosure (shot) is preceded by a time delay - 79 Elem Deadtime n - giving transient faults time to clear. Separate dead-time settings are provided for each of the 4 recloses and for each of the four fault types - P/F, E/F, SEF and External. Once a CB has reclosed and remained closed for a specified time period (the Reclaim time), the AR sequence is re-initialised and a Successful Close output issued. A single, common Reclaim time is used (Reclaim Timer). When an autoreclose sequence does not result in a successful reclosure, i.e. if a trip occurs in the Reclaim Time of the final shot, the relay will raise the 79 Last Trip Lockout output and the relay goes to the lockout state (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 41 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Indications The Instruments Menu includes the following meters relevant to the status of the Autoreclose and Manual Closing of the circuit breaker: Status of the AR sequence AR Shot Count. CB Open Countdown Timer CB Close Countdown Timer Inputs External inputs to the recloser functionality need to be wired to the binary inputs. Functions which can be mapped to these binary inputs include: 79 Out (edge triggered) 79 In (edge triggered) CB Closed CB Open 79 Ext Trip 79 Ext Pickup 79 Block Reclose 79 Lockout 79 Reset Lockout Block Close CB Close CB 79 Trip & Reclose 79 Trip & Lockout 79 Line Check Hot Line In Hot Line Out Instantaneous Protection In/Out Outputs Outputs are fully programmable to either binary outputs or LEDs. Programmable outputs include: 79 Out Of Service 79 In Service 79 In Progress Sequence Fail CB Close 79 Successful AR 79 Last Trip Lockout 79 Lockout 79 CloseOnFault 79 CB Close Fail (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 42 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.1.2 Autoreclose sequences The CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE PROT'N and CONTROL & LOGIC>AUTORECLOSE CONFIG' menus, allow the user to set independent Protection and Autoreclose sequences for each type of fault i.e. Phase Fault (P/F), Earth Fault (E/F), Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) or External Protections (EXTERN). Each Autoreclose sequence can be user set for up to four-shots i.e. five trips + four reclose sequence, with independently configurable type of Protection Trip, either Fast (Inst) or Delayed with associated Deadtime Delay time for each shot. The user has programming options for Autoreclose Sequences up to the maximum shot count i.e.:Inst or Delayed Trip 1 + (DeadTime 1: 0.08s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 2 + (DeadTime 2: 1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 3 + (DeadTime 3: 1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 4 + (DeadTime 4: 1s-14400s) + Inst or Delayed Trip 5 - Lockout. The AR function recognizes developing faults and, as the shot count advances, automatically applies the correct type of Protection Trip and associated Dead time for that fault-type at that point in the sequence. A typical sequence would consist of two Inst trips followed by at least one combined Delayed + HighSet (HS) Trip. This sequence enables transient faults to be cleared quickly by the Inst trip(s) and permanent fault to be cleared by the combined Delayed trip. The delayed trip must be `graded' with other Recloser/CB's to ensure system discrimination is maintained, i.e. that as much of the system as possible is live after the fault is cleared. A HS trips to lockout setting is provided such that when the number of operations of elements assigned as HS trips reach the setting the relay will go to lockout. The number of Shots (Closes) is user programmable, note: - only one Shot Counter is used to advance the sequence, the Controller selects the next Protection characteristic/Dead time according to the type of the last Trip in the sequence e.g. PF, EF, SEF or EXTERNAL. Reclose Dead Time User programmable dead times are available for each protection trip operation. The dead time is initiated when the trip output contact reset, the pickup is reset and the CB is open. Additionally, . if check synchronising feature is included, the line or bus voltage must be detected as dead, unless the Live Line Check setting in the Autoreclose Config menu is set to disabled. The CB close output relay is energised after the dead time has elapsed. 1st Trip (Inst) 2nd Trip (Inst) 1st Dead Time 2nd Dead Time 3rd Trip (Inst) 3rd Dead Time 4th Trip (Delayed) 4th Dead Time Figure 4.1-1 Typical Autoreclose Sequence with 3 Instantaneous and 1 Delayed trip (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 43 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.1.3 AUTORECLOSE PROT'N Menu This menu presents the Overcurrent Protection elements available for each type of Fault i.e. P/F, E/F or SEF and allows the user to select those that are to be applied as Inst trips; those that are to be applied as Delayed Trips; and those that are to be applied as HS Trips (HighSet), as required by the selected sequence. There is no corresponding setting for External as the External protection type is not normally controlled by the Autoreclose Relay. The resultant configuration enables the Autoreclose function to correctly apply the required Protection for each shot in a sequence. 4.1.4 AUTORECLOSE CONFIG Menu This menu allows the following settings to be made:- 79 Autoreclose Enabled turns ON all Autoreclose Functions. 79 Num Shots Sets the allowed number of Autoreclose attempts in a sequence. 79 Retry Enable Enabled configures the relay to perform further attempts to automatically Close the Circuit Breaker where the CB has initially failed to close in response to a Close command. If the first attempt fails the relay will wait for the 79 Retry Interval to expire then attempt to Close the CB again. 79 Retry Attempts Sets the maximum number of retry attempts. 79 Retry Interval Sets the time delay between retry attempts. 79 Reclose Blocked Delay If the CB is not ready to receive a Close command or if system conditions are such that the CB should not be closed immediately e.g. a close-spring is not charged, then a Binary input mapped to Reclose Block can be raised and the Close pulse will not be issued but will be held-back. The 79 Reclose Blocked Delay sets the time Reclose Block is allowed to be raised, if this time delay expires the Relay will go to Lockout. If Reclose Block is cleared, before this time expires, then the CB Close pulse will be issued at that point in time. Dead Time + Reclose Blocked Delay = Lockout. 79 Sequence Fail Timer Sets the time that AR start can be primed. Where this time expires before all the AR start signals are not received i.e. the CB has opened, protection pickups have reset and the trip relay has reset, the Relay goes to Lockout. 79 Minimum Lockout Delay Sets the time that the Relay's Lockout condition is maintained. After the last allowed Trip operation in a specific sequence the Circuit Breaker will be left locked-out in the open position and can only be closed by manual or remote SCADA operation. The 79 Minimum Lockout Delay timer can be set to delay a too-fast manual close after lockout, this prevents an operator from manually closing onto the same fault too quickly and thus performing multiple sequences and possibly burning-out Plant. 79 Reset LO by Timer Set to Enabled this ensures that the Lockout condition is reset when the timer expires, Lockout indication will be cleared; otherwise, set to Disabled, the Lockout condition will be maintained until the CB is Closed by a Close command. 79 Sequence Co-Ord When set to Enabled the Relay will co-ordinate its sequence and shot count such that it automatically keeps in step with downstream devices as they advance through their sequence. The Relay detects that a pickup has operated but has dropped-off before its associated time delay has expired, it then increments its Shot count and advances to the next stage of the autoreclose sequence without issuing a trip, this is repeated as long as the fault is being cleared by the downstream device such that the Relay moves through the sequence bypassing the INST Trips and moving on to the Delayed Trip to maintain Grading margins. 79 Cold Load Action Set to Delayed will inhibit all instantaneous protection elements when Cold Load settings are being used. 79 Live Line Checking will set such that it will stop the autoreclose sequence before the Deadtime is started if neither the line nor bus voltages become dead following the trip. This can be used as a check that the remote end circuit breaker is tripped before proceeding with the sequence on a ring connected system. If this check is not required, the 79 Live Line Check setting should be set to disabled. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 44 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 79 Check Synchronising during the Deadtime will start the Check Synchronising before the completion of the deadtime if the dead state of the line or bus becomes live during the deadtime. This restoration of Live voltage state indicates that the remote end circuit breaker has reclosed and therefore it is not necessary to delay the CB close until the deadtime expires. This feature can be disabled if it is not required. 79 LO Line VT Fail will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Line voltage is dead whilst the Bus voltage is live when the circuit breaker is closed. 79 LO Bus VT Fail will Lockout the autoreclose feature if the Bus voltage is dead whilst the Line voltage is live when the circuit breaker is closed. Notes on the `Lockout' State The Lockout state can be reached for a number of reasons. Lockout will occur for the following: - 1. 79 Sequence Fail Timer. 2. At the end of the Reclaim timer if the CB is in the open position. 3. A protection operates during the final Reclaim time. 4. If a Close Pulse is given and the CB fails to close. 5. The 79 Lockout binary input is active. 6. At the end of the 79 Reclose Blocked Delay due to presence of a persistent Block signal. 7. When the 79 Elem HS Trips to Lockout count is reached. 8. When the 79 Elem Delayed Trips to Lockout count is reached. Once lockout has occurred, an alarm (79 Lockout) is issued and all further Close commands, except manual close, are inhibited. If the Lockout command is received while a Manual Close operation is in progress, the feature is immediately locked-out. Once the Lockout condition has been reached, it will be maintained until reset. The following will reset lockout: - 1. By a Manual Close command, from fascia, comms or Close CB binary input. 2. By a 79 Reset Lockout binary input, provided there is no signal present that will cause Lockout. 3. At the end of the 79 Minimum LO Delay time setting if 79 Reset LO by Timer is selected to ENABLED, provided there is no signal present which will cause Lockout. 4. Where Lockout was entered by an A/R Out signal during an Autoreclose sequence then a 79 In signal must be received before Lockout can reset. 5. By the CB Closed binary input, provided there is no signal present which will cause Lockout. 6. The Lockout condition has a delayed drop-off of 2s. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 45 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.1.5 P/F SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Phase fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:- 79 P/F Prot'n Trip1 The first protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Sets the first Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip2 The second protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Sets the second Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip3 The third protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Sets the third Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 The fourth protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Dead time) in the P/F sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip5 The fifth and last protection Trip in the P/F sequence can be set to either Inst or Delayed. 79 P/F HighSet Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed HighSet trips. The relay will go to Lockout on the last HighSet Trip. This function can be used to limit the duration and number of high current trips that the Circuit Breaker is required to perform, if the fault is permanent and close to the Circuit Breaker then there is no point in forcing a number of Delayed Trips before the Relay goes to Lockout - that sequence will be truncated. 79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout Sets the number of allowed Delayed trips, Relay will go to Lockout on the last Delayed Trip. This function limits the number of Delayed trips that the Relay can perform when the Instantaneous protection Elements are externally inhibited for system operating reasons - sequences are truncated. 4.1.6 E/F SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Earth Fault trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but E/F settings. 4.1.7 SEF SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the Sensitive Earth trip/reclose sequence to be parameterized:As above but SEF Settings, Note: - SEF does not have HighSets (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 46 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.1.8 EXTERN SHOTS sub-menu This menu allows the External Protection autoreclose sequence to be parameterized:- 79 P/F Prot'n Trip1 Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection's Trip Output. 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Sets the first Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) for the External sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip2 Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary Output to Block an External Protection's second Trip output. 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Sets the second Reclose Delay ( Deadtime) in the External sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip3 Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection's third Trip Output. 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Sets the third Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip4 Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection's fourth Trip Output. 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Sets the fourth Reclose Delay (Deadtime) in the External sequence. 79 P/F Prot'n Trip5 Not Blocked/Blocked - Blocked raises an output which can be mapped to a Binary output to Block an External Protection's fifth Trip Output. 79 P/F Extern Trips to Lockout - Sets the number of allowed External protection' trips, Relay will go to Lockout on the last Trip. These settings allow the user to set-up a separate Autoreclose sequence for external protection(s) having a different sequence to P/F, E/F or SEF protections. The ` Blocked ` setting allows the Autoreclose sequence to raise an output at any point in the sequence to Block further Trips by the External Protection thus allowing the Overcurrent P/F or Earth Fault or SEF elements to apply Overcurrent Grading to clear the fault. Other Protection Elements in the Relay can also be the cause of trips and it may be that Autoreclose is required; the External Autoreclose sequence can be applied for this purpose. By setting-up internal Quick Logic equation(s) the user can define and set what should occur when any one of these other elements operates. Note: If the `CB Total Trip Count' or the `CB Frequent Ops Count' target is reached the relay will do one delayed tip and lockout*. *NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROT'N menu the relay will not trip. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 47 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 79 Out OUT OF SERVICE 79 Out Of Service 79 Auto-Reclose ENABLE/DISABLE 79 In CB Closed IN SERVICE 79 InService = CB Closed 79 Elem Prot Trip n Lockout Reset CB Open 79 Reset Lockout 79 Sequence Co-ord 79 Trip (Inst, Delayed, HS) 79 Ext Trip 79 Ext Pickup LOCKOUT RESET 79 Minimum LO Delay 79 Reset LO by Timer Manual Close CB Closed 79 Lockout LOCKOUT 79 Lockout AR Started SEQUENCE IN PROGRESS 79 InProgress Sequence Fail Sequence Fail Timer = Elapsed Sequence Reclose ENABLED & STARTER picked up & STARTER reset 79 Sequence Fail Timer Trip Reset & Pickup Reset & CB Open & Line Dead by Synchronising 79 Trip & Reclose 79 Trip & Lockout DEADTIME 79 Num Shots 79 Elem Prot Trip n (Inst, Delayed) 79 Elem Deadtime 79 Elem HS Trips to Lockout 79 Elem Delayed Trips to Lockout INHIBIT CLOSE CB 79 Block Reclose 79 Override Synch 79 Line Check Num Shots = Count HS or Delayed Trips to Lockout = Count Hot Line In Hot Line Out In Synch 79 Reclose Blocked Delay 25 Synch Close Delay 25 DLC/DBC/CS options 25 DLC/DBC Delays 25 Differential Overvoltage 25 Bus/Line Undervoltage CLOSE PULSE 25 Synch Close Delay Elapsed 79 Block Reclose AND 79 Reclose Blocked Delay Elapsed CB Close 79 Close Onto Fault Block Close CB CB Controls Latched 79 Retry Enable 79 Retry Attempts 79 Retry Interval Close CB Pulse 79 CB Fail To Close CB Failed to Close Close Pulse Expired - Close CB Increment Close Count RECLAIM Manual Close Manual Close CB Close CB Delay Elem Line Check Trip Starter raised in Reclaim Time CB Open at End of Reclaim Time, or Protection operation during final Reclaim Time Reclaim Timer Reclaim Time Elapsed 79 Successful AR Figure 4.1-2 Basic Autoreclose Sequence Diagram (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 48 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.2 Manual Close A Manual Close Command can be initiated in one of four ways: via a Close CB binary input, via the data communication Channel(s), from the relay CONTROL MODE menu or from the relay fascia function keys. It causes an instantaneous operation via Manual Close CB binary output, over-riding any autoreclose (AR) sequence in progress. When check syncronising is used, the manual close operation is performed using mode settings which are independent of those of the 79 autoreclose. Repeated Manual Closes are avoided by checking for Positive edge triggers. Even if the Manual Close CB input is constantly energised the relay will only attempt one close. A Manual Close will initiate Line Check if enabled. If a fault appears on the line during the Close Pulse or during the Reclaim Time with Line Check enabled, the relay will initiate a Trip and Lockout. This prevents a CB being repeatedly closed onto a faulted line. Where Line Check = DELAYED then instantaneous protection is inhibited until the reclaim time has elapsed. Manual Close resets Lockout, if the conditions that set Lockout have reset i.e. there is no trip or Lockout input present. Manual Close cannot proceed if there is a Lockout input present. Manual Close cannot proceed if Hot Line is In. Hot Line must be switched Out before Manual Close will be successful, then switched back In afterwards if required. With the Autoreclose function set to Disabled the Manual Close control is still active. 4.3 Synchronising The optional Synchronising function is used to check that the voltage conditions, measured by the voltage transformers on either side of the open circuit breaker, indicate that it is safe to close without risk of damage to the circuit breaker of disturbance to the system. The timing of closure, for charging lines which are dead following fault clearance, is controlled to co-ordinate with other devices. The window of time in which voltage conditions must be met is applied as a setting or can be disabled such that an indefinite period is allowed. 4.3.1 Reclosure Modes The Synchronising element can be set to allow the autoreclose sequence to proceed for various system voltage conditions. The voltage conditions selected must be met within the Sync Close Window time if this is Enabled, this time is settable and starts at the end of the deadtime for autoreclose or the receipt of a Close CB command. The voltage applied to the V 4 input is considered to be the BUSBAR voltage and the voltages applied to inputs V 1 ,V 2 & V 3 are the LINE voltage. 79 Dead Bar Charge, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is dead. Manual Close DBC, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage is live and the Busbar is dead. 79 Dead Line Charge, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is dead. Manual Close DLC, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Busbar voltage is live and the Line is dead. 79 Dead Line & Dead Bar Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when the Line voltage and the Busbar voltage are dead. Manual Close DLDB, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when the Line voltage and the Busbar voltage are dead. 79 Check Sync Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered live AND other synchronising requirements are met. Manual Close CS, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed when both the Line and Busbar are considered live AND other synchronising requirements are met. 79 Unconditional Close, when set to Enabled, allows AR to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of the Bus or Line. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 49 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Unconditional Manual Close, when set to Enabled, allows MC to proceed regardless of the voltage condition of the Bus or Line. Separate Enable/Disable settings are thus provided for each option for Autoreclose and Manual Close. 4.3.2 Charge Delays Separate autoreclose delay settings are provided for Dead Line Charge and Dead Bus Charge closure by the 79 DLC Delay and 79 DBC Delay settings. These are applied after the autoreclose Dead Time when voltage conditions are checked and met, at the Close Inhibit stage of the sequence. This feature effectively allows the dead time to be set differently for faults on each side of the recloser. 4.3.3 Voltage monitoring elements The single phase voltage source used for synchronising can be selected as any phase to phase or phase to earth voltage for flexibility. The voltage is compared to the corresponding voltage from the three phase arrangement on the other side of the circuit breaker. Voltage settings are set as a percentage of the nominal voltage specified in the CT/VT Config menu. Voltage detectors Voltage detectors determine the status of the line or bus. If the voltages on either the line or bus are below a set threshold level they can be considered to be `dead'. If the voltages are within a setting band around the nominal voltage they are classed as `live'. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus. If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area. Similarly, if a voltage is live, it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. This effectively allows for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set. Figure 4.3-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation. Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate. When any voltage is applied to the relay it will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first. A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap. Figure 4.3-1 Voltage Detector Operation Under-voltage detectors The under-voltage detectors, if enabled, can block a close output command if either the line voltage is below the 25 Line Undervolts setting value or the bus voltage is below the 25 Bus Undervolts setting value. Both line and bus have their own independent settings and are applied to the single phase voltage inputs. Differential voltage detectors The differential voltage detector, if enabled, can block a close output command if the difference between the line and bus voltages is greater than the differential voltage setting value. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 50 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.3.4 Check Synchronising Mode The Man Override Sync input is provided to bypass the voltage and synchronising checks to provide an emergency close function. Similarly, check synchronising can be overridden by the 79 Override Sync input during autoreclose. Override can be set by binary inputs, Control commands and the function keys. For the relay to issue a Check Sync Close the following conditions have to be met : The Line and Bus voltages must both be considered live. 25 Check Sync Angle - the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase angle setting value. Whilst within the limits the phase angle can be increasing or decreasing and the element will still issue a valid close signal. 25 Check Sync Slip, [if enabled] - the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip frequency setting value. 25 Check Sync Timer, [if enabled] - the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their parameters for the length of the slip timer setting. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of their limits the slip timer is reset. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an output is given. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the system due to e.g. some remote switching operations). 25 Line Undervolts, [if enabled] - the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. 25 Bus Undervolts, [if enabled] - the bus voltage has to be above the bus under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. 25 Volt Differential, [if enabled] - the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the differential voltage detector setting value for an output to be given. The synchronising is always started in the Check Synchronising mode of operation and the Check Synchronising limits are applied. To proceed to System Synchronisation a system split must be detected as described in section 4.3.5 SLIP Slip Within Range ? Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Within Range ? Slip Timer Phase Angle Setting Line U/V Block Block Bus U/V BLock Block V Block & & CheckSync Close Slip Timer Setting Block Figure 4.3-2 Check Sync Function 4.3.5 System Split Detector A system split occurs where part of the system becomes islanded and operates separately. Under these conditions the frequencies of the voltages either side of the breaker are asynchronous and therefore high phase angle differences can occur as the voltage phasors slip past each other. The decision to change to System Split settings, apply Close on Zero function, Lockout or ignore, during autoreclose and manual closing is set separately by the 25 DAR Split Mode and 25 MC Split Mode settings. The (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 51 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation System Split condition is detected when either the measured phase difference angle exceeds the pre-set 25 Split Angle value or if the slip frequency exceeds a pre-set 25 Split Slip rate based on the selection of 25 System Split Mode setting. Note : the system split setting is effectively an absolute value and therefore a split will occur at the value regardless of the direction of the frequency slip e.g. if an angle of 170 is selected, then starting from 0, a split will occur at +170 or -170 (effectively +190). If a system split occurs during an autoreclose Check Sync operation, with 25 System Sync set to Enabled, the following events occur: A System Split event is recorded. If the 25 DAR Split Mode is set to CS, Check Sync will continue If the 25 DAR Split Mode setting has been set to SS, the System Sync function is started. The 25 SS In Progress can be mapped to an output relay or led for alarm indication. The mapped LED will stay on for a minimum time, or can be latched using non self reset LEDs. If the 25 DAR Split Mode setting has been set to COZ, the Close On Zero function is started. The 25 COZ In Progress can be mapped to an output relay or led for alarm indication. If the 25 DAR Split Mode has been set to LO, then, a 25 System Split LO output is given which can be mapped to an output relay or led for alarm indication. The relay will stay in this lockout mode until one of the following methods of resetting it is performed 1. The relay is reset from Lockout by binary input or a command. 2. The CB is manually closed Similarly if a system split occurs during a Manual Close Check Sync operation, with 25 System Sync set to Enabled, the following events occur: A System Split event is recorded. If the 25 MC Split Mode is set to CS, Check Sync will continue If the 25 MC Split Mode setting has been set to SS, the System Sync function is started. The 25 SS In Progress can be mapped to an output relay or led for alarm indication. If the 25 DAR Split Mode setting has been set to COZ, the Close On Zero function is started. The 25 COZ In Progress can be mapped to an output relay or led for alarm indication. 4.3.6 System Sync Reversion If the close conditions of System Sync are not met and a zero slip condition is subsequently detected, by the slip falling below the 25 Split Slip setting, the relay will exit from System Sync mode and revert to Check Synchronising mode. The reversion allows the device to use the wider Check Sync parameters, to allow a close following the restoration of normal operation when the islanded network has been reconnected to the main network by successful reclosure of a parallel connection. 4.3.7 System Synchronising Mode For the relay to issue a System Sync Close the following conditions have to be met : Both the Bus and Line voltages must be considered Live by the Voltage Monitoring elements. 25 System Sync Angle - the phase difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the phase angle setting value and the phase angle has to be decreasing before the element will issue a valid close signal. 25 System Sync Slip, [if Enabled] - the frequency difference between line and bus has to be less than the slip frequency setting value. Slip frequency must be above the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion to Check Synchronising conditions. The settings for 25 System Sync Slip and 25 Split Slip must differ by at least 20mHz. 25 System Sync Timer, [if Enabled] - the phase angle and voltage blocking features have to be within their parameters for the length of the slip timer setting. If either the phase angle or the voltage elements fall outside of their limits the slip timer is reset. If they subsequently come back in then the slip timer has to time out before an output is given. (This ensures that a close output will not be given if there is a transient disturbance on the system due to e.g. some remote switching operations). 25 Line Undervolts, [if Enabled] - the line voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 52 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 25 Bus Undervolts, [if Enabled] - the bus voltage has to be above the line under-voltage setting value and also above 5V for an output to be given. 25 Volt Differential, [if Enabled] - the difference between the line and bus voltages has to be less than the V detector setting value for an output to be given. The System Synchronising operation of the relay will only be started after a System Split is detected as described in section 4.3.6 during an autoreclose or manual close sequence. SLIP Slip Within Range ? Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Within Range ? AND Phase Decreasing ? Slip Timer & Phase Angle Setting Live Line Slip Timer Setting & Live Bus Line U/V Block Block Bus U/V BLock Block V Block SystemSync Close Block Figure 4.3-3 System Sync Function 4.3.8 Close on Zero Mode If the 25 DAR Split Mode or 25 MC Split Mode is set to COZ the relay will apply a Close On Zero to the respective closing operation if the synchronising mode changes to System Split. The measured slip frequency and the measured phase difference are used to provide a Close Pulse which will close the CB when the phase difference is reducing and timed with the setting 25 CB Close Time such that the instant of closure is when the phase difference is zero. The slip frequency must be less than the 25 COZ Slip Freq but greater than the 25 Split Slip setting to avoid reversion to Check Synchronising conditions. Since this feature is part of the System Synchronising function, 25 System Sync must also be set to Enabled. SLIP Slip Within Range ? (> Split Slip & < COZ slip) Split Slip Setting & COZ Slip Frequency Setting Angle Phase Difference Phase Decreasing & ? & CB Close Time COZ Close Live Line Live Bus Line U/ V Block Block Bus U/ V BLock Block V Block & Block Figure 4.3-4 Close On Zero Function Close on Zero will not be accurate if slow CB times are applied in conjunction with fast slip rates during testing. Practical application limits are shown below (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 53 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 2 Maximum Slip Frequency (Hz) 1.8 1.6 1.4 1.2 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 0 200 400 600 800 CB Close Time (ms) Figure 4.3-5 Close On Zero Timing 4.4 Live/Dead Indication Outputs are provided to identify each voltage input as either Live or Dead using voltage user settings. These outputs are controlled independently of the 25 Check Synchronising Voltage monitoring elements but operate in the same way. Voltage detectors are provided for each phase input A, B, C & X and inputs Y & Z when fitted. If the voltage on the respective input is below a set threshold level they can be considered to be `dead'. If the voltages are above a voltage setting they are classed as `live'. Independent voltage detectors are provided for both line and bus. If a voltage is in the dead band range then it will be classed as dead until it has reached the live band area. Similarly, if a voltage is live, it continues to be live until it has reached the dead band area. This effectively allows for variable amounts of hysteresis to be set. Figure 4.4-1 illustrates the voltage detector operation. Note: the area between the dead and live zones is not indeterminate. When any voltage is applied to the relay it will ramp up the software RMS algorithm and always pass through the dead zone first. A wide range is provided for live and dead voltage detector levels but the live and dead zones must not overlap. Figure 4.4-1 Voltage Detector Operation Live and Dead outputs are provided for each voltage input: A Live, B Live, C Live, A Dead, B Dead, C Dead, X Live, Y Live, Z Live, X Dead, Y Dead & Z Dead, Combined outputs are also provided separately to indicate ALL phases Live or Dead: ABC Live, ABC Dead, XYZ Live & XYZ Dead (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 54 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.5 Circuit Breaker This menu includes relay settings applicable to both manual close (MC) and autoreclose (AR) functionality. CB Controls Latched CB controls for closing and tripping can be latched i.e. until confirmation that the action has been completed i.e. binary input is edge triggered when latched. Close CB Delay The Close CB Delay is applicable to manual CB close commands received through a Close CB binary input or via the Control Menu. Operation of the 79 MC Close CB binary output is delayed by the Close CB Delay setting. Close CB Pulse The duration of the CB Close Pulse is settable to allow a range of CBs to be used. The Close pulse will be terminated if any protection picks-up operates or a trip occurs. This is to prevent Close and Trip Command pulses existing simultaneously. A 79 Close On Fault Output is given if a pick-up or trip operates during the Close Pulse. This can be independently wired to Lockout. `CB Failed To Open and CB Failed to Close features are used to confirm that a CB has not responded correctly to each Trip and Close Command. If a CB fails to operate, the AR feature will go to lockout. '79 CB Close Fail' is issued if the CB is not closed at the end of the close pulse, CB Close Pulse. Reclaim Timer The `Reclaim time' will start each time a Close Pulse has timed out and the CB has closed. Where a protection pickup is raised during the reclaim time the relay advances to the next part of the reclose sequence. The relay goes to the Lockout state if the CB is open at the end of the reclaim time or a protection operates during the final reclaim time. Blocked Close Delay The close command may be delayed by a Block Close CB signal applied to a binary input. This causes the feature to pause before it issues the CB close command and can be used, for example, to delay CB closure until the CB energy has reached an acceptable level. If the Block signal has not been removed before the end of the defined time, Blocked Close Delay, the relay will go to the lockout state. Open CB Delay The Open CB Delay setting is applicable to CB trip commands received through an Open CB binary input or via the Control Menu. Operation of the Open CB binary output is delayed by the Open CB Delay setting. Open CB Pulse The duration of the CB open Command pulse is user settable to allow a range of CBs to be used. CB Failed To Open is taken from the Circuit Breaker Failure Element. CB Travel Alarm The CB Open/CB Closed binary inputs are monitored. The relay goes to Lockout and an output can be given where a 0/0 condition exists for longer than the CB Travel Alarm setting. An instantaneous output is given for a 1/1 state. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 55 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation CB Open CB Closed CB Open & User CB Open Status CB Closed & User CB Closed Status CB Travel Alarm DTL & 1 & CB Alarm User CB Alarm User CB DBI Figure 4.5-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Status 4.6 Hot Line In/Out The Hot Line function can be used to provide an immediate trip and auto-reclose inhibit for any Overcurrent, Earth Fault or Sensitive Earth Fault detection. This function is used to increase safety when personnel are working in the vicinity of live primary equipment. When Hot Line is enabled, pickup of any 50, 51, 50G, 51G, 50SEF or 51SEF element will cause an instantaneous trip, bypassing any time delay setting of the element. Any autoreclose sequence will be inhibited and Auto-reclose Lockout will be raised. This feature is not triggered by pick-up or operation of other protection elements such as under/over voltage, frequency, thermal or negative sequence overcurrent . Additionally, when Hot Line is In, Manual Close is inhibited. This can help to prevent unintended energisation of a dead circuit whilst personnel are working nearby. Hot Line must be switched to Out before the Manual Close action will be successful. Hot Line can be configured to be switched In/Out by binary inputs, function keys or by commands via the communications protocols. There are no other configurable options for Hot Line. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 56 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 4.7 Quick Logic The `Quick Logic' feature allows the user to input up to 16 logic equations (E1 to E16) in text format. Equations can be entered using Reydisp or at the relay fascia. Each logic equation is built up from text representing control characters. Each can be up to 20 characters long. Allowable characters are: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit ( ) Parenthesis ! `NOT' Function . `AND' Function ^ `EXCLUSIVE OR' Function + `OR' Function En Equation (number) Fn Function Key (number) `1' = Key pressed, `0' = Key not pressed In Binary Input (number) `1' = Input energised, `0' = Input de-energised Ln LED (number) `1' = LED energised, `0' = LED de-energised On Binary output (number) `1' = Output energised, `0' = Output de-energised Vn Virtual Input/Output (number) `1' = Virtual I/O energised, `0' = Virtual I/O de-energised Example Showing Use of Nomenclature E1= ((I1^F1).!O2)+L1 Equation 1 = ((Binary Input 1 XOR Function Key 1) AND NOT Binary Output 2) OR LED 1 When the equation is satisfied (=1) it is routed through a pick-up timer (En Pickup Delay), a drop-off timer (En Dropoff Delay), and a counter which instantaneously picks up and increments towards its target (En Counter Target). The counter will either maintain its count value En Counter Reset Mode = OFF, or reset after a time delay: En Counter Reset Mode = Single Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started only when the counter is first incremented (i.e. counter value = 1) and not for subsequent counter operations. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses and the count value has not reached its target the count value is reset to zero. En Counter Reset Mode = Multi Shot: The En Counter Reset Time is started each time the counter is incremented. Where En Counter Reset Time elapses without further count increments the count value is reset to zero. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 57 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Equation n P.U. DELAY D.O. DELAY Counter Counter Value 1 Increment Counter Counter = Target Value En = 1 2 P. U .D EL AY AY EL .D .O D Equation Output 1 0 1 0 T 1 For Counter Target = 2 En = 1 Figure 4.7-1 Sequence Diagram: Quick Logic PU/DO Timers (Counter Reset Mode Off) When the count value = En Counter Target the output of the counter (En) = 1 and this value is held until the initiating conditions are removed when En is instantaneously reset. The output of En is assigned in the OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX menu where it can be programmed to any binary output (O), LED (L) or Virtual Input/Output (V) combination. Protection functions can be used in Quick Logic by mapping them to a Virtual Input / Output. Refer to Section 7 - Applications Guide for examples of Logic schemes. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 58 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 5: Supervision Functions 5.1 Circuit Breaker Failure (50BF) The circuit breaker fail function has two time delayed outputs that can be used for combinations of re-tripping or back-tripping. CB Fail outputs are given after elapse of the 50BF-1 Delay or 50BF-2 Delay settings. The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: An output Trip Contact of the relay (MENU: OUTPUT CONFIG\BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG\Trip Contacts), or A binary input configured 50BF Ext Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\BINARY INPUT MATRIX\50BF Ext Trip). A binary or virtual input assigned to 50BF Mech Trip (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\ 50BF Mech Trip). CB Fail outputs will be issued providing any of the 3 phase currents are above the 50BF Setting or the current in the fourth CT is above 50BF-I4 for longer than the 50BF-n Delay setting, or for a mechanical protection trip the circuit breaker is still closed when the 50BF-n Delay setting has expired - indicating that the fault has not been cleared. Both 50BF-1 and 50BF-2 can be mapped to any output contact or LED. If the 50BF CB Faulty input (MENU: INPUT CONFIG\INPUT MATRIX\50BF CB Faulty) is energised when a CB trip is given the time delays 50BF-n Delay will be by-passed and the output given immediately. Operation of the CB Fail elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 50BF A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 50BF Element 50BF CB Faulty User 50BF CB Faulty Enabled & 1 50BF-1 Disabled User 50BF-1 Inhibit 50BF User Inhibit 50BF 50BF-1 Delay & Trip Contact & 1 50BF Ext Trig 50BF Mech Trip & 1 50BF-2 Delay 50BF-2 User 50BF-2 & CB Closed 50BF Setting IA IB IC > 50BF-I4 Setting I4 > 1 User PhA 50BF-1 User PhA 50BF-2 User PhB 50BF-1 User PhB 50BF-2 User PhC 50BF-1 User PhC 50BF-2 User E/F 50BF-1 User E/F 50BF-2 User Ext 50BF User Mech 50BF Figure 5.1-1 Logic Diagram: Circuit Breaker Fail Protection (50BF) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 59 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.2 VT Supervision (60VTS) 1 or 2 Phase Failure Detection Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) or zero phase sequence (ZPS) voltage in a power system is accompanied by NPS or ZPS current. The presence of either of these sequence voltages without the equivalent level of the appropriate sequence current is used to indicate a failure of one or two VT phases. The 60VTS Component setting selects the method used for the detection of loss of 1 or 2 VT phases i.e. ZPS or NPS components. The sequence component voltage is derived from the line voltages; suitable VT connections must be available. The relay utilises fundamental voltage measurement values for this function. The element has user settings 60VTS V and 60VTS I. A VT is considered to have failed where the voltage exceeds 60VTS V while the current is below 60VTS I for a time greater than 60VTS Delay. 3 Phase Failure Detection Under normal load conditions rated PPS voltage would be expected along with a PPS load current within the circuit rating. Where PPS load current is detected without corresponding PPS voltage this could indicate a three phase VT failure. To ensure these conditions are not caused by a 3 phase fault the PPS current must also be below the fault level. The element has a 60VTS V PPS setting, an 60VTS I PPS Load setting and a setting for 60VTS I PPS Fault. A VT is considered to have failed where positive sequence voltage is below 60VTS V PPS while positive sequence current is above I PPS Load and below I PPS Fault level for more than 60VTS Delay then a VT failure will be detected. External MCB A binary input can be set as Ext_Trig 60VTS to allow the 60VTS Delay element to be started from an external MCB operating. Once a VT failure condition has occurred the output is latched on and is reset by any of the following:Voltage is restored to a healthy state i.e. above V PPS setting while NPS voltage is below V NPS setting. Ext Reset 60VTS A binary or virtual input, or function key and a VT failure condition no longer exists. Inhibit 60VTS A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 60 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 60VTS Element Enabled Disabled & 60VTS Inhibit User VTS Inhibit 1 or 2 Phase Fail 60VTS Component VA VB VC IA IB IC V Setting V V0 Phase Seq. Filter V2 I0 Phase Seq. Filter > V1 NPS/ZPS I Setting I1 I I2 & 60VTS Delay & > User 60VTS Pickup >1 3 Phase Fail Ipps Load I1 > S Q R 60VTS Operated Ipps Fault I1 < & Vpps Setting V1 < & >1 External Trigger 60VTS Ext_Trig External Reset 60VTS Ext_Reset Figure 5.2-1 Logic Diagram: VT Supervision Function (60VTS) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 61 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.3 Busbar VT Fail (60VTF-Bus) When the optional synchronising function is fitted, the synchronising voltage transformer is utilised to provide an additional monitoring function to check the validity of the measured line and busbar voltages. When the circuit breaker is closed, both voltages should be either Live or Dead. If the Bus voltage indicates that the VT is Dead but the corresponding Line voltage is Live, this raises the Bus VT Fail output. A time delay setting is provided to avoid spurious operations during transient switching conditions. Additionally, this output can be enabled by a setting, 79 LO Bus VT Fail, to apply a Lockout signal to the autoreclose function so that a sequence will not be attempted after a trip occurs if it is known that the voltage measurement is not reliable. A similar setting is available, 79 LO Line VT Fail, which when Enabled will provide a Lockout for a Line VT failure detected by the 60VTS function. 5.4 CT Supervision (60CTS) Normally the presence of negative phase sequence (NPS) current in a power system is accompanied by NPS voltage. The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure. The element has a setting for NPS current level 60CTS Inps and a setting for NPS voltage level 60CTS Vnps If the negative sequence current exceeds its setting while the negative sequence voltage is below its setting for more than 60CTS Delay then a CT failure output (60CTS Operated) is given. Operation of the under/over voltage elements can be inhibited from: Inhibit 60CTS A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 60CTS Element Enabled Disabled Inhibit 60CTS & User Inhibit 60CTS 60CTS Delay & 60CTS Operated VA VB VC IA IB IC NPS Filter NPS Filter 60CTS Vnps V2 < User 60CTS & User 60CTS Pickup 60CTS Inps I2 > Figure 5.4-1 Logic Diagram: CT Supervision Function (60CTS) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 62 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.5 Broken Conductor (46BC) The element calculates the ratio of NPS to PPS currents. Where the NPS:PPS current ratio is above 46BC Setting an output is given after the 46BC Delay. The Broken Conductor function can be inhibited from Inhibit 46BC A binary input or virtual input, function key or via data comms. User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) 46BC Element Enabled 46BC Setting Disabled Inhibit 46BC & User Inhibit 46BC 46BC U/C Guarded Enable 46BC U/C Guard Setting User 46BC UC Guard Yes No Enable 46BC Delay IA IA IB IB IC IC NPS Filter 46BC I2 User 46BC User 46BC Pickup IA IB IC PPS Filter I1 Figure 5.5-1 Logic Diagram: Broken Conductor Function (46BC) 5.6 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) The relay provides three trip circuit supervision elements. One or more binary inputs can be mapped to 74TCS-n. The inputs are connected into the trip circuit such that at least one input is energised when the trip circuit wiring is intact. If all mapped inputs become de-energised, due to a break in the trip circuit wiring or loss of supply an output is given. The 74TCS-n Delay setting prevents failure being incorrectly indicated during circuit breaker operation. This delay should be greater than the operating time of the circuit breaker. The use of one or two binary inputs mapped to the same Trip Circuit Supervision element (e.g. 74TCS-n) allows the user to realise several alternative monitoring schemes - see `Applications Guide'. The Trip Circuit Supervision elements can be individually inhibited from: User Inhibit Reylogic (graphical logic) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 63 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 74TCS-n 74TCS-n Delay Enabled & Disabled TCS-n User 74TSC-n Inhibit User TCS-n 74TCS-n 1 74TCS-n NOTE: Diagram shows two binary inputs mapped to the same Trip Circuit Supervision element Figure 5.6-1 Logic Diagram: Trip Circuit Supervision Feature (74TCS) 5.7 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) Inrush restraint detector elements are provided, these monitor the line currents. The inrush restraint detector can be used to block the operation of selected elements during transformer magnetising inrush conditions. The 81HBL2 Bias setting allows the user to select between Phase, Sum and Cross methods of measurement: Phase Each phase is inhibited separately. Sum With this method the square root of the sum of the squares of the second harmonic in each phase is compared to each operate current individually. Cross All phases are inhibited when any phase detects an inrush condition. An output is given where the measured value of the second harmonic component is above the 81HBL2 setting. . An LED assigned to this function operates instantaneously, whereas an output relay assigned to this function operates after a 60ms time delay. 81HBL2 Element Enabled >1 Disabled 81 HBL2 81HBL2 Setting 81HBL2 Bias c IL1 IL2 IL3 > > > L1 81HBL2 L2 81HBL2 L3 81HBL2 Figure 5.7-1 Logic Diagram: Harmonic Block Feature (81HBL2) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 64 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.8 Battery Test The DC battery voltage is constantly monitored by the relay. The output function Battery Healthy is provided to indicate that the battery charging system is connected and functioning correctly by measurement of the `Float Charge' voltage level and comparison with the minimum float voltage based on the Battery Nominal Voltage setting. In addition to this, the relay can be used to apply a loading test to the battery system at a settable periodic interval. The test sequence is shown below. If a protection Pickup occurs at any time during the test, the test will be abandoned and the charging system reconnected. The battery voltage level will be maintained such that the Recloser will be capable of normal operation throughout the duration of the test. Battery tests can be executed at manual request from a binary input or from the Control Menu of the relay. If the time elapsed since the previous battery test is less than 12 hours, the test will not execute and Test Aborted will be displayed on the Battery Condition meter. Vq - Battery on float charge Battery isolated from charger Vq V Float minimum Battery test load applied V1 V4 `O/C' recovery V V2 V minimum V3 Test load removed Charger reconnected 50ms ~ 15 ms ~ 15 ms t Load test = 5 secs Regular monitor t monitor = 1 sec t cycle Raise `BatteryTest' Raise `Load Test' Clear `Load Test' Measure recovery Voltage t recovery t settle = 10 mins Clear `Battery Test' Regular monitor t restart monitoring = 30 mins Figure 5.8-1 Battery Test timing diagram When the test is required, the output Battery Test is raised to interface with external equipment. This signal is used to disconnect the charging system and the battery is allowed to settle for a fixed period of 30 minutes. The battery voltage with no load is then measured (V1) and the output Battery Load Test is then raised. This is used to connect the resistive load to the battery and the voltage is measured again after 500ms (V2). This voltage is used to asses the battery internal resistance and the resistance of connections. If V1-V2 (V) is greater than the Battery Volts Drop setting the test will be considered as a failure and the test stopped, otherwise voltage is measured again after a further 5 seconds with the load resistance connected. This voltage, (V3), is compared to V2 and must not differ by more than 2 volts or the test will be stopped and recorded as a fail. The load is then disconnected, by the drop-off of the Battery Load Test output and a 10 minute recovery time applied before the voltage is measured again (V4). This voltage must not differ from the pre-test voltage by more than 0.5 volts or Recovery Fail output will be raised. The Battery Test output is now cleared which will reconnect the charging system to allow the system to return to normal. The quiescent voltage monitoring will resume after 30 minutes. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 65 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.9 Capacitor Test The actuator mechanism of the recloser can be driven from a charged capacitor network. The condition of the capacitors is monitored externally to the relay and the interface to the relay is in the form of two binary signals which are driven by undervoltage detectors as shown below. These inputs are CapMon Input 1 and CapMon Input 2. In the quiescent state, both logical inputs should be in the `1' state and the detection of `0' on both inputs will trigger the CapacitorSupplyFail output. In addition to the monitoring during quiescent conditions, the state of the inputs can be monitored to assess capacitor condition during an externally applied discharge test. When the Cap Element setting is Enabled, the sequence is executed automatically, 30 minutes after completion of a successful battery test. The sequence can be started manually on demand by energising the Capacitor Test binary input. If any protection element pickup occurs at any time during the capacitor test sequence, the sequence will be terminated. Vcap quiescent> 152 V Capacitor @ nominal charge During the quiescent no - test periods the states of the two Binary Inputs mapped to CAPMON 1 and CAPMON 2 are monitored and the responses are to be as per the Quiescent Truth table given below. CAPMON States CAPMON 1 = 1 CAPMON 2 = 1 152 V > Vcap 152 V > Vcap > 136V Test load applied Recharge Time ~ 5 secs 136 V > Vcap This diagram indicates a healthy voltage / capacitor test response State States change 1 1 1 0 Raise `Capacitor Test' BO Regular monitoring of CAPMON 1 & CAPMON 2 States 1 0 Vcap quiescent- Capacitor @ nominal charge 152 V Clear `Capacitor Test' BO Test load removed State change 0 0 Capacitor Voltage hold - up window time ~ 5s N x t monitor t monitor = 10ms State States change X 1 X 1 Clear `Capacitor Test' BO Regular monitoring of CAPMON 1 & CAPMON2 t recovery = 10 secs Battery test end+ 30 mins Capacitor test Time allowed to live = 20 secs restart Quiescent monitoring Figure 5.9-1 Capacitor Test timing diagram When the test is required, the output Cap Test Active is raised. This is used externally to start the discharge test. When the voltage reduces to the higher voltage detector, the relay binary inputs CapMon Input 2 will change to state `0' from the quiescent `1'. CapMon Input 1 will remain at the `1' state. The relay recognises this 1-0 condition and starts a timer which runs for the Cap Holdup Time. If the CapMon Input 1 changes state to `0' during this time, the test is recorded as a fail and the relay goes to the recovery state as described below. If the timer expires with the 1-0 condition still maintained, the test is considered as a pass. The sequence now enters the recovery state and the Cap Test Active output is cleared causing the external discharge test to end The Capacitor voltage will now recover and the quiescent 1-1 state for CapMon Input 1 and CapMon Input 2 will be re-established. If the 1-1 state is not achieved at the end of the 10 second recovery time, the Cap Recovery Fail output and the Capacitor Only Trip output are raised and the reclose function of the relay are internally blocked. Normal continuous monitoring of the quiescent state will be resumed 10 seconds after the reset of the Cap Test Active output. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 66 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 5.10 Power Quality (27S/59S) Voltage sag (27S) and voltage swell (59S) elements monitor the power supply quality. The elements monitor the deviation of the voltage from the nominal value and the duration of this under or over voltage in accordance with IEEE 1159. SYSTEM VOLTAGE Instantaneous SIARFIx Momentary SMARFIx Temporary STARFIx Interruptions SIARFIx SWELL X = 110, 120 140% Swells SIARFIx V nominal SIARFIx SAG X = 10, 50. 70, 80. 90% STARFIx Sags SMARFIx 0.5 secs 3.0 secs 60 secs Figure 5.10-1 Sag and Swell Indices - IEEE 1159 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 67 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Section 6: Other Features 6.1 Data Communications Two serial communication ports, COM1 and COM2 are provided. RS485 connections are available on the terminal blocks at the rear of the relay (COM1). A USB port, (COM 2), is provided at the front of the relay for local access using a PC. Other rear mounted communication ports are available as an optional extra - 2x fibre optic communication serial ports with ST connectors (COM 3 and COM 4) plus 1x IRIG B 1x RS232 serial port (COM 3) plus IRIG B 1x RS485 serialport (COM 3) plus IRIG B 2x Electrical Ethernet with RJ45 connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4), 2x Optical Ethernet with Duplex LC connectors IEC 61850 - (COM 3 and COM 4). Communication is compatible with Modbus-RTU, IEC60870-5-103 FT 1.2, DNP 3.0, and IEC60870-5-101 transmission and application standards for all serial ports and IEC 61850 for Ethernet ports. For communication with the relay via a PC (personal computer) a user-friendly software package, Reydisp Evolution, is available to allow transfer of relay settings, waveform records, event records, fault data records, Instruments/meters and control functions. REYDISP EVOLUTION is compatible with IEC60870-5-103. Data communications operation is described in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual. 6.2 CB Maintenance Several CB trip operations counters are provided: CB Total Trip Count: Increments on each trip command issued. During an autoreclose sequence, when the target count is reached the relay will perform one Delayed Trip and lockout*. CB Delta Trip Count: Additional counter which can be reset independently of the Total Trip Counter. This can be used, for example, for recording trip operations between visits to a substation. CB Count to AR Block: Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout. CB Frequent Ops Count Logs the number of trip operations in a rolling window period of one hour. During an autoreclose sequence, when the target count is reached the relay will perform one Delayed Trip and lockout*. CB LO Handle Ops Displays the number of CB (lock out) LO Handle Ops experienced by the CB. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout. *NB: If Delayed Trips are not assigned in the AUTORECLOSE PROT'N menu the relay will not trip. 2 An I t counter is also included; this can provide an estimation of contact wear and maintenance requirements. The 2 I t value at the time of trip is added to the previously stored value. Binary outputs can be mapped to each of the above counters, these outputs are energised when the user defined Count Target or Alarm Limit is reached. The counters do not increment for manual operations. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 68 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6.3 Output Matrix Test The feature is only visible from the Relay fascia and allows the user to operate the relays functions. The test of the function will automatically operate any Binary Inputs or LED's already assigned to that function. Any protection function which is enabled in the setting menu will appear in the Output Matrix Test. 6.4 Data Storage 6.4.1 General The relay stores three types of data: relay event records, analogue/digital waveform records and fault records. Data records are backed up in non-volatile memory and are permanently stored even in the event of loss of auxiliary d.c. supply voltage. 6.4.2 Event Records The event recorder feature allows the time tagging of any change of state (Event) in the relay. As an event occurs, the actual event condition is logged as a record along with a time and date stamp to a resolution of 1 millisecond. There is capacity for a maximum of 5000 event records that can be stored in the relay and when the event buffer is full any new record will over-write the oldest. Stored events can be erased from the front fascia via DATA STORAGE>Clear Events setting or using Reydisp Evolution via Relay > Events > Reset Events. The following events are logged: Change of state of Binary outputs. Change of state of Binary inputs. Change of Settings and Settings Group Change of state of any of the control functions of the relay. All events can be retrieved over the data communications channel(s) and can be displayed in the `Reydisp Evolution' package in chronological order, allowing the sequence of events to be viewed. Events are also made available spontaneously to an IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 or IEC6-870-5-101 compliant control system. For a complete listing of events available in each model, refer to Technical Manual section 4 `Data Comms'. 6.4.3 Waveform Records. Waveform records provide a trace of the instantaneous magnitude of each analogue input channel and the status of each binary channel i.e. each binary input, binary output, virtual I/O and LED, against time for the duration of the record. The values are recorded at every digital sampling point used by the relay software. Each recorded analogue waveform displays an input identifier, minimum value, maximum value and the instantaneous values at both cursor positions (user variable). Each binary waveform displays the input/output number and the initiating condition(s) e.g. external input or protection element. Triggering of waveform storage is configured from the `Settings > DATA STORAGE > WAVEFORM STORAGE' menu. Triggering is automatically initiated from operation of any of the selected protection or control elements. Waveform storage can also be triggered from the relay fascia, from a suitably programmed binary input or via the data comms channel(s). Waveforms are sampled at a rate of 1600Hz (32 samples per cycle at 50Hz). The latest 100 records are stored, the most recent is waveform 1. Records are archived by the relay during quiescent periods. The duration of each stored record is 1s, 2s, 5s or 10s. The percentage of waveform storage prior to waveform triggering is user configurable. When the waveform archive buffer is full (i.e. 100 records are stored) the triggering of a new waveform record causes the oldest record - waveform 100 - to be overwritten. Stored waveforms can be deleted from the relay fascia using the DATA STORAGE > Clear Waveforms setting or via Reydisp. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 69 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6.4.4 Fault Data Records Measured quantities for the last 100 relay trip fault records are stored with time and date of trip. The HMI LCD can display the latest 10 fault records with time and date of trip, measured quantities and LED status. The Max Fault Rec. Time setting sets the time period from fault trigger during which the operation of any LEDs is recorded. Records are triggered from operation of an output relay programmed as a `CBn Trip Contact'. The `Trip Alert' feature must also be enabled. To achieve accurate instrumentation values for the fault records when testing, ensure a drop off delay is applied to the test set so that the injected quantities remain on for a short duration, typically 20ms, after the relay has issued the trip output. This extended period of injection simulates the behaviour of the power system where faulted conditions are present until CB operation. Where examined together the event records and the fault records will detail the full sequence of events leading to a trip. Fault records are stored in a rolling buffer, with the oldest faults overwritten. The fault storage can be cleared with the DATA STORAGE>Clear Faults setting. The SYSTEM CONFIG > Trip Alert = Disabled setting allows the above to be switched off e.g. during commissioning tests. 6.4.5 Demand The Demand / Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. Up to 10,080 individual time stamped records can be stored at a user defined rate e.g. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1 year @ 1 hour intervals. Maximum, minimum and mean values of line current, voltage and power (where applicable) are available as instruments which can be read in the relay INSTRUMENTS MENU or via Reydisp Evolution. In the menu DATA STORAGE > DEMAND / DATA LOG: The Data Log Period setting is used to define the period between stored samples. The Gn Demand Window setting defines the maximum period of time over which the demand values are calculated. A new set of demand values is established after expiry of the set time. The Gn Demand Window Type is the mode used to calculate demand values and can be set to FIXED or PEAK or ROLLING: When set to FIXED the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over fixed Window duration. At the end of each window the internal statistics are reset and a new window is started. When set to PEAK the maximum and minimum values since the feature was reset are recorded. When set to ROLLING the maximum, minimum and mean values demand statistics are calculated over a moving Window duration. The internal statistics are updated when the window advances. The statistics can be reset from a binary input or communication command, after a reset the update period and window are immediately restarted. 6.4.6 Data Log The Data log feature can be used to build trend and maximum/minimum demand records. Up to 10,080 individual time stamped records of each phase current and voltage (where fitted) analogue signal are recorded and stored at a user defined rate e.g. 35 days @ 5 minute intervals and > 1 year @ 1 hour intervals. 6.4.7 Energy Storage The measured Power is continuously integrated (over a one-second window) to produce 4 Energy quantities: * Active Export Energy (W) * Active Import Energy (W) * Reactive Export Energy (VAr) * Reactive Import Energy (VAr) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 70 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation The Direction of Energy transfer is set by: SYSTEM CONFIG> Export Power/Lag VAr. With both Export Power (W) and Lag VAr (VAr) set to be +ve, the Direction of Energy transfer will follow the IEC convention, as shown in the figure. REACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT (vars reverse) IEC CONVENTION : -ve vars +90 POWER FACTOR LAGGING ACTIVE (W) IMPORT REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT ACTIVE ENERGY IMPORT (watts reverse) IEC CONVENTION : -ve watts POWER FACTOR LEADING ACTIVE (W) EXPORT REACTIVE (VAr) IMPORT 0 180 POWER FACTOR LEADING ACTIVE (W) IMPORT REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT ACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT (watts forward) IEC CONVENTION : +ve watts POWER FACTOR LAGGING ACTIVE (W) EXPORT REACTIVE (VAr) EXPORT -90 REACTIVE ENERGY EXPORT (vars forward) IEC CONVENTION : +ve vars Figure 6.4-1 Energy Direction Convention Setting either the Export Power (W) or Lag VAr (VAr) to be -ve, will reverse the Direction of the Energy transfer for these quantities. So forward VAr will then be reported as Imported Reactive Energy, and forward Watts will be reported as Exported Active Energy. When the accumulated Energy quantities reach a set increment, the Relay issues a pulse to the binary outputs: OUTPUT CONFIG/OUTPUT MATRIX> Active Exp Pulse, Active Imp Pulse, Reactive Exp Pulse and Reactive Imp Pulse. The Energy increments are set by the settings: DATA STORAGE/ENERGY STORAGE> Active Exp Energy Unit, Active Imp Energy Unit, Reactive Exp Energy Unit and Reactive Imp Energy Unit. These setting also define the resolution of the stored energy values reported by instruments and communications protocols. The value is stored in the range 0-999999 which continues from zero automatically when 999999 is reached. 6.4.8 Fault Locator The relay provides a Single End type fault locator which is able to estimate the fault position using analogue information measured by the relay at one end of the protected circuit during the short duration of the fault. Following relay operation due to a system fault, the fault waveform record is automatically evaluated to establish the fault type in terms of the phase(s) affected and the relevant current and voltage is used to calculate the fault impedance. The relay compares this information to a line model based on characteristic impedance parameters which are input to the relay as settings and provides an output estimate of the fault location. This data is presented as a percentage of line length or a distance in miles or kilometres. The Positive Sequence Impedance on the protected line must be provided to the relay as settings for impedance magnitude and characteristic phase angle to enable the distance to fault to be calculated. The Earth Fault return impedance is specified in terms of the ratio of zero to positive sequence impedance magnitudes and the characteristic phase angle of the zero sequence impedance. The (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 71 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation characteristic angle of the zero sequence impedance is often significantly different to that of the positive sequence impedance. When power systems are earthed through compensation (Peterson) coils, the earth fault currents are extremely low and are not proportional to fault location. Impedance based fault location cannot be used for earth faults. Phase to phase fault location can be estimated. On networks of this type it is possible to have two earth faults on the network simultaneously on different phases of the same circuit which will appear as a phase to phase fault. This is known as a Cross Country fault. In these cases the measured impedance cannot give an accurate estimate of the fault condition. The 7SR224 provides detection of this condition using the measured zero sequence voltage to positive sequence voltage ratio (U0/U1) to allow the possible cross country fault to be reported. This threshold is adjustable by a user setting. Fault Location is reported for faults calculated in a zone which extends to 200% of the forward line impedance and 10% in the reverse direction. High resistance fault results where fault resistance is calculated as up to 20 times the line impedance are reported. For faults beyond these limits, the message `No Location' is reported. The Fault Location estimation is initiated by operation of the Trip Output. Some protection elements may be set to provide tripping for system conditions where a fault location is not applicable. The initiation of the Fault Locator can be inhibited by user settings. The settings for the Fault Locator are found as a sub-menu in the Data Storage menu The Fault Locator result data is available in the Fault Data records and can be viewed at the relay fascia and downloaded from the relay. 6.5 Metering The metering feature provides real-time data available from the relay fascia in the `Instruments Mode' or via the data communications interface. For a detailed description refer to Technical Manual Section 2 - Settings and Instruments. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 72 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6.6 Operating Mode The relay has three operating modes, Local, Remote and Out of Service. functions operation in each mode. The following table identifies the The modes can be selected by the following methods: SYSTEM CONFIG>RELAY MODE setting, a Binary Input or Command OPERATION REMOTE MODE LOCAL MODE OUT OF SERVICE MODE Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Setting Option Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Control Rear Serial Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Serial Ports (when set as Local) Fascia (Control Mode) USB Binary Inputs Binary Outputs Reporting Spontaneous IEC 101/103 DNP3 General Interrogation IEC 101/103 DNP3 MODBUS Changing of Settings Rear Ports (when set as Remote) Rear Ports (when set as Local) Fascia USB Historical Information Waveform Records Event Records Fault Information Setting Information Table 6-1 6.7 Operation Mode Control Mode This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The user is prompted to confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER key, before the command is executed. Control Mode commands could be password protected using the Control Password function - see section 6.8. Commands available in the Control Mode are: Open CB Close CB 79 In/Out 79 Trip and Reclose 79 Trip & Lockout Hotline Work In/Out E/F In/Out SEF In/Out Instantaneous Protection In/Out (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 73 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation Battery Test Required Set Local Mode Set Local or Remote Mode Set Remote Mode Set Out of Service Mode 6.8 Real Time Clock Time and date can be set either via the relay fascia using appropriate commands in the System Config menu, via the data comms channel(s) or via the optional IRIG-B input. In order to maintain synchronism within a substation, the relay can be synchronised to the nearest second or minute using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optional IRIG-B input or binary input. The default date is set at 01/01/2000, this indicates that no date has been set. When editing the Time, only the hours and minutes can be edited. The seconds are zeroed by pressing ENTER and the clock begins running.Time and date are maintained while the relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The time and date are maintained while the relay is de-energised by a back up storage capacitor. The length of time for which this data will be maintained will depend on such things as temperature, length of time in service, etc. However the data will be maintained for a minimum of 1.8 days. 6.8.1 Time Synchronisation - Data Communication Interface Where the data comms channel(s) is connected the relay can be directly time synchronised to the nearest second or minute using the global time synchronisation. This can be from a dedicated substation automation system or from `Reydisp Evolution' communications support software. 6.8.2 Time Synchronisation - Binary Input A binary input can be mapped Clock Sync from BI. The seconds or minutes will be rounded up or down to the nearest value when the BI is energised. This input is leading edge triggered. 6.8.3 Time Synchronisation - IRIG-B (Optional) A BNC connector on the relay rear provides an isolated IRIG-B time synchronisation port. The IRIG-B input expects a modulated 3-6 Volt signal and provides time synchronisation to the nearest millisecond. 6.9 Settings Groups The relay provides eight groups of settings - Group number (Gn) 1 to 8. At any one time only one group of settings can be `active' - SYSTEM CONFIG>Active Group setting. It is possible to edit one group while the relay operates in accordance with settings from another `active' group using the View/Edit Group setting. Some settings are independent of the active group setting i.e. they apply to all settings groups. This is indicated on the top line of the relay LCD - where only the Active Group No. is identified. Where settings are group dependent this is indicated on the top line of the LCD by both the Active Group No. and the View Group No. being displayed. A change of settings group can be achieved either locally at the relay fascia, remotely over the data comms channel(s) or via a binary input. When using a binary input an alternative settings group is selected only whilst the input is energised (Select Grp Mode: Level triggered) or latches into the selected group after energisation of the input (Select Grp Mode: Edge triggered). The settings group that is currently active is indicated by signals in the output matrix which can be used for indication and alarms. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 74 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation 6.10 Password Feature The relay incorporates two levels of password protection - one for settings, the other for control functions. The programmable password feature enables the user to enter a 4 character alpha numeric code to secure access to the relay functions. A Password of NONE indicates that a Password has not been set and that the Password feature is disabled. Where a Relay is delivered with the Password already set, this will be "AAAA". The password must be entered twice as a security measure against accidental changes. Once a password has been entered then it will be required thereafter to change settings or initiate control commands. Passwords can be de-activated by using the password to gain access and by entering the password NONE. Again this must be entered twice to de-activate the security system. As soon as the user attempts to change a setting or initiate control the password is requested before any changes are allowed. Once the password has been validated, the user is `logged on' and any further changes can be made without re-entering the password. If no more changes are made within 1 hour then the user will automatically be `logged off', re-enabling the password feature. The Settings Password prevents unauthorised changes to settings from the front fascia or over the data comms channel(s). The Control Password prevents unauthorised operation of controls in the relay Control Menu from the front fascia. The password validation screen also displays a numerical code. If the password is lost or forgotten, this code should be communicated to Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. and the password can be retrieved. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 75 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 76 of 76 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/11 First issue 2009/09 Second Issue. Updated to suit software modification 2010/04 Third Issue. Software version updated 2010/05 Fourth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand 2012/09 Fifth Issue. Software version updated 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) Contents Document Release History................................................................................................................................. 1 Software Revision History .................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1. Description Of Feature ............................................................................................................................... 4 1.1. Loss of Voltage (LOV) - Automatic Restoration Element ..................................................................... 4 1.2. Sequence Timing............................................................................................................................. 11 2. LOV Automation Menu............................................................................................................................. 12 List Of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point ...................................................... 4 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. ........................................................................ 6 State Diagram for Line Recloser operation ...................................................................... 8 State Diagram for Normally Open Point ........................................................................... 9 Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram .................................................................... 10 LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV, `Feeder' Recloser, Line Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations. ....................................... 11 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) Symbols and Nomenclature The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document: * Setting Menu Location MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU * Setting: Elem name -Setting * Setting value: value * Alternatives: [1st] [2nd] [3rd] Elem Char Dir Digital input signal (binary input) visible to user Elem Inhibit Digital output signal (output relay) visible to user Setting block showing list of setting values, with setting name. Appropriate block is TRUE when setting selected; other blocks are FALSE. PhaseAFwd Forward Reverse Elem Starter Common setting for multi-function block. Digital signal not visible to user, to/from another element Non-Dir Common control input (c) for multifunction block. All function blocks are disabled when control input is FALSE. Elem Reset Delay c start Digital signal not visible to user, internal to this element Analogue signal with signal description And Gate Or Gate PhA Dir Blk Function blocks. Ia Individual function blocks are disabled when associated control input (c) is FALSE. c trip start c trip & 1 EVENT: IEC, Modbus or DNP Where applicable Relay instrument (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited EVENT INST. Chapter 1 Page 3 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 1. Description Of Feature 1.1. Loss of Voltage (LOV) - Automatic Restoration Element This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. The LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders, see Figure 1, the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is possible following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. The resultant permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential closure of the NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted section. This sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly, restore the power to healthy sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost (CML) metric. LOV Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which, the normal NOP having been closed, manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its normal configuration. The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other permanent fault(s) occurring, after the first-fault LOV automation sequence, depending on their location within the system. However, if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be considered. Feeder 1 1A A Vabc B 1B Vabc C 1C Vabc `Vabc' NOP (TIE) `Vxyz' Feeder 2 2A Vabc Figure 1 2B Vabc 2C Vabc System Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types: Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state, the controller issues a trip then subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points along the feeder. NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different, unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost. Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV, followed by no further action to establish a new normally open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence. The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A, B & C on both Feeders will be closed as shown in Figure 1 and the NOP will be open. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream sides and voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. It should be noted that Reclosers at different points in the system are programmed to give the optimum, different, reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) their response is not conditional on seeing fault current, only on detection of loss of voltage. An LOV sequence starts to operate due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after a persistent fault is isolated from the supply i.e. fault current no longer flows, following a complete but unsuccessful autoreclose sequence. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source side from the supply and from adjacent feeders by the NOP. For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1- A section, the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that 1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.g. 1B to 1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. This is achieved as follows;- following the Lockout of the Source Recloser/CB-1A, the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV), (this may also have occurred temporarily, more than once during or for the whole, of the 1A recloser sequence). 1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 60 seconds, set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence, then their LOV Elements will each take action and give a 3 pole Trip output, both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time. The NOP, which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu, in example 1, will see LOV on its Feeder 1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side; if the NOP's LOV Element sees permanent LOV on either side i.e. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 75 seconds to give a grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at, for example, 60 seconds, then the NOP LOV Element will take action and issue a NOP Close. A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser. For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e.g. 5 seconds), on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the NOP close is successful and no fault appears, the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C's LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. Note that the 1C Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if 1C closes onto a permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C will Fast Protection Trip and Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1C Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B's LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. Note the 1B Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B will Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1B Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections backfed via the NOP. As can be seen from the above, the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e.g. 5 seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout; this ensures that the Recloser closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven, unfaulted, sections energised. This mode of operation does impose a fault, which will be cleared by a single high-speed Fast-Protection Trip, onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in `as much of the System being maintained in-service as possible'. If, following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation, a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed, then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i.e. the LOV Automation time-allowed-to-live timer, the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set to a longer time, with grading margin > 5 secs, than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose, tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself as necessary. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers, which will see fault current when the last Recloser in the sequence closes, remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted. Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy sections. This co-ordinated grading, under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure, is achieved by programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional, their settings in both directions can be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed, Reverse directions. LOV Element has two main outputs i.e. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs, it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix, all other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes. It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder, therefore, there must be a user-set pecking order. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.g. 75 s - 80 s - 85 s, ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply is restored via a third path should the first or second, choice path not be available or fails, see Figure 2 . LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds S/STN 1 S/STN 2 85 s 1st 75 s 80 s 2nd 80 s 3rd 85 s 1st 75 s 85 s 75 s 80 s 2nd 3rd 85 s 1st 75 s OFF 2nd 85 s 1st 75 s 80 s 2nd Figure 2 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting; Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential first choice, a second choice and third choice back-feed feeder, the user can set these independently to suit his system. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e.g. 85 second Action Delay time. NB the NOP LOV Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that the User can select NOP LOV Close so as to supply power in a single first required direction only, not a second. The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder, st nd rd showing how the user can select the 1 , 2 and 3 choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. Other arrangements can be set-up by User. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same Action Delay time settings on both sides. The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled, by the User setting and can be switched In/Out dynamically via any Binary Inputs, LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General Commands. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected. For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence, only the downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required. Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. The controller monitors will respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the `A' or `X' side. For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence, the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i.e. both downstream and upstream voltages, must be monitored. Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary. An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. The setting of the Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing. The LOV function is set to `Out' by default and must be switched `In'. The voltages and open/closed state of the recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function `In'. A type Feeder or Recloser must be Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides. This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the `primed' staus is achieved. The device must be in the `primed' state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. The NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault. The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of voltage on any single phase. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole tripping is permitted. The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. When selected as Single mode, the LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed following a subsequent loss of voltage. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 7 of 12 Figure 3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited LOV RESET LOV RESET Allows for Reclosing Cycle `LOV Fast Inhibit' LOV Line Check Delay = LOV Reclose Delay = 5s mode Inst Line Check - after 5s change Mode to Delayed Line Check & Reclaim LOV RESET BLOCK RECLOSE `LOV Reclose' LOV Close Blocked Timer = 5s LOV Reclose Delay = 5s Reclose mode Inst Line Check Reclose only IF Volts are present 50 ms Check for 3O CB CLOSE If 3O CLOSE LOV RESET NOP closes @ 75s Notes:Recloser only requires 3 pole voltage presence monitoring on one side i.e. Downstream Vabc side. Monitoring uses the Live Line (LL)/Dead Line (DL) states on all phases i.e. 3O LOV = !Va.!Vb.!Vc = DLa.DLb.DLc If 3O Volts on VA,VB,VC OR VX,VY,VZ `LOV InProgress' Time = 30s If 3O CB OPEN and Device Type = Recloser 50 ms Check for 3O CB OPEN Trip after LOVa/b Action Delay = 60secs `LOV Action delay' `LOV Trip' If 3O back-feed Volts is not present for > 5 Seconds, OR If CB does not Close go to IDLE If Volts not present ALARM `LOV Backfeed V Fail' If Close Blocked not remove within 5 secs ALARM `LOV Close Blocked' If 3O LOV CLOSE Successful. Mode - Delay Line Check LOV RECLAIM Time If CB Closed and 3O Volts (LL) re-appears return LOV RESET If `3O LOV' (DL) If CB is Open and Device Type = Feeder then go to IDLE 3 Phase Up and Down Voltages were present DO Delay = 90secs 50 ms Check for CB CLOSED AND 3O Volts If LOV InProgress times out LOV Reclose conditions not met i.e. no 3O Volts presented, go to IDLE ALARM `LOV Backfeed V Fail' If CB Closed and 3O Volts not present return after 90 Secs Drop-Off Delay If LOV Reclaim Times out then Reset the Line Check Trip i.e resume normal operation & go to IDLE ALARM _ `LOV Successful' `LOV Reset' IDLE 50 ms Check for CB CLOSED AND 3O Volts If CB Closed and 3O Volts present for more than 60 secs RECLOSER & FEEDER LOV LOGIC 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) State Diagram for Line Recloser operation Chapter 1 Page 8 of 12 Figure 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited LOV RECLAIM Time `LOV Fast Inhibit' LOV Reclaim Delay = LOV Reclose Delay = 5s mode Inst Line Check - after 5s change to Mode to Delayed Line Check & Reclaim If 3O LOV CLOSE Successful. Mode = Delay Line Check LOV RESET LOV RESET ' If 3O CLOSE 50 ms Check for 3O CB CLOSE `LOV Close' LOV Close Blocked Timer = 5 s NOP close initiation @ 75 / 80s 3O Volts EXCLUSIVE OR i.e. LLx & DLa OR DLx & LLa `LOV In-Progress' LOVa (DLa & LLx) Action Delay Time = 75 s LOVx (LLa & DLx) Action Delay Time = 80 s If Close NOT Blocked or if Block removed within 5 seconds proceed BLOCK CLOSE If Close Blocked NOT removed within 5 seconds go to IDLE. Alarm `LOV Close Blocked' LOV RESET LOV Reclose Delay = 5s Reclose mode Fast Line Check. Close only IF DLa & LLx OR LLa & DLx is TRUE If CB does not CLOSE go to IDLE. Alarm `LOV Close Failed' LOV RESET If Exclusive OR `3O LOV' i.e LLx & DLa OR DLx & Lla `3O LOV' on one side only If NOP OPEN and Exclusive OR does not remain True return. i.e. If NOP OPEN and 3O Volts re-appear both sides i.e. LLa & LLx OR DLa & DLx NOP has been/is open AND 3 Phase Voltages have been present on both sides, for more than 5s DO Delay = 90s 50 ms Check for NOP OPEN AND 3O Volts both sides If NOP Trip and Lockout go to IDLE. Alarm ` `LOV Failed' If NOP Open and 3O Volts NOT present on one side i.e. if either LLx & DLa OR DLx & LLa NOT TRUE then return after 90 Secs Drop-Off Delay If NOP OPEN and 3O Volts present on both sides for more than 5 secs If LOV Reclaim Times out then Reset the Line Check Trip i.e resume normal operation & go to IDLE ALARM _ `LOV Successful' `LOV RESET' IDLE 50 ms Check for NOP OPEN AND 3O Volts on both sides Normally Open Point LOV Automation State diagram 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) State Diagram for Normally Open Point Chapter 1 Page 9 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) CB Closed 100% LIVE LINE = 80% Live Line / Dead Line Hysteresis DEAD LINE = 40% 0% DEAD LINE LIVE LINE DEAD LINE LIVE LINE LIVE LINE (LL) 0 1 0 1 DEAD LINE (DL) 1 0 1 0 NOTE:- A Line is DEAD until it is LIVE and then LIVE until it is DEAD. Figure 5 Live Line / Dead Line State Table Diagram This state diagram shows how the Live Line / Dead Line states correctly mimic the response of a single electromechanical element with high Hysteresis. There can be no mythical `third' state, where a Line is neither Live nor Dead, to cause confusion. The User settable limits allow a dead line with high levels of pick-up Voltage due to mutual or capacitive coupling to remain correctly classified as a Dead Line i.e. one which can be reclosed without requiring Check Synchronising. As can also be seen the state conditions are robust allowing for severe Voltage dips caused by faults on a live line without losing the correct Live Line state indication. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 10 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 1.2. Sequence Timing T=0s 2Inst + 2Delayed DAR Sequence by Recloser which `Clears' Fault LOV U/V Threshold setting Possible Voltage patterns [offset slightly for clarity] as seen by Downstream devices. Voltage level may be total 100% or pulsed Sags, as determined by Fault Type, Location and Fault impedance LOV Raised Action Delay Action Delay Action Delay Permanent LOV Raised Action Delay All LOV Reclosers + `Feeder' Recloser open together `Feeder' [new NOP(TIE)] Recloser(s) `Feeder' Recloser Trip&Lockout to create new NOP Restoration delay = NOP Action Delay + 5*(NOP+N) s Restoration of back-fed supply to last healthy section 5s Recloser N (N-1) x 5s Nth Recloser LOV CLOSE. Closes onto the fault and TRIPS & LocksOut Fast LCT Delayed LCT 5s 5s Normal Operation with Directional settings 1st Recloser LOV Close Recloser 1 Fast LCT Recloser LOV Action Delay = 35 s (for fault voltage < Live setting) 5s Delayed LCT Normal Operation with Directional settings 5s NOP [TIE] Recloser LOV Action Delay = 35s Closes (for fault voltage > Live setting) NOP LOV Action Delay = 40s Normally Open Point (TIE) Fast LCT Delayed LCT Normal Operation with Directional settings 5s Assumed Maximum Time for full sequence = 30 secs `In Progress' timer Permanent LOV Raised Figure 6 LOV Automation sequence showing relative timing of LOV, `Feeder' Recloser, Line Reclosers and NOP relative timing operations. Examples of LOV Automation Sequence Timing. In the worst case, the LOV timing will not start until after the full multi-shot autoreclose sequence has completed due to restoration of full voltage during the recloses onto the fault. i.e. full 30 seconds sequence, a Recloser Action Delay of 35 secs, a NOP action time setting of 40 seconds and two Reclosers to the fault position, each with 5 seconds Reclose Delay, the total time from first Fault-current inception to restoration of supply to the final healthy section = 30+35+5+5 =75 seconds. In many cases the fault voltage may remain below the Dead setting due to the low fault impedance throughout the auto sequence. The LOV timing will therefore execute during the autoreclose sequence and the LOV action will be sooner. If the permanent LOV occurs earlier due to a shorter AutoReclose sequence, say 2 Fast + 1 Delayed =15 s, and with Recloser Action Delay of 35 seconds, a NOP action delay reduced to 36 seconds and Reclose Delay reduced to 2 seconds, then the total time = 15+36+2 = 53 s this is well below 60 s and would not count as an Interruption, therefore, the CML metric would not be increased. The majority of LOV Automation sequences could thus not count as Interruptions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 11 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 1 Loss of Voltage) 2. LOV Automation Menu Gn LOV-A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live. Gn LOV-A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead. Gn LOV-X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live. Gn LOV-X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead. Gn LOV Automation Selects whether the LOV Automation Element is enabled. Gn LOV Plant Device Type Selects the appropriate functionality for the type of device. Gn LOV Start Option Selects either 3P or Any pole dead for LOV starting. Gn Primed Interlock Allows the voltage check for correct Live voltage before allowing LOV to be switched In, to be disabled. Gn LOV Primed Time Time that the primed condition of correct open/closed state and live voltage has to be present for before the LOV Automation is classed as primed. Gn LOV Recloser Opening Select if a Recloser Type should open after LOV and reclose once voltage is restored or stay closed whilst waiting for voltage to be restored. Gn LOV Action Delay After Loss of Voltage for this length of time with the device in a 'primed' state, the LOV Action starts. (Recloser & Feeder). Gn LOV-A Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the A Side. Gn LOV-A Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the A Side for this length of time with the device in a 'primed' state, the LOV action starts. (NOP). Gn LOV-X Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the X Side. Gn LOV-X Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the X Side for this length of time with the device in a 'primed' state, the LOV action starts. (NOP) Gn LOV Sequence Time Maximum time allowed after LOV Action Delay for a Recloser type to wait for Voltage to reappear. Gn LOV Reclose Delay When "Gn LOV Recloser Opening" is Enabled, the voltage must be reestablished for this length of time before the Recloser will close. Gn LOV SOTF Time For this length of time after a recloser has been closed, due to an LOV Automation operation, all Instantaneous protections will be allowed to operate. Gn LOV Reclaim Time For this length of time after the Gn LOV SOTF Time all Instantaneous protections will be inhibited. Gn LOV Memory Time Length of time that NOP will remain primed for after losing voltage on both sides. Gn LOV Operation Selects whether the element must be switched `In' again to allow another LOV operation following a successful LOV Automation operation. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 12 of 12 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/11 First draft 2009/09 First Issue. Software version updated 2010/04 Third Issue. Software version updated 2010/05 Fourth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand 2012/09 Software version updated 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited. 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) Contents Document Release History................................................................................................................................. 1 Software Revision History .................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. Section 1: Description of Feature........................................................................................................................ 4 1.1 Single Triple Autoreclose ................................................................................................................... 4 1.1.1 Mode A - 3P Trip 3P LO....................................................................................................... 5 1.1.2 Mode B - 1P Trip 3P LO....................................................................................................... 5 1.1.3 Mode C - 1P Trip 1P LO ...................................................................................................... 7 List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single / three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic................................................................................... 6 Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic. ........................................................................... 8 List of Figures Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser ............................................................................... 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 2 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) Symbols and Nomenclature The following notational and formatting conventions are used within the remainder of this document: * Setting Menu Location MAIN MENU>SUB-MENU * Setting: Elem name -Setting * Setting value: value * Alternatives: [1st] [2nd] [3rd] Elem Char Dir Digital input signal (binary input) visible to user Elem Inhibit Digital output signal (output relay) visible to user Setting block showing list of setting values, with setting name. Appropriate block is TRUE when setting selected; other blocks are FALSE. PhaseAFwd Forward Reverse Elem Starter Common setting for multi-function block. Digital signal not visible to user, to/from another element Non-Dir Common control input (c) for multifunction block. All function blocks are disabled when control input is FALSE. Elem Reset Delay c start Digital signal not visible to user, internal to this element Analogue signal with signal description And Gate Or Gate PhA Dir Blk Function blocks. Ia Individual function blocks are disabled when associated control input (c) is FALSE. c trip start c trip & 1 EVENT: IEC, Modbus or DNP Where applicable Relay instrument (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited EVENT INST. Chapter 1 Page 3 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) Section 1: Description of Feature 1.1 Single Triple Autoreclose This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. Three pole commands and controls available in the standard controller are replaced by pole segregated inputs. 2 Operations counters, Circuit Breaker Fail and I T functions are available on a pole by pole basis, these replace the standard functionality. The capacitor test function which is used to test the condition of the capacitor network is duplicated in the Single/Triple recloser to provide extended functionality for monitoring of the additional capacitor networks to suit phase segregated Recloser mechanisms. The three capacitor networks are tested simultaneously. In a system where the three phases of the supply are used independently to provide single phase to neutral connected loads, the three phases of the Recloser can be tripped and reclosed separately to produce less interruption to the unfaulted phases and to provide better co-ordination with single phase devices fitted downstream. This function allows the asynchronous reclosing sequences in the three phases to be controlled by a single controller device at the point where the three independent single phase reclosers are adjacent, i.e. before the split point. The controller provides phase segregated protection elements as well as elements such as earth fault for which the phase selection is not clearly defined. The controller provides logic and settings to allow trip and reclose of different phase combinations to provide the fastest clearance of faults with minimum system disruption. Standard 3 pole tripping elements such as voltage elements can be configured to start or lockout the autoreclose function using quicklogic, virtual I/O and the external AR start input to suit operational requirements. The practice of single phase HV distribution systems is commonly used in some countries, particularly in rural areas where loading is light. Phase-Neutral Loads Separate routes Single/Triple recloser A Valley A Valley B B C N 4 CTs essential Valley C Figure 1.1-1 Typical arrangement of Single/Triple Recloser The Single/Triple controller has three modes of operation and operation mode can be changed by settings and relay inputs. This means that the response to a fault can be variable to suit system requirements. Mode A, 3P Trip 3P LO, allows only three pole tripping and 3 poles are tripped regardless of the fault type, Three pole Autoreclose can be set to execute for any protection element. The Lockout state applies to all poles. This allows the recloser to operate as a standard three pole device. Mode B, 1P Trip 3P LO, allows 1P trips for faults diagnosed as affecting only 1 phase and generated from elements which will start an autoreclose sequence. For faults detected by these protection elements which are diagnosed as affecting more than one phase, three pole trips are issued and three pole autoreclose is executed. Three pole trips are therefore issued for all fault detections for which single pole autoreclose will not return the recloser to the three poles closed state. Lockout is a three pole condition and logic in the controller ensures that in this Mode the recloser is never left in a single pole open condition for an extended period. A single pole reclose sequence in progress will be converted to three pole reclose or terminated by Lockout by the generation of a three pole trip if a simultaneous fault or fail to reclose occurs. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 4 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) Mode C, 1P Trip 1P LO, allows the three poles of the recloser to operate independently for fault detections which are diagnosed as affecting a single pole only. The Lockout condition on one phase, resulting from a non-reclosing protection element operation or failure to reclose during a sequence, is independent of the other poles. Single or two pole Lockout and the accompanying single or two pole open condition is allowed to exist indefinitely and does not affect the autoreclose sequences subsequently applied to the other pole(s). Fault detections which are diagnosed as affecting more than one pole will trip and reclose the affected two or three poles. If Single pole Trip is allowable then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single pole Circuit Breaker. In some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole device. Each Recloser has its own Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed Auxiliary contacts. Each Recloser has its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle. Each Recloser also has its own external push button switches to provide local electrical Trip/Close input signals. The I/O matrices and the internal logic of the Single/Triple Controller is extended, compared to the standard Controller, to include interfaces to suit this additional functionality. The Controller provides logic and interlocking to ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes. The controller provides three independent autoreclose elements whose operations are automatically internally linked and sequences synchronized as applicable to suit the setting selections, type of fault applied and progress of sequences. Each pole has independent shot counters which are used to select the required deadtime and control the application of Instantaneous Element Blocks on a pole by pole basis to achieve co-ordination with other single pole devices in the system. 1.1.1 Mode A - 3P Trip 3P LO Mode A allows the three single pole Reclosers to operate in three pole mode as a standard three pole Recloser. Protection elements operations are issued to all of the pole segregated trip outputs simultaneously and all autoreclose sequences are three pole. If any pole goes to Lockout for CB Fail to Close, a three pole trip and lockout is issued All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a `Open CB A' command will open only pole `A' when the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is set to Mode A. Although the tripping logic and control functions operate in three pole mode, the operations counters are still executed on a pole by pole basis. This allows the correct co-ordination with single pole reclose equipment downstream. Separate counts are recorded for each phase for Phase fault High set and Delayed trips and checked against the Number of Trips to Lockout settings. The Protection Trip counter which is used to inhibit Instantaneous protection during Delayed shots is common for all phases and Earth Faults. 1.1.2 Mode B - 1P Trip 3P LO Mode B provides single pole tripping and reclose to minimize disruption to load connected on the unfaulted phases in a three phase system. Mode B will only allow single pole trips to be issued if autoreclose follows, to return the recloser to a normal 3 poles closed condition. This mode should be used on a 3 phase system where it is undesirable to allow the system to have a single pole open for any extended period of time but where a transient single pole open condition during autoreclose can minimize disruption to supply on the unfaulted phases. The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip. Single pole tripping is not allowed if Autoreclose is disabled or switched out. Single Pole tripping is only allowed if the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which are operated by residual current cannot discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these elements must be used in conjunction with phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole tripping. Two phase tripping is never allowed in Mode B. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a three pole trip. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead time, the controller will force a three pole trip of the recloser which may be followed by a three pole reclose. If a single pole autoreclose is not successful, when Lockout is reached, the controller will force a three pole trip of the recloser. The External Trip input is assumed to have caused a three pole trip and will start a three pole reclose sequence. All Manual Open and Close commands for the Recloser, from binary inputs or via serial comms to the Controller are simultaneously applied to all three poles. For example, a `Open CB-A' command will open only pole `A' when the controller is set in Mode C, but all three phases will be opened if this command is raised when the controller is set to Mode B. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 5 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) The Line Check & Hot Line working functions prevent autoreclose from executing and therefore these functions also force any affected trip to be three pole only. The table below shows the single/three pole tripping decision logic: State SEF Op SEF Op SEF Op SEF Op E/F Op E/F Op E/F Op E/F Op SEF|E/F|PF Op Pole X Op Pole X Op Pole X Op A79Prime Lockout=True B79Prime Lockout=True C79Prime Lockout=True External Trip Non ARC Table 1 Supplementary Starter State Data No other Starters or Outputs raised E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs raised Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised No other Starters or Outputs raised SEF Starter or Output Raised Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised Two|Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State i.e. Trip due to second pole while first is in Dead time No other Starters or Outputs raised SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised Any other P/F starter or Output raised Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole Trip & Lockout Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole Trip & Lockout Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Three pole Trip & Lockout S/T ACTION 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC Any pole Trip & Lockout Command 3PTrip & Lockout The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE X - Don't Care 3P ACTION 3PTrip & 3PARC as per settings / mapping 3PTrip & Reclose 3PTrip & Lockout 3P Trip & Reclose Command Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage / Frequency [unless mapped to External ARC Start] 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 3PTrip & 3PARC Three pole Trip & Lockout Three pole Trip & Lockout Three pole Trip & Lockout Mode B operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single / three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 6 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) 1.1.3 Mode C - 1P Trip 1P LO Mode C provides phase segregated control of three independent single pole reclosers. Operation of the single pole reclosers can be synchronized to suit the applied fault to provide the correct clearance sequence whilst retaining the ability to provide independent single pole sequences running concurrently for separate coincident faults on different poles. Any pole can reach the Lockout state due to a persistent fault or a failure of plant. This results in a single pole open condition which will remain until manual action is taken to restore. The operation of the controller for subsequent faults on the other phases is not affected by the Open or Lockout state on the previously faulted phase. During coincident, independent autoreclose sequences on two or three phases, the issue of the independent close pulses is aligned so that if the fault is actually multi-phase and persistent, Close Onto Fault and the start of subsequent Deadtimes are aligned. This avoids the possible scenario where the fault duration is extended by passing fault from one phase to another by re-energising a second phase with ionization still in the vicinity from Close onto Fault of the first pole to reclose. Independent sequence counters are incorporated for each pole. The number of shots to Lockout are counted separately on each pole, for High set, Delayed and total number of shots. This means that if faults are detected on two or more phases simultaneously, during an autoreclose sequence that was already In Progress on one phase, the controller may be executing shot 1 for one pole whilst on shot 2 for another. One Pole may actually count to Lockout before the other, which will continue with further shots and also whilst one pole blocks instantaneous protection to go to Delayed protection only, the other phase will continue to operate with Instantaneous protection unblocked. This is correct operation and allows the single pole reclosers to retain correct co-ordination with other single pole devices in the system. In Mode C the controller handles Manual Open and Close commands to the three single pole Reclosers on an individual pole basis. For example Open CB-A and Close CB-A do not affect poles B or C. Similarly the Trip and Lockout inputs are provided for each pole separately but Trip and Reclose is provided as a three pole function only. The External Trip function is provided as a three pole function only. The operation of any tripping protection element which does not start autoreclose will cause a three pole trip. Single Pole tripping is only allowed if the affected phase can be identified. Earth Fault and SEF elements which are operated by residual current cannot discern the phase affected by the fault and the operation of these elements must be used in conjunction with phase element starters to diagnose the faulted phase for single pole tripping. Two phase tripping is allowed in Mode C. Any fault detection affecting more than one phase will cause a trip of the affected phases. If a protection element operates on a second phase during a single pole autoreclose dead time, the controller will issue a single pole trip of the second pole of the recloser which will be followed by a single pole reclose of this pole also. The Close Pulses to the two poles will be aligned If a single pole autoreclose is not successful and Lockout is reached, this applies to the affected pole only. The controller will not force a three pole trip of the recloser. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 7 of 8 7SR224 Argus Description of Operation (Appendix 2 Single Triple) State SEF Op SEF Op SEF Op SEF Op SEF Op E/F Op E/F Op E/F Op E/F Op E/F Op SEF|E/F Op Supplementary Starter State Data No other Starters or Outputs raised E/F Starter or Output raised, no other Starters or Outputs raised Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised No other Starters or Outputs raised SEF Starter or Output Raised Any single P/F pole X Starter or Output raised Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised Three P/F pole Starters or Outputs raised AND one|two poles in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State State i.e. Trip due to second pole while first is in Dead time AND one pole in OPEN but NOT @ Lockout State AND Pole X Starter or Output raised i.e. Trip due to second pole to Ground fault while first pole is in Dead time AND one pole X already in Lockout state AND two poles X & Y already in Lockout state No other Starters or Outputs raised SEF Starter or Output and/or E/F Starter or Output raised One other Pole Y P/F starter or Output raised Two P/F, pole Y and pole Z, Starters or Outputs raised AND 1|2 poles Y & Z already in Lockout state [don't care] Next A pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole A Trip & Lockout Next B pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole B Trip & Lockout Next C pole ARC Config Element operation forces Pole C Trip & Lockout S/T ACTION 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 2PYZTrip & 2PYZARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC Single Pole Trip & Lockout command 1PTrip & 1P Lockout External Trip The following are all Three pole Trip regardless of MODE X - don't Care Non ARC Config Prot'n 3P Trip & Reclose command Any other non-ARC element operation e.g. Voltage / Frequency [unless mapped to External ARC Start] 3P ACTION 3PTrip & 3PARC as per settings / mapping 3PTrip + 3PARC 3PTrip SEF|E/F Op SEF|E/F Op SEF|E/F Op Pole X Op Pole X Op Pole X Op Pole X Op Pole X Op A79Prime Lockout=True B79Prime Lockout=True C79Prime Lockout=True Table 2 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC 2PXYTrip & 2PXYARC 3PTrip & 3PARC 1PXTrip & 1PXARC Single pole A Trip Lockout Single pole B Trip Lockout Single pole C Trip Lockout & & & Mode C operation - Logic Table of Element operation / Starter states determining the Single/Two/Three pole (Triple) Trip & ARC logic. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 1 Page 8 of 8 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2015/11 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 1 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d Contents Document Release History ............................................................................................................................... 1 Software Revision History ................................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1. Relay Instrumentation ................................................................................................................................. 3 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 1.7. 1.8. 1.9. 1.10. 1.11. 1.12. 1.13. 1.14. 1.15. 1.16. 1.17. 1.18. 1.19. 1.20. 1.21. 1.22. 1.23. 1.24. 1.25. Favourite Meters .............................................................................................................................. 3 Current Meters ................................................................................................................................. 3 Voltage Meters ................................................................................................................................. 4 Frequency Meters ............................................................................................................................. 5 Power Meters ................................................................................................................................... 6 Energy Meters .................................................................................................................................. 6 Wattmetric Meters ............................................................................................................................ 6 Directional Meters ............................................................................................................................ 7 Thermal Meters ................................................................................................................................ 7 Single-Triple Meters ......................................................................................................................... 7 Auto-Reclose Meters ........................................................................................................................ 8 Synchronising Meters ....................................................................................................................... 8 Loss of Voltage Meters ..................................................................................................................... 8 Maintenance Meters ......................................................................................................................... 9 General Alarm Meters .................................................................................................................... 11 Battery Condition Meters ................................................................................................................ 11 Capacitor condition Meters ............................................................................................................. 11 Power Quality Meters ..................................................................................................................... 12 Demand Meters .............................................................................................................................. 12 Binary Input Meters ........................................................................................................................ 14 Binary Output Meters...................................................................................................................... 14 Virtual Meters ................................................................................................................................. 14 Communication Meters................................................................................................................... 15 Miscellaneous Meters ..................................................................................................................... 16 Quick Logic Meters......................................................................................................................... 16 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 2 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1. Relay Instrumentation 1.1. Favourite Meters Instrument Description -------------------FAVOURITE METERS > to view This allows the user to view his previously constructed list of `favourite meters' by pressing TEST/RESET button and the READ DOWN button to scroll though the meters added to this sub-group To construct a sub-group of favourite meters, first go to the desired meter then press ENTER this will cause a message to appear on the LCD `Add To Favourites YES pressing ENTER again will add this to the FAVOURITE METERS Sub-menu. To remove a meter from the FAVOURITE METERS submenu go to that meter each in the FAVOURITE METERS sub-menu or at its Primary location press ENTER and the message `Remove From Favourites' will appear press ENTER again and this meter will be removed from the FAVOURITE METERS sub-group 1.2. Current Meters Instrument Description -------------------CURRENT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Current TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Primary Current Ia 0.00A Ib 0.00A Ic 0.00A Secondary Current Ia 0.00A Ib 0.00A Ic 0.00A Nom Current o Ia 0.00xIn ---Ib 0.00xIn ----o Ic 0.00xIn ----o Pri Earth Current In 0.000A Ig 0.000A Isef 0.000A Sec Earth Current In 0.000A Ig 0.000A Isef 0.000A Nom Earth Current In 0.000xIn ---o Ig 0.000xIn ---- Isef 0.000xIn ---- o o I Seq Components Izps 0.00xIn ----o Ipps 0.00xIn ----o Displays the 3 phase currents Primary RMS values Displays the 3 phase currents Secondary RMS values Displays the 3 phase currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current. Displays the 3 Earth currents Primary RMS values Displays the 3 Earth currents Secondary RMS values Displays the 3 Earth currents Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current. Displays the Current Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS current. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 3 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d Instrument Description o Inps 0.00xIn ---2nd Harmonic Current Ia 0.00xIn Ib 0.00xIn Ic 0.00xIn Last Trip current Ia 0.00 A Ib 0.00 A Ic 0.00 A Last Trip current Ig 0.00 A nd Displays the 3 phase currents 2 Harmonic components Nominal RMS values. Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation for the 3 phase currents Displays the Current recorded for the most recent trip operation .for the measured earth current 1.3. Voltage Meters -------------------VOLTAGE METERS > to view -------------------Prim Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00V Vbc 0.00V Vca 0.00V Sec Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00V Vbc 0.00V Vca 0.00V Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage Vab 0.00xVn ----o Vbc 0.00xVn ----o Vca 0.00xVn ----o Prim Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Vb 0.00V Vc 0.00V Sec Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Vb 0.00V Vc 0.00V Nom Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00xVn ----o Vb 0.00xVn ----o Vc 0.00xVn ----o V Seq Components Izps 0.00V ----o Ipps 0.00V ----o Inps 0.00V ----o Calc Earth Voltage Pri 0.00V Sec 0.00V ----o Prim Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00V This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Voltage TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage. Displays the calculated Earth voltage both primary and secondary which also shows the secondary angle Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 4 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d Vyz 0.00V Vzx 0.00V Sec Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00V Vyz 0.00V Vzx 0.00V Nominal Ph-Ph Voltage Vxy 0.00xVn ----o Vyz 0.00xVn ----o Vzx 0.00xVn ----o Prim Ph-N Voltage Va 0.00V Vb 0.00V Vc 0.00V Sec Ph-N Voltage Vx 0.00V Vy 0.00V Vz 0.00V Nom Ph-N Voltage Vx 0.00xVn ----o Vy 0.00xVn ----o Vz 0.00xVn ----o XYZ V Seq Components Izps 0.00V ----o Ipps 0.00V ----o Inps 0.00V ----o Last Trip Voltage Va 0.00V Vb 0.00V Vc 0.00V CS/NVD Voltage (Vx) Pri 0.00V Sec 0.00V ----o Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs Displays the Phase to Phase Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Primary RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Secondary RMS values & Angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. Displays the Phase to Neutral Voltage Nominal RMS values for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. Displays the Voltage Sequence components Nominal RMS values & phase angles with respect to PPS voltage for the xyz side voltage inputs on 6VT models only. Displays the voltages recorded for the most recent trip operation Displays the 4th voltage (Vx) for the 4x VT models, both primary and secondary which also shows the phase angle. This voltage can be used for NVD, Vx 27/59 or where available Checksync. 1.4. Frequency Meters Instrument Description -------------------FREQUENCY METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Frequency TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Frequency 0.000Hz Displays the power system frequency. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 5 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.5. Power Meters Instrument -------------------POWER METERS > to view -------------------Phase A Phase B Phase C P (3P) Phase A Phase B Phase C Q (3P) Phase A Phase B Phase C S (3P) PF A PF B PF C PF (3P) Description This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Power TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group 0.0W 0.0W 0.0W 0.0W 0.0VAr 0.0VAr 0.0VAr 0.0VAr 0.0VA 0.0VA 0.0VA 0.0VA 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Displays Real Power Displays Reactive Power Displays Apparent Power Displays Power factor 1.6. Energy Meters Instrument Description -------------------ENERGY METERS > to view -------------------Active Energy Exp 000000x10kWh Imp 000000x10kWh Reactive Energy Exp 000000x10kVArh Imp 000000x10kVArh This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Energy TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Displays both imported and exported Active Energy Displays both imported and exported Reactive Energy 1.7. Wattmetric Meters Instrument -------------------WATTMETRIC > to view -------------------IresR Pres IresR Angle 0.0deg Io-Vo Angle 0.0deg Description This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Wattmetric function TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group 0.000A 0.00W Displays the values of the Real component of residual current, the residual real power, the phase of the residual current. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 6 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.8. Directional Meters Instrument Description -------------------DIRECTIONAL METERS > to view -------------------P/F Dir (67) -------------------No Dir Calc E/F Dir (67N) -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Directional elements TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. No Dir, PhA Fwd, PhA Rev, PhB Fwd, PhB Rev, PhC Fwd, PhC Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. No Dir Meas E/F Dir (67G) -------------------- No Dir, E/F Fwd, E/F Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. No Dir SEF Dir (67SEF) -------------------- No Dir, E/F Fwd, E/F Rev The appropriate values from the selection will be displayed. No Dir No Dir, SEF Fwd, SEF Rev 1.9. Thermal Meters Instrument Description -------------------THERMAL METERS > to view This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Thermal TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Thermal Status Phase A Phase B Phase C 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% Displays the thermal capacity 1.10. Single-Triple Meters Instrument Description -------------------SINGLE TRIPLE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Single Triple option TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Only seen on models that have the Single-Triple option Single Triple Mode Mode A 3PTrip3PLO Displays the Single triple mode which is in operation. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 7 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.11. Auto-Reclose Meters Instrument Description -------------------AUTORECLOSE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Autoreclose TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Autoreclose Status Out Of Service Close Shot 0 Autoreclose Status A= Out Of Service B= Out Of Service C= Out Of Service Close Shot A 0 Close Shot B 0 Close Shot C 0 Status of the autoreclose for the non single-triple models. Status of the autoreclose for the single-triple models. Status of the current autoreclose shot number for the single-triple models. 1.12. Synchronising Meters SYNC METERS to view Line Volts Bus Volts Line Freq Bus Freq Phase Diff 0.0Deg Slip Freq Voltage Diff 0% 0.00V 0.00V 0.000Hz 0.000Hz 0.000Hz This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Synchronising TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Displays the voltages used for synchronising in models that include this function Displays the calculated synchronising parameters in models that include this function 1.13. Loss of Voltage Meters LOSS OF VOLTS METERS to view Loss of Volts Status Disabled This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with SLoss of Voltage TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Displays the current status of the Loss of Volts logic in the LOV models only. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 8 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.14. Maintenance Meters Instrument Description -------------------MAINTENANCE METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Maintenance TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group CB Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB A Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB B Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB C Total Trips Count Target 0 100 CB Ph A Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph BTrips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph C Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Ph E/F Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB A Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB B Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB C Delta Trips Count 0 Target 100 CB Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the A phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the B phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were diagnosed as being issued for faults involving the C phase for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips which were issued for operation of-earth fault elements for the non single-triple models Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase A CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase B CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the phase C CB for the Single Triple models only Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the non single-triple models. CB A Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the A phase CB on the SingleTriple models only. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout on the A phase CB. CB B Count To AR Block Count 0 Target 100 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the B phase CB on the SingleTriple models only. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout on the B phase CB. CB C Count To AR Block Count 0 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the C phase CB on the SingleTriple models only. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 9 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d Instrument Target Description 100 Trip to Lockout on the C phase CB. CB Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 Displays the number of CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the non single-triple models. CB-A Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 Displays the number of phase A CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models. CB-B Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 Displays the number of phase B CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models. CB-C Freq Ops Count Count 0 Target 10 Displays the number of phase C CB trips experienced by the CB over the last rolling 1 hr period. When the target is reached the relay will only do 1 Delayed Trip to Lockout for the single-triple models. CB LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 0 Target 100 CB Wear Phase A 0.00MA^2s Phase B 0.00MA^2s Phase C 0.00MA^2s CB Wear Remaining Phase A 0% Phase B 0% Phase C 0% CB Wear A Count 0.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% CB Wear B Count 0.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% CB Wear C Count 0.00MA^2s Target 100MA^2s Remaining 100% Displays the number of operations of the Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the non single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase A Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase B Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the number of operations of the phase C Circuit Breaker Lockout handle for the single-triple models Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear for the non single-triple models. Displays the current measure of circuit breaker wear remaining as a percentage of the alarm level setting for the non single-triple models. Displays the current measure of Phase A circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. Displays the current measure of Phase B circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. Displays the current measure of Phase C circuit breaker wear for the singletriple models. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 10 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.15. General Alarm Meters Instrument Description -------------------GENERAL ALARM METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group General Alarms -------------------ALARM 1 Cleared Displays the state of General Alarm ... General Alarms -------------------ALARM 12 Cleared 1.16. Battery Condition Meters Instrument Description -------------------BATTERY CONDITION > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Battery Condition monitoring TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Battery Condition -------------------- Status of the Battery Condition Test function Disabled Resistance 0m Ohms Aux dc 0V Displays resistance measurements from the most recent battery test. Displays measured voltage. 1.17. Capacitor condition Meters Instrument Description -------------------CAPACITOR CONDITION > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Capacitor Condition TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Capacitor Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-A Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-B Condition -------------------Disabled Cap-C Condition -------------------Disabled Status of the Capacitor Condition Test function on the non single -triple models Status of the phase A Capacitor Condition Test function on the single -triple models Status of the phase B Capacitor Condition Test function on the single -triple models Status of the phase C Capacitor Condition Test function on the single -triple models (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 11 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.18. Power Quality Meters Instrument Description -------------------POWER QUALITY METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Power Quality TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group. Pole 1 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 2 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 3 27sag SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI System Interrupts P1 interrupts P2 interrupts P3 interrupts Pole 1 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 2 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI Pole 3 59 swell SARFI SIARFI SMARFI STARFI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of undervoltage sags per type since last reset Displays the number of voltage interruptions since last reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset Displays the number of overvoltage swells per type since last reset 1.19. Demand Meters Instrument Description -------------------DEMAND METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the demand metering. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group V Phase A Demand Max Min Mean V Phase B Demand Max Min Mean V Phase C Demand Max 0.00V 0.00V 0.00V 0.00V 0.00V 0.00V 0.00V Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A. Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AB Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase AC (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 12 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d Instrument Min 0.00V Mean 0.00V V Phase AB Demand Max 0.00V Min 0.00V Mean 0.00V V Phase BC Demand Max 0.00V Min 0.00V Mean 0.00V V Phase CA Demand Max 0.00V Min 0.00V Mean 0.00V I Phase A Demand Max 0.00A Min 0.00A Mean 0.00A I Phase B Demand Max 0.00A Min 0.00A Mean 0.00A I Phase C Demand Max 0.00A Min 0.00A Mean 0.00A Power P 3P Demand Max 0.00W Min 0.00W Mean 0.00W Power Q 3P Demand Max 0.00VAr Min 0.00VAr Mean 0.00VAr Power S 3P Demand Max 0.00VA Min 0.00VA Mean 0.00VA Frequency Demand Max 0.000Hz Min 0.000Hz Mean 0.000Hz Description Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase A.B Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase BC Shows the Max, Min and Mean Voltage for Phase CA. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase A. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase B. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Phase C. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power P 3P Demand. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power Q 3P Demand. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for Power S 3P Demand. Shows the Max, Min and Mean for System Frequency Demand. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 13 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.20. Binary Input Meters Instrument Description -------------------BINARY INPUT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary inputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group BI BI BI BI BI 1-8 ---- --- 9-16 ---- --- 17-24 ---- --- 25-32 ---- --- 33-33 - Displays the state of DC binary inputs 1 to 16 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) Displays the state of DC binary inputs 17 to 32 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) Displays the state of DC binary input 33 (The number of binary inputs may vary depending on model) 1.21. Binary Output Meters Instrument Description -------------------BINARY OUTPUT METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with the Binary Outputs TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group BO 1-8 BO 9-16 ---- ------- ---- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 1 to 16. (The number of binary outputs may vary depending on model) BO 17-24 BO 25-30 ---- ------- -- Displays the state of DC binary Outputs 17 to 30. (The number of binary outputs may vary depending on model) 1.22. Virtual Meters Instrument Description -------------------VIRTUAL METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that shows the state of the virtual status inputs in the relay TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group V 1-8 V 9-16 ---- ------- ---- Displays the state of Virtual Outputs 1 to 16 (The number of virtual inputs will vary depending on model) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 14 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.23. Communication Meters Instrument Description -------------------COMMUNICATION METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with Communications ports TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 COM1 TRAFFIC Tx1 0 Rx1 0 Rx1 Errors 0 COM2 TRAFFIC Tx2 0 Rx2 0 Rx2 Errors 0 COM3 TRAFFIC Tx3 0 Rx3 0 Rx3 Errors 0 COM4 TRAFFIC Tx4 0 Rx4 0 Rx4 Errors 0 EN100 INFORMATION Version 04.07.01 Part# BF1111111111 Network Config Mac 00000000 IP 000.000.000.000 NM 255.255.255.000 ... Displays which com ports are currently active Displays traffic on Com1 Displays traffic on Com2 Displays traffic on Com3 Displays traffic on Com4 Displays EN100 information Displays EN100 network information Displays further EN100 61850 information (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 15 of 16 7SR224 Argus InstrumentationApp. R8b-7d 1.24. Miscellaneous Meters Instrument Description -------------------MISCELLANEOUS METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes indication such as the relays time and date, the amount of fault and waveform records stored in the relay TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group Date 01/01/2000 Time 22:41:44 Waveform Recs 0 Fault Recs 0 Event Recs 0 Data Log Recs 0 This meter displays the date and time and the number of Fault records and Event records stored in the relay 1.25. Quick Logic Meters Instrument Description -------------------QUICK LOGIC METERS > to view -------------------- This is the sub-group that includes all the meters that are associated with QuickLogic. TEST/RESET allows access to this sub-group E 1-8 E 9-16 E1 Equation EQN TMR CNT ---- ------- ---- Shows the state of all the equations 0-0 0-1 =0 =0 =0 E16 Equation EQN TMR 0-0 CNT 0-1 =0 =0 =0 Shows the state of an individual equation. EQN shows the equation state. TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation. CNT shows the count progress and state for the equation. ... Shows the state of an individual equation. EQN shows the equation state. TMR shows the timer progress and state for the equation. CNT shows the count progress and state for the equation. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Page 16 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2015/11 First issue The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Contents Document Release History.......................................................................................................................1 Software Revision History ......................................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1. Introduction .........................................................................................................................................8 1.1. Function Diagram ......................................................................................................................8 2. Menu Structure ...................................................................................................................................9 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. Standard ...................................................................................................................................9 Loss Of Voltage.......................................................................................................................10 Single/Triple ............................................................................................................................11 3. Relay Settings - Standard .................................................................................................................12 3.1. System Config.........................................................................................................................12 3.2. CT/VT Config ..........................................................................................................................14 3.3. Function Config .......................................................................................................................16 3.4. Current Prot'n..........................................................................................................................19 3.4.1. Phase Overcurrent ........................................................................................................19 3.4.1.1. 51-1 ................................................................................................................19 3.4.1.2. 51-2 ................................................................................................................20 3.4.1.3. 51-3 ................................................................................................................21 3.4.1.4. 51-4 ................................................................................................................21 3.4.1.5. 50-1 ................................................................................................................22 3.4.1.6. 50-2 ................................................................................................................22 3.4.1.7. 50-3 ................................................................................................................23 3.4.1.8. 50-4 ................................................................................................................23 3.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C ..........................................................................................................24 3.4.3. Cold Load .....................................................................................................................24 3.4.4. Measured E/F ...............................................................................................................26 3.4.4.1. 51G-1 .............................................................................................................26 3.4.4.2. 51G-2 .............................................................................................................27 3.4.4.3. 51G-3 .............................................................................................................27 3.4.4.4. 51G-4 .............................................................................................................28 3.4.4.5. 50G-1 .............................................................................................................29 3.4.4.6. 50G-2 .............................................................................................................29 3.4.4.7. 50G-3 .............................................................................................................29 3.4.4.8. 50G-4 .............................................................................................................30 3.4.5. Sensitive E/F.................................................................................................................30 3.4.5.1. 51SEF-1 .........................................................................................................31 3.4.5.2. 51SEF-2 .........................................................................................................31 3.4.5.3. 51SEF-3 .........................................................................................................32 3.4.5.4. 51SEF-4 .........................................................................................................32 3.4.5.5. 50SEF-1 .........................................................................................................33 3.4.5.6. 50SEF-2 .........................................................................................................33 3.4.5.7. 50SEF-3 .........................................................................................................34 3.4.5.8. 50SEF-4 .........................................................................................................34 3.4.6. Restricted E/F ...............................................................................................................34 3.4.7. NPS Overcurrent...........................................................................................................35 3.4.7.1. 46IT ................................................................................................................35 3.4.7.2. 46DT ..............................................................................................................35 3.4.8. Under Current ...............................................................................................................35 3.4.8.1. 37-1 ................................................................................................................35 3.4.8.2. 37-2 ................................................................................................................36 3.4.9. Thermal ........................................................................................................................36 3.5. Voltage Prot'n .........................................................................................................................37 3.5.1. Phase U/O voltage ........................................................................................................37 3.5.1.1. 27/59-1 ...........................................................................................................37 3.5.1.2. 27/59-2 ...........................................................................................................37 3.5.1.3. 27/59-3 ...........................................................................................................38 3.5.1.4. 27/59-4 ...........................................................................................................38 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 2 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.5.2. Vx U/O voltage..............................................................................................................39 3.5.2.1. 4 Voltage Input models ................................................................................... 39 3.5.2.2. 6 Voltage Input models ................................................................................... 40 3.5.2.3. Vx 27/59-1 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................... 40 3.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-2 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................... 40 3.5.2.5. Vx 27/59-3 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................... 41 3.5.2.6. Vx 27/59-4 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................... 41 3.5.3. NPS overvoltage ...........................................................................................................42 3.5.3.1. 47-1 ................................................................................................................42 3.5.3.2. 47-2 ................................................................................................................42 3.5.4. Neutral overvoltage .......................................................................................................43 3.5.4.1. 59NIT .............................................................................................................43 3.5.4.2. 59NDT ............................................................................................................43 3.5.5. U/O Frequency .............................................................................................................43 3.5.5.1. 81-1 ................................................................................................................43 3.5.5.2. 81-2 ................................................................................................................44 3.5.5.3. 81-3 ................................................................................................................44 3.5.5.4. 81-4 ................................................................................................................45 3.6. Supervision .............................................................................................................................45 3.6.1. CB Fail..........................................................................................................................45 3.6.2. VT supervision ..............................................................................................................46 3.6.3. CT supervision ..............................................................................................................46 3.6.4. Broken Conductor .........................................................................................................47 3.6.5. Trip CCT supervision ....................................................................................................47 3.6.6. Inrush detector ..............................................................................................................47 3.6.7. Battery Test ..................................................................................................................48 3.6.8. Capacitor Test ..............................................................................................................48 3.6.9. Power Quality ...............................................................................................................48 3.6.10. 27SAG ..........................................................................................................................48 3.6.11. 59SWELL .....................................................................................................................49 3.7. Control & Logic .......................................................................................................................49 3.7.1. Autoreclose Prot'n.........................................................................................................49 3.7.2. Autoreclose Config........................................................................................................50 3.7.2.1. P/F SHOTS ....................................................................................................51 3.7.2.2. E/F SHOTS ....................................................................................................52 3.7.2.3. SEF Shots ......................................................................................................53 3.7.2.4. Extern Shots...................................................................................................54 3.7.3. Manual Close ................................................................................................................54 3.7.4. Circuit Breaker ..............................................................................................................55 3.7.5. Live/Dead .....................................................................................................................56 3.7.6. Quick Logic ...................................................................................................................56 3.8. Input Config ............................................................................................................................66 3.8.1. Input Matrix ...................................................................................................................66 3.8.2. Function Key Matrix ......................................................................................................73 3.8.3. Binary Input Config .......................................................................................................74 3.8.4. Function Key Config......................................................................................................78 3.8.5. General Alarms .............................................................................................................79 3.9. Output Config ..........................................................................................................................80 3.9.1. Output Matrix ................................................................................................................80 3.9.2. Binary Output Config.....................................................................................................95 3.9.3. LED Config ...................................................................................................................96 3.9.4. Pickup Config................................................................................................................97 3.10. Maintenance ...........................................................................................................................97 3.10.1. CB Counters .................................................................................................................97 3.10.2. I^2T CB Wear ...............................................................................................................99 3.10.3. Output Matrix Test ........................................................................................................99 3.11. Data Storage ...........................................................................................................................99 3.11.1. Demand/Data Log .........................................................................................................99 3.11.2. Waveform Storage ......................................................................................................100 3.11.3. Fault Storage ..............................................................................................................100 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 3 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.11.4. Event Storage .............................................................................................................101 3.11.5. Energy Storage ...........................................................................................................101 3.11.6. Fault Locator...............................................................................................................101 3.12. Communications ...................................................................................................................102 4. Relay Settings - Standard Plus LOV ...............................................................................................104 4.1. System Config.......................................................................................................................104 4.2. CT/VT Config ........................................................................................................................105 4.3. Function Config .....................................................................................................................107 4.4. Current Prot'n........................................................................................................................110 4.4.1. Phase Overcurrent ......................................................................................................110 4.4.1.1. 51-1 ..............................................................................................................110 4.4.1.2. 51-2 ..............................................................................................................111 4.4.1.3. 51-3 ..............................................................................................................112 4.4.1.4. 51-4 ..............................................................................................................112 4.4.1.5. 50-1 ..............................................................................................................113 4.4.1.6. 50-2 ..............................................................................................................113 4.4.1.7. 50-3 ..............................................................................................................114 4.4.1.8. 50-4 ..............................................................................................................114 4.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C ........................................................................................................115 4.4.3. Cold Load ...................................................................................................................115 4.4.4. Measured E/F .............................................................................................................117 4.4.4.1. 51G-1 ...........................................................................................................117 4.4.4.2. 51G-2 ...........................................................................................................118 4.4.4.3. 51G-3 ...........................................................................................................118 4.4.4.4. 51G-4 ...........................................................................................................119 4.4.4.5. 50G-1 ...........................................................................................................120 4.4.4.6. 50G-2 ...........................................................................................................120 4.4.4.7. 50G-3 ...........................................................................................................120 4.4.4.8. 50G-4 ...........................................................................................................121 4.4.5. Sensitive E/F...............................................................................................................121 4.4.5.1. 51SEF-1 .......................................................................................................122 4.4.5.2. 51SEF-2 .......................................................................................................122 4.4.5.3. 51SEF-3 .......................................................................................................123 4.4.5.4. 51SEF-4 .......................................................................................................123 4.4.5.5. 50SEF-1 .......................................................................................................124 4.4.5.6. 50SEF-2 .......................................................................................................124 4.4.5.7. 50SEF-3 .......................................................................................................125 4.4.5.8. 50SEF-4 .......................................................................................................125 4.4.6. Restricted E/F .............................................................................................................125 4.4.7. NPS Overcurrent.........................................................................................................126 4.4.7.1. 46IT ..............................................................................................................126 4.4.7.2. 46DT ............................................................................................................126 4.4.8. Under Current .............................................................................................................126 4.4.8.1. 37-1 ..............................................................................................................126 4.4.8.2. 37-2 ..............................................................................................................127 4.4.9. Thermal ......................................................................................................................127 4.5. Voltage Prot'n .......................................................................................................................127 4.5.1. Phase U/O Voltage .....................................................................................................127 4.5.1.1. 27/59-1 .........................................................................................................128 4.5.1.2. 27/59-2 .........................................................................................................128 4.5.1.3. 27/59-3 .........................................................................................................129 4.5.1.4. 27/59-4 .........................................................................................................129 4.5.2. Vx U/O Voltage ...........................................................................................................130 4.5.2.1. Vx 27/59-1 ....................................................................................................130 4.5.2.2. Vx 27/59-2 ....................................................................................................130 4.5.2.3. Vx 27/59-3 ....................................................................................................131 4.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-4 ....................................................................................................131 4.5.3. NPS Overvoltage ........................................................................................................132 4.5.3.1. 47-1 ..............................................................................................................132 4.5.3.2. 47-2 ..............................................................................................................132 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 4 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.5.4. Neutral Overvoltage ....................................................................................................132 4.5.4.1. 59NIT ...........................................................................................................132 4.5.4.2. 59NDT ..........................................................................................................133 4.5.5. U/O Frequency ...........................................................................................................133 4.5.5.1. 81-1 ..............................................................................................................133 4.5.5.2. 81-2 ..............................................................................................................134 4.5.5.3. 81-3 ..............................................................................................................134 4.5.5.4. 81-4 ..............................................................................................................134 4.6. Supervision ...........................................................................................................................135 4.6.1. CB Fail........................................................................................................................135 4.6.2. VT Supervision ...........................................................................................................135 4.6.3. CT Supervision ...........................................................................................................136 4.6.4. Broken Conductor .......................................................................................................137 4.6.5. Trip CCT Supervision ..................................................................................................137 4.6.6. Inrush Detector ...........................................................................................................137 4.6.7. Battery Test ................................................................................................................138 4.6.8. Capacitor Test ............................................................................................................138 4.6.9. Power Quality .............................................................................................................138 4.6.10. 27SAG ........................................................................................................................139 4.6.11. 59SWELL ...................................................................................................................139 4.7. Control & Logic .....................................................................................................................140 4.7.1. Autoreclsoe Prot'n.......................................................................................................140 4.7.2. Autoreclose Config......................................................................................................141 4.7.2.1. P/F Shots .....................................................................................................142 4.7.2.2. E/F Shots .....................................................................................................142 4.7.2.3. SEF Shots ....................................................................................................143 4.7.2.4. Extern Shots.................................................................................................144 4.7.3. Manual Close ..............................................................................................................145 4.7.4. Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................146 4.7.5. Live/Dead ...................................................................................................................146 4.7.6. LOV Automation .........................................................................................................147 4.7.7. Quick Logic .................................................................................................................148 4.8. Input Config ..........................................................................................................................158 4.8.1. Input Matrix .................................................................................................................158 4.8.2. Function Key Matrix ....................................................................................................166 4.8.3. Binary Input Config .....................................................................................................167 4.8.4. Function Key Config....................................................................................................169 4.8.5. General Alarms ...........................................................................................................170 4.9. Output Config ........................................................................................................................171 4.9.1. Output Matrix ..............................................................................................................171 4.9.2. Binary Output Config...................................................................................................186 4.9.3. LED Config .................................................................................................................188 4.9.4. Pickup Config..............................................................................................................188 4.10. Maintenance .........................................................................................................................189 4.10.1. CB Counters ...............................................................................................................189 4.10.2. I^2T CB Wear .............................................................................................................190 4.10.3. Output Matrix Test ......................................................................................................191 4.11. Data Storage .........................................................................................................................191 4.11.1. Demand/Data Log .......................................................................................................191 4.11.2. Waveform Storage ......................................................................................................191 4.11.3. Fault Storage ..............................................................................................................192 4.11.4. Event Storage .............................................................................................................192 4.11.5. Energy Storage ...........................................................................................................192 4.12. Communications ...................................................................................................................192 5. Relay Settings - Standard Plus Single/Triple................................................................................... 195 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. System Config.......................................................................................................................195 CT/VT Config ........................................................................................................................197 Function Config .....................................................................................................................198 Current Prot'n........................................................................................................................201 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 5 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.4.1. Phase Overcurrent ......................................................................................................201 5.4.1.1. 51-1 ..............................................................................................................201 5.4.1.2. 51-2 ..............................................................................................................202 5.4.1.3. 51-3 ..............................................................................................................203 5.4.1.4. 51-4 ..............................................................................................................204 5.4.1.5. 50-1 ..............................................................................................................204 5.4.1.6. 50-2 ..............................................................................................................205 5.4.1.7. 50-3 ..............................................................................................................205 5.4.1.8. 50-4 ..............................................................................................................205 5.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C .......................................................................................................206 5.4.3. Cold Load ...................................................................................................................206 5.4.4. Measured E/F .............................................................................................................208 5.4.4.1. 51G-1 ...........................................................................................................208 5.4.4.2. 51G-2 ...........................................................................................................209 5.4.4.3. 51G-3 ...........................................................................................................210 5.4.4.4. 51G-4 ...........................................................................................................210 5.4.4.5. 50G-1 ...........................................................................................................211 5.4.4.6. 50G-2 ...........................................................................................................211 5.4.4.7. 50G-3 ...........................................................................................................212 5.4.4.8. 50G-4 ...........................................................................................................212 5.4.5. Sensitive E/F...............................................................................................................213 5.4.5.1. 51SEF-1 .......................................................................................................213 5.4.5.2. 51SEF-2 .......................................................................................................214 5.4.5.3. 51SEF-3 .......................................................................................................214 5.4.5.4. 51SEF-4 .......................................................................................................215 5.4.5.5. 50SEF-1 .......................................................................................................215 5.4.5.6. 50SEF-2 .......................................................................................................216 5.4.5.7. 50SEF-3 .......................................................................................................216 5.4.5.8. 50SEF-4 .......................................................................................................216 5.4.6. Restricted E/F .............................................................................................................217 5.4.7. NPS Overcurrent.........................................................................................................217 5.4.7.1. 46IT ..............................................................................................................217 5.4.7.2. 46DT ............................................................................................................217 5.4.8. Under Current .............................................................................................................218 5.4.8.1. 37-1 ..............................................................................................................218 5.4.8.2. 37-2 ..............................................................................................................218 5.4.9. Thermal ......................................................................................................................218 5.5. Voltage Prot'n .......................................................................................................................219 5.5.1. Phase U/O Voltage .....................................................................................................219 5.5.1.1. 27/59-1 .........................................................................................................219 5.5.1.2. 27/59-2 .........................................................................................................220 5.5.1.3. 27/59-3 .........................................................................................................220 5.5.1.4. 27/59-4 .........................................................................................................221 5.5.2. Vx U/O Voltage ...........................................................................................................221 5.5.2.1. 4 Voltage Input models ................................................................................. 221 5.5.2.2. 6 Voltage Input models ................................................................................. 222 5.5.2.3. Vx 27/59-1 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................. 222 5.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-2 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................. 223 5.5.2.5. Vx 27/59-3 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................. 223 5.5.2.6. Vx 27/59-4 (6 Voltage input models) ............................................................. 224 5.5.3. NPS Overvoltage ........................................................................................................224 5.5.3.1. 47-1 ..............................................................................................................224 5.5.3.2. 47-2 ..............................................................................................................225 5.5.4. Neutral Overvoltage ....................................................................................................225 5.5.4.1. 59NIT ...........................................................................................................225 5.5.4.2. 59NDT ..........................................................................................................225 5.5.5. U/O Frequency ...........................................................................................................226 5.5.5.1. 81-1 ..............................................................................................................226 5.5.5.2. 81-2 ..............................................................................................................226 5.5.5.3. 81-3 ..............................................................................................................227 5.5.5.4. 81-4 ..............................................................................................................227 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 6 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.6. Supervision ...........................................................................................................................228 5.6.1. CB Fail........................................................................................................................228 5.6.2. VT Supervision ...........................................................................................................228 5.6.3. CT Supervision ...........................................................................................................229 5.6.4. Broken Conductor .......................................................................................................229 5.6.5. Trip CCT Supervision ..................................................................................................229 5.6.6. Inrush Detector ...........................................................................................................230 5.6.7. Battery Test ................................................................................................................230 5.6.8. Capacitor Test ............................................................................................................230 5.6.9. Power Quality .............................................................................................................231 5.6.10. 27SAG ........................................................................................................................231 5.6.11. 59SWELL ...................................................................................................................232 5.7. Control & Logic .....................................................................................................................232 5.7.1. Autoreclose Prot'n.......................................................................................................232 5.7.2. Autoreclose Config......................................................................................................233 5.7.2.1. P/F Shots .....................................................................................................234 5.7.2.2. E/F Shots .....................................................................................................235 5.7.2.3. SEF Shots ....................................................................................................236 5.7.2.4. Extern Shots.................................................................................................237 5.7.3. Manual Close ..............................................................................................................237 5.7.4. Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................238 5.7.5. Live/Dead ...................................................................................................................239 5.7.6. Quick Logic .................................................................................................................239 5.8. Input Config ..........................................................................................................................248 5.8.1. Input Matrix .................................................................................................................248 5.8.2. Function Key Matrix ....................................................................................................258 5.8.3. Binary Input Config .....................................................................................................260 5.8.4. Function Key Config....................................................................................................264 5.8.5. General Alarms ...........................................................................................................265 5.9. Output Config ........................................................................................................................266 5.9.1. Output Matrix ..............................................................................................................266 5.9.2. 283 5.9.3. Binary Output Config...................................................................................................284 5.9.4. LED Config .................................................................................................................286 5.9.5. Pickup Config..............................................................................................................286 5.10. Maintenance .........................................................................................................................287 5.10.1. CB Counters ...............................................................................................................287 5.10.2. I^2T CB Wear .............................................................................................................289 5.10.3. Output Matrix Test ......................................................................................................290 5.11. Data Storage .........................................................................................................................290 5.11.1. Demand/Data Log .......................................................................................................290 5.11.2. Waveform Storage ......................................................................................................291 5.11.3. Fault Storage ..............................................................................................................291 5.11.4. Event Storage .............................................................................................................291 5.11.5. Energy Storage ...........................................................................................................292 5.12. Communications ...................................................................................................................292 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 7 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 1. Introduction This firmware version provides support for the IEC 61850 option and executes on the TC1796 microprocessor platform This firmware version is available for models 7SR224[234678]-[23][AB][ABC][123478][238]-0[CDE][AD]0. 1.1. Function Diagram 1or4 x Vx 27/ 59 3V/Vx 3x TCS 79 2x 59N 25 IG* * * 4x 67/50 G 4x 67/51 G 4x 67/51 SEF 4x 67/50 SEF 64 REF 3V 3I 2x 47 4x 27/59 4x 81 50BF 2x 46 49 46BC CTS VTS 4x 67/51 4x 67/50 * - IG Current source can be selected as I4 or calculated from I1+I2+I3 7SR224 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 8 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 2. Menu Structure 2.1. Standard 7SR224 RECLOSER ____________________________ ENTER to CONTROL CONTROL MODE SETTINGS MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE FAULT DATA MODE NUMBER OF FAULTS CB TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN SYSTEM CONFIG FAVOURITE METERS AR : Out Of Service IN I OUT CT/VT CONFIG CURRENT METERS AR : Trip & Reclose CONFIRM ACTION FUNCTION CONFIG AR : Trip & Lockout CONFIRM ACTION Hotline Working : OUT IN I OUT CURRENT PROT'N VOLTAGE METERS PHASE OVERCURRENT 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 FREQUENCY METERS POWER METERS VOLTAGE CONT O/C E/F Protection : IN IN I OUT SEF Protection : IN IN I OUT COLD LOAD DIRECTIONAL METERS MEASURED E/F Inst Protection : IN IN I OUT Loss Of Volts : IN IN I OUT Battery Test CONFIRM ACTION ENERGY METERS SENSITIVE E/F RESTRICTED E/F 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 NPS OVERCURRENT 46IT 46DT UNDER CURRENT 37-1 37-2 VOLTAGE PROT'N AUTORECLOSE METERS LOSS OF VOLTS METERS MAINTENANCE METERS GENERAL ALARM METERS THERMAL PHASE U/O VOLTAGE THERMAL METERS 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 BATTERY CONDITION Vx U/O VOLTAGE NPS OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE U/O FREQUENCY SUPERVISION CB FAIL 47-1 47-2 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 CAPACITOR CONDITION POWER QUALITY METERS DEMAND METERS VT SUPERVISION FAULT LOCATOR CT SUPERVISION BROKEN CONDUCTOR BINARY INPUT METERS TRIP CCT SUPERVISION BINARY OUTPUT METERS INRUSH DETECTOR BATTERY TEST VIRTUAL METERS CAPACITOR TEST POWER QUALITY 27SAG 59SWELL COMMUNICATION METERS DEMAND CONTROL & LOGIC AUTORECLOSE PROT'N MISCELLANEOUS METERS AUTORECLOSE CONFIG RE(CLOSURE) MODE SYNCHRONISING CHECK For optional Synchronising Check function. MANUAL CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER LIVE/DEAD QUICK LOGIC INPUT CONFIG INPUT MATRIX FUNCTION KEY MATRIX BINARY INPUT CONFIG FUNCTION KEY CONFIG GENERAL ALARMS OUTPUT MATRIX OUTPUT CONFIG BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG LED CONFIG PICKUP CONFIG CB MAINTENANCE CB COUNTERS I^2T CB WEAR DATA STORAGE COMMUNICATIONS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 9 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 2.2. Loss Of Voltage 7SR224 RECLOSER ____________________________ ENTER to CONTROL CONTROL MODE SETTINGS MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE FAULT DATA MODE NUMBER OF FAULTS CB TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN SYSTEM CONFIG FAVOURITE METERS AR : Out Of Service IN I OUT CT/VT CONFIG CURRENT METERS AR : Trip & Reclose CONFIRM ACTION FUNCTION CONFIG VOLTAGE METERS AR : Trip & Lockout CONFIRM ACTION CURRENT PROT'N Hotline Working : OUT IN I OUT PHASE OVERCURRENT 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 FREQUENCY METERS POWER METERS VOLTAGE CONT O/C E/F Protection : IN IN I OUT SEF Protection : IN IN I OUT COLD LOAD DIRECTIONAL METERS MEASURED E/F Inst Protection : IN IN I OUT Loss Of Volts : IN IN I OUT Battery Test CONFIRM ACTION ENERGY METERS SENSITIVE E/F RESTRICTED E/F 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 NPS OVERCURRENT 46IT 46DT UNDER CURRENT 37-1 37-2 VOLTAGE PROT'N AUTORECLOSE METERS LOSS OF VOLTS METERS MAINTENANCE METERS GENERAL ALARM METERS THERMAL PHASE U/O VOLTAGE THERMAL METERS 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 BATTERY CONDITION Vx U/O VOLTAGE NPS OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE U/O FREQUENCY SUPERVISION CB FAIL 47-1 47-2 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 CAPACITOR CONDITION POWER QUALITY METERS DEMAND METERS VT SUPERVISION FAULT LOCATOR CT SUPERVISION BROKEN CONDUCTOR BINARY INPUT METERS TRIP CCT SUPERVISION BINARY OUTPUT METERS INRUSH DETECTOR BATTERY TEST VIRTUAL METERS CAPACITOR TEST POWER QUALITY 27SAG 59SWELL COMMUNICATION METERS DEMAND CONTROL & LOGIC AUTORECLOSE PROT'N MISCELLANEOUS METERS AUTORECLOSE CONFIG MANUAL CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER LOV LIVE/DEAD QUICK LOGIC INPUT CONFIG INPUT MATRIX FUNCTION KEY MATRIX BINARY INPUT CONFIG FUNCTION KEY CONFIG GENERAL ALARMS OUTPUT MATRIX OUTPUT CONFIG BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG LED CONFIG PICKUP CONFIG CB MAINTENANCE CB COUNTERS I^2T CB WEAR DATA STORAGE COMMUNICATIONS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 10 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 2.3. Single/Triple 7SR224 RECLOSER ____________________________ ENTER to CONTROL CONTROL MODE SETTINGS MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE FAULT DATA MODE NUMBER OF FAULTS CB-A TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN SYSTEM CONFIG FAVOURITE METERS CB-B TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN CT/VT CONFIG CURRENT METERS CB-C TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN FUNCTION CONFIG AR : Out Of Service IN I OUT AR : Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO CONFIRM ACTION CURRENT PROT'N VOLTAGE METERS PHASE OVERCURRENT 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 FREQUENCY METERS POWER METERS VOLTAGE CONT O/C AR : Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO CONFIRM ACTION AR : Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO CONFIRM ACTION COLD LOAD DIRECTIONAL METERS MEASURED E/F AR : Trip & Reclose 3Ph CONFIRM ACTION AR : Trip & Lockout CB-A CONFIRM ACTION AR : Trip & Lockout CB-B CONFIRM ACTION SENSITIVE E/F RESTRICTED E/F AR : Trip & Lockout CB-C Hotline Working : OUT E/F Protection : IN CONFIRM ACTION IN I OUT IN I OUT ENERGY METERS 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 NPS OVERCURRENT 46IT 46DT UNDER CURRENT 37-1 37-2 PHASE U/O VOLTAGE SINGLE TRIPLE METERS AUTORECLOSE METERS MAINTENANCE METERS GENERAL ALARM METERS THERMAL VOLTAGE PROT'N THERMAL METERS 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 BATTERY CONDITION Vx U/O VOLTAGE SEF Protection : IN IN I OUT NPS OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE Inst Protection : IN IN I OUT U/O FREQUENCY Battery Test CONFIRM ACTION SUPERVISION CB FAIL 47-1 47-2 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 CAPACITOR CONDITION POWER QUALITY METERS DEMAND METERS VT SUPERVISION BINARY INPUT METERS CT SUPERVISION BROKEN CONDUCTOR BINARY OUTPUT METERS TRIP CCT SUPERVISION VIRTUAL METERS INRUSH DETECTOR BATTERY TEST COMMUNICATION METERS CAPACITOR TEST POWER QUALITY 27SAG 59SWELL MISCELLANEOUS METERS DEMAND CONTROL & LOGIC AUTORECLOSE PROT'N AUTORECLOSE CONFIG MANUAL CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER LIVE/DEAD QUICK LOGIC INPUT CONFIG INPUT MATRIX FUNCTION KEY MATRIX BINARY INPUT CONFIG FUNCTION KEY CONFIG GENERAL ALARMS OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT MATRIX BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG LED CONFIG PICKUP CONFIG CB MAINTENANCE CB COUNTERS I^2T CB WEAR DATA STORAGE COMMUNICATIONS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 11 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3. Relay Settings - Standard 3.1. System Config Description Range Default Language Setting Selects the language in which the relay text will be displayed. English, USA-English English 50, 60 50Hz Setting Dependencies When enabled only active settings are displayed and all others hidden Disabled, Enabled Enabled Favourite Meters Timer Selects the time delay after which, if no key presses have been detected, the relay will begin to poll through any screens which have been selected as favourite instruments Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 60min Backlight timer Controls when the LCD backlight turns off Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 5min Curr Set Display Select whether the Pickup values are shown in terms of x Nominal, Primary or Secondary values on the Relay Fascia xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom E/F Curr Set Display As Above xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom Export Power/Lag VAr Selects the signs required for exporting power and lagging VArs +ve/+ve, +ve/-ve, -ve/+ve, ve/-ve +ve/+ve Select Grp Mode Mode of operation of the group change from status input. Edge triggered ignores the status input once it has changed to the relevant group, where as with Level triggered the relay will only stay in the group it has changed to whilst the status input is being driven, after which it returns to the previous group. Edge triggered, Level triggered Edge triggered Setting Active Group Selects which settings group is currently activated System Frequency Selects the Power System Frequency from 50 or 60 Hz View/Edit Group Selects which settings group is currently being displayed Date Sets the date, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date Time Sets the time, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 12 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Clock Sync. From BI Real time clock may be synchronised using a binary input (See Clock Sync. in Binary Input Menu) Disabled, Seconds, Minutes Minutes Operating Mode Selects the current operating mode of the relay. This can also be changed by a binary input mode selection. Out Of Service, Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Local Or Remote Unexpected Restart Blocking When enabled the relay will become permanenently blocked if the Unexpected Restart Count is exceeded in the Unexpected Restart Period Disabled, Enabled Disabled Unexpected Restart Count The number of unexpected reatarts which must occur in the Unexpected Resart Period before the relay blocking is initiated 1, 2 ... 20 3 Unexpected Restart Period Rolling time period in which the Unexpected Restart Count must be exceeded to initiate the relay blocking 1, 2 ...100 hrs 1 hrs Setting Password Allows a 4 character alpha code to be entered as the password. Note that the display shows a password dependant encrypted code on the second line of the display (Password) NONE Control Password As Above (Password) NONE Trip Alert When Enabled the occurance of a Trip will cause the relay to display the Trip Alert Screen, the only way to leave this screen is by acknowledging the trip through the TEST/RESET button on the relay fascia Disabled, Enabled Enabled General Alarm Alert When Enabled the occurance of a General Alarm will cause the relay to display the General Alarm Screen, any relay fascia button being pressed will cancel this action and revert to the last screen being displayed prior to the alarm Disabled, Enabled Enabled Relay Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identifier the circuit the relay is attached to or the relays purpose (16 Character String) 7SR224 Circuit Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identify the circuit name or relay's purpose (16 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 13 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.2. CT/VT Config Description Range Default Phase Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Phase Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Phase Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Phase Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Phase Voltage Config Required to allow for different types of physical VT connections. Van,Vbn,Vcn, Vab,Vbc,3V0, Va,Vb,Vc Van,Vbn,Vcn Phase VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Phase VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Vx Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input Measuring range of V4, V5 & V6 is 132V RMS on 6xVT models. 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Vx Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Vx Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Vx Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Vx VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Vx VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Phase Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for phase inputs 1, 5 1A Phase CT Ratio Prim Phase CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Phase CT Ratio Sec Phase CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 Earth Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for Measured Earth inputs 1, 5 1A (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 14 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Earth CT Ratio Prim Measured Earth CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Earth CT Ratio Sec Measured Earth CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 I1, I2, I3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware current inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC V1, V2, V3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware voltage inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC Phase Rotation Specifies the vectorial positive phase sequence order of the allocated phase references. This setting allows the relay to be applied on networks with abnormal phasor sequence. A,B,C A,C,B A,B,C (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 15 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.3. Function Config Description Range Default Gn Phase Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no Phase Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Voltage Cont O/C When set to Disabled, no Voltage Cont O/C elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Cold Load When set to Disabled, no Cold Load elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Measured E/F When set to Disabled, no Measured E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Sensitive E/F When set to Disabled, no Sensitive E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Restricted E/F When set to Disabled, no Restricted E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no NPS Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Under Current When set to Disabled, no Under Current elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 16 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Thermal When set to Disabled, no Thermal elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Phase U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Phase U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Vx U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Vx U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no NPS Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Neutral Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no Neutral Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn U/O Frequency When set to Disabled, no U/O Frequency elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Fail When set to Disabled, no CB Fail elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn VT Supervision When set to Disabled, no VT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 17 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CT Supervision When set to Disabled, no CT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Broken Conductor When set to Disabled, no Broken Conductor elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Trip Cct Supervision When set to Disabled, no Trip Cct Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Inrush Detector When set to Disabled, no Inrush Detector elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Counters When set to Disabled, no Gn CB Counter elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn I^2t CB Wear When set to Disabled, no Gn I^2t CB Wear elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Battery Test When set to Disabled, no Battery Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Capacitor Test When set to Disabled, no Capacitor Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 18 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27Sag & 59Swell When set to Disabled, no 27Sag & 59Swell elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Live/Dead When set to Disabled, no Live/Dead elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Description Range Default Gn 67 Char Angle Maximum torque angle for phase overcurrent elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 45deg Gn 67 Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 1, 1.5 ... 19.5, 20 1V Gn 67 2-out-of-3 Logic Selects whether 2 out of 3 voting logic is enabled for phase overcurrent elements Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 51/50 Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51 & 50 elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency RMS, Fundamental RMS Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Element Selects whether the 51-1 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Setting 3.4. Current Prot'n 3.4.1. Phase Overcurrent 3.4.1.1. Setting 51-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 19 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-2 Element Selects whether the 51-2 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 3.4.1.2. Setting 51-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 20 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.4.1.3. 51-3 Description Range Default Gn 51-3 Element Selects whether the 51-3 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-4 Element Selects whether the 51-4 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 3.4.1.4. Setting 51-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 21 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-1 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-2 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s 3.4.1.5. 3.4.1.6. Setting 50-1 Setting 50-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 22 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-3 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-4 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 3.4.1.7. 3.4.1.8. Setting 50-3 Setting 50-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 23 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C Description Range Default Gn 51V Element Selects whether the Voltage Controlled Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51V Setting The voltage below which 51V operates 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 30V Gn 51V VTS Action Selects whether or not the 51V element is blocked when VTS operates Off, Inhibit Off Gn 51-1 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-1 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-2 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-2 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-3 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-3 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-4 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-4 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Description Range Default Cold Load Selects whether the Cold Load element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Pick-up Time Cold Load operate time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Drop-off Time Cold Load reset time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Reduced Current Selects whether reduced current functionality is to be used Disabled, Enabled Disabled Reduced Current Level Selects current level below which Reduced Current Time is used for Cold Load reset delay 0.05, 0.1 ... 2.45, 2.5 0.25xIn Reduced Current Time Cold Load reset time delay used when reduced current active 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Gn 51c-1 Setting 51-1 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-1 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-1 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Setting 3.4.3. Cold Load (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 24 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51c-1 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-2 Setting 51-2 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-2 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-2 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-2 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-3 Setting 51-3 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-3 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-3 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-3 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-3 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-3 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-4 Setting 51-4 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-4 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-4 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-4 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-4 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 25 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51c-4 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 67G Char Angle Maximum torque angle for measured earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67G Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 0.33V Gn 51G/50G Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51G & 50G elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency. Calculated setting switches the current source from measured at I4 to derived from sum of I1-I3 RMS, Fundamental, Calculated RMS Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Element Selects whether the 51G-1 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Setting 3.4.4. Measured E/F 3.4.4.1. Setting 51G-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 26 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-2 Element Selects whether the 51G-2 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-3 Element Selects whether the 51G-3 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI 3.4.4.2. 3.4.4.3. Setting 51G-2 Setting 51G-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 27 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Element Selects whether the 51G-4 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off 3.4.4.4. Setting 51G-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 28 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 3.4.4.5. 3.4.4.6. 50G-1 Setting 50G-2 Description Range Default Gn 50G-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 3.4.4.7. Setting Setting 50G-3 Description Range Default Gn 50G-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disable d Gn 50G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 29 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 67SEF Char Angle Maximum torque angle for sensitive earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67SEF Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5 ... 66.5, 67 0.33V Gn 67SEF Compensated Network When Enabled the directional elements bounderies are widened to +- 87.5 Degs Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric When set to Enabled, the SEF elements will operate using the Wattmetric principle Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric Power Specifies the residual power cutoff threshold used by the Wattmetric protection 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 0.1xInxW 3.4.4.8. Setting 50G-4 Setting 3.4.5. Sensitive E/F (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 30 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 67SEF Ires Select Selects the current upon which the SEF elements operate as either only the real component of residual current or the total residual current Ires, Ires Real Ires Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-1 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-1 IDMTL Sensitive Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-2 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-2 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 3.4.5.1. 3.4.5.2. Setting 51SEF-1 Setting 51SEF-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 31 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-3 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-3 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-4 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-4 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled 3.4.5.3. 3.4.5.4. Setting 51SEF-3 Setting 51SEF-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 32 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn 3.4.5.5. 3.4.5.6. Setting 50SEF-1 Setting 50SEF-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 33 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 64H Element High impedance restricted earth fault current element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 64H Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.945, 0.95 0.2xIn Gn 64H Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s 3.4.5.7. 3.4.5.8. Setting 50SEF-3 Setting 50SEF-4 Setting 3.4.6. Restricted E/F (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 34 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.4.7. NPS Overcurrent 3.4.7.1. 46IT Description Range Default Gn 46IT Element Selects whether the 46IT IDMTL/DTL negative phase sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46IT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 0.25xIn Gn 46IT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI, ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI IEC-NI Gn 46IT Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 46IT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 46IT Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 46DT Element Selects whether the 46DT INST/DTL negative sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46DT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 3.99, 4 0.1xIn Gn 46DT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s Description Range Default Gn 37-1 U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 37 Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.1xIn Description Range Default Gn 37-1 Element Phase under current element 37-1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-1 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-1 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes 3.4.7.2. Setting 46DT Setting 3.4.8. Under Current 3.4.8.1. Setting 37-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 35 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 37-1 Start Option Specifies the 37-1 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All 3.4.8.2. Setting 37-2 Description Range Default Gn 37-2 Element Phase under current element 37-2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-2 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-2 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes Gn 37-2 Start Option Specifies the 37-2 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All Description Range Default Gn 49 Thermal Overload Selects whether the thermal overload protection element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 49 Overload Setting Pickup level 0.1, 0.11 ... 2.99, 3 1.05xIn Gn 49 Time Constant Thermal time constant 1, 1.5 ... 999.5, 1000 10m Gn 49 Capacity Alarm Selects whether thermal capacity alarm enabled Disabled, 50 ... 99, 100 Disabled Setting 3.4.9. Thermal Setting 49 Reset Therm State Control that allows thermal state to be manually reset (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 36 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.5. Voltage Prot'n 3.5.1. Phase U/O voltage Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Gn 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 1, 1.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Description Range Default Gn 27/59-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V 3.5.1.1. 3.5.1.2. Setting 27/59-1 Setting 27/59-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 37 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27/59-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled 3.5.1.3. 3.5.1.4. Setting 27/59-3 Setting 27/59-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 38 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Specifies the voltage below which the Vx 27/59 element(s) will not indicate operation 1, 1.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guarded Specifies the Vx 27/59 element as operating when any phase voltage is below setting or operating when all three phase voltages are below setting No, Yes No Gn Vx 27/59 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element for Vx is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn Vx 27/59 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn Vx 27/59 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn Vx 27/59 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Setting 3.5.2. Vx U/O voltage 3.5.2.1. 4 Voltage Input models (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 39 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.5.2.2. 6 Voltage Input models Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for Vx U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Ph-N Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Specifies the voltage below which the Vx 27/59 element(s) will not indicate operation. 1, 1.5 ... 119.5, 120 5V 5V Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Over Gn Vx 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V Gn Vx 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any 3.5.2.3. 3.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-1 (6 Voltage input models) Vx 27/59-2 (6 Voltage input models) Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Over Gn Vx 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V Gn Vx 27/59-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 40 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Under Gn Vx 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V Gn Vx 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Yes Gn Vx 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Under Gn Vx 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V 3.5.2.5. 3.5.2.6. Vx 27/59-3 (6 Voltage input models) Vx 27/59-4 (6 Voltage input models) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 41 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Yes Gn Vx 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any 3.5.3. NPS overvoltage 3.5.3.1. 47-1 Description Range Default Gn 47-1 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-1 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s Description Range Default Gn 47-2 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-2 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.5s 3.5.3.2. Setting 47-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 42 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.5.4. Neutral overvoltage Description Range Default Gn 59N Voltage Source Selects voltage source between calculated 3V0 (Vn) or measured 3V0 through Vx input Vn, Vx Vn Description Range Default Gn 59NIT Element Selects whether the inverse time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59NIT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NIT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IDMTL or DTL DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Gn 59NIT Time Mult (IDMTL) Time multiplier (applicable to IDMTL curve but not DTL selection) 0.1, 0.2 ... 139.5, 140 1 Gn 59NIT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 59NIT Reset Selects between an instantaneous reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 59NDT Element Selects whether the definite time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59NDT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NDT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.01s Description Range Default Gn 81 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Description Range Default Gn 81-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-1 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-1 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49.5Hz 3.5.4.1. 3.5.4.2. Setting 59NIT Setting 59NDT Setting 3.5.5. U/O Frequency 3.5.5.1. Setting 81-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 43 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 81-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s Gn 81-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-2 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-2 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49Hz Gn 81-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.8s Gn 81-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-3 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-3 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 48Hz Gn 81-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.6s 3.5.5.2. 3.5.5.3. Setting 81-2 Setting 81-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 44 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 81-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-4 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-4 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 47.5Hz Gn 81-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.4s Gn 81-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 50BF Element Selects whether the Circuit Breaker Fail element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50BF Setting Breaker Fail Current Pickup level. If the current falls below this level then the CB is deemed to have opened and the element is reset. 0.05, 0.055 ... 1.995, 2 0.2xIn Gn 50BF-I4 Setting 0.005, 0.01 ... 1.995, 2 0.05xIn Gn 50BF-1 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operates 20, 25 ... 59995, 60000 60ms Gn 50BF-2 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operates 20, 25 ... 59995, 60000 120ms 3.5.5.4. Setting 81-4 Setting 3.6. Supervision 3.6.1. CB Fail (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 45 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.6.2. VT supervision Description Range Default Gn 60VTS Element Selects whether the VT supervision element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60VTS Component Selects whether NPS or ZPS quantities are used by the VT supervision element NPS, ZPS NPS Gn 60VTS V Level above which there is a possible 1 or 2 phase VT fuse failure 7, 8 ... 109, 110 7V Gn 60VTS I Level above which a 1 or 2 phase fault condition is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS Vpps Level below which there is a possible 3 phase VT fuse failure 1, 2 ... 109, 110 15V Gn 60VTS Ipps Load Level current must be above before 3 phase VTS will be issued 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS Ipps Fault Level above which 3 phase fault is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 10xIn Gn 60VTS Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Gn 60VTF-Bus Element Selects whether the Bus VT Fail element is enabled. Element based on voltages and circuit breaker position Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 60VTF-Bus Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.1 ... 99.9, 100 2s Description Range Default Gn 60CTS Element Selects whether the CT supervision element is enabled (NPS current in the absence of NPS voltage) Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60CTS Inps Arm if NPS Current (Inps) is above this level 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60CTS Vnps Inhibit if NPS Voltage (Vnps) is above this level 7, 8 ... 109, 110 10V Gn 60CTS Delay CTS Operate delay 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Setting 3.6.3. CT supervision (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 46 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.6.4. Broken Conductor Description Range Default Gn 46BC Element Selects whether the definite time broken conductor element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46BC Setting NPS Current to PPS Current ratio 20, 21 ... 99, 100 20% Gn 46BC Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 20s Gn 46BC U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 46BC Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 46BC U/C Guarded Specifies whether undercurrent guard is applied to the 46BC element No, Yes No Description Range Default Gn 74TCS-1 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-1 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-2 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-2 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-3 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-3 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Description Range Default Gn 81HBL2 Element Selects whether the phase inrush detector 81HBL2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81HBL2 Bias Selects the bias method used for magnetising inrush. Phase - Segregated, each phase blocks itself. Cross - Blocked, each phase can block the operation of other phases. Sum - Of Squares, each phase blocks itself using the square root of the sum of squares of the 2nd harmonic. Phase, Cross, Sum Cross Setting 3.6.5. Trip CCT supervision Setting 3.6.6. Inrush detector (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 47 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 81HBL2 Setting The magnetising inrush detector operates when the 2nd harmonic current exceeds a set percentage of the fundamental current 0.1, 0.11 ... 0.49, 0.5 0.2xI Description Range Default Battery Element Selects whether the Battery Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Battery Nominal Voltage Selects battery nominal voltage 24, 30, 48, 110, 220 48V Battery Test Rate Frequency of battery tests Every 12 Hours, Every Day ... Every Nov 1st, Every Dec 1st Every Month 1st Battery Test Time Hour of the day at which test will take place 0, 1 ... 22, 23 12 Battery Test Load Load resistance applied during test 2.5, 2.6 ... 99.9, 100 6.8ohms Battery Volts Drop Max step change in voltage allowed when test load is applied 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3, 3.25, 3.5 2.5V Description Range Default Cap Element Selects whether the Capacitor Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Cap Holdup Time If capacitor test load applied for this time & capacitor is still above test threshold the load test will be classed as a pass 0, 0.02 ... 9.9, 10 5s Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Description Range Default Gn 27Sag Element Selects whether the 27Sag Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage below which 27Sag SARFI is raised 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 70% Setting 3.6.7. Battery Test Setting 3.6.8. Capacitor Test Setting 3.6.9. Power Quality Setting 3.6.10. 27SAG (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 48 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27Sag VTS Block Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 27Sag SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 27Sag STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. If voltage dip longer than this time it is classed as an interruption. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Description Range Default Gn 59Swell Element Selects whether the 59Swell Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59Swell SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage above which 59 SARFI is raised. 110, 120, 130, 140 120% Gn 59Swell SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 59Swell SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 59Swell STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Inst Trips Selects which phase fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) -------- Setting 3.6.11. 59SWELL Setting 3.7. Control & Logic 3.7.1. Autoreclose Prot'n (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 49 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Inst Trips Selects which earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) -------- Gn 79 SEF Inst Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) -------- Gn 79 P/F Delayed Trips Selects which phase fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips Selects which earth fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault elements are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 Gn 79 P/F HS Trips Selects which phase fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) ---- Gn 79 E/F HS Trips Selects which earth fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) ---- Description Range Default Gn 79 Autoreclose If disabled then all attempts to control the AR IN/OUT status will fail and the AR will be permanently Out Of Service. When enabled the AR IN/OUT state may be controlled via the CONTROL MODE menu option, via Binary Input or via local or remote communications. Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 3.7.2. Autoreclose Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 50 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 Num Shots Selects the number of auto-reclose attempts before the Autorecloser locks out 1, 2, 3, 4 1 Gn 79 Retry Enable Selects whether the Retry close functionality is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 79 Retry Attempts Selects the number of retries allowed per shot 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 1 Gn 79 Retry Interval Time delay between retries 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Reclose Blocked Delay Specifies the maximum time that the Autorecloser can be blocked before proceeding to the lockout state. (NOTE: The block delay timer only starts after the Deadtime.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Sequence Fail Timer Time before lockout occurs on an incomplete reclose sequence. (i.e Trip & starter conditions have not been cleared after Sequence Fail Time.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Minimum LO Delay The time after entering lockout before any further external close commands are allowed. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn 79 Reset LO By Timer Select whether Lockout is automatically reset after a time delay. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Sequence Co-ord Selects whether Sequence co-ordination functionality is used or not. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Cold Load Action Selects whether whist Cold Load is active the relay will perform only Delayed Trips or not. Off, Delayed Off Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s 3.7.2.1. Setting P/F SHOTS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 51 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 P/F Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s 3.7.2.2. Setting E/F SHOTS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 52 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s 3.7.2.3. Setting SEF Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 53 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 1, 1.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Trips To Lockout Selects how many external trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn Line Check Trip Selects whether line check trip is enabled, if enabled no AR sequence initiated Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn P/F Line Check Trip Selects whether a phase fault line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst 3.7.2.4. Setting Extern Shots Setting 3.7.3. Manual Close (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 54 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn E/F Line Check Trip Selects whether an earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn SEF Line Check Trip Selects whether a sensitive earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn Extern Line Check Trip Selects whether an external line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Description Range Default Gn Close CB Delay Delay between a Close CB control being received and the Close CB contacts being operated to allow operator walk away. 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 10000ms Gn Close CB Pulse Specifies the duration of the circuit breaker close pulse 0.1, 0.2 ... 59.9, 60 2s Gn Reclaim Timer The period of time after a CB has closed and remained closed before the reclosure is deemed to be successful and the AR is reinitialised. If the CB remains open at the end of the reclaim time then the AR goes to lockout. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn Blocked Close Delay Selects the maximum time that the manual Close CB may be blocked by interlocking before the command or control is cancelled. The relay will signal "Blocked by Interlocking". 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn Open CB Delay Delay between an Open CB control being received and the Open CB contacts being operated. 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 10000ms Gn Open CB Pulse Selects the maximum time of the Open CB pulse. If the CB is not closed when this timer expires then an alarm will be raised to signify failure to close. 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2 1s Gn CB Travel Alarm Selects the maximum time that the CB should take to either Open or Close before a failure is recorded. 0.01, 0.02 ... 1.99, 2 1s Gn CB Controls Latched Selects whether Binary Input triggers of Close CB and Open CB are latched. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Setting 3.7.4. Circuit Breaker (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 55 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.7.5. Live/Dead Description Range Default Gn A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 10V Gn X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V Gn X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 10V Description Range Default Quick Logic Enable or Disable all logic equations Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E1 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E1 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E1 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E1 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E1 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 3.7.6. Quick Logic (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 56 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E2 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E2 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E2 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E2 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E3 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E3 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E3 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E3 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 57 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E3 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E4 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E4 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E4 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E4 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E4 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E5 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E5 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E5 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 58 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E5 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E5 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E5 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E6 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E6 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E6 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E6 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E6 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E7 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E7 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 59 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E7 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E7 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E7 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E8 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E8 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E8 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E8 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E8 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E9 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 60 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E9 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E9 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E9 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E9 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E10 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E10 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E10 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E10 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 61 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E10 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E11 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E11 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E11 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E11 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E11 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E12 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E12 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E12 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 62 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E12 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E12 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E12 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E13 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E13 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E13 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E13 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E13 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E14 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E14 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 63 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E14 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E14 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E14 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E15 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E15 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E15 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E15 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E15 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E16 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 64 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E16 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E16 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E16 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E16 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 65 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.8. Input Config 3.8.1. Input Matrix Description Range Default Inhibit 51-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit Wattmetric Selects which inputs inhibit the Wattmetric power element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 66 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 51SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 64H Selects which inputs inhibit the 64H element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 46IT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46IT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 46DT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46DT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 37-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 37-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 49 Selects which inputs inhibit the 49 thermal element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset 49 Selects which inputs resets the 49 thermal model element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 67 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit Vx 27/59 Selects which inputs inhibit the Vx 27/59 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 47-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 47-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 59NIT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N IDMTL/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 59NDT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N INST/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 81-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 81-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 81-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 81-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 60CTS Selects which inputs inhibit the CT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 46BC Selects which inputs inhibit the 46 Broken Conductor element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-1 Selects which inputs are monitoring trip circuits Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-2 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-3 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 81HBL2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81HBL2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Trig Trip Contacts Selects which inputs will trigger the Trip contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 50BF Selects which inputs inhibit the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF CB Faulty Selects which input bypasses the 50BF timer due to a fault CB Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF Mech Trip Selects which input allows a mechanical trip to start the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF Ext Trip Selects which inputs can also start the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 68 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 60VTS Selects which inputs inhibit the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Ext Trig 60VTS Selects MCB inputs to VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Ext Reset 60VTS Selects which inputs reset the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 60VTF-Bus Selects which inputs inhibit the VT Fail element on the Bus VTs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Total Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Total Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Ph A Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph A Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Ph B Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph B Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Ph C Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph C Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB E/F Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB E/F Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Delta Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Delta Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset ARBlock Count Selects which inputs Reset the AR Block count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset Freq Ops Count Selects which inputs Reset the Frequent Ops count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB LO Count Selects which inputs Reset the CB Lockout operations count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset I^2t CB Wear Selects which inputs Reset the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Trigger I^2t CB Wear Selects which inputs will cause an external trigger of the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 1 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 1 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 2 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 2 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 69 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default General Alarm 3 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 3 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 4 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 4 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 5 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 5 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 6 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 6 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 7 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 7 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 8 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 8 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 9 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 9 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 10 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 10 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 11 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 11 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Alarm 12 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 12 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- ExtPowerGood Selects which inputs are used to indicate External power to battery is good. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- InhibitBatteryTest Selects which inputs will inhibit a Battery test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CapMon Input 1 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 1. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CapMon Input 2 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 2. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Capacitor Test Selects which inputs will initiate a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit Cap Test Selects which inputs will inhibit a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset SagSwell Count Selects which inputs will reset the 27Sag & 59Swell counts. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 70 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 27Sag Selects which inputs will inhibit the 27Sag elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 59Swell Selects which inputs will inhibit the 59Swell elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset Demand Selects which inputs will rest the Demand elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit Fault Locator Selects which inputs will inhibit the Fault Locator Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Close CB Selects which inputs will issue a close to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Block Close CB Selects which inputs will block the manual closing of the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Open CB Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Out Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser out of service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 In Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser in service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Trip & Reclose Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & reclose Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & lockout Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Ext Trip Selects which input will start the external an Auto-relose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Ext Pickup Selects which input should be connected to the pickup of the external elements required to start an Auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Block Reclose Selects which inputs will block the Autorecloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Reset Lockout Selects which inputs will force the Autorecloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 71 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Line Check Selects which inputs will start the Line Check functionality of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Lockout Selects which inputs will force the Autorecloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Override Sync Selects which inputs will bypass the Synchronisation check of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Man Override Sync Selects which inputs will bypass the Synchronisation check of the Manual Close Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Ext Start 25 Sync Selects which inputs will start the synchronisation window Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset 25 Sync Selects which inputs will stop the synchronisation window Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Start 25 System Sync Selects which inputs will start the System Sync check Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Hot Line Out Selects which inputs will switch out Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Hot Line In Selects which inputs will switch in Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inst Prot'n Out Selects which inputs will switch out the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inst Prot'n In Selects which inputs will switch in the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E/F Out Selects which inputs will switch out the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E/F In Selects which inputs will switch in the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- SEF Out Selects which inputs will switch out the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- SEF In Selects which inputs will switch in the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Trigger Wave Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a waveform record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Trigger Fault Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a fault record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 1 Switches active setting group to group 1 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 72 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reset Energy Meters Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 2 Switches active setting group to group 2 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 3 Switches active setting group to group 3 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 4 Switches active setting group to group 4 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 5 Switches active setting group to group 5 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 6 Switches active setting group to group 6 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 7 Switches active setting group to group 7 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Select Group 8 Switches active setting group to group 8 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Out Of Service Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Local Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Local Or Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Clock Sync. Selects which input is used to synchronise the real time clock Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset LEDs & O/Ps Selects which inputs will reset the latched LEDs and binary outputs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Description Range Default Open CB Selects which function key will Open the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Close CB Selects which function key will Close the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Autoreclose In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Reclose Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & reclose Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Setting 3.8.2. Function Key Matrix (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 73 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Trip & Lockout Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & lockout Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Hot Line Work In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Hot Line Working In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ E/F In/Out Selects which function key will toggle E/F protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ SEF In/Out Selects which function key will toggle SEF protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Inst Prot'n In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Instantaneous protection elements In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Out Of Service Mode Selects which function key will put the relay into Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Mode Selects which function key will put the relay into Local Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Remote Mode Selects which function key will put the relay into Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Or Remote Mode Selects which function key will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ MOS On/Off Selects which function key will toggle the bypass mode of the Synchronisation check of the Manual Close Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 OS On/Off Selects which function key wil loggle the bypass mode of the Synchronisation check of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Description Range Default Inverted Inputs Selects which inputs pickup when voltage is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 ) -------------------------------- BI 1 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 1 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 2 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s Setting 3.8.3. Binary Input Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 74 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 2 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 3 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 3 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 4 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 4 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 5 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 5 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 6 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 6 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 7 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 7 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 8 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 8 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 9 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 9 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 10 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 10 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 11 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 11 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 12 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 12 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 13 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 13 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 14 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 75 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 14 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 15 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 15 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 16 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 16 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 17 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 17 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 18 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 18 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 19 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 19 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 20 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 20 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 21 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 21 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 22 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 22 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 23 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 23 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 24 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 24 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 24 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 24 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 25 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 25 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 25 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 25 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 26 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 26 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 76 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 26 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 26 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 27 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 27 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 27 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 27 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 28 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 28 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 28 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 28 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 29 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 29 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 29 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 29 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 30 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 30 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 30 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 30 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 31 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 31 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 31 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 31 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 32 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 32 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 32 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 32 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 33 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 33 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 33 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 33 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s Enabled In Local Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Local' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 77 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.8.4. Function Key Config Description Range Default Function Key 1 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 1 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 2 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 3 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 4 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 5 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 6 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 7 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 8 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 8 Function Key 9 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 9 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 9 Function Key 10 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 10 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 10 Function Key 11 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 11 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 12 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 12 Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) -----------1668183366 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 78 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.8.5. General Alarms Description Range Default General Alarm-1 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 1 (16 Character String) ALARM 1 General Alarm-2 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 2 (16 Character String) ALARM 2 General Alarm-3 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 3 (16 Character String) ALARM 3 General Alarm-4 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 4 (16 Character String) ALARM 4 General Alarm-5 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 5 (16 Character String) ALARM 5 General Alarm-6 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 6 (16 Character String) ALARM 6 General Alarm-7 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 7 (16 Character String) ALARM 7 General Alarm-8 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 8 (16 Character String) ALARM 8 General Alarm-9 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 9 (16 Character String) ALARM 9 General Alarm-10 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 10 (16 Character String) ALARM 10 General Alarm-11 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 11 (16 Character String) ALARM 11 General Alarm-12 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 12 (16 Character String) ALARM 12 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 79 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.9. Output Config 3.9.1. Output Matrix Description Range Default Protection Healthy Relays selected are energised whilst relay self-monitoring does NOT detect any hardware or software errors and DC Supply is healthy. A changeover contact or normally closed contact may be used to generate Protection Defective from this output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) BO1 51-1 51-1 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51-2 51-2 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51-3 51-3 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51-4 51-4 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50-1 50-1 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50-2 50-2 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50-3 50-3 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50-4 50-4 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51G-1 51G-1 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-2 51G-2 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-3 51G-3 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-4 51G-4 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-1 50G-1 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-2 50G-2 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 80 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 50G-3 50G-3 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-4 50G-4 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 Wattmetric Po> Wattmetric residual power operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51SEF-1 51SEF-1 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-2 51SEF-2 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-3 51SEF-3 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-4 51SEF-4 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-1 50SEF-1 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-2 50SEF-2 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-3 50SEF-3 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-4 50SEF-4 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 64H 64H Restricted Earth Fault element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Cold Load Active Cold Load settings are active Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 46IT IDMTL/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 46DT INST/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37 PhA 37 Under Current operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37 PhB 37 Under Current operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37 PhC 37 Under Current operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 81 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 37-1 37-1 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37-2 37-2 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 49 Trip Thermal capacity trip operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 49 Alarm Thermal capacity alarm operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59-1 Under/Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59-2 Under/Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59-3 Under/Overvoltage stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59-4 Under/Overvoltage stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59 PhA 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59 PhB 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59 PhC 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Vx 27/59 Under/Overvoltage Vx stage operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- ABC Live All phases considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- A Live A phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- B Live B phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- C Live C phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- XYZ Live 6VT models only All phases considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- X Live A phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 82 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Y Live 6VT models only B phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Z Live 6VT models only C phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- ABC Dead All phases considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- A Dead A phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- B Dead B phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- C Dead C phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- XYZ Dead 6VT models only All phases considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- X Dead A phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Y Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 47-1 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 47-2 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 59NIT Neutral Overvoltage IDMTL/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 59NDT Neutral Overvoltage INST/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 81-1 Under/Over frequency stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 81-2 Under/Over frequency stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 81-3 Under/Over frequency stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 6VT models only B phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Z Dead 6VT models only C phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 83 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 81-4 Under/Over frequency stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 60CTS CT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 46BC 46 Broken Conductor element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-1 Trip Circuit 1 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-2 Trip Circuit 2 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 74TCS-3 Trip Circuit 3 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 81HBL2 81HBL2 2nd harmonic blocking operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Pickup General Pickup operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF-1 Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF-2 Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 60VTS VT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 60VTF-Bus Bus VT Fail element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF PhA 50BF element operated for current on phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF PhB 50BF element operated for current on phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF PhC 50BF element operated for current on phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF EF 50BF element operated for Earth Fault current Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Total Trip Count Total CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Ph A Trip Count Ph A CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 84 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default CB Ph B Trip Count Ph B CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Ph C Trip Count Ph C CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB E/F Trip Count E/F CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Delta Trip Count Delta CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Count To ARBlock Count To AR Block CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Freq Ops Count CB Frequent Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB LO Handle Ops CB Lockout Handle Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- I^2t CB Wear I^2t CB Wear limit exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Battery Test Battery Test is in progress. This can be used to disable battery charger during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Battery Load Test Battery Load Test is in progress. This can be used to apply the battery test load during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Battery Test Pass Indicates whether the last battery test passed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Battery Test Fail Indicates whether the last battery test failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Recovery Fail Indicates whether the battery failed to recover back to its pre-test voltage after last battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Ext. Power Good Indicates whether the external battery supply is ok. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Battery Healthy Indicates whether the current battery voltage is healthy Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Capacitor Ready Indicates whether the current capacitor status is ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CapacitorSupplyFail Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Supply Failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 85 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Capacitor Only Trip Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Only Trip. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Capacitor DBI Indicates whether the current capacitor status is DBI condition. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Cap Test Active Capacitor Test is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Cap Test Pass Indicates whether the last capacitor test passed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Cap Test Fail Indicates whether the last capacitor test failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Cap Recovery Fail Indicates whether the capacitor voltage failed to recover after the last capacitor test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27Sag Pole1 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27Sag Pole2 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27Sag Pole3 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 59Swell Pole1 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 59Swell Pole2 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 59Swell Pole3 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- En100 Life Indicates IEC 61850 processor running Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- En100 Error Indicates IEC 61850 processor detects error Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- IEC 61850 Configured Indicates IEC 61850 is congigured Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Phase A A phase A overcurrent element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L1 Phase B A phase B overcurrent element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L2 Phase C A phase C overcurrent element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 86 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Forward P/F The Phase fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reverse P/F The Phase fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Forward E/F The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reverse E/F The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Forward SEF The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reverse SEF The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Close CB Blocked Indicates that the Close CB control is blocked by its interlocking logic. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Open CB Open pulse due to Manual Open being issued. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Alarm Indicates the CB is either in an illegal state or is stuck neither open or closed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Closed Indicates that the circuit breaker is in the closed position. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Open Indicates that the circuit breaker is in the open position. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Manual Close CB Close pulse due to Manual close being issued Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 AR Close CB Close pulse due to auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Trip & Reclose Indicates the Trip & Reclose sequence being performed Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout Indicates the Trip & Lockout sequence being performed Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Lockout Indicates the auto-recloser is in the Lockout state Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 87 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Out Of Service Indicates the auto-recloser is out of service Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 In Service Indicates the auto-recloser is in service Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 In Progress Indicates an auto-reclose sequence is in progress Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Block Extern Indicates that Extern for the current shot has been selected to be delayed. (This may be used to block external tripping elements in the same way as the internal protection elements are blocked to achieve Instantaneous / Delayed operation.) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 CB Fail To Close Indicates the CB was not closed at the end of the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Close Onto Fault Indicates an element starter or trip operated during the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Successful AR Indicates that after a reclose and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Last Trip Lockout Indicates that the Autoreclose reached Lockout due to a trip on the final shot Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Successful Man Close Indicates that after a manual close and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Live Line Indicates that the Line is energised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Live Bus Indicates that the Bus is energised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Line U/V Indicates that an undervoltage condition exists on the Line Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Bus U/V Indicates that an undervoltage condition exists on the Bus Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Diff Voltage Indicates that a Voltage Differential exists Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 Voltage Check Indicates that all the Voltage Check conditions are met Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 In Sync Indicates that the system is In Sync Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 88 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 25 CS In Progress Indicates that Check Sync is In Progress Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 SS In Progress Indicates that System Sync is In Progress Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 COZ In Progress Indicates that Close On Zero is In Progress Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 25 System Split LO Indicates that a System Split LO condition exists Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Hot Line Working Indicates that Hot LineWorking functionality has been selected Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inst Prot'n Out Indicates that the protection elements selected to be Instantaneous elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E/F Out Indicates that the instantaneous protection elements are switched out. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- SEF Out Indicates that the SEF protection elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- New Wave Stored The waveform recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- New Fault Stored The fault recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- +ve P (3P) Real Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- -ve P (3P) Real Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- +ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- -ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Man Override Sync Selects which inputs will bypass the Synchronisation check of the Manual Close Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 79 Override Sync Selects which inputs will bypass the Synchronisation check of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 89 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reactive Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reactive Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Out Of Service Mode Indicates the relay is in Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Local Mode Indicates the relay is in Local Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Remote Mode Indicates the relay is in Remote Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 1 Indicates the relay is using settings group 1 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 2 Indicates the relay is using settings group 2 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 3 Indicates the relay is using settings group 3 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 4 Indicates the relay is using settings group 4 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 5 Indicates the relay is using settings group 5 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 6 Indicates the relay is using settings group 6 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 7 Indicates the relay is using settings group 7 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 8 Indicates the relay is using settings group 8 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 1 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 1 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 2 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 2 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 3 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 3 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 4 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 4 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 5 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 5 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 90 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default User Output 6 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 6 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 7 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 7 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 8 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 8 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 9 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 9 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 10 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 10 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 11 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 11 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 12 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 12 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 13 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 13 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 14 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 14 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 15 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 15 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 16 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 16 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 17 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 17 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 18 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 18 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 19 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 19 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 20 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 20 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 21 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 21 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 22 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 22 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 91 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default User Output 23 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 23 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 24 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 24 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 25 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 25 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 26 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 26 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 27 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 27 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 28 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 28 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 29 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 29 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 30 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 30 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 31 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 31 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 32 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 32 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 1 Operated DC Binary Input 1 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 2 Operated DC Binary Input 2 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 3 Operated DC Binary Input 3 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 4 Operated DC Binary Input 4 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 5 Operated DC Binary Input 5 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 6 Operated DC Binary Input 6 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 7 Operated DC Binary Input 7 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 8 Operated DC Binary Input 8 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 92 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 9 Operated DC Binary Input 9 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 10 Operated DC Binary Input 10 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 11 Operated DC Binary Input 11 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 12 Operated DC Binary Input 12 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 13 Operated DC Binary Input 13 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 14 Operated DC Binary Input 14 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 15 Operated DC Binary Input 15 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 16 Operated DC Binary Input 16 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 17 Operated DC Binary Input 17 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 18 Operated DC Binary Input 18 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 19 Operated DC Binary Input 19 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 20 Operated DC Binary Input 20 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 21 Operated DC Binary Input 21 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 22 Operated DC Binary Input 22 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 23 Operated DC Binary Input 23 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 24 Operated DC Binary Input 24 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 25 Operated DC Binary Input 25 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 26 Operated DC Binary Input 26 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 93 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 27 Operated DC Binary Input 27 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 28 Operated DC Binary Input 28 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 29 Operated DC Binary Input 29 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 30 Operated DC Binary Input 30 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 31 Operated DC Binary Input 31 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 32 Operated DC Binary Input 32 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- BI 33 Operated DC Binary Input 33 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E1 Quick Logic equation 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E2 Quick Logic equation 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E3 Quick Logic equation 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E4 Quick Logic equation 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E5 Quick Logic equation 5 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E6 Quick Logic equation 6 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E7 Quick Logic equation 7 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E8 Quick Logic equation 8 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E9 Quick Logic equation 9 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E10 Quick Logic equation 10 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E11 Quick Logic equation 11 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 94 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E12 Quick Logic equation 12 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E13 Quick Logic equation 13 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E14 Quick Logic equation 14 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E15 Quick Logic equation 15 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- E16 Quick Logic equation 16 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Description Range Default Trip Contacts The Binary Outputs selected by this setting are classed as Trip contacts. (When any of these BOs operate the Trip LED is lit, CB Fail is started, if enabled, & a Fault Record is stored) Combination of ( BO1-BO30) -------------- Hand Reset Outputs Relays selected, as Hand Reset will remain latched until manually reset from front panel or via communications link or by removing DC Supply. By default relays are Self Resetting and will reset when the driving signal is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 ) -------------- Min Operate Time 1 Minimum operate time of output relay if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 2 Minimum operate time of output relay 2 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 3 Minimum operate time of output relay 3 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 4 Minimum operate time of output relay 4 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 5 Minimum operate time of output relay 5 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 6 Minimum operate time of output relay 6 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Setting 3.9.2. Binary Output Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 95 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Min Operate Time 7 Minimum operate time of output relay 7 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 8 Minimum operate time of output relay 8 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 9 Minimum operate time of output relay 9 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 10 Minimum operate time of output relay 10 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 11 Minimum operate time of output relay 11 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 12 Minimum operate time of output relay 12 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 13 Minimum operate time of output relay 13 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 14 Minimum operate time of output relay 14 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Pulsed Outputs Selects which outputs are pulsed. The pulse width is set by the Min Operate Time setting for each output Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 ) -------------- Description Range Default Self Reset LEDs LEDs selected, as Self Reset will automatically reset when the driving signal is removed. By default all LEDs are Hand Reset and must be manually reset either locally via the front fascia or remotely via communications. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 Green LEDs Selects which LEDs will be green when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) ------------------- Red LEDs Selects which LEDs will be red when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 Setting 3.9.3. LED Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 96 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.9.4. Pickup Config Description Range Default Gn P/F Pickups When any of the selected pickups operate General Pickup is driven. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn E/F Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Voltage Pickups As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT Gn Freq Pickups As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 Gn Misc Pickups As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 ) 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 Description Range Default Gn CB Total Trip Count Selects whether the CB Total Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Total Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Total Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 3.10. Maintenance 3.10.1. CB Counters Setting Gn CB Total Trip Count Reset Resets CB Total Trip Count counter Gn CB Phase Trip Counter Selects whether the phase segregated counters; CB Ph A Trip Count, CB Ph B Trip Count, CB Ph C Trip Count & CB E/F Trip Count, are enabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 97 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB Ph A Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph A trips allowed before CB Ph A Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase A 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB Delta Trip Count Selects whether the CB Delta Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Delta Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Delta Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB Count To AR Block Selects whether the CB Count To AR Block counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Count To AR Block Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Count To AR Block counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Setting Gn CB Ph A Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph A Trip Count counter Gn CB Ph B Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph B trips allowed before CB Ph B Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase B Gn CB Ph B Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph B Trip Count counter Gn CB Ph C Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph C trips allowed before CB Ph C Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase C Gn CB Ph C Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph C Trip Count counter Gn CB E/F Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB E/F trips allowed before CB E/F Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50G/51G element pickup or 50SEF/51SEF element operation Gn CB E/F Trip Count Reset Resets CB E/F Trip Count counter Gn CB Delta Trip Count Reset Resets CB Delta Trip Count counter Gn CB Count To AR Block Reset Resets CB Count To AR Block counter (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 98 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB Freq Ops Count Selects whether the CB Frequent Operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Freq Ops Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Frequent Operations Counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 10 Gn CB LO Handle Ops Selects whether the CB Lockout operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB LO Handle Ops Target Selects the number of CB Lockout handle operations allowed before CB LO Handle Ops Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Description Range Default Gn I^2t Counter Selects whether the I^2t CB Wear monitor is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn Alarm Limit Sets limit before alarm is issued 10, 11 ... 99000, 100000 10MA^2s Gn Separation Time Sets the time for CB mechanism to start moving, time before contacts start to separate 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.02s Gn Clearance Time Time for CB to clear fault 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.04s Description Range Default Data Log Period Selects period between stored samples 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 5min Setting Gn CB Freq Ops Count Reset Resets CB Frequent Operations Counter Gn CB LO Handle Ops Reset Resets CB Lockout Handle Operations Counter. 3.10.2. I^2T CB Wear Setting Reset I^2t Count Reset the CB wear count 3.10.3. Output Matrix Test 3.11. Data Storage 3.11.1. Demand/Data Log Setting Clear Data Log Clear the Data Log (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 99 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Demand Window The time window over which the Min, Max and Mean values are calculated. 1, 2 ... 23, 24 24hrs Gn Demand Window Type Method used to calculate Demand values. Fixed, Peak, Rolling Fixed Description Range Default Gn P/F Trig Storage Select which elements trigger a waveform record Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn E/F Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Misc Current Storage As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2, 49 Trip, 49 Alarm ) ------ Gn Voltage Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) --------- Gn Freq Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) ---- Pre-trigger Storage Select Percentage of waveform record stored before the fault is triggered 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 20% Record Duration Select waveform record duration 10 Rec x 1 Sec, 5 Rec x 2 Sec, 2 Rec x 5 Sec, 1 Rec x 10 Sec 10 Rec x 1 Sec Description Range Default Gn Max Fault Rec Time Maximum time Fault record information will be stored and classed as same fault 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 2000ms Setting Gn Demand Reset Reset all Demand values 3.11.2. Waveform Storage Setting Trigger Waveform Trigger waveform storage Clear Waveforms Clear all stored waveform records 3.11.3. Fault Storage (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 100 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Range Default Setting Description Range Default Setting Gn Active Exp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Active Imp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Reactive Exp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Gn Reactive Imp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Description Range Default Fault Locator Disabled, enabled disabled Line Angle 0 .. 90deg 75deg EF Comp Z0/Z1 Ratio 0 .. 10 2.5 EF Comp Z0 Angle 0 .. 355deg 75deg Z+ Impedance 0.1.. 250 10 Ohms Sec'y Z+ Per Unit Distance 0.0005 .. 5 0.5 Ohms Display Units Percent, kilometres, miles Percent System Earthing Normal, compensated Normal Gn U0/U1 Ratio 0 ..1 0.1 Gn Freq FL Inhibits 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 Gn Misc FL Inhibits 49,46IT, 46DT, 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT, 46BC, Vx27/59 49,46IT, 46DT, 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT, 46BC, Vx27/59 Clear Faults Clear all stored fault records 3.11.4. Event Storage Description Clear Events Clear all stored event records 3.11.5. Energy Storage 3.11.6. Fault Locator (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 101 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 3.12. Communications Description Range Default COM1-RS485 Station Address Station Address for COM1-RS485 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM1-RS485 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM1-RS485 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM1-RS485 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM1-RS485 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM1-RS485 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM1-RS485 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM3 Station Address Station Address for COM3 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM3 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM3 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM3 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM3 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 19200 COM3 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM3 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM3 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF COM3 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM4 Station Address Station Address for COM4 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM4 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM4 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 OFF COM4 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM4 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM4 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM4 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM4 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 102 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default COM4 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote DNP3 Unsolicited Events Allows unsolicited event support in the relay. When Enabled, unsolicited event transmission can be controlled by the Master. When Disabled, Master requests are ignored. Disabled, Enabled Disabled DNP3 Destination Address The address of the master to which unsolicited events will be sent. 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 DNP3 Application Timeout Specifies the response timeout for application layer confirmation 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s I101 Link Mode Specifies the Link Layer mode as balance or unbalanced Balanced, Unbalanced Unbalanced I101 Link Address Sets Link Address Field size. Not Present - Only used with balanced transmission"," 1 octet address range 0 - 254","2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Not Present, 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Common Address of Asdu Sets Common Address Field size. Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 0 - 254, 2 octets address range 0 65534 1 Octet , 2 Octets 2 Octets I101 Cause of Trans. (COT) Size of cause of transmission in octets. 1 octet - COT code, 2 octets - COT code + originator address or 0 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Info. Obj. Add. (IOA) Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 1 - 255, 2 octets address range 1 - 65535, 3 octets used to generate structured address format 1 Octet , 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octets I101 Asdu Address Address to use to identify ASDU layer 0, 1 ... 65534, 65535 3 I101 Cyclic Period Period device will generate cyclic data. Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically Off, 1 ... 3599, 3600 60s I101 Background Period Period device will generate background data. Set to Off to disable generating of background data. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background Off, 1 ... 1499, 1500 Off LAN Protocol Allows IEC60870-5-103 via Ethernet port Off, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5103 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 103 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4. Relay Settings - Standard Plus LOV 4.1. System Config Description Range Default Language Setting Selects the language in which the relay text will be displayed. English, USA-English English 50, 60 50Hz Setting Dependencies When enabled only active settings are displayed and all others hidden Disabled, Enabled Enabled Favourite Meters Timer Selects the time delay after which, if no key presses have been detected, the relay will begin to poll through any screens which have been selected as favourite instruments Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 60min Backlight timer Controls when the LCD backlight turns off Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 5min Curr Set Display Select whether the Pickup values are shown in terms of x Nominal, Primary or Secondary values on the Relay Fascia xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom E/F Curr Set Display As Above xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom Export Power/Lag VAr Selects the signs required for exporting power and lagging VArs +ve/+ve, +ve/-ve, -ve/+ve, ve/-ve +ve/+ve Select Grp Mode Mode of operation of the group change from status input. Edge triggered ignores the status input once it has changed to the relevant group, where as with Level triggered the relay will only stay in the group it has changed to whilst the status input is being driven, after which it returns to the previous group. Edge triggered, Level triggered Edge triggered Setting Active Group Selects which settings group is currently activated System Frequency Selects the Power System Frequency from 50 or 60 Hz View/Edit Group Selects which settings group is currently being displayed Date Sets the date, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date Time Sets the time, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 104 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Clock Sync. From BI Real time clock may be synchronised using a binary input (See Clock Sync. in Binary Input Menu) Disabled, Seconds, Minutes Minutes Operating Mode Selects the current operating mode of the relay. This can also be changed by a binary input mode selection. Out Of Service, Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Local Or Remote Setting Password Allows a 4 character alpha code to be entered as the password. Note that the display shows a password dependant encrypted code on the second line of the display (Password) NONE Control Password As Above (Password) NONE Trip Alert When Enabled the occurance of a Trip will cause the relay to display the Trip Alert Screen, the only way to leave this screen is by acknowledging the trip through the TEST/RESET button on the relay fascia Disabled, Enabled Enabled General Alarm Alert When Enabled the occurance of a General Alarm will cause the relay to display the General Alarm Screen, any relay fascia button being pressed will cancel this action and revert to the last screen being displayed prior to the alarm Disabled, Enabled Enabled Relay Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identifier the circuit the relay is attached to or the relays purpose (16 Character String) 7SR224 Circuit Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identify the circuit name or relay's purpose (16 Character String) Setting 4.2. CT/VT Config Description Range Default Phase Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Phase Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Phase Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Phase Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Phase Voltage Config Required to allow for different types of physical VT connections. Van,Vbn,Vcn, Vab,Vbc,3V0, Va,Vb,Vc Van,Vbn,Vcn (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 105 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Phase VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Phase VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Vx Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input Measuring range of V4, V5 & V6 is 132V RMS on 6xVT models. 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Vx Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Vx Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Vx Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Vx VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Vx VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Phase Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for phase inputs 1, 5 1A Phase CT Ratio Prim Phase CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Phase CT Ratio Sec Phase CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 Earth Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for Measured Earth inputs 1, 5 1A Earth CT Ratio Prim Measured Earth CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Earth CT Ratio Sec Measured Earth CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 I1, I2, I3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware current inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC V1, V2, V3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware voltage inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC Phase Rotation Specifies the vectorial positive phase sequence order of the allocated phase references. This setting allows the relay to be applied on networks with abnormal phasor sequence. A,B,C A,C,B A,B,C (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 106 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.3. Function Config Description Range Default Gn Phase Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no Phase Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Voltage Cont O/C When set to Disabled, no Voltage Cont O/C elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Cold Load When set to Disabled, no Cold Load elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Measured E/F When set to Disabled, no Measured E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Sensitive E/F When set to Disabled, no Sensitive E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Restricted E/F When set to Disabled, no Restricted E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no NPS Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Under Current When set to Disabled, no Under Current elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 107 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Thermal When set to Disabled, no Thermal elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Phase U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Phase U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Vx U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Vx U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no NPS Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Neutral Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no Neutral Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn U/O Frequency When set to Disabled, no U/O Frequency elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Fail When set to Disabled, no CB Fail elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn VT Supervision When set to Disabled, no VT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 108 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CT Supervision When set to Disabled, no CT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Broken Conductor When set to Disabled, no Broken Conductor elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Trip Cct Supervision When set to Disabled, no Trip Cct Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Inrush Detector When set to Disabled, no Inrush Detector elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Counters When set to Disabled, no Gn CB Counter elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn I^2t CB Wear When set to Disabled, no Gn I^2t CB Wear elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Battery Test When set to Disabled, no Battery Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Capacitor Test When set to Disabled, no Capacitor Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 109 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn LOV Automation When set to Disabled, no LOV Automation elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 27Sag & 59Swell When set to Disabled, no 27Sag & 59Swell elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Description Range Default Gn 67 Char Angle Maximum torque angle for phase overcurrent elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 45deg Gn 67 Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 1, 1.5 ... 19.5, 20 1V Gn 67 2-out-of-3 Logic Selects whether 2 out of 3 voting logic is enabled for phase overcurrent elements Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 51/50 Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51 & 50 elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency RMS, Fundamental RMS Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Element Selects whether the 51-1 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Setting 4.4. Current Prot'n 4.4.1. Phase Overcurrent 4.4.1.1. Setting 51-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 110 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-2 Element Selects whether the 51-2 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 4.4.1.2. Setting 51-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 111 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.4.1.3. 51-3 Description Range Default Gn 51-3 Element Selects whether the 51-3 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-4 Element Selects whether the 51-4 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 4.4.1.4. Setting 51-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 112 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-1 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-2 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s 4.4.1.5. 4.4.1.6. Setting 50-1 Setting 50-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 113 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-3 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-4 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 4.4.1.7. 4.4.1.8. Setting 50-3 Setting 50-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 114 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C Description Range Default Gn 51V Element Selects whether the Voltage Controlled Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51V Setting The voltage below which 51V operates 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 30V Gn 51V VTS Action Selects whether or not the 51V element is blocked when VTS operates Off, Inhibit Off Gn 51-1 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-1 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-2 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-2 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-3 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-3 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-4 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-4 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Description Range Default Cold Load Selects whether the Cold Load element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Pick-up Time Cold Load operate time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Drop-off Time Cold Load reset time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Reduced Current Selects whether reduced current functionality is to be used Disabled, Enabled Disabled Reduced Current Level Selects current level below which Reduced Current Time is used for Cold Load reset delay 0.05, 0.1 ... 2.45, 2.5 0.25xIn Reduced Current Time Cold Load reset time delay used when reduced current active 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Gn 51c-1 Setting 51-1 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-1 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-1 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Setting 4.4.3. Cold Load (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 115 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51c-1 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-2 Setting 51-2 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-2 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-2 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-2 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-3 Setting 51-3 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-3 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-3 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-3 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-3 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-3 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-4 Setting 51-4 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-4 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-4 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-4 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-4 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 116 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51c-4 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 67G Char Angle Maximum torque angle for measured earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67G Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 0.33V Gn 51G/50G Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51G & 50G elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency. Calculated setting switches the current source from measured at I4 to derived from sum of I1-I3 RMS, Fundamental, Calculated RMS Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Element Selects whether the 51G-1 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Setting 4.4.4. Measured E/F 4.4.4.1. Setting 51G-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 117 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-2 Element Selects whether the 51G-2 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-3 Element Selects whether the 51G-3 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI 4.4.4.2. 4.4.4.3. Setting 51G-2 Setting 51G-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 118 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Element Selects whether the 51G-4 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off 4.4.4.4. Setting 51G-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 119 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir 4.4.4.5. 4.4.4.6. 4.4.4.7. Setting 50G-1 Setting 50G-2 Setting 50G-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 120 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 67SEF Char Angle Maximum torque angle for sensitive earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67SEF Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5 ... 66.5, 67 0.33V Gn 67SEF Compensated Network When Enabled the directional elements bounderies are widened to +- 87.5 Degs Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric When set to Enabled, the SEF elements will operate using the Wattmetric principle Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric Power Specifies the residual power cutoff threshold used by the Wattmetric protection 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 0.1xInxW 4.4.4.8. Setting 50G-4 Setting 4.4.5. Sensitive E/F (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 121 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 67SEF Ires Select Selects the current upon which the SEF elements operate as either only the real component of residual current or the total residual current Ires, Ires Real Ires Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-1 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-1 IDMTL Sensitive Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-2 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-2 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 4.4.5.1. 4.4.5.2. Setting 51SEF-1 Setting 51SEF-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 122 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-3 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-3 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-4 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-4 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled 4.4.5.3. 4.4.5.4. Setting 51SEF-3 Setting 51SEF-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 123 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn 4.4.5.5. 4.4.5.6. Setting 50SEF-1 Setting 50SEF-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 124 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 64H Element High impedance restricted earth fault current element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 64H Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.945, 0.95 0.2xIn Gn 64H Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s 4.4.5.7. 4.4.5.8. Setting 50SEF-3 Setting 50SEF-4 Setting 4.4.6. Restricted E/F (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 125 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.4.7. NPS Overcurrent 4.4.7.1. 46IT Description Range Default Gn 46IT Element Selects whether the 46IT IDMTL/DTL negative phase sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46IT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 0.25xIn Gn 46IT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI, ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI IEC-NI Gn 46IT Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 46IT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 46IT Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 46DT Element Selects whether the 46DT INST/DTL negative sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46DT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 3.99, 4 0.1xIn Gn 46DT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s Description Range Default Gn 37-1 U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 37 Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.1xIn Description Range Default Gn 37-1 Element Phase under current element 37-1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-1 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-1 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes 4.4.7.2. Setting 46DT Setting 4.4.8. Under Current 4.4.8.1. Setting 37-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 126 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 37-1 Start Option Specifies the 37-1 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All 4.4.8.2. Setting 37-2 Description Range Default Gn 37-2 Element Phase under current element 37-2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-2 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-2 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes Gn 37-2 Start Option Specifies the 37-2 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All Description Range Default Gn 49 Thermal Overload Selects whether the thermal overload protection element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 49 Overload Setting Pickup level 0.1, 0.11 ... 2.99, 3 1.05xIn Gn 49 Time Constant Thermal time constant 1, 1.5 ... 999.5, 1000 10m Gn 49 Capacity Alarm Selects whether thermal capacity alarm enabled Disabled, 50 ... 99, 100 Disabled Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Gn 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 1, 1.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Setting 4.4.9. Thermal Setting 49 Reset Therm State Control that allows thermal state to be manually reset 4.5. Voltage Prot'n 4.5.1. Phase U/O Voltage (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 127 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.5.1.1. 27/59-1 Description Range Default Gn 27/59-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn 27/59-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No 4.5.1.2. Setting 27/59-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 128 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 4.5.1.3. 4.5.1.4. Setting 27/59-3 Setting 27/59-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 129 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn 27/59-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx Voltage Input Mode Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Ph-N 1, 1.5 ... 119.5, 120 5V 5V Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-1 Element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Under, Over Over Over 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s No, Yes No No No, Yes No No Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Under, Over Over Over 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V 4.5.2. Vx U/O Voltage Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for Vx U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Specifies the voltage below which the Vx 27/59 element(s) will not indicate operation. 4.5.2.1. Vx 27/59-1 Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Gn Vx 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Gn Vx 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level Gn Vx 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting Gn Vx 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time Gn Vx 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element Gn Vx 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Gn Vx 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up 4.5.2.2. Vx 27/59-2 Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Gn Vx 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Gn Vx 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 130 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Hysteresis 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s No, Yes No No No, Yes No No Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-3 Element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Under, Over Under Under 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s No, Yes Yes Yes No, Yes No No Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 Element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Under, Over Under Under 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time Gn Vx 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element Gn Vx 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Gn Vx 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up 4.5.2.3. Vx 27/59-3 Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Gn Vx 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Gn Vx 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level Gn Vx 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting Gn Vx 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time Gn Vx 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element Gn Vx 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Gn Vx 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up 4.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-4 Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Gn Vx 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Gn Vx 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level Gn Vx 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 131 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 U/V Guarded No, Yes Yes Yes No, Yes No No Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn 47-1 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-1 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element Gn Vx 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Gn Vx 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up 4.5.3. NPS Overvoltage 4.5.3.1. 4.5.3.2. 47-1 47-2 Description Range Default Gn 47-2 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-2 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.5s Description Range Default Gn 59N Voltage Source Selects voltage source between calculated 3V0 (Vn) or measured 3V0 through Vx input Vn, Vx Vn Description Range Default Gn 59NIT Element Selects whether the inverse time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 4.5.4. Neutral Overvoltage 4.5.4.1. Setting 59NIT (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 132 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 59NIT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NIT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IDMTL or DTL DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Gn 59NIT Time Mult (IDMTL) Time multiplier (applicable to IDMTL curve but not DTL selection) 0.1, 0.2 ... 139.5, 140 1 Gn 59NIT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 59NIT Reset Selects between an instantaneous reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 59NDT Element Selects whether the definite time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59NDT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NDT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.01s Description Range Default Gn 81 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Description Range Default Gn 81-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-1 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-1 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49.5Hz Gn 81-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s Gn 81-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes 4.5.4.2. Setting 59NDT Setting 4.5.5. U/O Frequency 4.5.5.1. Setting 81-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 133 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.5.5.2. 81-2 Description Range Default Gn 81-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-2 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-2 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49Hz Gn 81-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.8s Gn 81-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-3 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-3 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 48Hz Gn 81-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.6s Gn 81-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-4 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under 4.5.5.3. 4.5.5.4. Setting 81-3 Setting 81-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 134 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 81-4 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 47.5Hz Gn 81-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.4s Gn 81-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 50BF Element Selects whether the Circuit Breaker Fail element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50BF Setting Breaker Fail Current Pickup level. If the current falls below this level then the CB is deemed to have opened and the element is reset. 0.05, 0.055 ... 1.995, 2 0.2xIn Gn 50BF-I4 Setting 0.005, 0.01 ... 1.995, 2 0.05xIn Gn 50BF-1 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operates 20, 25 ... 59995, 60000 60ms Gn 50BF-2 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operates 20, 25 ... 59995, 60000 120ms Description Range Default Gn 60VTS Element Selects whether the VT supervision element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60VTS Component Selects whether NPS or ZPS quantities are used by the VT supervision element NPS, ZPS NPS Gn 60VTS V Level above which there is a possible 1 or 2 phase VT fuse failure 7, 8 ... 109, 110 7V Gn 60VTS I Level above which a 1 or 2 phase fault condition is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Setting 4.6. Supervision 4.6.1. CB Fail Setting 4.6.2. VT Supervision (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 135 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 60VTS Vpps Level below which there is a possible 3 phase VT fuse failure 1, 2 ... 109, 110 15V Gn 60VTS Ipps Load Level current must be above before 3 phase VTS will be issued 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS Ipps Fault Level above which 3 phase fault is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 10xIn Gn 60VTS Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Gn 60VTS-X Element Selects whether the VT supervision element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60VTS-X Component Selects whether NPS or ZPS quantities are used by the VT supervision element NPS, ZPS NPS Gn 60VTS-X V Level above which there is a possible 1 or 2 phase VT fuse failure 7, 8 ... 109, 110 7V Gn 60VTS-X I Level above which a 1 or 2 phase fault condition is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS-X Vpps Level below which there is a possible 3 phase VT fuse failure 1, 2 ... 109, 110 15V Gn 60VTS-X Ipps Load Level current must be above before 3 phase VTS will be issued 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS-X Ipps Fault Level above which 3 phase fault is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 10xIn Gn 60VTS-X Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Description Range Default Gn 60CTS Element Selects whether the CT supervision element is enabled (NPS current in the absence of NPS voltage) Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60CTS Inps Arm if NPS Current (Inps) is above this level 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60CTS Vnps Inhibit if NPS Voltage (Vnps) is above this level 7, 8 ... 109, 110 10V Gn 60CTS Delay CTS Operate delay 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Setting 4.6.3. CT Supervision (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 136 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.6.4. Broken Conductor Description Range Default Gn 46BC Element Selects whether the definite time broken conductor element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46BC Setting NPS Current to PPS Current ratio 20, 21 ... 99, 100 20% Gn 46BC Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 20s Gn 46BC U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 46BC Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 46BC U/C Guarded Specifies whether undercurrent guard is applied to the 46BC element No, Yes No Description Range Default Gn 74TCS-1 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-1 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-2 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-2 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-3 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-3 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Description Range Default Gn 81HBL2 Element Selects whether the phase inrush detector 81HBL2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 4.6.5. Trip CCT Supervision Setting 4.6.6. Inrush Detector (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 137 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 81HBL2 Bias Selects the bias method used for magnetising inrush. Phase - Segregated, each phase blocks itself. Cross - Blocked, each phase can block the operation of other phases. Sum - Of Squares, each phase blocks itself using the square root of the sum of squares of the 2nd harmonic. Phase, Cross, Sum Cross Gn 81HBL2 Setting The magnetising inrush detector operates when the 2nd harmonic current exceeds a set percentage of the fundamental current 0.1, 0.11 ... 0.49, 0.5 0.2xI Description Range Default Battery Element Selects whether the Battery Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Battery Nominal Voltage Selects battery nominal voltage 24, 30, 48, 110, 220 48V Battery Test Rate Frequency of battery tests Every 12 Hours, Every Day ... Every Nov 1st, Every Dec 1st Every Month 1st Battery Test Time Hour of the day at which test will take place 0, 1 ... 22, 23 12 Battery Test Load Load resistance applied during test 2.5, 2.6 ... 99.9, 100 6.8ohms Battery Volts Drop Max step change in voltage allowed when test load is applied 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3, 3.25, 3.5 2.5V Description Range Default Cap Element Selects whether the Capacitor Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Cap Holdup Time If capacitor test load applied for this time & capacitor is still above test threshold the load test will be classed as a pass 0, 0.02 ... 9.9, 10 5s Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Setting 4.6.7. Battery Test Setting 4.6.8. Capacitor Test Setting 4.6.9. Power Quality (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 138 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.6.10.27SAG Description Range Default Gn 27Sag Element Selects whether the 27Sag Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage below which 27Sag SARFI is raised 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 70% Gn 27Sag VTS Block Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 27Sag SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 27Sag STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. If voltage dip longer than this time it is classed as an interruption. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Description Range Default Gn 59Swell Element Selects whether the 59Swell Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59Swell SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage above which 59 SARFI is raised. 110, 120, 130, 140 120% Gn 59Swell SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 59Swell SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 59Swell STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Setting 4.6.11. 59SWELL (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 139 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.7. Control & Logic 4.7.1. Autoreclsoe Prot'n Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Inst Trips Selects which phase fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) -------- Gn 79 E/F Inst Trips Selects which earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) -------- Gn 79 SEF Inst Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) -------- Gn 79 P/F Delayed Trips Selects which phase fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips Selects which earth fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault elements are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 Gn 79 P/F HS Trips Selects which phase fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) ---- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 140 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F HS Trips Selects which earth fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) ---- Description Range Default Gn 79 Autoreclose If disabled then all attempts to control the AR IN/OUT status will fail and the AR will be permanently Out Of Service. When enabled the AR IN/OUT state may be controlled via the CONTROL MODE menu option, via Binary Input or via local or remote communications. Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 79 Num Shots Selects the number of auto-reclose attempts before the Autorecloser locks out 1, 2, 3, 4 1 Gn 79 Retry Enable Selects whether the Retry close functionality is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 79 Retry Attempts Selects the number of retries allowed per shot 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 1 Gn 79 Retry Interval Time delay between retries 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Reclose Blocked Delay Specifies the maximum time that the Autorecloser can be blocked before proceeding to the lockout state. (NOTE: The block delay timer only starts after the Deadtime.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Sequence Fail Timer Time before lockout occurs on an incomplete reclose sequence. (i.e Trip & starter conditions have not been cleared after Sequence Fail Time.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Minimum LO Delay The time after entering lockout before any further external close commands are allowed. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn 79 Reset LO By Timer Select whether Lockout is automatically reset after a time delay. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Sequence Co-ord Selects whether Sequence co-ordination functionality is used or not. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Cold Load Action Selects whether whist Cold Load is active the relay will perform only Delayed Trips or not. Off, Delayed Off Setting 4.7.2. Autoreclose Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 141 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.7.2.1. P/F Shots Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 P/F Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s 4.7.2.2. Setting E/F Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 142 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s 4.7.2.3. Setting SEF Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 143 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked 4.7.2.4. Setting Extern Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 144 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 Extern Trips To Lockout Selects how many external trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn Line Check Trip Selects whether line check trip is enabled, if enabled no AR sequence initiated Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn P/F Line Check Trip Selects whether a phase fault line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn E/F Line Check Trip Selects whether an earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn SEF Line Check Trip Selects whether a sensitive earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn Extern Line Check Trip Selects whether an external line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Setting 4.7.3. Manual Close (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 145 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.7.4. Circuit Breaker Description Range Default Gn Close CB Delay Delay between a Close CB control being received and the Close CB contacts being operated to allow operator walk away. 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 10000ms Gn Close CB Pulse Specifies the duration of the circuit breaker close pulse 0.1, 0.2 ... 59.9, 60 2s Gn Reclaim Timer The period of time after a CB has closed and remained closed before the reclosure is deemed to be successful and the AR is reinitialised. If the CB remains open at the end of the reclaim time then the AR goes to lockout. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn Blocked Close Delay Selects the maximum time that the manual Close CB may be blocked by interlocking before the command or control is cancelled. The relay will signal "Blocked by Interlocking". 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn Open CB Delay Delay between an Open CB control being received and the Open CB contacts being operated. 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 10000ms Gn Open CB Pulse Selects the maximum time of the Open CB pulse. If the CB is not closed when this timer expires then an alarm will be raised to signify failure to close. 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2 1s Gn CB Travel Alarm Selects the maximum time that the CB should take to either Open or Close before a failure is recorded. 0.01, 0.02 ... 1.99, 2 1s Gn CB Controls Latched Selects whether Binary Input triggers of Close CB and Open CB are latched. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Description Range Default Gn A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 10V Gn X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V Gn X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 10V 4.7.5. Setting Live/Dead (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 146 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.7.6. LOV Automation Description Range Default Gn LOV-A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live. 5, 5.5 ... 79.5, 80 50V Gn LOV-A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead. 5, 5.5 ... 79.5, 80 10V Gn LOV-X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live. 5, 5.5 ... 79.5, 80 50V Gn LOV-X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead. 5, 5.5 ... 79.5, 80 10V Gn LOV Automation When set to Disabled, no LOV Automation elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn LOV Plant Device Type Selects the appropriate functionality for the type of device. NOP(TIE), Feeder, Recloser Recloser Gn LOV Start Option The required voltage loss can be single phase or all phases. All Dead, Any Dead All Dead Gn LOV Primed Interlock When set to Enabled, the correct voltage & CB position must be seen before the LOV element will Prime, when Disabled only correct CB position is required. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn LOV Primed Time Time that the primed condition has to be present for before the LOV Automation is classed as primed. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn LOV Recloser Opening Select if a Recloser Type should open after LOV and reclose once voltage is restored or stay closed whilst waiting for voltage to be restored. Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn LOV Action Delay After Loss of Voltage for this length of time the LOV action starts. (Recloser & Feeder) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV-A Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the A Side. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn LOV-A Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the A Side for this length of time the LOV action starts. (NOP) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV-X Action Select whether the NOP is to operate for Loss of voltage on the X Side. Disabled, Enabled Enabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 147 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn LOV-X Action Delay After the Loss of Voltage on the X Side for this length of time the LOV action starts. (NOP) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV Sequence Time Time allowed after LOV Action Delay for a NOP to close and Voltage to reappear. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV Reclose Delay When "Gn LOV Recloser Opening" is Enabled, the voltage must be re-established for this length of time before the Recloser will close. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn LOV SOTF Time For this length of time after a recloser has been closed, due to an LOV Automation operation, all Instantaneous protections will be allowed to operate. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn LOV Reclaim Time For this length of time after the "Gn LOV SOTF Time" all Instantaneous protections will be inhibited. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV Memory Time Length of time that NOP will remain primed for after losing voltage on both sides. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn LOV Operation LOV sequences can be single shot or repeated. Multi, Single Multi Description Range Default Quick Logic Enable or Disable all logic equations Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E1 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E1 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Setting 4.7.7. Quick Logic (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 148 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E1 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E1 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E1 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E2 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E2 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E2 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E2 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E3 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E3 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 149 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E3 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E3 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E3 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E4 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E4 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E4 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E4 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E4 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E5 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 150 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E5 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E5 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E5 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E5 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E6 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E6 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E6 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E6 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 151 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E6 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E7 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E7 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E7 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E7 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E7 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E8 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E8 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E8 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 152 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E8 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E8 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E8 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E9 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E9 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E9 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E9 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E9 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E10 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E10 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 153 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E10 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E10 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E10 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E11 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E11 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E11 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E11 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E11 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E12 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 154 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E12 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E12 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E12 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E12 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E13 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E13 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E13 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E13 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 155 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E13 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E14 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E14 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E14 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E14 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E14 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E15 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E15 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E15 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 156 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E15 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E15 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E15 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E16 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E16 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E16 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E16 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E16 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 157 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.8. Input Config 4.8.1. Input Matrix Description Range Default Inhibit 51-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 158 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit Wattmetric Selects which inputs inhibit the Wattmetric power element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 64H Selects which inputs inhibit the 64H element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 46IT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46IT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 46DT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46DT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 37-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 37-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 49 Selects which inputs inhibit the 49 thermal element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset 49 Selects which inputs resets the 49 thermal model element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 159 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 27/59-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 27/59-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit Vx 27/59 Selects which inputs inhibit the Vx 27/59 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 47-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 47-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 59NIT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N IDMTL/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 59NDT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N INST/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 81-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 81-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 81-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 81-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 60CTS Selects which inputs inhibit the CT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 46BC Selects which inputs inhibit the 46 Broken Conductor element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 74TCS-1 Selects which inputs are monitoring trip circuits Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 74TCS-2 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 74TCS-3 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 81HBL2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81HBL2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit LOV Selects which inputs inhibit the Loss of Voltage element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 160 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Trig Trip Contacts Selects which inputs will trigger the Trip contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 50BF Selects which inputs inhibit the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 50BF CB Faulty Selects which input bypasses the 50BF timer due to a fault CB Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 50BF Mech Trip Selects which input allows a mechanical trip to start the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 50BF Ext Trip Selects which inputs can also start the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 60VTS Selects which inputs inhibit the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Ext Trig 60VTS Selects MCB inputs to VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Ext Reset 60VTS Selects which inputs reset the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 60VTS-X Selects which inputs inhibit the VT Supervision element on the xyz VTs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Ext Trig 60VTS-X Selects MCB inputs to VT Supervision element on the xyz VTs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Ext Reset 60VTS-X Selects which inputs reset the VT Supervision element on the xyz VTs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset CB Total Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Total Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset CB Ph A Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph A Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Ph B Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph B Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Ph C Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Ph C Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB E/F Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB E/F Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Reset CB Delta Trip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Delta Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 161 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reset ARBlock Count Selects which inputs Reset the AR Block count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset Freq Ops Count Selects which inputs Reset the Frequent Ops count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset CB LO Count Selects which inputs Reset the CB Lockout operations count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset I^2t CB Wear Selects which inputs Reset the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Trigger I^2t CB Wear Selects which inputs will cause an external trigger of the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 1 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 1 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 2 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 2 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 3 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 3 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 4 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 4 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 5 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 5 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 6 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 6 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 7 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 7 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 8 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 8 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 9 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 9 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 10 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 10 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 11 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 11 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- General Alarm 12 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 12 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 162 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- ExtPowerGood Selects which inputs are used to indicate External power to battery is good. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- InhibitBatteryTest Selects which inputs will inhibit a Battery test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- CapMon Input 1 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 1. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- CapMon Input 2 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 2. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Capacitor Test Selects which inputs will initiate a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit Cap Test Selects which inputs will inhibit a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset SagSwell Count Selects which inputs will reset the 27Sag & 59Swell counts. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 27Sag Selects which inputs will inhibit the 27Sag elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit 59Swell Selects which inputs will inhibit the 59Swell elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset Demand Selects which inputs will rest the Demand elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inhibit Fault Locator Selects which inputs will inhibit the Fault Locator Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Close CB Selects which inputs will issue a close to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Block Close CB Selects which inputs will block the manual closing of the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Open CB Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- CB Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- CB Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 163 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Out Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser out of service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 In Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser in service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Reclose Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & reclose Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & lockout Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Ext Trip Selects which input will start the external an Auto-relose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Ext Pickup Selects which input should be connected to the pickup of the external elements required to start an Auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Block Reclose Selects which inputs will block the Autorecloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Reset Lockout Selects which inputs will force the Autorecloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Line Check Selects which inputs will start the Line Check functionality of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- 79 Lockout Selects which inputs will force the Autorecloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Hot Line Out Selects which inputs will switch out Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Hot Line In Selects which inputs will switch in Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inst Prot'n Out Selects which inputs will switch out the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Inst Prot'n In Selects which inputs will switch in the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- E/F Out Selects which inputs will switch out the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- E/F In Selects which inputs will switch in the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- SEF Out Selects which inputs will switch out the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 164 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default SEF In Selects which inputs will switch in the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- LOV Out Selects which inputs will switch out the LOV Automation Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- LOV In Selects which inputs will switch in the LOV Automation Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Trigger Wave Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a waveform record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Trigger Fault Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a fault record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 1 Switches active setting group to group 1 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset Energy Meters Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 2 Switches active setting group to group 2 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 3 Switches active setting group to group 3 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 4 Switches active setting group to group 4 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 5 Switches active setting group to group 5 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 6 Switches active setting group to group 6 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 7 Switches active setting group to group 7 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Select Group 8 Switches active setting group to group 8 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Out Of Service Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Local Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Local Or Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 165 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Clock Sync. Selects which input is used to synchronise the real time clock Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Reset LEDs & O/Ps Selects which inputs will reset the latched LEDs and binary outputs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------- Description Range Default Open CB Selects which function key will Open the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Close CB Selects which function key will Close the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Autoreclose In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Reclose Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & reclose Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Lockout Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & lockout Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Hot Line Work In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Hot Line Working In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ E/F In/Out Selects which function key will toggle E/F protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ SEF In/Out Selects which function key will toggle SEF protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Inst Prot'n In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Instantaneous protection elements In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ LOV In/Out Selects which function key will toggle LOV Automation In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Or Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Setting 4.8.2. Function Key Matrix (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 166 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 4.8.3. Binary Input Config Description Range Default Inverted Inputs Selects which inputs pickup when voltage is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 ) ---------------------- BI 1 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 1 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 2 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 2 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 3 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 3 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 4 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 4 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 5 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 5 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 6 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 6 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 7 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 7 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 8 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 8 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 9 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 9 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 10 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 10 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 11 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 167 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 11 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 12 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 12 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 13 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 13 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 14 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 14 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 15 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 15 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 16 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 16 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 17 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 17 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 18 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 18 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 19 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 19 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 20 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 20 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 21 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 21 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 22 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 22 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 23 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 168 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 23 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s Enabled In Local Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Local' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23 Description Range Default Function Key 1 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 1 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 2 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 3 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 4 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 5 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 6 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 7 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 8 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 8 Function Key 9 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 9 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 9 Setting 4.8.4. Function Key Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 169 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Function Key 10 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 10 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 10 Function Key 11 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 11 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 12 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 12 Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) -----------1668183366 Description Range Default General Alarm-1 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 1 (16 Character String) ALARM 1 General Alarm-2 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 2 (16 Character String) ALARM 2 General Alarm-3 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 3 (16 Character String) ALARM 3 General Alarm-4 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 4 (16 Character String) ALARM 4 General Alarm-5 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 5 (16 Character String) ALARM 5 General Alarm-6 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 6 (16 Character String) ALARM 6 General Alarm-7 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 7 (16 Character String) ALARM 7 General Alarm-8 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 8 (16 Character String) ALARM 8 General Alarm-9 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 9 (16 Character String) ALARM 9 General Alarm-10 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 10 (16 Character String) ALARM 10 General Alarm-11 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 11 (16 Character String) ALARM 11 Setting 4.8.5. General Alarms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 170 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default General Alarm-12 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 12 (16 Character String) ALARM 12 Description Range Default Protection Healthy Relays selected are energised whilst relay self-monitoring does NOT detect any hardware or software errors and DC Supply is healthy. A changeover contact or normally closed contact may be used to generate Protection Defective from this output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) BO1 51-1 51-1 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 51-2 51-2 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 51-3 51-3 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 51-4 51-4 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50-1 50-1 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50-2 50-2 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50-3 50-3 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50-4 50-4 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 51G-1 51G-1 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-2 51G-2 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-3 51G-3 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 51G-4 51G-4 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 Setting 4.9. Output Config 4.9.1. Output Matrix (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 171 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 50G-1 50G-1 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-2 50G-2 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-3 50G-3 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 50G-4 50G-4 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L4 Wattmetric Po> Wattmetric residual power operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 51SEF-1 51SEF-1 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-2 51SEF-2 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-3 51SEF-3 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 51SEF-4 51SEF-4 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-1 50SEF-1 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-2 50SEF-2 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-3 50SEF-3 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 50SEF-4 50SEF-4 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L5 64H 64H Restricted Earth Fault element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Cold Load Active Cold Load settings are active Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 46IT IDMTL/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 46DT INST/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 37 PhA 37 Under Current operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 172 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 37 PhB 37 Under Current operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37 PhC 37 Under Current operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 37-1 37-1 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 37-2 37-2 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 49 Trip Thermal capacity trip operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 49 Alarm Thermal capacity alarm operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27/59-1 Under/Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27/59-2 Under/Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27/59-3 Under/Overvoltage stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27/59-4 Under/Overvoltage stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27/59 PhA 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59 PhB 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 27/59 PhC 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Vx 27/59 Under/Overvoltage Vx stage operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- ABC Live All phases considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- A Live A phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- B Live B phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- C Live C phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 173 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default XYZ Live All phases considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- X Live A phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Y Live B phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Z Live C phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- ABC Dead All phases considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- A Dead A phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- B Dead B phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- C Dead C phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- XYZ Dead All phases considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- X Dead A phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Y Dead B phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Z Dead C phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 47-1 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 47-2 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 59NIT Neutral Overvoltage IDMTL/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 59NDT Neutral Overvoltage INST/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 81-1 Under/Over frequency stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 81-2 Under/Over frequency stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 174 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 81-3 Under/Over frequency stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 81-4 Under/Over frequency stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 60CTS CT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 46BC 46 Broken Conductor element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 74TCS-1 Trip Circuit 1 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 74TCS-2 Trip Circuit 2 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 74TCS-3 Trip Circuit 3 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 81HBL2 nd 81HBL2 2 harmonic blocking operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- General Pickup General Pickup operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV ABC Live Phase A or Phase B or Phase C is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV XYZ Live Phase X or Phase Y or Phase Z is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV A Live Phase A is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV B Live Phase B is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV C Live Phase C is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV X Live Phase X is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Y Live Phase Y is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Z Live Phase Z is classed as being Live Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Primed The prime conditions have been met and Loss Of Voltage Automation will start when the voltage is lost. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 175 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default LOV In Progress Loss Of Voltage Automation is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Fail Loss Of Voltage Automation did not complete successfully. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV A Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase A was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV X Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase X was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV B Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase B was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Y Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase Y was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV C Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase C was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Z Loss Of Voltage Automation has been performed and Phase Z was involved. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50BF-1 Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50BF-2 Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 60VTS VT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 60VTS-X VT Supervision element for x,y.x phases operated. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 50BF PhA 50BF element operated for current on phase A Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF PhB 50BF element operated for current on phase B Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF PhC 50BF element operated for current on phase C Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- 50BF EF 50BF element operated for Earth Fault current Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Total Trip Count Total CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Ph A Trip Count Ph A CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 176 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default CB Ph B Trip Count Ph B CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Ph C Trip Count Ph C CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB E/F Trip Count E/F CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- CB Delta Trip Count Delta CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Count To ARBlock Count To AR Block CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Freq Ops Count CB Frequent Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB LO Handle Ops CB Lockout Handle Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- I^2t CB Wear I^2t CB Wear limit exceeded Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Battery Test Battery Test is in progress. This can be used to disable battery charger during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Battery Load Test Battery Load Test is in progress. This can be used to apply the battery test load during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Battery Test Pass Indicates whether the last battery test passed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Battery Test Fail Indicates whether the last battery test failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Recovery Fail Indicates whether the battery failed to recover back to its pre-test voltage after last battery test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Ext. Power Good Indicates whether the external battery supply is ok. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Battery Healthy Indicates whether the current battery voltage is healthy Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Capacitor Ready Indicates whether the current capacitor status is ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CapacitorSupplyFail Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Supply Failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 177 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Capacitor Only Trip Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Only Trip. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Capacitor DBI Indicates whether the current capacitor status is DBI condition. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Cap Test Active Capacitor Test is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Cap Test Pass Indicates whether the last capacitor test passed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Cap Test Fail Indicates whether the last capacitor test failed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Cap Recovery Fail Indicates whether the capacitor voltage failed to recover after the last capacitor test. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole1 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole2 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole3 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole1 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole2 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole3 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- En100 Life Indicates IEC 61850 processor running Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- En100 Error Indicates IEC 61850 processor detects error Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- IEC 61850 Configured Indicates IEC 61850 is congigured Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Phase A A phase A element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L1 Phase B A phase B element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L2 Phase C A phase C element operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) L3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 178 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Forward P/F The Phase fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Reverse P/F The Phase fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Forward E/F The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Reverse E/F The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Forward SEF The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Reverse SEF The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Close CB Blocked Indicates that the Close CB control is blocked by its interlocking logic. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Open CB Open pulse due to Manual Open being issued. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Alarm Indicates the CB is either in an illegal state or is stuck neither open or closed. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Closed Indicates that the circuit breaker is in the closed position. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- CB Open Indicates that the circuit breaker is in the open position. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Manual Close CB Close pulse due to Manual close being issued Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 AR Close CB Close pulse due to auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Reclose Indicates the Trip & Reclose sequence being performed Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout Indicates the Trip & Lockout sequence being performed Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Lockout Indicates the auto-recloser is in the Lockout state Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 179 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Out Of Service Indicates the auto-recloser is out of service Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 In Service Indicates the auto-recloser is in service Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 In Progress Indicates an auto-reclose sequence is in progress Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Block Extern Indicates that Extern for the current shot has been selected to be delayed. (This may be used to block external tripping elements in the same way as the internal protection elements are blocked to achieve Instantaneous / Delayed operation.) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 CB Fail To Close Indicates the CB was not closed at the end of the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Close Onto Fault Indicates an element starter or trip operated during the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Successful AR Indicates that after a reclose and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- 79 Last Trip Lockout Indicates that the Autoreclose reached Lockout due to a trip on the final shot Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Successful Man Close Indicates that after a manual close and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Hot Line Working Indicates that Hot LineWorking functionality has been selected Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Inst Prot'n Out Indicates that the protection elements selected to be Instantaneous elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E/F Out Indicates that the instantaneous protection elements are switched out. Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- SEF Out Indicates that the SEF protection elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- LOV Out Selects which inputs will switch out the LOV Automation Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- New Wave Stored The waveform recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 180 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default New Fault Stored The fault recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- +ve P (3P) Real Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- -ve P (3P) Real Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- +ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- -ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Active Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Reactive Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Reactive Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Out Of Service Mode Indicates the relay is in Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Local Mode Indicates the relay is in Local Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Remote Mode Indicates the relay is in Remote Mode Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Active Settings Group 1 Indicates the relay is using settings group 1 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 2 Indicates the relay is using settings group 2 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 3 Indicates the relay is using settings group 3 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 4 Indicates the relay is using settings group 4 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 5 Indicates the relay is using settings group 5 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 6 Indicates the relay is using settings group 6 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 181 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Active Settings Group 7 Indicates the relay is using settings group 7 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- Active Settings Group 8 Indicates the relay is using settings group 8 Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 1 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 1 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 2 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 2 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 3 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 3 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 4 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 4 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 5 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 5 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 6 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 6 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 7 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 7 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 8 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 8 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 9 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 9 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 10 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 10 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 11 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 11 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 12 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 12 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 13 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 13 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 14 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 14 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 15 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 15 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 182 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default User Output 16 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 16 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 17 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 17 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 18 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 18 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 19 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 19 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 20 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 20 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 21 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 21 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 22 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 22 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 23 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 23 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 24 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 24 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 25 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 25 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 26 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 26 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 27 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 27 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 28 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 28 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 29 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 29 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 30 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 30 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 31 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 31 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- User Output 32 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 32 is raised Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ----------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 183 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 1 Operated DC Binary Input 1 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 2 Operated DC Binary Input 2 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 3 Operated DC Binary Input 3 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 4 Operated DC Binary Input 4 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 5 Operated DC Binary Input 5 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 6 Operated DC Binary Input 6 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 7 Operated DC Binary Input 7 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 8 Operated DC Binary Input 8 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 9 Operated DC Binary Input 9 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 10 Operated DC Binary Input 10 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 11 Operated DC Binary Input 11 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 12 Operated DC Binary Input 12 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 13 Operated DC Binary Input 13 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 14 Operated DC Binary Input 14 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 15 Operated DC Binary Input 15 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 16 Operated DC Binary Input 16 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 17 Operated DC Binary Input 17 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 18 Operated DC Binary Input 18 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 184 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 19 Operated DC Binary Input 19 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 20 Operated DC Binary Input 20 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 21 Operated DC Binary Input 21 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 22 Operated DC Binary Input 22 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- BI 23 Operated DC Binary Input 23 has operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E1 Quick Logic equation 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E2 Quick Logic equation 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E3 Quick Logic equation 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E4 Quick Logic equation 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E5 Quick Logic equation 5 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E6 Quick Logic equation 6 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E7 Quick Logic equation 7 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E8 Quick Logic equation 8 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E9 Quick Logic equation 9 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E10 Quick Logic equation 10 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E11 Quick Logic equation 11 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E12 Quick Logic equation 12 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E13 Quick Logic equation 13 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 185 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E14 Quick Logic equation 14 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E15 Quick Logic equation 15 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- E16 Quick Logic equation 16 operated Combination of ( BO1 BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------------- Description Range Default Trip Contacts The Binary Outputs selected by this setting are classed as Trip contacts. (When any of these BOs operate the Trip LED is lit, CB Fail is started, if enabled, & a Fault Record is stored) Combination of ( BO1 BO30 ) --------------------- Hand Reset Outputs Relays selected, as Hand Reset will remain latched until manually reset from front panel or via communications link or by removing DC Supply. By default relays are Self Resetting and will reset when the driving signal is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 ) --------------------- Min Operate Time 1 Minimum operate time of output relay if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 2 Minimum operate time of output relay 2 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 3 Minimum operate time of output relay 3 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 4 Minimum operate time of output relay 4 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 5 Minimum operate time of output relay 5 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 6 Minimum operate time of output relay 6 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 7 Minimum operate time of output relay 7 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Setting 4.9.2. Binary Output Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 186 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Min Operate Time 8 Minimum operate time of output relay 8 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 9 Minimum operate time of output relay 9 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 10 Minimum operate time of output relay 10 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 11 Minimum operate time of output relay 11 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 12 Minimum operate time of output relay 12 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 13 Minimum operate time of output relay 13 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 14 Minimum operate time of output relay 14 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 15 Minimum operate time of output relay 15 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 16 Minimum operate time of output relay 16 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 17 Minimum operate time of output relay 17 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 18 Minimum operate time of output relay 18 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 19 Minimum operate time of output relay 19 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 20 Minimum operate time of output relay 20 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 21 Minimum operate time of output relay 21 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 187 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Min Operate Time 22 Minimum operate time of output relay 22 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Pulsed Outputs Selects which outputs are pulsed. The pulse width is set by the Min Operate Time setting for each output Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 ) --------------------- Description Range Default Self Reset LEDs LEDs selected, as Self Reset will automatically reset when the driving signal is removed. By default all LEDs are Hand Reset and must be manually reset either locally via the front fascia or remotely via communications. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 Green LEDs Selects which LEDs will be green when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) ------------------- Red LEDs Selects which LEDs will be red when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 Description Range Default Gn P/F Pickups When any of the selected pickups operate General Pickup is driven. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn E/F Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Voltage Pickups As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT Gn Freq Pickups As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 Setting 4.9.3. LED Config Setting 4.9.4. Pickup Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 188 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Misc Pickups As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 ) 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 Description Range Default Gn CB Total Trip Count Selects whether the CB Total Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Total Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Total Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB Phase Trip Counter Selects whether the phase segregated counters; CB Ph A Trip Count, CB Ph B Trip Count, CB Ph C Trip Count & CB E/F Trip Count, are enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Ph A Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph A trips allowed before CB Ph A Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase A 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Setting 4.10. Maintenance 4.10.1. CB Counters Setting Gn CB Total Trip Count Reset Resets CB Total Trip Count counter Gn CB Ph A Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph A Trip Count counter Gn CB Ph B Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph B trips allowed before CB Ph B Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase B Gn CB Ph B Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph B Trip Count counter Gn CB Ph C Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB Ph C trips allowed before CB Ph C Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50/51 element pickup on phase C Gn CB Ph C Trip Count Reset Resets CB Ph C Trip Count counter Gn CB E/F Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB E/F trips allowed before CB E/F Trip Count counter output operates. This counter is incremented when the Trip Output operates coincident with a 50G/51G element pickup or 50SEF/51SEF element operation (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 189 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB Delta Trip Count Selects whether the CB Delta Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Delta Trip Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Delta Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB Count To AR Block Selects whether the CB Count To AR Block counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Count To AR Block Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Count To AR Block counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB Freq Ops Count Selects whether the CB Frequent Operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB Freq Ops Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Frequent Operations Counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 10 Gn CB LO Handle Ops Selects whether the CB Lockout operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB LO Handle Ops Target Selects the number of CB Lockout handle operations allowed before CB LO Handle Ops Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Description Range Default Gn I^2t Counter Selects whether the I^2t CB Wear monitor is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn Alarm Limit Sets limit before alarm is issued 10, 11 ... 99000, 100000 10MA^2s Setting Gn CB E/F Trip Count Reset Resets CB E/F Trip Count counter Gn CB Delta Trip Count Reset Resets CB Delta Trip Count counter Gn CB Count To AR Block Reset Resets CB Count To AR Block counter Gn CB Freq Ops Count Reset Resets CB Frequent Operations Counter Gn CB LO Handle Ops Reset Resets CB Lockout Handle Operations Counter. 4.10.2. I^2T CB Wear (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 190 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Separation Time Sets the time for CB mechanism to start moving, time before contacts start to separate 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.02s Gn Clearance Time Time for CB to clear fault 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.04s Description Range Default Data Log Period Selects period between stored samples 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 5min Gn Demand Window The time window over which the Min, Max and Mean values are calculated. 1, 2 ... 23, 24 24hrs Gn Demand Window Type Method used to calculate Demand values. Fixed, Peak, Rolling Fixed Setting Reset I^2t Count Reset the CB wear count 4.10.3. Output Matrix Test 4.11. Data Storage 4.11.1. Demand/Data Log Setting Clear Data Log Clear the Data Log Gn Demand Reset Reset all Demand values 4.11.2. Waveform Storage Description Range Default Gn P/F Trig Storage Select which elements trigger a waveform record Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Gn E/F Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Misc Current Storage As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2, 49 Trip, 49 Alarm ) ------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 191 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Voltage Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) --------- Gn Freq Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) ---- Pre-trigger Storage Select Percentage of waveform record stored before the fault is triggered 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 20% Record Duration Select waveform record duration 10 Rec x 1 Sec, 5 Rec x 2 Sec, 2 Rec x 5 Sec, 1 Rec x 10 Sec 10 Rec x 1 Sec Description Range Default Gn Max Fault Rec Time Maximum time Fault record information will be stored and classed as same fault 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 2000ms Range Default Setting Description Range Default Setting Gn Active Exp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Active Imp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Reactive Exp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Gn Reactive Imp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Description Range Default COM1-RS485 Station Address Station Address for COM1-RS485 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 Trigger Waveform Trigger waveform storage Clear Waveforms Clear all stored waveform records 4.11.3. Fault Storage Setting Clear Faults Clear all stored fault records 4.11.4. Event Storage Description Clear Events Clear all stored event records 4.11.5. Energy Storage 4.12. Communications (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 192 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default COM1-RS485 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM1-RS485 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM1-RS485 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM1-RS485 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM1-RS485 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM1-RS485 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM3 Station Address Station Address for COM3 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM3 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM3 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM3 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM3 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 19200 COM3 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM3 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM3 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF COM3 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM4 Station Address Station Address for COM4 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM4 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM4 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 OFF COM4 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM4 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM4 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM4 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM4 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF COM4 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote DNP3 Unsolicited Events Allows unsolicited event support in the relay. When Enabled, unsolicited event transmission can be controlled by the Master. When Disabled, Master requests are ignored. Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 193 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default DNP3 Destination Address The address of the master to which unsolicited events will be sent. 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 DNP3 Application Timeout Specifies the response timeout for application layer confirmation 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s I101 Link Mode Specifies the Link Layer mode as balance or unbalanced Balanced, Unbalanced Unbalanced I101 Link Address Sets Link Address Field size. Not Present - Only used with balanced transmission"," 1 octet address range 0 - 254","2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Not Present, 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Common Address of Asdu Sets Common Address Field size. Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 0 - 254, 2 octets address range 0 65534 1 Octet , 2 Octets 2 Octets I101 Cause of Trans. (COT) Size of cause of transmission in octets. 1 octet - COT code, 2 octets - COT code + originator address or 0 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Info. Obj. Add. (IOA) Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 1 - 255, 2 octets address range 1 - 65535, 3 octets used to generate structured address format 1 Octet , 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octets I101 Asdu Address Address to use to identify ASDU layer 0, 1 ... 65534, 65535 3 I101 Cyclic Period Period device will generate cyclic data. Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically Off, 1 ... 3599, 3600 60s I101 Background Period Period device will generate background data. Set to Off to disable generating of background data. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background Off, 1 ... 1499, 1500 Off LAN Protocol Allows IEC60870-5-103 via Ethernet port Off, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5103 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 194 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5. Relay Settings - Standard Plus Single/Triple 5.1. System Config Description Range Default Language Setting Selects the language in which the relay text will be displayed. English, USA-English English 50, 60 50Hz Setting Dependencies When enabled only active settings are displayed and all others hidden Disabled, Enabled Enabled Favourite Meters Timer Selects the time delay after which, if no key presses have been detected, the relay will begin to poll through any screens which have been selected as favourite instruments Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 60min Backlight timer Controls when the LCD backlight turns off Off, 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 5min Curr Set Display Select whether the Pickup values are shown in terms of x Nominal, Primary or Secondary values on the Relay Fascia xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom E/F Curr Set Display As Above xNom, Primary, Secondary xNom Export Power/Lag VAr Selects the signs required for exporting power and lagging VArs +ve/+ve, +ve/-ve, -ve/+ve, ve/-ve +ve/+ve Select Grp Mode Mode of operation of the group change from status input. Edge triggered ignores the status input once it has changed to the relevant group, where as with Level triggered the relay will only stay in the group it has changed to whilst the status input is being driven, after which it returns to the previous group. Edge triggered, Level triggered Edge triggered Setting Active Group Selects which settings group is currently activated System Frequency Selects the Power System Frequency from 50 or 60 Hz View/Edit Group Selects which settings group is currently being displayed Date Sets the date, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date Time Sets the time, this setting can only be changed on the fascia or via Relay->Control>Set Time and Date (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 195 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Clock Sync. From BI Real time clock may be synchronised using a binary input (See Clock Sync. in Binary Input Menu) Disabled, Seconds, Minutes Minutes Operating Mode Selects the current operating mode of the relay. This can also be changed by a binary input mode selection. Out Of Service, Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Local Or Remote Setting Password Allows a 4 character alpha code to be entered as the password. Note that the display shows a password dependant encrypted code on the second line of the display (Password) NONE Control Password As Above (Password) NONE Trip Alert When Enabled the occurance of a Trip will cause the relay to display the Trip Alert Screen, the only way to leave this screen is by acknowledging the trip through the TEST/RESET button on the relay fascia Disabled, Enabled Enabled General Alarm Alert When Enabled the occurance of a General Alarm will cause the relay to display the General Alarm Screen, any relay fascia button being pressed will cancel this action and revert to the last screen being displayed prior to the alarm Disabled, Enabled Enabled Relay Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identifier the circuit the relay is attached to or the relays purpose (16 Character String) 7SR224 Circuit Identifier An alphanumeric string shown on the LCD normally used to identify the circuit name or relay's purpose (16 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 196 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.2. CT/VT Config Description Range Default Phase Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Phase Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Phase Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Phase Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Phase Voltage Config Required to allow for different types of physical VT connections. Van,Vbn,Vcn, Vab,Vbc,3V0, Va,Vb,Vc Van,Vbn,Vcn Phase VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Phase VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Vx Nom Voltage Selects the nominal voltage setting Vn of the voltage input Measuring range of V4, V5 & V6 is 132V RMS on 6xVT models. 40, 40.1 ... 159.9, 160 63.5V Vx Voltage Trim Magnitude Allows trimming of voltage magnitude, the setting value should be the voltage required to be added to get back to Vx Nom Voltage. 0, 0.1 ... 19.9, 20 0V Vx Voltage Trim Angle Allows trimming of voltage angle, the setting value is added to the current voltage angle -45, -44.9 ... 44.9, 45 0deg Vx VT Ratio Prim VT ratio Primary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments ( 6 Character String) 132000 Vx VT Ratio Sec VT ratio Secondary value, used to scale primary voltage instruments 40, 40.5 ... 159.5, 160 110 Phase Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for phase inputs 1, 5 1A Phase CT Ratio Prim Phase CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Phase CT Ratio Sec Phase CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 Earth Current Input Selects whether 1 or 5 Amp terminals are being used for Measured Earth inputs 1, 5 1A (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 197 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Earth CT Ratio Prim Measured Earth CT ratio primary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 2000 Earth CT Ratio Sec Measured Earth CT ratio secondary to scale primary current instruments ( 6 Character String) 1 I1, I2, I3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware current inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC V1, V2, V3 Connections Allocates phase reference letters to the relay hardware voltage inputs ABC, ACB, BAC, BCA, CAB,CBA ABC Phase Rotation Specifies the vectorial positive phase sequence order of the allocated phase references. This setting allows the relay to be applied on networks with abnormal phasor sequence. A,B,C A,C,B A,B,C Description Range Default Gn Phase Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no Phase Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Voltage Cont O/C When set to Disabled, no Voltage Cont O/C elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Cold Load When set to Disabled, no Cold Load elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Measured E/F When set to Disabled, no Measured E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Sensitive E/F When set to Disabled, no Sensitive E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Setting 5.3. Function Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 198 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Restricted E/F When set to Disabled, no Restricted E/F elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overcurrent When set to Disabled, no NPS Overcurrent elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Under Current When set to Disabled, no Under Current elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Thermal When set to Disabled, no Thermal elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Phase U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Phase U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Vx U/O Voltage When set to Disabled, no Vx U/O Voltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn NPS Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no NPS Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Neutral Overvoltage When set to Disabled, no Neutral Overvoltage elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 199 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn U/O Frequency When set to Disabled, no U/O Frequency elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Fail When set to Disabled, no CB Fail elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn VT Supervision When set to Disabled, no VT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CT Supervision When set to Disabled, no CT Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Broken Conductor When set to Disabled, no Broken Conductor elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Trip Cct Supervision When set to Disabled, no Trip Cct Supervision elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Inrush Detector When set to Disabled, no Inrush Detector elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn CB Counters When set to Disabled, no Gn CB Counter elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 200 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn I^2t CB Wear When set to Disabled, no Gn I^2t CB Wear elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Battery Test When set to Disabled, no Battery Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn Capacitor Test When set to Disabled, no Capacitor Test elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 27Sag & 59Swell When set to Disabled, no 27Sag & 59Swell elements will be functional and all associated settings will be hidden. (The Setting Dependencies setting being set to Disabled will make all settings visible but will not allow them to operate). Enabled, Disabled Disabled Description Range Default Gn 67 Char Angle Maximum torque angle for phase overcurrent elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 45deg Gn 67 Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 1, 1.5 ... 19.5, 20 1V Gn 67 2-out-of-3 Logic Selects whether 2 out of 3 voting logic is enabled for phase overcurrent elements Enabled, Disabled Disabled Gn 51/50 Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51 & 50 elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency RMS, Fundamental RMS Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Element Selects whether the 51-1 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 5.4. Current Prot'n 5.4.1. Phase Overcurrent 5.4.1.1. Setting 51-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 201 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-2 Element Selects whether the 51-2 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s 5.4.1.2. Setting 51-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 202 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51-3 Element Selects whether the 51-3 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 5.4.1.3. Setting 51-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 203 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.4.1.4. 51-4 Description Range Default Gn 51-4 Element Selects whether the 51-4 IDMTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-1 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off 5.4.1.5. Setting 50-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 204 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-2 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-3 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50-3 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50-4 Element Selects whether the INST/ DTL Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir 5.4.1.6. 5.4.1.7. 5.4.1.8. Setting 50-2 Setting 50-3 Setting 50-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 205 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50-4 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 49.5, 50 1xIn Gn 50-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51V Element Selects whether the Voltage Controlled Overcurrent element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51V Setting The voltage below which 51V operates 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 30V Gn 51V VTS Action Selects whether or not the 51V element is blocked when VTS operates Off, Inhibit Off Gn 51-1 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-1 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-2 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-2 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-3 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-3 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Gn 51-4 Multiplier Multiplier applied to the 51-4 element when VCO element has operated 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.5 Description Range Default Cold Load Selects whether the Cold Load element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Pick-up Time Cold Load operate time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Drop-off Time Cold Load reset time delay 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Reduced Current Selects whether reduced current functionality is to be used Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 5.4.2. Voltage Cont O/C Setting 5.4.3. Cold Load (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 206 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reduced Current Level Selects current level below which Reduced Current Time is used for Cold Load reset delay 0.05, 0.1 ... 2.45, 2.5 0.25xIn Reduced Current Time Cold Load reset time delay used when reduced current active 1, 1.1 ... 14100, 14400 600s Gn 51c-1 Setting 51-1 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-1 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-1 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-1 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-1 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-2 Setting 51-2 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-2 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-2 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-2 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-2 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-3 Setting 51-3 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-3 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-3 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-3 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-3 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 207 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51c-3 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51c-4 Setting 51-4 element parameter used when Cold Load operates 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 1xIn Gn 51c-4 Char As Above DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51c-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) As Above 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51c-4 Delay (DTL) As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51c-4 Min Operate Time As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-4 Follower DTL As Above 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51c-4 Reset As Above (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 67G Char Angle Maximum torque angle for measured earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67G Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3 0.33V Gn 51G/50G Measurement Selects whether the RMS value used by the 51G & 50G elements is True RMS or only calculated at fundamental frequency. Calculated setting switches the current source from measured at I4 to derived from sum of I1-I3 RMS, Fundamental, Calculated RMS Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Element Selects whether the 51G-1 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Setting 5.4.4. Measured E/F 5.4.4.1. Setting 51G-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 208 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-2 Element Selects whether the 51G-2 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 5.4.4.2. Setting 51G-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 209 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.4.4.3. 51G-3 Description Range Default Gn 51G-3 Element Selects whether the 51G-3 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51G-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Element Selects whether the 51G-4 IDMTL measured Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.5xIn Gn 51G-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51G-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 5.4.4.4. Setting 51G-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 210 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51G-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51G-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51G-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 51G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 51G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-1 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-1 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s 5.4.4.5. 5.4.4.6. Setting 50G-1 Setting 50G-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 211 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50G-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-2 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-2 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-3 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-3 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off Description Range Default Gn 50G-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50G-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50G-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50G-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 24.95, 25 0.5xIn Gn 50G-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50G-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50G-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Gn 50G-4 Inrush Action Selects if the 50G-4 element is blocked from operating when 2nd Harmonic Inrush Detector operates Off, Inhibit Off 5.4.4.7. 5.4.4.8. Setting 50G-3 Setting 50G-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 212 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.4.5. Sensitive E/F Description Range Default Gn 67SEF Char Angle Maximum torque angle for sensitive earth fault elements -95, -94 ... 94, 95 -15deg Gn 67SEF Minimum Voltage Selects the directional elements minimum voltage, below which the element will be inhibited 0.33, 0.5 ... 66.5, 67 0.33V Gn 67SEF Compensated Network When Enabled the directional elements bounderies are widened to +- 87.5 Degs Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric When set to Enabled, the SEF elements will operate using the Wattmetric principle Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 67SEF Wattmetric Power Specifies the residual power cutoff threshold used by the Wattmetric protection 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 0.1xInxW Gn 67SEF Ires Select Selects the current upon which the SEF elements operate as either only the real component of residual current or the total residual current Ires, Ires Real Ires Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-1 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-1 IDMTL Sensitive Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-1 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-1 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-1 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-1 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-1 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s 5.4.5.1. Setting 51SEF-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 213 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-2 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-2 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-2 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-2 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-2 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-2 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-2 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or DTL reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-3 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-3 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-3 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-3 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 5.4.5.2. 5.4.5.3. Setting 51SEF-2 Setting 51SEF-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 214 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-3 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-3 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-3 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 51SEF-4 Element Selects whether the 51SEF-4 IDMTL derived Earth Fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 51SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 51SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.995, 1 0.2xIn Gn 51SEF-4 Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI ... 201, 202 IEC-NI Gn 51SEF-4 Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 51SEF-4 Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 51SEF-4 Min Operate Time Minimum operate time of element. 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Follower DTL Additional definite time added after characteristic time 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 0s Gn 51SEF-4 Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Gn 51SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 51SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-1 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled 5.4.5.4. 5.4.5.5. Setting 51SEF-4 Setting 50SEF-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 215 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-1 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-1 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-1 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-1 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-2 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-2 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-2 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-2 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-2 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-3 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-3 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir Gn 50SEF-3 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-3 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-3 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-4 Element Selects whether the DTL measured Earth fault element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50SEF-4 Dir. Control Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is nondirectional, forward or reverse Non-Dir, Forward, Reverse Non-Dir 5.4.5.6. 5.4.5.7. 5.4.5.8. Setting 50SEF-2 Setting 50SEF-3 Setting 50SEF-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 216 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 50SEF-4 Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 4.995, 5 0.2xIn Gn 50SEF-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 50SEF-4 VTS Action Selects whether 50SEF-4 element is blocked or made non-directional when VTS operates Off, Inhibit, Non-Dir Off Description Range Default Gn 64H Element High impedance restricted earth fault current element Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 64H Setting Pickup level 0.005, 0.006 ... 0.945, 0.95 0.2xIn Gn 64H Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Description Range Default Gn 46IT Element Selects whether the 46IT IDMTL/DTL negative phase sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46IT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 2.49, 2.5 0.25xIn Gn 46IT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IEC or ANSI IDMTL or DTL DTL, IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI, ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI IEC-NI Gn 46IT Time Mult (IEC/ANSI) Time multiplier (applicable to IEC and ANSI curves but not DTL selection) 0.025, 0.030 ... 1.6, 1.7 ... 5, 6 ... 100 1 Gn 46IT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 46IT Reset Selects between an ANSI decaying reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 46DT Element Selects whether the 46DT INST/DTL negative sequence current element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46DT Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.06 ... 3.99, 4 0.1xIn Gn 46DT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s Setting 5.4.6. Restricted E/F Setting 5.4.7. NPS Overcurrent 5.4.7.1. 5.4.7.2. 46IT Setting 46DT (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 217 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.4.8. Under Current Description Range Default Gn 37-1 U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 37 Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.1xIn Description Range Default Gn 37-1 Element Phase under current element 37-1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-1 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-1 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-1 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes Gn 37-1 Start Option Specifies the 37-1 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All Description Range Default Gn 37-2 Element Phase under current element 37-2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 37-2 Setting Pickup level 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 37-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Gn 37-2 U/C Guarded Specifies whether the 37-2 element is subject to the undercurrent guard No, Yes Yes Gn 37-2 Start Option Specifies the 37-2 element as operting when any phase current is below setting or operating when all three phase currents are below setting All, Any All Description Range Default Gn 49 Thermal Overload Selects whether the thermal overload protection element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 49 Overload Setting Pickup level 0.1, 0.11 ... 2.99, 3 1.05xIn Gn 49 Time Constant Thermal time constant 1, 1.5 ... 999.5, 1000 10m 5.4.8.1. 5.4.8.2. Setting 37-1 Setting 37-2 Setting 5.4.9. Thermal (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 218 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 49 Capacity Alarm Selects whether thermal capacity alarm enabled Disabled, 50 ... 99, 100 Disabled Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Gn 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 1, 1.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Description Range Default Gn 27/59-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Setting 49 Reset Therm State Control that allows thermal state to be manually reset 5.5. Voltage Prot'n 5.5.1. Phase U/O Voltage 5.5.1.1. Setting 27/59-1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 219 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.5.1.2. 27/59-2 Description Range Default Gn 27/59-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V Gn 27/59-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No Gn 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No 5.5.1.3. Setting 27/59-3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 220 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn 27/59-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Gn 27/59-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Gn 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No Gn 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Description Range Default Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Specifies the voltage below which the Vx 27/59 element(s) will not indicate operation 1, 1.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guarded Specifies the Vx 27/59 element as operating when any phase voltage is below setting or operating when all three phase voltages are below setting No, Yes No Gn Vx 27/59 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element for Vx is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Gn Vx 27/59 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 80V 5.5.1.4. Setting 27/59-4 Setting 5.5.2. Vx U/O Voltage 5.5.2.1. 4 Voltage Input models (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 221 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn Vx 27/59 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for Vx U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Ph-N Gn Vx 27/59 U/V Guard Setting Specifies the voltage below which the Vx 27/59 element(s) will not indicate operation. 1, 1.5 ... 119.5, 120 5V 5V Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-1 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Over Gn Vx 27/59-1 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V Gn Vx 27/59-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-1 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-1 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any 5.5.2.2. 6 Voltage Input models 5.5.2.3. Vx 27/59-1 (6 Voltage input models) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 222 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.5.2.4. Vx 27/59-2 (6 Voltage input models) Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-2 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Over Over Gn Vx 27/59-2 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 80V 80V Gn Vx 27/59-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-2 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-2 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-3 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Under Gn Vx 27/59-3 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V Gn Vx 27/59-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Yes Gn Vx 27/59-3 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No 5.5.2.5. Vx 27/59-3 (6 Voltage input models) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 223 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-3 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any Description Range Default Setting Gn Vx 27/59-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over voltage element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Disabled Gn Vx 27/59-4 Operation Selects between Undervoltage and Overvoltage pickup for this element Under, Over Under Under Gn Vx 27/59-4 Setting Under or over voltage pickup level 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V 50V Gn Vx 27/59-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% 3% Gn Vx 27/59-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.1s 0.1s Gn Vx 27/59-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Yes Gn Vx 27/59-4 VTS Inhibit Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates No, Yes No No Gn Vx 27/59-4 O/P Phases Selects whether element operates for any phase picked up or only when all phases are picked up Any, All Any Any 5.5.2.6. Vx 27/59-4 (6 Voltage input models) 5.5.3. NPS Overvoltage 5.5.3.1. 47-1 Description Range Default Gn 47-1 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-1 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 224 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.5.3.2. 47-2 Description Range Default Gn 47-2 Element Selects whether the definite time NPS overvoltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 47-2 Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 89.5, 90 20V Gn 47-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to drop-off thresholds e.g. 3% picks up at setting and drops off below 97% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 3% Gn 47-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.5s Description Range Default Gn 59N Voltage Source Selects voltage source between calculated 3V0 (Vn) or measured 3V0 through Vx input Vn, Vx Vn Description Range Default Gn 59NIT Element Selects whether the inverse time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59NIT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NIT Char Selects characteristic curve to be IDMTL or DTL DTL, IDMTL IDMTL Gn 59NIT Time Mult (IDMTL) Time multiplier (applicable to IDMTL curve but not DTL selection) 0.1, 0.2 ... 139.5, 140 1 Gn 59NIT Delay (DTL) Delay (applicable only when DTL is selected for characteristic) 0, 0.01 ... 19.99, 20 5s Gn 59NIT Reset Selects between an instantaneous reset characteristic or a definite time reset (ANSI) Decaying, 0 ... 59, 60 0s Description Range Default Gn 59NDT Element Selects whether the definite time neutral over voltage element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59NDT Setting Pickup level 1, 1.5 ... 99.5, 100 5V Gn 59NDT Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.01s Setting 5.5.4. Neutral Overvoltage 5.5.4.1. 5.5.4.2. Setting 59NIT Setting 59NDT (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 225 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.5.5. U/O Frequency Description Range Default Gn 81 U/V Guard Setting Selects voltage level below which the guard element is applied. 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 5V Description Range Default Gn 81-1 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-1 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-1 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49.5Hz Gn 81-1 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-1 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 1s Gn 81-1 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes Description Range Default Gn 81-2 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-2 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-2 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 49Hz Gn 81-2 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-2 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.8s Gn 81-2 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes 5.5.5.1. 5.5.5.2. Setting 81-1 Setting 81-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 226 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.5.5.3. 81-3 Description Range Default Gn 81-3 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-3 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-3 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 48Hz Gn 81-3 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-3 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.6s Gn 81-3 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes 5.5.5.4. Setting 81-4 Description Range Default Gn 81-4 Element Selects whether the Under/Over frequency element stage 4 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81-4 Operation Selects between Underfrequency and Overfrequency pickup for this element Under, Over Under Gn 81-4 Setting Under or over frequency pickup level 40, 40.01 ... 69.98, 69.99 47.5Hz Gn 81-4 Hysteresis Sets the pickup to dropoff thresholds e.g. 3% on Overlevel picks up above pickup setting and drops off below 97% of setting, 3% on Underlevel picks up below setting and drops off above 103% of setting 0, 0.1 ... 79.9, 80 0.1% Gn 81-4 Delay Sets operate delay time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0.4s Gn 81-4 U/V Guarded Selects whether U/V Guard element can block the operation of this element No, Yes Yes (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 227 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.6. Supervision 5.6.1. CB Fail Description Range Default Gn 50BF Element Selects whether the Circuit Breaker Fail element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 50BF Setting Breaker Fail Current Pickup level. If the current falls below this level then the CB is deemed to have opened and the element is reset. 0.05, 0.055 ... 1.995, 2 0.2xIn Gn 50BF-I4 Setting 0.05, 0.055 ... 1.995, 2 0.05xIn Gn 50BF-1 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operates 0, 5 ... 59995, 60000 60ms Gn 50BF-2 Delay Delay before Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operates 0, 5 ... 59995, 60000 120ms Description Range Default Gn 60VTS Element Selects whether the VT supervision element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60VTS Component Selects whether NPS or ZPS quantities are used by the VT supervision element NPS, ZPS NPS Gn 60VTS V Level above which there is a possible 1 or 2 phase VT fuse failure 7, 8 ... 109, 110 7V Gn 60VTS I Level above which a 1 or 2 phase fault condition is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS Vpps Level below which there is a possible 3 phase VT fuse failure 1, 2 ... 109, 110 15V Gn 60VTS Ipps Load Level current must be above before 3 phase VTS will be issued 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60VTS Ipps Fault Level above which 3 phase fault is assumed so VTS inhibited 0.05, 0.1 ... 19.95, 20 10xIn Gn 60VTS Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Setting 5.6.2. VT Supervision (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 228 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.6.3. CT Supervision Description Range Default Gn 60CTS Element Selects whether the CT supervision element is enabled (NPS current in the absence of NPS voltage) Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 60CTS Inps Arm if NPS Current (Inps) is above this level 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2, 0.25, 0.3, 0.35, 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 0.65, 0.7, 0.75, 0.8, 0.85, 0.9, 0.95, 1 0.1xIn Gn 60CTS Vnps Inhibit if NPS Voltage (Vnps) is above this level 7, 8 ... 109, 110 10V Gn 60CTS Delay CTS Operate delay 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 10s Description Range Default Gn 46BC Element Selects whether the definite time broken conductor element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 46BC Setting NPS Current to PPS Current ratio 20, 21 ... 99, 100 20% Gn 46BC Delay Sets operate delay time 0.03, 0.04 ... 14300, 14400 20s Gn 46BC U/C Guard Setting Specifies the current below which the 46BC Undercurrent elements will not indicate operation 0.05, 0.1 ... 4.95, 5 0.25xIn Gn 46BC U/C Guarded Specifies whether undercurrent guard is applied to the 46BC element No, Yes No Description Range Default Gn 74TCS-1 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-1 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-1 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-2 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 74TCS-2 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Gn 74TCS-3 Selects whether the trip circuit supervision element 74TCS-3 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Setting 5.6.4. Broken Conductor Setting 5.6.5. Trip CCT Supervision (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 229 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 74TCS-3 Delay Time delay before trip circuit supervision operates 0, 0.02 ... 59.98, 60 0.4s Description Range Default Gn 81HBL2 Element Selects whether the phase inrush detector 81HBL2 is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 81HBL2 Bias Selects the bias method used for magnetising inrush. Phase - Segregated, each phase blocks itself. Cross - Blocked, each phase can block the operation of other phases. Sum - Of Squares, each phase blocks itself using the square root of the sum of squares of the 2nd harmonic. Phase, Cross, Sum Cross Gn 81HBL2 Setting The magnetising inrush detector operates when the 2nd harmonic current exceeds a set percentage of the fundamental current 0.1, 0.11 ... 0.49, 0.5 0.2xI Description Range Default Battery Element Selects whether the Battery Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Battery Nominal Voltage Selects battery nominal voltage 24, 30, 48, 110, 220 48V Battery Test Rate Frequency of battery tests Every 12 Hours, Every Day ... Every Nov 1st, Every Dec 1st Every Month 1st Battery Test Time Hour of the day at which test will take place 0, 1 ... 22, 23 12 Battery Test Load Load resistance applied during test 2.5, 2.6 ... 99.9, 100 6.8ohms Battery Volts Drop Max step change in voltage allowed when test load is applied 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, 3, 3.25, 3.5 2.5V Description Range Default Cap-A Element Selects whether the Capacitor Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Cap-A Holdup Time If capacitor test load applied for this time & capacitor is still above test threshold the load test will be classed as a pass 0, 0.02 ... 9.9, 10 5s Setting 5.6.6. Inrush Detector Setting 5.6.7. Battery Test Setting 5.6.8. Capacitor Test (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 230 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Cap-B Element Selects whether the Capacitor Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Cap-B Holdup Time If capacitor test load applied for this time & capacitor is still above test threshold the load test will be classed as a pass 0, 0.02 ... 9.9, 10 5s Cap-C Element Selects whether the Capacitor Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Cap-C Holdup Time If capacitor test load applied for this time & capacitor is still above test threshold the load test will be classed as a pass 0, 0.02 ... 9.9, 10 5s Description Range Default Gn Voltage Input Mode Selects Ph-Ph or Ph-N voltages for U/V guard element & 27/59 elements operation. Ph-N, Ph-Ph Ph-N Description Range Default Gn 27Sag Element Selects whether the 27Sag Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage below which 27Sag SARFI is raised 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 70% Gn 27Sag VTS Block Selects whether element is blocked or not when VTS operates Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 27Sag SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 27Sag SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 27Sag STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. If voltage dip longer than this time it is classed as an interruption. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Setting 5.6.9. Power Quality Setting 5.6.10. 27SAG (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 231 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.6.11. 59SWELL Description Range Default Gn 59Swell Element Selects whether the 59Swell Element is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 59Swell SARFI Threshold Percentage of nominal voltage above which 59 SARFI is raised. 110, 120, 130, 140 120% Gn 59Swell SIARFI Delay Time below which the SIARFI count is incremented. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 0.5s Gn 59Swell SMARFI Delay Time below which the SMARFI count is incremented, if greater than SIARFI Delay 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 5s Gn 59Swell STARFI Delay Time below which the STARFI count is incremented, if greater than SMARFI Delay. 0, 0.01 ... 55, 60 60s Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Inst Trips Selects which phase fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) -------- Gn 79 E/F Inst Trips Selects which earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) -------- Gn 79 SEF Inst Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault protection elements are classed as Instantaneous elements and start an autoreclose sequence. These will be blocked from operating during Delayed autoreclose sequences. See autoreclose section of manual for detail of what elements can cause only Delayed protection to be used. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) -------- Gn 79 P/F Delayed Trips Selects which phase fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 Setting 5.7. Control & Logic 5.7.1. Autoreclose Prot'n (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 232 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips Selects which earth fault protection are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips Selects which sensitive earth fault elements are classed as Delayed elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4 Gn 79 P/F HS Trips Selects which phase fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) ---- Gn 79 E/F HS Trips Selects which earth fault elements are classed as High Set elements, any selected elements operating will start an autoreclose sequence. Combination of ( 50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) ---- Description Range Default Gn Single Triple Mode Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO, Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO, Mode C 1PTrip1PLO Mode A 3PTrip3PLO Gn 79 Autoreclose If disabled then all attempts to control the AR IN/OUT status will fail and the AR will be permanently Out Of Service. When enabled the AR IN/OUT state may be controlled via the CONTROL MODE menu option, via Binary Input or via local or remote communications. Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 79 Num Shots Selects the number of auto-reclose attempts before the Autorecloser locks out 1, 2, 3, 4 1 Gn 79 Retry Enable Selects whether the Retry close functionality is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn 79 Retry Attempts Selects the number of retries allowed per shot 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 1 Gn 79 Retry Interval Time delay between retries 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Reclose Blocked Delay Specifies the maximum time that the Autorecloser can be blocked before proceeding to the lockout state. (NOTE: The block delay timer only starts after the Deadtime.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Setting 5.7.2. Autoreclose Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 233 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 Sequence Fail Timer Time before lockout occurs on an incomplete reclose sequence. (i.e Trip & starter conditions have not been cleared after Sequence Fail Time.) 0, 1 ... 599, 600 60s Gn 79 Minimum LO Delay The time after entering lockout before any further external close commands are allowed. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn 79 Reset LO By Timer Select whether Lockout is automatically reset after a time delay. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Sequence Co-ord Selects whether Sequence co-ordination functionality is used or not. Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn 79 Cold Load Action Selects whether whist Cold Load is active the relay will perform only Delayed Trips or not. Off, Delayed Off Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 P/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s 5.7.2.1. Setting P/F Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 234 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth phase fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 PhA HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 PhB HS Trips To Lockout As Above 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 PhC HS Trips To Lockout As Above 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 PhA Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 PhB Delayed Trips To Lockout As Above 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 PhC Delayed Trips To Lockout As Above 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s 5.7.2.2. Setting E/F Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 235 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn 79 E/F Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth earth fault trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 E/F HS Trips To Lockout Selects how many High Set trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Gn 79 E/F Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth sensitive earth fault trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Delayed Gn 79 SEF Delayed Trips To Lockout Selects how many Delayed trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 5.7.2.3. Setting SEF Shots (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 236 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.7.2.4. Extern Shots Description Range Default Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 1 Selects whether the first external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 1 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 0.08, 0.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 2 Selects whether the second external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 2 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 3 Selects whether the third external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 3 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 2, 2.1 ... 14300, 14400 5s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 4 Selects whether the fourth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Deadtime 4 Time period between the fault being cleared and the close pulse being issued 30, 30.1 ... 14300, 14400 30s Gn 79 Extern Prot'n Trip 5 Selects whether the fifth external trip is Instantaneous or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Gn 79 Extern Trips To Lockout Selects how many external trips are allowed before going to Lockout 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 5 Description Range Default Gn Line Check Trip Selects whether line check trip is enabled, if enabled no AR sequence initiated Disabled, Enabled Enabled Gn P/F Line Check Trip Selects whether a phase fault line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed. When set to Delayed all P/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn E/F Line Check Trip Selects whether an earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all E/F Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Gn SEF Line Check Trip Selects whether a sensitive earth fault line check trip is Instantaneous or Delayed. When set to Delayed all SEF Inst Trips will be Inhibited for this shot. Inst, Delayed Inst Setting 5.7.3. Manual Close (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 237 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn Extern Line Check Trip Selects whether an external line check trip is Instantaneous (Fast) or Delayed Not Blocked, Blocked Not Blocked Description Range Default Gn Close CB Delay Delay between a Close CB control being received and the Close CB contacts being operated to allow operator walk away. 0, 0.1 ... 899, 900 10s Gn Close CB Pulse Specifies the duration of the circuit breaker close pulse 0.1, 0.2 ... 59.9, 60 2s Gn Reclaim Timer The period of time after a CB has closed and remained closed before the reclosure is deemed to be successful and the AR is re-initialised. If the CB remains open at the end of the reclaim time then the AR goes to lockout. 0, 1 ... 599, 600 2s Gn Blocked Close Delay Selects the maximum time that the manual Close CB may be blocked by interlocking before the command or control is cancelled. The relay will signal "Blocked by Interlocking". 0, 1 ... 599, 600 5s Gn Open CB Delay Delay between an Open CB control being received and the Open CB contacts being operated. 0, 0.1 ... 899, 900 10s Gn Open CB Pulse Selects the maximum time of the Open CB pulse. If the CB is not closed when this timer expires then an alarm will be raised to signify failure to close. 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2 1s Gn CB Travel Alarm Selects the maximum time that the CB should take to either Open or Close before a failure is recorded. 0.01, 0.02 ... 1.99, 2 1s Gn PD Time Delay Selects the maximum time that a CB pole discrepency should allowed to exist before issuing an alarm. (This is not active in Mode C as single pole Lockout is allowed) 1, 2 ... 14300, 14400 10s Gn CB Controls Latched Selects whether Binary Input triggers of Close CB and Open CB are latched. Latch, Reset Latch Setting 5.7.4. Circuit Breaker (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 238 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.7.5. Live/Dead Description Range Default Gn A Live Voltage above which the A Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 50V Gn A Dead Voltage below which the A Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 199.5, 200 10V Gn X Live Voltage above which the X Side is classed as Live 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 50V Gn X Dead Voltage below which the X Side is classed as Dead 5, 5.5 ... 119.5, 120 10V Setting 5.7.6. Quick Logic Description Range Default Quick Logic Enable or Disable all logic equations Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E1 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E1 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E1 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E1 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E1 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E1 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E1 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E2 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 239 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E2 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E2 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E2 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E2 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E2 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E3 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E3 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E3 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E3 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E3 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 240 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E3 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E4 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E4 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E4 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E4 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E4 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E4 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E5 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E5 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E5 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E5 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 241 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E5 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E5 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E5 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E6 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E6 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E6 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E6 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E6 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E6 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E7 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E7 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 242 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E7 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E7 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E7 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E7 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E8 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E8 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E8 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E8 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E8 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E8 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E9 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 243 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range E9 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E9 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E9 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E9 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E9 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E10 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E10 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E10 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E10 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E10 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Setting Chapter 2 Page 244 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E10 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E11 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E11 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E11 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E11 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E11 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E11 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E12 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E12 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E12 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E12 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 245 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E12 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E12 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E12 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E13 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E13 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E13 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E13 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E13 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E13 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E14 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E14 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 246 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E14 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E14 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E14 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E14 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E15 Disabled, Enabled Disabled E15 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E15 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E15 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E15 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E15 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Equation Enable or Disable logic equation E16 Disabled, Enabled Disabled (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 247 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E16 Specify logic equations of the form En = <Operand><Operator><Operand>using the following:0123456789=Digit() = Parenthesis! = NOT operation. = AND operation^ = EXCLUSIVE OR operationE(followed by a digit) = Equation numberF (Followed by a digit) = Function Key numberI(Followed by a digit) = Binary Input numberL(Followed by a digit) = LED numberO(Followed by a digit) = output relay numberV(Followed by a digit) =Virtual Input/Output number.ExamplesMake a function key LED toggle when function key is pressed (requires E1 to drive L11 in output matrix)E1 = F3^L11 (20 Character String) E16 Pickup Delay Time before equation output operates, after equation satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Dropoff Delay Time before equation output resets, after equation nolonger satisfied 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s E16 Counter Target Select number of times equation must be satisfied before equation output operates 1, 2 ... 998, 999 1 E16 Counter Reset Mode Select type of counter reset mode Off, Multi-shot, Single-shot Off E16 Counter Reset Time Select counter reset time 0, 0.01 ... 14300, 14400 0s Description Range Default Inhibit 51-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Setting 5.8. Input Config 5.8.1. Input Matrix (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 248 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 50-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50G-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50G-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50G-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50G-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50G-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Wattmetric Selects which inputs inhibit the Wattmetric power element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16 ) ----------------------------------- Inhibit 51SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 51SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 51SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50SEF-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50SEF-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50SEF-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 249 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 50SEF-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 50SEF-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 64H Selects which inputs inhibit the 64H element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 46IT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46IT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 46DT Selects which inputs inhibit the 46DT element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 37-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 37-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 37-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 49 Selects which inputs inhibit the 49 thermal element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset 49 Selects which inputs resets the 49 thermal model element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 27/59-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 27/59-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 27/59-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 27/59-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 27/59-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Vx 27/59 Selects which inputs inhibit the Vx 27/59 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 47-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 47-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 47-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 59NIT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N IDMTL/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 59NDT Selects which inputs inhibit the 59N INST/DTL element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 81-1 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-1 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 250 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Inhibit 81-2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 81-3 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-3 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 81-4 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81-4 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 60CTS Selects which inputs inhibit the CT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 46BC Selects which inputs inhibit the 46 Broken Conductor element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 74TCS-1 Selects which inputs are monitoring trip circuits Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 74TCS-2 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 74TCS-3 As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 81HBL2 Selects which inputs inhibit the 81HBL2 element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16 ) ----------------------------------- Trig Trip Contacts A Selects which inputs will trigger the Trip contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trig Trip Contacts B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trig Trip Contacts C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 50BF Selects which inputs inhibit the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 50BF-A Ext Trip Selects which inputs can also start the 50BF element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 50BF-B Ext Trip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 50BF-C Ext Trip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 60VTS Selects which inputs inhibit the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Ext Trig 60VTS Selects MCB inputs to VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 251 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Ext Reset 60VTS Selects which inputs reset the VT Supervision element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-A TotalTrip Selects which inputs Reset the CB Total Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-B TotalTrip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-C TotalTrip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-A DeltaTrip Selects which inputs Reset the Delta CB Trip count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-B DeltaTrip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-C DeltaTrip As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ ResetCB-A ARBlockCnt Selects which inputs Reset the AR Block count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ ResetCB-B ARBlockCnt As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ ResetCB-C ARBlockCnt As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-A Freq Ops Selects which inputs Reset the Frequent Ops count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-B Freq Ops As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-C Freq Ops As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-A LO Count Selects which inputs Reset the CB Lockout operations count Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-B LO Count As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset CB-C LO Count As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset I^2t CB-A Wear Selects which inputs Reset the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset I^2t CB-B Wear As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 252 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reset I^2t CB-C Wear As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trig I^2t CB-A Wear Selects which inputs will cause an external trigger of the I^2t CB Wear element Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trig I^2t CB-B Wear As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trig I^2t CB-C Wear As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 1 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 1 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 2 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 2 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 3 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 3 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 4 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 4 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 5 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 5 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 6 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 6 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 7 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 7 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 8 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 8 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 9 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 9 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 10 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 10 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 11 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 11 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ General Alarm 12 Selects which inputs will activate the General Alarm 12 text Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ ExtPowerGood Selects which inputs are used to indicate External power to battery is good. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 253 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default InhibitBatteryTest Selects which inputs will inhibit a Battery test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Capacitor Test Selects which inputs will initiate a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-A Mon Input 1 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 1. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-A Mon Input 2 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 2. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Cap-A Test Selects which inputs will inhibit a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-B Mon Input 1 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 1. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-B Mon Input 2 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 2. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Cap-B Test Selects which inputs will inhibit a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-C Mon Input 1 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 1. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Cap-C Mon Input 2 Selects which inputs will monitor Capacitor level 2. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Cap-C Test Selects which inputs will inhibit a Capacitor test. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset SagSwell Count Selects which inputs will reset the 27Sag & 59Swell counts. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 27Sag Selects which inputs will inhibit the 27Sag elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit 59Swell Selects which inputs will inhibit the 59Swell elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset Demand Selects which inputs will rest the Demand elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inhibit Fault Locator Selects which inputs will inhibit the Fault Locator Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16 ) ----------------------------------- Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode A (3 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout). Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode B (1 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout). Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 254 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode C (1 pole Trip & 1 pole lockout). Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Close CB-A Selects which inputs will issue a close to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Block Close CB-A Selects which inputs will block the manual closing of the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Open CB-A Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-A Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-A Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Close CB-B Selects which inputs will issue a close to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Block Close CB-B Selects which inputs will block the manual closing of the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Open CB-B Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-B Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-B Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Close CB-C Selects which inputs will issue a close to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Block Close CB-C Selects which inputs will block the manual closing of the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Open CB-C Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-C Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ CB-C Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Out Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser out of service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 255 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 In Selects which inputs will switch the Autorecloser in service Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Trip & Reclose Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & reclose Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Trip & Lockout A Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & lockout Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Trip & Lockout B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Trip & Lockout C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Ext Trip Selects which input will start the external an Auto-relose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Ext Pickup Selects which input should be connected to the pickup of the external elements required to start an Auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Block Reclose A Selects which inputs will block the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Block Reclose B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Block Reclose C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Reset Lockout A Selects which inputs will force the Auto-recloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Reset Lockout B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Reset Lockout C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Line Check A Selects which inputs will start the Line Check functionality of the Auto-recloser Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Line Check B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Line Check C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Lockout A Selects which inputs will force the Auto-recloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ 79 Lockout B As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 256 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Lockout C As Above Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Hot Line Out Selects which inputs will switch out Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Hot Line In Selects which inputs will switch in Hot Line Working Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inst Prot'n Out Selects which inputs will switch out the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Inst Prot'n In Selects which inputs will switch in the instantaneous protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ E/F Out Selects which inputs will switch out the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ E/F In Selects which inputs will switch in the E/F protection elements. Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ SEF Out Selects which inputs will switch out the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ SEF In Selects which inputs will switch in the SEF protection elements Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trigger Wave Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a waveform record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Trigger Fault Rec Selects which inputs can trigger a fault record Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 1 Switches active setting group to group 1 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset Energy Meters Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 2 Switches active setting group to group 2 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 3 Switches active setting group to group 3 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 4 Switches active setting group to group 4 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 5 Switches active setting group to group 5 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 6 Switches active setting group to group 6 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 257 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Select Group 7 Switches active setting group to group 7 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Select Group 8 Switches active setting group to group 8 Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Out Of Service Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Local Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Local Or Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Clock Sync. Selects which input is used to synchronise the real time clock Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Reset LEDs & O/Ps Selects which inputs will reset the latched LEDs and binary outputs Combination of ( BI1-BI43, V1V16) ------------------------------------------ Description Range Default Open CB-A Selects which function key will Open the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Close CB-A Selects which function key will Close the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Open CB-B Selects which function key will Open the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Close CB-B Selects which function key will Close the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Open CB-C Selects which function key will Open the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Close CB-C Selects which function key will Close the circuit breaker Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Autoreclose In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Selects which function key will Set the relay to operate in Mode A (3 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout) Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Setting 5.8.2. Function Key Matrix (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 258 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Selects which function key will Set the relay to operate in Mode B (1 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout) Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Selects which function key will Set the relay to operate in Mode C (1 pole Trip & 1 pole lockout) Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Reclose 3Ph Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & reclose Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Lockout A Selects which function key will cause the CB to trip & lockout Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Lockout B As Above Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ 79 Trip & Lockout C As Above Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Hot Line Work In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Hot Line Working In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ E/F In/Out Selects which function key will toggle E/F protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ SEF In/Out Selects which function key will toggle SEF protection In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Inst Prot'n In/Out Selects which function key will toggle Instantaneous protection elements In & Out Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ Local Or Remote Mode Selects which inputs will put the relay into Local Or Remote Mode Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ BatteryTestRequired Selects which inputs will initiate a Battery test Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) ------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 259 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.8.3. Binary Input Config Description Range Default Inverted Inputs Selects which inputs pickup when voltage is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 ) ----------------------------------------- BI 1 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 1 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 1 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 2 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 2 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 2 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 3 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 3 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 3 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 4 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 4 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 4 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 5 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 5 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 5 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 6 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 6 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 6 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 7 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 7 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 7 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 8 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 8 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 8 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 9 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 9 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 9 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 10 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 10 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 10 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 260 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 11 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 11 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 11 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 12 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 12 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 12 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 13 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 13 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 13 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 14 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 14 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 14 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 15 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 15 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 15 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 16 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 16 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 16 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 17 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 17 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 17 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 18 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 18 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 18 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 19 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 19 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 19 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 20 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 20 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 20 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 21 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 21 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 21 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 22 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 22 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 22 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 261 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 23 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 23 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 23 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 24 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 24 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 24 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 24 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 25 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 25 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 25 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 25 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 26 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 26 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 26 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 26 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 27 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 27 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 27 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 27 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 28 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 28 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 28 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 28 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 29 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 29 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 29 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 29 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 30 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 30 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 30 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 30 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 31 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 31 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 31 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 31 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 32 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 32 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 32 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 32 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 33 Pickup Delay Delay on pickup of DC Binary Input 33 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 33 Dropoff Delay Delay on dropoff of DC Binary Input 33 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 34 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 34 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 262 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 35 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 35 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 36 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 36 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 37 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 37 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 38 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 38 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 39 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 39 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 40 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 40 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 41 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 41 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 42 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 42 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s BI 43 Pickup Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0.02s BI 43 Dropoff Delay 0, 0.005 ... 14300, 14400 0s Enabled In Local Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Local' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 263 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43 Description Range Default Function Key 1 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 1 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 2 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 3 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 4 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 5 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 6 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 7 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 8 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 8 Function Key 9 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 9 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 9 Function Key 10 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 10 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 10 Setting 5.8.4. Function Key Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 264 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Function Key 11 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 11 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Text User definable text that will be used in the HMI function key confirmation screen when Function key 12 is pressed. (20 Character String) Function Key 12 Enabled In Remote Selects which inputs are enabled when the relay is in Operating Mode 'Remote' or 'Local Or Remote' Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 ) -----------1668183366 Description Range Default General Alarm-1 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 1 (16 Character String) ALARM 1 General Alarm-2 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 2 (16 Character String) ALARM 2 General Alarm-3 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 3 (16 Character String) ALARM 3 General Alarm-4 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 4 (16 Character String) ALARM 4 General Alarm-5 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 5 (16 Character String) ALARM 5 General Alarm-6 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 6 (16 Character String) ALARM 6 General Alarm-7 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 7 (16 Character String) ALARM 7 General Alarm-8 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 8 (16 Character String) ALARM 8 General Alarm-9 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 9 (16 Character String) ALARM 9 General Alarm-10 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 10 (16 Character String) ALARM 10 General Alarm-11 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 11 (16 Character String) ALARM 11 General Alarm-12 Defines the text to be displayed for General Alarm 12 (16 Character String) ALARM 12 5.8.5. Setting General Alarms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 265 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.9. Output Config 5.9.1. Output Matrix Description Range Default Protection Healthy Relays selected are energised whilst relay selfmonitoring does NOT detect any hardware or software errors and DC Supply is healthy. A changeover contact or normally closed contact may be used to generate Protection Defective from this output Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) BO1 51-1 51-1 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 51-2 51-2 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 51-3 51-3 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 51-4 51-4 IDMTL/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50-1 50-1 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50-2 50-2 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50-3 50-3 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50-4 50-4 INST/DTL Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 51G-1 51G-1 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 51G-2 51G-2 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 51G-3 51G-3 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 51G-4 51G-4 IDMTL/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 50G-1 50G-1 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 50G-2 50G-2 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 50G-3 50G-3 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 266 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 50G-4 50G-4 INST/DTL measured Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L4 Wattmetric Po> Wattmetric residual power operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ 51SEF-1 51SEF-1 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 51SEF-2 51SEF-2 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 51SEF-3 51SEF-3 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 51SEF-4 51SEF-4 IDMTL/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 50SEF-1 50SEF-1 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 50SEF-2 50SEF-2 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 50SEF-3 50SEF-3 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 50SEF-4 50SEF-4 INST/DTL Sensitive Earth Fault operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L5 64H 64H Restricted Earth Fault element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cold Load Active Cold Load settings are active Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 46IT IDMTL/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 46DT INST/DTL NPS Overcurrent operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 37 PhA 37 Under Current operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ 37 PhB 37 Under Current operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ 37 PhC 37 Under Current operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ 37-1 37-1 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 37-2 37-2 Under Current operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 267 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 49 Trip Thermal capacity trip operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 49 Alarm Thermal capacity alarm operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27/59-1 Under/Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27/59-2 Under/Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27/59-3 Under/Overvoltage stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27/59-4 Under/Overvoltage stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27/59 PhA 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase A Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ 27/59 PhB 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase B Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ 27/59 PhC 27/59 Voltage element operated on Phase C Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ Vx 27/59 Under/Overvoltage Vx stage operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- ABC Live All phases considered Live Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ A Live A phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ B Live B phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ C Live C phase considered Live Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ XYZ Live 6VT models only All phases considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ X Live A phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Y Live 6VT models only B phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Z Live 6VT models only C phase considered Live on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ ABC Dead All phases considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ A Dead A phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ B Dead B phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ C Dead C phase considered Dead Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 268 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default XYZ Dead 6VT models only All phases considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ X Dead A phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Y Dead Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ 47-1 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 47-2 INST/DTL NPS Overvoltage stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 59NIT Neutral Overvoltage IDMTL/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 59NDT Neutral Overvoltage INST/DTL operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 81-1 Under/Over frequency stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 81-2 Under/Over frequency stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 81-3 Under/Over frequency stage 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 81-4 Under/Over frequency stage 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 60CTS CT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 46BC 46 Broken Conductor element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 74TCS-1 Trip Circuit 1 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 74TCS-2 Trip Circuit 2 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 74TCS-3 Trip Circuit 3 fail operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 81HBL2 nd 81HBL2 2 harmonic blocking operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ General Pickup General Pickup operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 6VT models only B phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB Z Dead 6VT models only C phase considered Dead on the XYZ side of the CB (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 269 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 50BF-1 Pole A Circuit Breaker Fail stage 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50BF-1 Pole B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50BF-1 Pole C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50BF-2 Pole A Circuit Breaker Fail stage 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50BF-2 Pole B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 50BF-2 Pole C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 60VTS VT Supervision element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Total TripCount Total CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Total TripCount As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Total TripCount As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Delta TripCount Delta CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Delta TripCount As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Delta TripCount As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Count - ARBlock Count To AR Block CB trip count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Count - ARBlock As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Count - ARBlock As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Freq Ops Count CB Frequent Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Freq Ops Count As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 270 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default CB-C Freq Ops Count As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A LO Handle Ops CB Lockout Handle Operations count exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B LO Handle Ops As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C LO Handle Ops As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- I^2t CB-A Wear I^2t CB Wear limit exceeded Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- I^2t CB-B Wear As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- I^2t CB-C Wear As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Battery Test Battery Test is in progress. This can be used to disable battery charger during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Battery Load Test Battery Load Test is in progress. This can be used to apply the battery test load during a battery test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Battery Test Pass Indicates whether the last battery test passed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Battery Test Fail Indicates whether the last battery test failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Recovery Fail Indicates whether the battery failed to recover back to its pre-test voltage after last battery test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Ext. Power Good Indicates whether the external battery supply is ok. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Battery Healthy Indicates whether the current battery voltage is healthy Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Ready Indicates whether the capacitor is ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Supply Fail Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Supply Failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Only Trip Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Only Trip. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A DBI Indicates whether the current capacitor status is DBI condition. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 271 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Cap-A Test Active Capacitor Test is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Test Pass Indicates whether the last capacitor test passed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Test Fail Indicates whether the last capacitor test failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-A Recovery Fail Indicates whether the capacitor voltage failed to recover after the last capacitor test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Ready Indicates whether the capacitor is ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Supply Fail Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Supply Failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Only Trip Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Only Trip. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B DBI Indicates whether the current capacitor status is DBI condition. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Test Active Capacitor Test is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Test Pass Indicates whether the last capacitor test passed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Test Fail Indicates whether the last capacitor test failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-B Recovery Fail Indicates whether the capacitor voltage failed to recover after the last capacitor test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Ready Indicates whether the capacitor is ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Supply Fail Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Supply Failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Only Trip Indicates whether the current capacitor status is Only Trip. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C DBI Indicates whether the current capacitor status is DBI condition. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Test Active Capacitor Test is in progress. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Test Pass Indicates whether the last capacitor test passed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 272 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Cap-C Test Fail Indicates whether the last capacitor test failed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Cap-C Recovery Fail Indicates whether the capacitor voltage failed to recover after the last capacitor test. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Capacitors Ready Indicates whether the all capacitors are ready to trip and close. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole1 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole2 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 27Sag Pole3 SARFI Voltage has dropped below the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole1 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 1. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole2 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 2. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 59Swell Pole3 SARFI Voltage has risen above the defined SARFI level on Pole 3. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- En100 Life Indicates IEC 61850 processor running Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ En100 Error Indicates IEC 61850 processor detects error Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ IEC 61850 Configured Indicates IEC 61850 is congigured Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Phase A A phase A element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Phase B A phase B element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Phase C A phase C element operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Forward P/F The Phase fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Reverse P/F The Phase fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Forward E/F The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 273 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Reverse E/F The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Forward SEF The fault is in the forward direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Reverse SEF The fault is in the reverse direction. Note this output is presented EVEN when relay elements are set to be non-directional. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Pole A Trip Indicates that a Pole A Trip is required and should be mapped to the Pole A Trip contact Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L1 Pole B Trip Indicates that a Pole B Trip is required and should be mapped to the Pole B Trip contact Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L2 Pole C Trip Indicates that a Pole C Trip is required and should be mapped to the Pole C Trip contact Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) L3 Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode A (3 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout). Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode B (1 pole Trip & 3 pole lockout). Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Selects which inputs will Set the relay to operate in Mode C (1 pole Trip & 1 pole lockout). Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Close CB-A Blocked Indicates that the Close CB control is blocked by its interlocking logic. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Open CB-A Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Alarm Indicates the CB is either in an illegal state or is stuck neither open or closed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-A Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Close CB-B Blocked Indicates that the Close CB control is blocked by its interlocking logic. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Open CB-B Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 274 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default CB-B Alarm Indicates the CB is either in an illegal state or is stuck neither open or closed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-B Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Close CB-C Blocked Indicates that the Close CB control is blocked by its interlocking logic. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Open CB-C Selects which inputs will issue an open to the circuit breaker. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Alarm Indicates the CB is either in an illegal state or is stuck neither open or closed. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Closed Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker closed contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- CB-C Open Selects which inputs are connected to the circuit breaker open contacts Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Pole Discrepancy Indicates there is a CB pole discrepency. i.e. 1 or 2 poles Open whilst 1 or 2 poles are closed. (This is not active in Mode C as single pole Lockout is allowed) Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Manual Close CB-A Close pulse due to Manual close being issued Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 AR Close CB-A Close pulse due to auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Manual Close CB-B Close pulse due to Manual close being issued Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 AR Close CB-B Close pulse due to auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Manual Close CB-C Close pulse due to Manual close being issued Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 AR Close CB-C Close pulse due to auto-reclose sequence Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Reclose Indicates the Trip & Reclose sequence being performed Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout A Selects which inputs will trigger a trip & lockout Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 275 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Trip & Lockout B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Trip & Lockout C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Lockout A Selects which inputs will force the Auto-recloser into the Lockout state Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Lockout B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Lockout C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Out Of Service Indicates the auto-recloser is out of service Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 In Service Indicates the auto-recloser is in service Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 In Progress A Indicates an auto-reclose sequence is in progress Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 In Progress B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 In Progress C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Block Extern Indicates that Extern for the current shot has been selected to be delayed. (This may be used to block external tripping elements in the same way as the internal protection elements are blocked to achieve Instantaneous / Delayed operation.) Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Fail To Close A Indicates the CB was not closed at the end of the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Fail To Close B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Fail To Close C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Close On Fault A Indicates an element starter or trip operated during the Close Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Close On Fault B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Close On Fault C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 276 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default 79 Successful AR A Indicates that after a reclose and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Last Trip LO A Indicates that the Autoreclose reached Lockout due to a trip on the final shot Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ 79 Successful AR B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Last Trip LO B Indicates that the Autoreclose reached Lockout due to a trip on the final shot Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ 79 Successful AR C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- 79 Last Trip LO C Indicates that the Autoreclose reached Lockout due to a trip on the final shot Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Successful MC A Indicates that after a manual close and at the end of the Reclaim time the CB was closed and there were no auto-reclose trip elements operated. (This is issued for 2 secs) Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Successful MC B As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Successful MC C As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Hot Line Working Indicates that Hot LineWorking functionality has been selected Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Inst Prot'n Out Indicates that the protection elements selected to be Instantaneous elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E/F Out Indicates that the instantaneous protection elements are switched out. Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- SEF Out Indicates that the SEF protection elements are switched out Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- New Wave Stored The waveform recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- New Fault Stored The fault recorder has stored new information Note: this is a pulsed output Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- +ve P (3P) Real Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ -ve P (3P) Real Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 277 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default +ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Export detector operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ -ve Q (3P) Reactive Power Import detector operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------ Active Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Active Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Reactive Exp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Reactive Imp Pulse Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Out Of Service Mode Indicates the relay is in Out Of Service Mode Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Local Mode Indicates the relay is in Local Mode Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Remote Mode Indicates the relay is in Remote Mode Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Active Settings Group 1 Indicates the relay is using settings group 1 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 2 Indicates the relay is using settings group 2 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 3 Indicates the relay is using settings group 3 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 4 Indicates the relay is using settings group 4 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 5 Indicates the relay is using settings group 5 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 6 Indicates the relay is using settings group 6 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 7 Indicates the relay is using settings group 7 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ Active Settings Group 8 Indicates the relay is using settings group 8 Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 1 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 1 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 2 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 2 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 3 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 3 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 4 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 4 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 278 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default User Output 5 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 5 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 6 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 6 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 7 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 7 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 8 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 8 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 9 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 9 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 10 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 10 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 11 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 11 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 12 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 12 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 13 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 13 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 14 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 14 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 15 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 15 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 16 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 16 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 17 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 17 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 18 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 18 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 19 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 19 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 20 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 20 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 21 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 21 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 279 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default User Output 22 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 22 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 23 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 23 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 24 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 24 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 25 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 25 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 26 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 26 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 27 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 27 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 28 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 28 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 29 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 29 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 30 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 30 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 31 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 31 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ User Output 32 Indicates that the Reylogic User Output 32 is raised Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1-L28, V1- V16 ) ------------------------------------ BI 1 Operated DC Binary Input 1 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 2 Operated DC Binary Input 2 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 3 Operated DC Binary Input 3 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 4 Operated DC Binary Input 4 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 5 Operated DC Binary Input 5 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 6 Operated DC Binary Input 6 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 7 Operated DC Binary Input 7 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 280 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 8 Operated DC Binary Input 8 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 9 Operated DC Binary Input 9 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 10 Operated DC Binary Input 10 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 11 Operated DC Binary Input 11 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 12 Operated DC Binary Input 12 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 13 Operated DC Binary Input 13 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 14 Operated DC Binary Input 14 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 15 Operated DC Binary Input 15 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 16 Operated DC Binary Input 16 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 17 Operated DC Binary Input 17 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 18 Operated DC Binary Input 18 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 19 Operated DC Binary Input 19 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 20 Operated DC Binary Input 20 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 21 Operated DC Binary Input 21 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 22 Operated DC Binary Input 22 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 23 Operated DC Binary Input 23 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 24 Operated DC Binary Input 24 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 25 Operated DC Binary Input 25 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 281 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default BI 26 Operated DC Binary Input 26 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 27 Operated DC Binary Input 27 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 28 Operated DC Binary Input 28 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 29 Operated DC Binary Input 29 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 30 Operated DC Binary Input 30 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 31 Operated DC Binary Input 31 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 32 Operated DC Binary Input 32 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 33 Operated DC Binary Input 33 has operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 34 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 35 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 36 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 37 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 38 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 39 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 40 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 41 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 42 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- BI 43 Operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 282 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default E1 Quick Logic equation 1 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E2 Quick Logic equation 2 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E3 Quick Logic equation 3 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E4 Quick Logic equation 4 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E5 Quick Logic equation 5 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E6 Quick Logic equation 6 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E7 Quick Logic equation 7 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E8 Quick Logic equation 8 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E9 Quick Logic equation 9 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E10 Quick Logic equation 10 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E11 Quick Logic equation 11 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E12 Quick Logic equation 12 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E13 Quick Logic equation 13 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E14 Quick Logic equation 14 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E15 Quick Logic equation 15 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- E16 Quick Logic equation 16 operated Combination of ( BO1 - BO30, L1- L28, V1- V16) ------------------------------------------------- Setting 5.9.2. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 283 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.9.3. Binary Output Config Description Range Default CB-A Trip Contacts The Binary Outputs selected by this setting are classed as Trip contacts. (When any of these BOs operate the Trip LED is lit, CB Fail is started, if enabled, & a Fault Record is stored) Combination of ( BO1 - BO30 ) --------------------- CB-B Trip Contacts As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30 ) --------------------- CB-C Trip Contacts As Above Combination of ( BO1 - BO30 ) --------------------- Hand Reset Outputs Relays selected, as Hand Reset will remain latched until manually reset from front panel or via communications link or by removing DC Supply. By default relays are Self Resetting and will reset when the driving signal is removed. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 ) --------------------- Min Operate Time 1 Minimum operate time of output relay if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 2 Minimum operate time of output relay 2 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 3 Minimum operate time of output relay 3 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 4 Minimum operate time of output relay 4 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 5 Minimum operate time of output relay 5 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 6 Minimum operate time of output relay 6 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 7 Minimum operate time of output relay 7 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 8 Minimum operate time of output relay 8 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 9 Minimum operate time of output relay 9 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 284 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Min Operate Time 10 Minimum operate time of output relay 10 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 11 Minimum operate time of output relay 11 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 12 Minimum operate time of output relay 12 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 13 Minimum operate time of output relay 13 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 14 Minimum operate time of output relay 14 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 15 Minimum operate time of output relay 15 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 16 Minimum operate time of output relay 16 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 17 Minimum operate time of output relay 17 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 18 Minimum operate time of output relay 18 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 19 Minimum operate time of output relay 19 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 20 Minimum operate time of output relay 20 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 21 Minimum operate time of output relay 21 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Min Operate Time 22 Minimum operate time of output relay 22 if set to self reset, if also set to be pulsed then this is the pulse width 0, 0.01 ... 59, 60 0.1s Pulsed Outputs Selects which outputs are pulsed. The pulse width is set by the Min Operate Time setting for each output Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22 ) --------------------- (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 285 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.9.4. LED Config Description Range Default Self Reset LEDs LEDs selected, as Self Reset will automatically reset when the driving signal is removed. By default all LEDs are Hand Reset and must be manually reset either locally via the front fascia or remotely via communications. Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 ) 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 Green LEDs Selects which LEDs will be green when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 ) --------------------------- Red LEDs Selects which LEDs will be red when driven Combination of ( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 ) 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 Description Range Default Gn P/F Pickups When any of the selected pickups operate General Pickup is driven. Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 513, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 504 Gn E/F Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G-1, 50G2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Pickups As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Voltage Pickups As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT Gn Freq Pickups As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) 81-1, 81-2, 813, 81-4 Gn Misc Pickups As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 ) 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2 Setting 5.9.5. Pickup Config (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 286 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.10. Maintenance 5.10.1. CB Counters Description Range Default Gn CB-A Total TripCount Selects whether the CB Total Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A Total TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Total Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-B Total TripCount Selects whether the CB Total Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B Total TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Total Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-C Total TripCount Selects whether the CB Total Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C Total TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Total Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-A Delta TripCount Selects whether the CB Delta Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A Delta TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Delta Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-B Delta TripCount Selects whether the CB Delta Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B Delta TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Delta Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-C Delta TripCount Selects whether the CB Delta Trip Count counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C Delta TripCount Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Delta Trip Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Setting Gn CB-A Total TripCount Reset Resets CB Total Trip Count counter Gn CB-B Total TripCount Reset Resets CB Total Trip Count counter Gn CB-C Total TripCount Reset Resets CB Total Trip Count counter Gn CB-A Delta TripCount Reset Resets CB Delta Trip Count counter Gn CB-B Delta TripCount Reset Resets CB Delta Trip Count counter (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 287 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB-A Count - ARBlock Selects whether the CB Count To AR Block counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A Count - ARBlock Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Count To AR Block counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-B Count - ARBlock Selects whether the CB Count To AR Block counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B Count - ARBlock Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Count To AR Block counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-C Count - ARBlock Selects whether the CB Count To AR Block counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C Count - ARBlock Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Count To AR Block counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-A Freq Ops Count Selects whether the CB Frequent Operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A Freq Ops Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Frequent Operations Counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-B Freq Ops Count Selects whether the CB Frequent Operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B Freq Ops Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Frequent Operations Counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Setting Gn CB-C Delta TripCount Reset Resets CB Delta Trip Count counter Gn CB-A Count - ARBlock Reset Resets CB Count To AR Block counter Gn CB-B Count - ARBlock Reset Resets CB Count To AR Block counter Gn CB-C Count - ARBlock Reset Resets CB Count To AR Block counter Gn CB-A Freq Ops Count Reset Resets CB Frequent Operations Counter Gn CB-B Freq Ops Count Reset Resets CB Frequent Operations Counter (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 288 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB-C Freq Ops Count Selects whether the CB Frequent Operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C Freq Ops Count Target Selects the number of CB trips allowed before CB Frequent Operations Counter output operates. While count is above target the Autorecloser will only perform 1 x Delayed Shot and Lockout 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-A LO Handle Ops Selects whether the CB Lockout operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A LO Handle Ops Target Selects the number of CB Lockout handle operations allowed before CB LO Handle Ops Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-B LO Handle Ops Selects whether the CB Lockout operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B LO Handle Ops Target Selects the number of CB Lockout handle operations allowed before CB LO Handle Ops Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Gn CB-C LO Handle Ops Selects whether the CB Lockout operations Counter is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C LO Handle Ops Target Selects the number of CB Lockout handle operations allowed before CB LO Handle Ops Count counter output operates 0, 1 ... 9999, 10000 100 Description Range Default Gn CB-A I^2t Counter Selects whether the I^2t CB Wear monitor is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-A Alarm Limit Sets limit before alarm is issued 10, 11 ... 99000, 100000 10MA^2s Gn CB-A Separation Time Sets the time for CB mechanism to start moving, time before contacts start to separate 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.02s Gn CB-A Clearance Time Time for CB to clear fault 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.04s Setting Gn CB-C Freq Ops Count Reset Resets CB Frequent Operations Counter Gn CB-A LO Handle Ops Reset Resets CB Lockout Handle Operations Counter. Gn CB-B LO Handle Ops Reset Resets CB Lockout Handle Operations Counter. Gn CB-C LO Handle Ops Reset Resets CB Lockout Handle Operations Counter. 5.10.2. I^2T CB Wear (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 289 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default Gn CB-B I^2t Counter Selects whether the I^2t CB Wear monitor is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-B Alarm Limit Sets limit before alarm is issued 10, 11 ... 99000, 100000 10MA^2s Gn CB-B Separation Time Sets the time for CB mechanism to start moving, time before contacts start to separate 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.02s Gn CB-B Clearance Time Time for CB to clear fault 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.04s Gn CB-C I^2t Counter Selects whether the I^2t CB Wear monitor is enabled Disabled, Enabled Disabled Gn CB-C Alarm Limit Sets limit before alarm is issued 10, 11 ... 99000, 100000 10MA^2s Gn CB-C Separation Time Sets the time for CB mechanism to start moving, time before contacts start to separate 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.02s Gn CB-C Clearance Time Time for CB to clear fault 0, 0.001 ... 0.199, 0.2 0.04s Description Range Default Data Log Period Selects period between stored samples 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 5min Gn Demand Window The time window over which the Min, Max and Mean values are calculated. 1, 2 ... 23, 24 24hrs Gn Demand Window Type Method used to calculate Demand values. Fixed, Peak, Rolling Fixed Setting CB-A Reset I^2t Count Reset the CB wear count CB-B Reset I^2t Count Reset the CB wear count CB-C Reset I^2t Count Reset the CB wear count 5.10.3. Output Matrix Test 5.11. Data Storage 5.11.1. Demand/Data Log Setting Clear Data Log Clear the Data Log Gn Demand Reset Reset all Demand values (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 290 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.11.2. Waveform Storage Description Range Default Gn P/F Trig Storage Select which elements trigger a waveform record Combination of ( 51-1, 51-2, 51-3, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 50-4 ) 51-1, 51-2, 513, 51-4, 50-1, 50-2, 50-3, 504 Gn E/F Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51G-1, 51G2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G-1, 50G2, 50G-3, 50G-4 ) 51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3, 51G-4, 50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3, 50G-4 Gn SEF/REF Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H ) 51SEF-1, 51SEF-2, 51SEF-3, 51SEF-4, 50SEF-1, 50SEF-2, 50SEF-3, 50SEF-4, 64H Gn Misc Current Storage As Above Combination of ( 46IT, 46DT, 37-1, 37-2, 49 Trip, 49 Alarm ) ------ Gn Voltage Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 27/59-1, 27/59-2, 27/59-3, 27/59-4, Vx 27/59, 47-1, 47-2, 59NIT, 59NDT ) --------- Gn Freq Trig Storage As Above Combination of ( 81-1, 81-2, 81-3, 81-4 ) ---- Pre-trigger Storage Select Percentage of waveform record stored before the fault is triggered 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 20% Record Duration Select waveform record duration 10 Rec x 1 Sec, 5 Rec x 2 Sec, 2 Rec x 5 Sec, 1 Rec x 10 Sec 10 Rec x 1 Sec Description Range Default Gn Max Fault Rec Time Maximum time Fault record information will be stored and classed as same fault 0, 1 ... 59900, 60000 2000ms Range Default Setting Trigger Waveform Trigger waveform storage Clear Waveforms Clear all stored waveform records 5.11.3. Fault Storage Setting Clear Faults Clear all stored fault records 5.11.4. Event Storage Description Setting Clear Events Clear all stored event records (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 291 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d 5.11.5. Energy Storage Description Range Default Gn Active Exp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Active Imp Energy Unit 1kWh, 10kWh, 100kWh, 1MWh, 10MWh, 100MWh 10kWh Gn Reactive Exp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Gn Reactive Imp Energy Unit 1kVArh, 10kVArh, 100kVArh, 1MVArh, 10MVArh, 100MVArh 10kVArh Setting 5.12. Communications Description Range Default COM1-RS485 Station Address Station Address for COM1-RS485 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM1-RS485 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM1-RS485 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM1-RS485 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM1-RS485 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM1-RS485 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM1-RS485 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM3 Station Address Station Address for COM3 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 COM3 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM3 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 COM3 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM3 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 19200 COM3 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM3 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM3 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF COM3 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote COM4 Station Address Station Address for COM4 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 292 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default COM4 Protocol Selects protocol to use for COM4 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3, IEC60870-5-101 OFF COM4 Baud Rate Sets the communications baud rate for COM4 75, 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 19200 COM4 Parity Selects whether parity information is used NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM4 Line Idle Selects the communications line idle sense LIGHT OFF, LIGHT ON LIGHT OFF COM4 Data Echo Enables echoing of data from RX port to TX port when operating relays in a Fibre Optic ring configuration OFF, ON OFF COM4 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote DNP3 Unsolicited Events Allows unsolicited event support in the relay. When Enabled, unsolicited event transmission can be controlled by the Master. When Disabled, Master requests are ignored. Disabled, Enabled Disabled DNP3 Destination Address The address of the master to which unsolicited events will be sent. 0, 1 ... 65533, 65534 0 DNP3 Application Timeout Specifies the response timeout for application layer confirmation 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s I101 Link Mode Specifies the Link Layer mode as balance or unbalanced Balanced, Unbalanced Unbalanced I101 Link Address Sets Link Address Field size. Not Present - Only used with balanced transmission"," 1 octet address range 0 - 254","2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Not Present, 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Common Address of Asdu Sets Common Address Field size. Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 0 - 254, 2 octets address range 0 65534 1 Octet , 2 Octets 2 Octets I101 Cause of Trans. (COT) Size of cause of transmission in octets. 1 octet - COT code, 2 octets - COT code + originator address or 0 1 Octet , 2 Octets 1 Octet I101 Info. Obj. Add. (IOA) Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 1 - 255, 2 octets address range 1 - 65535, 3 octets used to generate structured address format 1 Octet , 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octets I101 Asdu Address Address to use to identify ASDU layer 0, 1 ... 65534, 65535 3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 293 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings App. R8b-7d Description Range Default I101 Cyclic Period Period device will generate cyclic data. Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically Off, 1 ... 3599, 3600 60s I101 Background Period Period device will generate background data. Set to Off to disable generating of background data. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background Off, 1 ... 1499, 1500 Off LAN Protocol Allows IEC60870-5-103 via Ethernet port Off, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5103 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Setting Chapter 2 Page 294 of 294 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11 The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2009/02 Third issue. Single Triple Autoreclose added. 2009/09 Fourth Issue. Software version R4c-3b added & optional RS485/RS232 comms. 2010/04 Fifth Issue. Software version updated 2010/05 Sixth Issue. Document formatted due to rebrand 2010/09 Seventh issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol. 2012/09 Eighth Issue. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol & minor description changes. 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Contents Section 1: Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 3 1.1 Relay Menus And Display .................................................................................................................. 3 1.2 Operation Guide ................................................................................................................................ 5 1.2.1 User Interface Operation ...................................................................................................... 5 1.3 Settings Display................................................................................................................................. 7 1.4 Instruments Mode .............................................................................................................................. 8 1.5 Fault Data Mode ................................................................................................................................ 8 1.6 Control Mode..................................................................................................................................... 8 Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution ......................................................................................... 9 2.1 Physical Connection .......................................................................................................................... 9 2.1.1 Front USB connection .......................................................................................................... 9 2.1.2 Rear RS485 connection...................................................................................................... 10 2.1.3 Optional rear fibre optic connection ..................................................................................... 10 2.1.4 Optional Rear RS232 connection ........................................................................................ 11 2.1.5 Configuring Relay Data Communication .............................................................................. 11 2.1.6 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp ................................................................................... 15 List of Figures Figure 1.1-1 Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3 Figure 1.1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol .................................................................................................................. 3 Figure 1.1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from illustration) ................................. 4 Figure 1.2-4 Relay Identifier Screen ................................................................................................................... 5 Figure 1.2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version) ........................................... 6 Figure 2.1.1-1 USB connection to PC ................................................................................................................. 9 Figure 2.1.2-1 RS485 connection to PC ............................................................................................................ 10 Figure 2.1.3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC ..................................................................................................... 10 Figure 2.1.4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC ................................................................................................. 11 Figure 2.1.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection ........................................................................................................... 15 APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R2d-1a Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4-3 Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R3d-2b Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4c-3b Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4d-4 Relay Settings. Software version 2435H80011R4f-4b Relay Settings. Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a Relay Settings. Software version 2435H85010R7c-7a Relay Settings. Software version 2435H85010R7e-7c APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX Relay Instrumentation. Software version 2435H85010R7b-7a Relay Instrumentation. Software version 2435H85010R7c-7a Relay Instrumentation. Software version 2435H85010R7e-7c (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 2 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Section 1: Introduction 1.1 Relay Menus And Display All relay fascias contain the same access keys although the fascias may differ in appearance from model to model. The basic menu structure is also the same in all products and consists of four main menus, these being, Settings Mode - allows the user to view and (if allowed via the settings mode password) change user settings in the relay from the fascia. Instruments Mode - allows the user to view the relay meters e.g. current, voltage etc. and configure favourite instrument views which will cycle on the lcd automatically when the relay is unattended. Fault Data Mode - allows the user to view the type and data of any protection operation of the relay. Control Mode - allows the user to control external plant under the relays control for example the CB (if allowed via the control mode password) The menus can be viewed via the LCD by pressing the access keys as below, Relay Identifier Setting Mode Instruments Fault Data Control Figure 1.1-1 Menu Pressing CANCEL returns to the Identifier screen LCD Contrast To change the contrast on the LCD insert a flat nosed screwdriver into the screwhead below the contrast symbol, turning the screwhead decreases or increases the contrast of the LCD. Figure 1.1-2 Fascia Contrast symbol (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 3 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Figure 1.1-3 Fascia of a 7SR224 relay (Please note your model may differ from illustration) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 4 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 1.2 Operation Guide 1.2.1 User Interface Operation The basic menu structure flow diagram is shown in Figure 1.2-5. This diagram shows the main modes of display: Settings Mode, Instrument Mode, Fault Data Mode and Control Mode. When the relay leaves the factory all data storage areas are cleared and the settings set to default as specified in settings document. When the relay is first energised the user is presented with the following message: 7SR224 _______________________________ ENTER to CONTROL Figure 1.2-4 Relay Identifier Screen On the factory default setup the relay LCD should display the relay identifier, on each subsequent power-on the screen that was showing before the last power-off will be displayed. The push-buttons on the fascia are used to display and edit the relay settings via the LCD, to display and activate the control segment of the relay, to display the relays instrumentation and Fault data and to reset the output relays and LED's. The five push-buttons have the following functions: READ DOWN READ UP Used to navigate the menu structure. ENTER The ENTER push-button is used to initiate and accept setting changes. When a setting is displayed pressing the ENTER key will enter the edit mode, the setting will flash and can now be changed using the READ UP or READ DOWN buttons. When the required value is displayed the ENTER button is pressed again to accept the change. When an instrument is displayed pressing ENTER will toggle the instruments favourite screen status. CANCEL This push-button is used to return the relay display to its initial status or one level up in the menu structure. Pressed repeatedly will return to the Relay Identifier screen. It is also used to reject any alterations to a setting while in the edit mode. TEST/RESET This push-button is used to reset the fault indication on the fascia. When on the Relay Identifier screen it also acts as a lamp test button, when pressed all LEDs will momentarily light up to indicate their correct operation. It is also moves the cursor right when navigating through menus and settings. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 5 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 7SR22 ARGUS ____________________________ ENTER to CONTROL CONTROL MODE SETTINGS MODE INSTRUMENTS MODE FAULT DATA MODE NUMBER OF FAULTS CB TRAVELLING CLOSE I OPEN SYSTEM CONFIG FAVOURITE METERS AR : Out Of Service IN I OUT CT/VT CONFIG CURRENT METERS AR : Trip & Reclose CONFIRM ACTION FUNCTION CONFIG AR : Trip & Lockout CONFIRM ACTION Hotline Working : OUT IN I OUT CURRENT PROT'N VOLTAGE METERS PHASE OVERCURRENT 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 FREQUENCY METERS POWER METERS VOLTAGE CONT O/C E/F Protection : IN IN I OUT SEF Protection : IN IN I OUT COLD LOAD DIRECTIONAL METERS MEASURED E/F Inst Protection : IN IN I OUT Loss Of Volts : IN IN I OUT Battery Test CONFIRM ACTION ENERGY METERS SENSITIVE E/F RESTRICTED E/F 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 NPS OVERCURRENT 46IT 46DT UNDER CURRENT 37-1 37-2 PHASE U/O VOLTAGE AUTORECLOSE METERS LOSS OF VOLTS METERS MAINTENANCE METERS GENERAL ALARM METERS THERMAL VOLTAGE PROT'N THERMAL METERS 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 BATTERY CONDITION Vx U/O VOLTAGE NPS OVERVOLTAGE NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE U/O FREQUENCY SUPERVISION CB FAIL 47-1 47-2 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 CAPACITOR CONDITION POWER QUALITY METERS DEMAND METERS VT SUPERVISION BINARY INPUT METERS CT SUPERVISION BROKEN CONDUCTOR BINARY OUTPUT METERS TRIP CCT SUPERVISION VIRTUAL METERS INRUSH DETECTOR BATTERY TEST COMMUNICATION METERS CAPACITOR TEST POWER QUALITY CONTROL & LOGIC 27SAG 59SWELL MISCELLANEOUS METERS AUTORECLOSE PROT'N AUTORECLOSE CONFIG MANUAL CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER LIVE/DEAD LOV QUICK LOGIC INPUT CONFIG INPUT MATRIX FUNCTION KEY MATRIX BINARY INPUT CONFIG FUNCTION KEY CONFIG GENERAL ALARMS OUTPUT CONFIG OUTPUT MATRIX BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG LED CONFIG PICKUP CONFIG CB MAINTENANCE CB COUNTERS I^2T CB WEAR DATA STORAGE COMMUNICATIONS Figure 1.2-5 Typical Menu Structure (See Appendices for relevant software version) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 6 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 1.3 Settings Display The Settings Mode is reached by pressing the READ DOWN button from the relay identifier screen. Once the Settings Mode title screen has been located pressing the READ DOWN button takes the user into the Settings mode sub-menus. Each sub-menu contains the programmable settings of the relay in separate logical groups. The sub menus are accessed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Pressing the READ DOWN button will scroll through the settings, after the last setting in each sub menu is reached the next sub menu will be displayed. If a particular sub menu is not required to be viewed then pressing READ DOWN will move directly to the next one in the list. While a setting is being displayed on the screen the ENTER button can be pressed to edit the setting value. If the relay is setting password protected the user will be asked to enter the password. If an incorrect password is entered editing will not be permitted. All screens can be viewed even if the password is not known. While a setting is being edited flashing characters indicate the edit field. Pressing the READ UP or READ DOWN buttons will display the valid field values. If these buttons are pressed and held, the rate of scrolling will increase. Once editing is complete pressing the ENTER button stores the new setting into the non-volatile memory. The setting change is effective immediately unless any protection element is operating, in which case the change becomes effective when no elements are operating. Configuration and inspection of communications protocol data objects, text used for display in international languages, graphical user logic and programming of user specific custom protection characteristics is not possible from the fascia and pc based tools must be used if required. NB: The Settings Display may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the manual for relevant software version. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 7 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 1.4 Instruments Mode The Instrument Mode sub-menu displays key quantities and information to aid with commissioning. The following meters are available and are navigated around by using the READ UP , READ DOWN and TEST/REST buttons. NB: The Instruments Mode may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the manual for relevant software version. 1.5 Fault Data Mode The Fault Data Mode sub menu lists the time and date of the previous ten protection operations. The stored data about each fault can be viewed by pressing the TEST/RESET button. Each record contains data on the operated elements, analogue values and LED flag states at the time of the fault. The data is viewed by scrolling down using the READ DOWN button. 1.6 Control Mode This mode provides convenient access to commonly used relay control and test functions. When any of the items listed below are selected control is initiated by pressing the ENTER key. The TEST/RESET button is used to toggle between the available options. The user is prompted to confirm the action, again by pressing the ENTER key, before the command is executed. If the action is not confirmed within a short time the action is automatically cancelled. Control Mode commands can be password protected by using the Control Password function Commands available in the Control Mode are: CB: Open or CB: Close AR: In Service or AR: Out of Service AR: Trip and Reclose AR: Trip & Lockout Hotline Working: In or Hotline Working: Out E/F Protection: In or E/F Protection: Out SEF Protection: In or SEF Protection: Out Inst Protection: In or Inst Protection: Out Battery Test Set Local Mode Set Local or Remote Mode Set Remote Mode Set Service Mode (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 8 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Section 2: Setting the Relay Using Reydisp Evolution Reydisp Evolution software provides a pc tool which can be used for programming of protection configuration and settings and the mapping of hardware input and outputs using a graphical interface. It is supplied with additional tools for configuration of serial communication protocol data objects, configuration of text for international language support and programming of user specific time current curves. To configure the relay using a serial communication port the user will need the following:PC with Reydisp Evolution Installed. (This can be download from our website www.siemens.com/energy and found under the submenu `Software') This software requires windows 2000-service pack 4 or above, or windows XP with service pack 2 or above. Configuration and download of IEC 61850 data and programming of graphical user logic requires the use of the Reydisp Manager software which is supplied with online instructions and help and is not documented here. 2.1 Physical Connection The relay can be connected to Reydisp via any of the communication ports on the relay. Suitable communication Interface cable and converters are required depending which port is being used. 2.1.1 Front USB connection To connect your pc locally via the front USB port. USB Type A socket on PC USB Data Cable Local Engineer Access USB Type B USB Type A Figure 2.1.1-1 USB connection to PC (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 9 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 2.1.2 Rear RS485 connection USB or 9 pin male D connector 14 18 Laptop computer RS232 straight through cable or RS232 to USB converter cable RS485 Screened twisted pair Rear terminals 25 pin male D connector Figure 2.1.2-1 RS485 connection to PC 2.1.3 Optional rear fibre optic connection 7SG244 USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer RS232 straight through cable or RS232 to USB converter cable 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 2.1.3-1 Fibre Optic Connection to PC Sigma devices have a 25 pin female D connector with the following pin out. Pin 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Description Transmit Data Received Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data set ready Signal Ground Received Line Signal Detector Data Terminal Ready Function Transmit Data Received Data Loop to pin 5 Loop to pin 4 +5 V (2) Signal Ground +5 V (2) +5 V (2) 1 9 Shield Aux Power Signal Ground +5 V (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 10 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 2.1.4 Optional Rear RS232 connection Figure 2.1.4-1 Direct RS232 Connection to PC The optional RS232 port is a 9 pin male D connector with the following pin out. Pin Description Function 1 2 Received Line Signal Detector Received Data No Connection Received Data 3 4 Transmit Data Data Terminal Ready Transmit Data +5 V 5 6 Signal Ground Data set ready Signal Ground +5 V 7 8 Request to Send Clear to Send Loop to pin 8 Loop to pin 7 9 Ring indicator +5 V 2.1.5 Configuring Relay Data Communication Using the keys on the relay fascia scroll down the settings menu's into the `communications' menu and change the settings for the communication port used on the relay. All of the below settings may not be available in all relay types. Reydisp software uses IEC60870-5-103 protocol to communicate. COM1-RS485 Port COM2-USB Port COM3 - Optional Fibre Optic, RS485 or RS232 COM4 - Optional Fibre Optic (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 11 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Setting name Range COM1-RS485 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or 103 IEC60870-5-101 COM1-RS485 Station Address Default 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU 0 0 - 65534 for DNP3.0 COM1-RS485 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 19200 COM1-RS485 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM1-RS485 Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Remote COM2-USB Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, ASCII, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5101 IEC60870-5103 COM1-RS485 Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Local COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, IEC6-0870-5MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or 103 IEC60870-5-101 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 COM3- Station Address 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU 0 0 - 65534 for DNP3.0 COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 COM3 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN COM3 Line Idle LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF COM3 Data echo ON, OFF OFF COM3-RS485 Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Remote COM4 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or OFF IEC60870-5-101 0 - 65534 for DNP3.0 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Notes COM1 is the rear mounted RS485 port Address given to relay to identify that relay from others which may be using the same path for communication as other relays for example in a fibre optic hub COM2 is the front USB port. COM3 This is an optional rear mounted optional connection Address given to relay to identify that relay from others which may be using the same path for communication as other relays for example in a fibre optic hub 57600 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 COM4- Station Address 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU Units 0 COM4 This is an optional rear mounted optional connection Address given to relay to identify that relay from others which may be using the same path for communication as other relays for example in a fibre optic hub Chapter 2 Page 12 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Setting name Range Default COM4 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 19200 COM4 Parity NONE, OFF, EVEN EVEN COM4 Line Idle LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF COM4 Data echo ON, OFF OFF COM1-RS485 Mode Local,Remote, Local or Remote Remote Unsolicited Mode DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED Setting is only visible when a port Protocol is set to DNP3 Destination Address 0 ... 65534 0 Setting is only visible when a port Protocol is set to DNP3 DNP3 Application Timeout 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s I101 Link Mode Balanced, Unbalanced Unbalanced Not Present, 1 Octet, 2 I101 Link Address Field Octets 1 Octet I101 Common Address of ASDU 1 Octet, 2 Octets 2 Octet I101 Cause of Trans (COT) 1 Octet, 2 Octets 1 Octet (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Units Seconds Notes Setting is only visible when a port Protocol is set to DNP3 Balanced transmission is used for point to point connection to one device. The controlled station (slave) may send link messages at any time. Unbalanced transmission is used for multi-drop connection, e.g. RS485, to one or more devices. The controlling station (master) send class 1 and 2 polls to each slave station. Size of link address in octets. Not Present - Only used with balanced transmission. 1 octet address range 0 - 254 2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 0 - 254 2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Size of cause of transmission in octets. 1 octet - COT code 2 octets - COT code + originator address or 0. Chapter 2 Page 13 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments Setting name Range Default Units I101 Info Obj Add (IOA) 1 Octet, 2 Octets, 3 Octets 2 Octet I101 ASDU Address 0 .. 65535 3 I101 Cyclic Period Off, 1 ..3600 seconds 60 Seconds Seconds I101 Background Period Off, 1 ..1500 minutes Off Minutes Notes Size of Info Object address in octets. 1 octet address range 1 - 255 2 octets address range 1 - 65535 3 octets used to generate structured address format. Address to use to identify ASDU layer Period device will generate cyclic data. Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically. Period device will generate background data. Set to Off to disable generating of background data. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background. NB: The Data Communication Configuration may vary between software versions. Please see the appendices to this section of the manual for relevant software version. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 14 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments 2.1.6 Connecting to the Relay via Reydisp When Reydisp Evolution software is running all available communication ports of the PC will automatically be detected. On the start page tool bar open up the sub-menu File > Connect. The `Communication Manager' window will display all available communication ports. With the preferred port highlighted, select the `Properties' option and ensure the baud rate and parity match that selected in the relay Data Comms settings. Select `Connect' to initiate the relay-PC connection. Figure 2.1.5-1 PC Comm Port Selection Via the Relay > Set Address > Address set the relay address (1-254) or alternatively search for connected devices using the Relay > Set Address > Device Map. The relay can now be configured using the Reydisp software. Please refer to the Reydisp Evolution Manual for further guidance. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 15 of 16 7SR224 Argus Settings, Configuration & Instruments (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 2 Page 16 of 16 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 R1a Typographical revisions; Page 9 2009/09 LOV modified, 50/51G modified to suit calculated values. 2010/04 Check Synchronising added 2010/05 Document reformatted due to rebrand 2010.09 Data updated for EATS 48-4 compliance for binary inputs 2012/10 Minor defect corrections, 27/59 Vx was missing, 61850 added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual, IDMTL Time Multiplier range extended The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Contents Section 1: Common Functions............................................................................................................................ 5 1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................. 5 1.1.1 CE Conformity...................................................................................................................... 5 1.1.2 Reference ............................................................................................................................ 5 1.1.3 Dimensions .......................................................................................................................... 5 1.1.4 Weights ............................................................................................................................... 6 Energising Quantities ................................................................................................................................. 7 1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply ......................................................................................................... 7 1.1.6 AC Current ........................................................................................................................... 7 1.1.7 AC Voltage .......................................................................................................................... 8 1.1.8 Binary (Digital) Outputs ........................................................................................................ 8 1.1.9 Binary (Digital) Inputs ........................................................................................................... 9 1.2 Functional Performance ................................................................................................................... 11 1.2.1 Instrumentation .................................................................................................................. 11 1.2.2 USB Data Communication Interface.................................................................................... 11 1.2.3 Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface ................................................................. 11 1.2.4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port) ................................................ 11 1.2.5 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port)................................... 11 1.2.6 RS232 Data Communication Interface ................................................................................ 11 1.2.7 RS232 Data Communication Interface ................................................................................ 11 1.2.8 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) .............................. 12 1.2.9 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) ................................. 12 1.2.10 Real Time Clock ................................................................................................................. 12 1.3 Environmental Performance ............................................................................................................. 13 1.3.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 13 1.3.2 Emissions .......................................................................................................................... 14 1.3.3 Immunity ............................................................................................................................ 15 1.3.4 Mechanical ........................................................................................................................ 16 Section 2: Protection Functions ........................................................................................................................ 17 2.1 27/59 Under/Over Voltage................................................................................................................ 17 2.1.2 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 17 2.1.3 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 17 2.1.4 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 17 2.2 27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage ........................................................................................................... 18 2.2.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 18 2.2.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 18 2.2.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 18 2.3 37 Undercurrent............................................................................................................................... 19 2.3.2 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 19 2.3.3 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 19 2.3.4 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 19 2.4 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ................................................................................ 20 2.4.1 Reference (46DT) .............................................................................................................. 20 2.4.2 Operate and Reset Level (46DT) ........................................................................................ 20 2.4.3 Operate and Reset Time (46DT) ......................................................................................... 20 2.4.4 Reference (46IT) ................................................................................................................ 21 2.4.5 Operate and Reset Level (46IT) .......................................................................................... 21 2.4.6 Operate and Reset Time (46IT) .......................................................................................... 21 2.5 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage.............................................................................................. 22 2.5.1 Reference (47) ................................................................................................................... 22 2.5.2 Operate and Reset Level (47) ............................................................................................. 22 2.5.3 Operate and Reset Time (47) ............................................................................................. 22 2.6 49 Thermal Overload ....................................................................................................................... 23 2.6.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 23 2.6.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 23 2.6.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 23 2.7 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent .......................................................................................................... 25 2.7.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 25 2.7.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 25 2.7.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 25 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 2 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.8 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault......................................................................................... 26 2.8.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 26 2.8.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 26 2.8.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 26 2.9 50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault ...................................................................................... 27 2.9.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 27 2.9.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 27 2.9.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 27 2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent .......................................................................................................... 28 2.10.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 28 2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 28 2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 29 2.11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault ......................................................................................... 30 2.11.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 30 2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 30 2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 31 2.12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault ...................................................................................... 35 2.12.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 35 2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 35 2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 36 2.13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ................................................................................................. 37 2.13.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 37 2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 37 2.14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement ................................................................................................... 38 2.14.1 Reference (59NDT) ............................................................................................................ 38 2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) ...................................................................................... 38 2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) ...................................................................................... 38 2.14.4 Reference (59NIT).............................................................................................................. 38 2.14.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) ....................................................................................... 38 2.14.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT) ........................................................................................ 39 2.15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection............................................................................................... 40 2.15.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 40 2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 40 2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 40 2.16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault ........................................................................ 41 2.16.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 41 2.16.2 Operate Angle.................................................................................................................... 41 2.16.3 Operate Threshold ............................................................................................................. 41 2.16.4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level ...................................................................................... 41 2.16.5 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 41 2.17 81Under/Over Frequency ................................................................................................................. 42 2.17.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 42 2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 42 2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 42 Section 3: Supervision Functions...................................................................................................................... 43 3.1 46BC Broken Conductor .................................................................................................................. 43 3.1.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 43 3.1.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 43 3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 43 3.2 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail ................................................................................................................. 44 3.2.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 44 3.2.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 44 3.2.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 44 3.3 60CTS Current Transformer Supervision .......................................................................................... 45 3.3.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 45 3.3.2 Current & Voltage Threshold............................................................................................... 45 3.3.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 45 3.4 60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision .......................................................................................... 46 3.4.1 Reference (60VTS) ............................................................................................................ 46 3.4.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 46 3.4.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 46 3.5 60VTF-Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision ................................................................................... 47 3.5.1 Reference (60VTF)............................................................................................................. 47 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 3 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.5.2 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 47 3.6 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision ........................................................................................................ 47 3.6.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 47 3.6.2 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 47 3.7 81HBL2 Inrush Detector................................................................................................................... 48 3.7.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 48 3.7.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 48 3.7.3 Operate and Reset Time .................................................................................................... 48 Section 4: Control Functions ............................................................................................................................ 49 4.1 Check Synchronising ....................................................................................................................... 49 4.1.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 49 4.1.2 Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements ............................................................................... 49 4.1.3 Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements ................................................................................. 50 4.1.4 Voltage Difference.............................................................................................................. 50 4.1.5 General Autoreclose Timers ............................................................................................... 50 4.1.6 CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference .............................................................. 50 4.1.7 CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency................................................................................................ 50 4.1.8 CS/SS Timer ...................................................................................................................... 50 4.1.9 Split Angle Detector............................................................................................................ 51 4.1.10 Split Slip Frequency Detector.............................................................................................. 51 4.2 Live/Dead ........................................................................................................................................ 51 4.2.1 Reference .......................................................................................................................... 51 4.2.2 Live/Dead Detector Elements ............................................................................................. 51 4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ............................................................................. 51 4.3.1 Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live ) ........................................................................................ 51 4.3.2 Operate and Reset Level .................................................................................................... 51 4.3.3 Reference LOV Automation Timers ..................................................................................... 52 4.3.4 Operate Time LOV Automation Timers................................................................................ 52 List of Figures Figure 1-1 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2............................................................................................................. 10 Thermal Overload Protection Curves ............................................................................. 24 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1) .......................................................................... 32 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1)........................................................... 33 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1) ......................................................................... 34 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 4 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 General 1.1.1 CE Conformity This product is CE compliant to relevant EU directives. 1.1.2 Reference This product complies with IEC 60255-3, IEC 60255-6 and IEC 60255-12. 1.1.2.1 Accuracy Reference Conditions This product has been tested under the following conditions, unless specifically stated otherwise. Parameter Value Auxiliary supply nominal Frequency nominal Ambient temperature 20 C 1.1.3 Dimensions Parameter Width Value E10 case 260 mm E12 case 312 mm Height 177 mm Depth behind panel (including clearance for wiring and fibre) 287 mm Projection (from front of panel) 31 mm See appropriate case outline and panel drilling drawing, as specified in Diagrams and Parameters document, for complete dimensional specifications. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 5 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.1.4 Weights Parameter Value 7SR2242, E10 case 6 kg 7SR2243, E10 case 6 kg (Including panel 7SR2244, E10 case fixings & terminal screws, 7SR2246, E12 case excluding 7SR2247, E12 case packaging) 6 kg Net weight 7SR2248, E12 case 7.4 kg 7.8 kg 7.8 kg When supplied with additional fibre optic, RS485 or RS232 communication interface the above weights are increased by 0.165 kg. When supplied with additional Ethernet communication interface the above weights are increased by 0.6 kg. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 6 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Energising Quantities 1.1.5 Auxiliary Power Supply Nominal VAUX Operating Range 30, 48, 110, 220 VDC 1.1.5.1 Attribute 24 to 290 VDC Burden Value 30V DC 48V DC 110V DC 220V DC 1.1.5.2 Quiescent (typical) 6.0 W Quiescent (back light) 7.0 W Quiescent (typical) 5.5 W Quiescent (back light) 6.5 W Quiescent (typical) 6.5 W Quiescent (back light) 7.5 W Quiescent (typical) 7.5 W Quiescent (back light) 8.5 W Operational Features Attribute Value 0% Dip Withstand Period Comments 100 ms Typical time after switch on to Dip Immunity Acquisition Period 5 minutes attain claimed immunity to dips NOTE: Dips in supply that fall below the minimum voltage for a period greater than the 0% Dip Withstand Period, will invoke a relay reset. (1) During conditions of auxiliary input voltage variations which are not described in section 1.4.3.1, the relay may enter a safety protection mode where a power supply shutdown occurs. This condition is designed to protect the power supply from damage as well as prevent internal relay faults from developing into dangerous situations. Once the relay has entered this safety mode, it may be necessary to reduce the auxiliary input voltage to zero volts for up to 30 seconds before re-application of the auxiliary supply will cause the relay to power up and operate normally. (1) Using fuses as on/off switches or allowing batteries to run at very low cell voltages for extended periods and then attempting to re-charge them are examples of such auxiliary supply conditions. 1.1.6 AC Current Nominal Measuring Range In 1, 5 A Phase and earth 80 x In fn 50, 60 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Note. 1 A and 5 A nominal inputs are user selectable on each model. 1.1.6.1 Burden Attribute AC Burden (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Value - Phase and Earth 1A 5A 0.1 VA 0.3 VA Chapter 3 Page 7 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.1.6.2 Thermal Withstand Overload Current Overload Period Phase and Earth 1A 5A Continuous 3.0 xIn 10 minutes 3.5 xIn 5 minutes 4.0 xIn 3 minutes 5.0 xIn 2 minutes 6.0 xIn 3 seconds 57.7 A 202 A 2 seconds 70.7 A 247 A 1 second 100 A 350 A 1 cycle 700 A 2500 A 1.1.7 AC Voltage Attribute Nominal Operating Range 4x VT models: 0-270 V RMS Vn 40-160 V RMS 6x VT models: 0-270 V RMS V1,V2,V3. 0-132 V RMS for V4,V5,V6 fn 50, 60 Hz 1.1.7.1 Attribute Burden 47 to 63 Hz Value 0.1 VA at 110 V AC Burden 1.1.7.2 Attribute Thermal withstand Value Overvoltage withstand 300 V RMS 1.1.8 Binary (Digital) Outputs Contact rating to IEC 60255-0-2 Attribute Value Carry continuously 5 A AC or DC Make and carry (L/R 40 ms and V 300 V) Break ( 5 A and 300 V) for 0.5 s 20 A AC or DC for 0.2 s 30 A AC or DC AC resistive 1250 VA AC inductive 250 VA at p.f. 0.4 DC resistive 75 W DC inductive 30 W at L/R 40 ms 50 W at L/R 10 ms Contact Operate / Release Time 7 ms / 3 ms Minimum number of operations 1000 at maximum load Minimum recommended load 0.5 W at minimum of 10 mA or 5 V (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 8 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.1.9 Binary (Digital) Inputs Nominal VBI 1.1.9.1 Attribute Operating Range 19 VDC 17 to 290 VDC 88 VDC 74 to 290 VDC Performance Maximum DC current for operation Value VBI = 19 V 1.5 mA VBI = 88 V 1.5 mA Reset/Operate voltage ratio 90 % Typical response time < 7 ms Typical response time when programmed to energise an output relay contact < 20 ms The binary inputs have a low minimum operate current and may be set for high speed operation. To achieve immunity from AC interference, a BI pick-up delay of typically one-cycle can be applied. The default pick-up time delay of 20 ms will provide this immunity. The standard EATS 48-4 specifies additional performance requirements to provide greater security against external disturbances. This standard can be applied to applications where a binary input is used to influence a control function (e.g. provide a tripping function) and the wiring is considered to be susceptible to capacitive currents, but double pole switching is not applied. See Chapter 7 Applications Guide. To comply with EATS 48-4, classes ESI 1 and ESI 2, external components / BI pick-up delays are required as shown in fig. 1-1. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 9 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification ESI-1 + 470 ESI-2 30 V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5 V Operative) IOP > 10 mA + 220 BI (19 V) 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5 V Operative) IOP > 20 mA BI (19 V) 1K5 820 - + 1K6 - + 48 V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60 V Operative) IOP > 10 mA 820 48 V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60 V Operative) IOP > 20 mA BI (19 V) BI (19 V) 820 1K5 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10F, 60 V Capacitance discharge) + 2K0 + 110 V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5 V Operative) IOP > 25 mA 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5 V Operative) IOP > 50 mA 1K2 BI (19 V) BI (19 V) 330 560 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10 F, 150 V Capacitance discharge) + 110 V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5 V Operative) IOP > 25 mA + 110 V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5 V Operative) IOP > 50 mA BI (88 V) BI (88 V) 1K3 2K7 - - BI pickup DTL = 10 ms (10 F, 150 V Capacitance discharge) Resistor power ratings: 30 V DC Nominal 48 V DC Nominal 110 V DC Nominal 110 V DC Nominal >3 W >3 W >10 W (ESI- 1) >20 W (ESI-2) Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot Figure 1-1 Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 10 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.2 Functional Performance 1.2.1 Instrumentation Instrument Value Reference Typical accuracy I Current 0.1 xIn I 3.0 xIn 1 % In V Voltage 0.8 xVn V 1.2 xVn 1 % Vn Power, real and apparent V = Vn, I 0.1 xIn, pf 0.8 3 % Pn, where Pn = Vn x In Power factor V = Vn, I 0.1 xIn, pf 0.8 0.05 pf 1.2.2 USB Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors USB-Type B 1.2.3 Fibre optic Serial Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Fibre-optic Connectors STTM (BFOC/2.5) Recommended fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with ST connector Optical Wavelength 820 nm Launch power (into recommended fibre) -16 dBm Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm 1.2.4 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Standard Rear Port) Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 4 mm Ring Crimp 1.2.5 RS485 Data Communication Interface (Optional Rear Mounted Port) Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors Screw retainer terminal to suit Flat Blade Crimps up to 2.5 mm 1.2.6 RS232 Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 9 way Male `D' connector 1.2.7 RS232 Data Communication Interface Attribute Value Physical layer Electrical Connectors 9 way Male `D' connector (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 11 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.2.8 Fibre Optic Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Attribute Value Physical Layer Fibre Optic Connectors Duplex LC 100 BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3 Recommended Fibre 62.5/125 m glass fibre with Duplex-LC connector Transmission Speed 100 MBit/s Optical Wavelength 1300 nm Bridgeable distance 2 km 1.2.9 Electrical Ethernet Data Communication Interface (IEC 61850 Option) Attribute Value Physical Layer Electrical Connectors RJ45 100BaseF in acc. With IEEE802.3 Transmission Speed 100 MBit/s Test Voltage (with regard to socket) 500 VAC 50 Hz Bridgeable distance 20 m 1.2.10 Real Time Clock 1.2.10.1 Internal Clock The specification below applies only while no external synchronisation signal (e.g. IRIG-B, IEC 60870-5-103) is being received. Attribute Value Accuracy (- 10 C to + 55 C) 1.2.10.2 Attribute 3.5 ppm (No Aux supply connected) 100 ppm (Aux supply connected) IRIG-B Value Connector BNC Signal Type IRIG-B 120, 122 or 123 Applied signal level minimum 3 V, maximum 6 V, peak-to-peak Signal : carrier ratio 3:1 Input Impedance 4 k Ohms approx. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 12 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3 Environmental Performance 1.3.1 General 1.3.1.1 Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Type Level Operating range -10 C to +55 C Storage range -25 C to +70 C 1.3.1.2 Humidity IEC 60068-2-3 Type Level Operational test 56 days at 40 C and 95 % relative humidity 1.3.1.3 Transient Overvoltage IEC 60255-5 Type Level Between all M4 terminals and earth, or between any two independent circuits 1.3.1.4 Insulation IEC 60255-5 Type Level Between any M4 terminal and earth Between independent circuits Across normally open contacts 1.3.1.5 5.0 kV, 1.2/50 s 0.5j 2.5 kV AC RMS for 1 min 1.0 kV AC RMS for 1 min IP Ratings IEC 60529 Type Installed with cover on Installed with cover removed (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Level Rear IP 20 Front IP 51 Rear IP 20 Front IP 20 Chapter 3 Page 13 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3.2 Emissions IEC 60255-25 1.3.2.1 Type Radiated Radio Frequency Limits at 10 m Open Area test site, Quasi-peak 30 to 230 MHz 40 dB(V/m) 230 to 10000 MHz 47 dB(V/m) 1.3.2.2 Conducted Radio Frequency Type Limits Quasi-peak Average 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB(V) 66 dB(V) 0.5 to 30 MHz 73 dB(V) 60 dB(V) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 14 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3.3 Immunity 1.3.3.1 Auxiliary DC Supply Variation IEC 60255-11 Quantity Value Allowable superimposed ac component 12% of DC voltage Allowable breaks/dips in supply (collapse to zero from nominal voltage) 20 ms 1.3.3.2 High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1 Class III Type Level Common (longitudinal) mode 2.5 kV Series (transverse) mode 1.0 kV RS485 standard rear port 1 kV No Data Loss IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV Type Level Variation Contact discharge 8.0 kV 5% Type Level Variation 80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m 5% IEC 60255-22-4 Class A (2002) Type Level Variation 5/50 ns 2.5 kHz repetitive 4 kV 10 % RS485 standard rear port 2 kV No Data Loss Level 4.0 kV Variation 2.0 kV 10 % 1.0 kV No data loss 2.0 kV 10 % 1.0 kV* 10 % 1.3.3.3 1.3.3.4 Variation 10 % Electrostatic Discharge Radiated Immunity IEC 60255-22-3 Class III 1.3.3.5 1.3.3.6 Fast Transients Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5; IEC 61000-4-5 Type Analog Inputs. Line to Earth Case, Aux Power & I/O. Line to Earth RS485 Comms port Line to Earth Analog Inputs. Line to Line Case, Aux Power & I/O. Line to Line 10 % * Note: 45 ms pick-up delay applied to binary inputs 1.3.3.7 Conducted Radio Frequency Interference IEC 60255-22-6 Type Level Variation 0.15 to 80 MHz 10 V 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 15 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1.3.4 Mechanical 1.3.4.1 Vibration (Sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class I Type Level Vibration response 0.5 gn Vibration endurance 1.0 gn 1.3.4.2 Variation 5% Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Class I Type Level Shock response 5 gn, Shock withstand 15 gn, 11 ms Bump test 10 gn, 16 ms 1.3.4.3 Variation 11 ms 5% Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class I Type Level Variation Seismic response 1 gn 5% 1.3.4.4 Type Durability Level 6 > 10 operations Mechanical Classification (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 16 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 2: Protection Functions 2.1 2.1.2 27/59 Under/Over Voltage Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting 5, 5.5...200 V hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80.0 % td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.1.3 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % - hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V 1% Repeatability Variation 2.1.4 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute tbasicE top Value Element basic operate time. Overvoltage Standard & LOV models Undervoltage Element basic operate time. Overvoltage Single-Triple model only Undervoltage 0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms 10 ms 0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms 10 ms 1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms 10 ms 0 to 1.1 x Vs: 81 ms 10 ms 0 to 2.0 xVs: 71 ms 10 ms 1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 64 ms 10 ms Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Disengaging time < 80 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 17 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.2 27/59 Vx Under/Over voltage 2.2.1 Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting for 4xVT models 5, 5.5...199.5, 200 V Vs Setting for 6xVT models 5, 5.5...119.5, 120 V hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80.0 % td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.2.2 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V Reset level Overvoltage = (100 % - hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V Undervoltage = (100 % + hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V 1% Repeatability Variation 2.2.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Overvoltage 0 to 1.1 x Vs: 73 ms 10 ms tbasicE Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Disengaging time < 80 ms Undervoltage (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 2.0 xVs: 63 ms 10 ms 1.1 to 0.5 xVs: 58 ms 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 18 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.3 2.3.2 37 Undercurrent Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.10...5.0 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.3.3 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 105 % Iop Repeatability 1% Variation 2.3.4 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 1.1 to 0.5 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 19 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.4 2.4.1 46NPS Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Reference (46DT) Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.06... 4.0 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.4.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level (46DT) Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.4.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time (46DT) Attribute tbasic top Element basic operate time Value 0 to 2 xIs: 40 ms, 10 ms 0 to 5 xIs: 30 ms, 10 ms Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Overshoot time <40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 20 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.4.4 char Reference (46IT) Parameter Value Characteristic setting IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 Is Setting 0.05, 0.06... 2.5 xIn I Applied Current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 x Is td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s tres Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s 2.4.5 Iop Operate and Reset Level (46IT) Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Variation 2.4.6 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time (46IT) Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 35 ms, 10ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL ANSI DECAYING [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 td, 1 % or 20 ms tres = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 50 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 tres tres, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 21 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.5 2.5.1 47 Negative Phase Sequence Voltage Reference (47) Parameter Value Vs Setting 1, 1.5... 90 V Hyst. Hysteresis 0, 0.1... 80 % td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.5.2 Vop Operate and Reset Level (47) Attribute Value Operate level (100%-hyst) x Vop, 1 % or 0.25 V Reset level 95 % Vop Repeatability 1% Variation 2.5.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time (47) Attribute Value 0V to 2 xVs, 80 ms, 20 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 2 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 60 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0V to 10 xVs, 55 ms, 20 ms Chapter 3 Page 22 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.6 2.6.1 49 Thermal Overload Reference Parameter Value Is Overload setting 0.10, 0.11... 3 xIn Time constant setting 1, 1.5... 1000 min 2.6.2 Iol Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Overload level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iol Repeatability 1% Variation 2.6.3 top -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Overload trip operate time I 2 - I 2P t = x ln 2 2 I - (k x I B ) 5 % absolute or 100 ms, (IS 0.3 xIN to 3 xIN) where IP = prior current Repeatability 100 ms Figure 2-1 shows the thermal curves for various time constants. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 23 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 100000 10000 = 1000 mins 1000 Time (sec) = 100 mins 100 = 10 mins 10 = 1 min 1 0.1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Current (multiple of setting) Figure 2-1 Thermal Overload Protection Curves (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 24 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.7 2.7.1 50 Instantaneous Overcurrent Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.05, 0.06 ...2, 2.05... 25, 25.5... 50 xIn I Applied Current (for operate time) 5 xIs td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.7.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.7.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 25 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.8 2.8.1 50G Instantaneous Measured Earth Fault Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.006 ...0.1, 0.105 .. 2.5, 2.55 ... 25 xIn I Applied Current (for operate time) 5 x Is td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.8.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation 2.8.3 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 26 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.9 50SEF Instantaneous Sensitive Earth Fault 2.9.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.006 ...0.1, 0.105 .. 5 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01... 20.0, 20.1 .. 100.0, 101....1000, 1010 ... 10000 , 10100 ... 14400 I Applied current (for operate time) 5 xIs 2.9.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop 5 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % -10 C to +55 C Variation fnom 5 % 5% 5% harmonics to fcutoff 2.9.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs: 35 ms, 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Variation 0 to 5 xIs: 25 ms, 10 ms fnom 5 % (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 5% Chapter 3 Page 27 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.10 51 Time Delayed Overcurrent 2.10.1 Reference Is Parameter Value Setting 0.05, 0.06... 2.5 xIn IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; char ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Characteristic setting Manufacturer specific curves See `Performance Specification Appendix 1' Tm I Time Multiplier setting Applied current 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 IDMTL (for operate time) DTL 2 to 20 xIs 5 xIs td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s tres Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s 2.10.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 28 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.10.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, 20ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL ANSI DECAYING [] -1 for char = t op = x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 td, 1 % or 20ms tres = Reset time K I Is R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 tres tres, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier = 1). These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 29 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.11 51G Time Delayed Measured Earth Fault 2.11.1 Reference Is Parameter Value Setting 0.005, 0.006 ...0.100, 0.105... 1.0 xIn IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; Char ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL Characteristic setting Manufacturer specific curves See `Performance Specification Appendix 1' Tm Time Multiplier setting 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 td Delay setting (DTL) 0, 0.01... 20 s tres Reset setting ANSI DECAYING, 0, 1... 60 s I Applied current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs DTL 5 xIs 2.11.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 30 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.11.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2xIs) 20 ms, 20ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI char = DTL ANSI DECAYING [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 td, 1 % or 20ms tres = Reset time K R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 tres tres, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms Figure 2-2 shows the operate times for the four IEC IDMTL curves with a time multiplier of 1. Figure 2-3 shows the ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) and Figure 2-4 shows the ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier = 1). These operate times apply to non-directional characteristics. Where directional control is applied then the directional element operate time should be added to give total maximum operating time. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 31 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Long Time Inverse Normal Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-2 IEC IDMTL Curves (Time Multiplier=1) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 32 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 100 Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 1 Very Inverse Extremely Inverse 0.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 20 30 40 50 60 80 100 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-3 ANSI IDMTL Operate Curves (Time Multiplier=1) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 33 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 1000 500 100 50 Extremely Inverse Very Inverse Time (sec) 10 Moderately Inverse 5 1 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Current (multiples of setting) Figure 2-4 ANSI Reset Curves (Time Multiplier=1) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 34 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.12 51SEF Time Delayed Sensitive Earth Fault 2.12.1 Reference Is Parameter Value Setting 0.005, 0.006 ...0.100, 0.105... 1.0 xIn IEC-NI, -VI, -EI, -LTI; ANSI-MI, -VI, -EI; DTL char Characteristic setting Manufacturer specific curves See `Performance Specification Appendix 1' Tm Time multiplier 0.025, 0.030... 1.6, 1.7... 5, 6... 100 td Delay setting 0.00...20.00 s tres Reset setting DECAYING, 0, 1...60 s I Applied current (for operate time) IDMTL 2 to 20 xIs DTL 5 xIs 2.12.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Is, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 95 % Iop 4 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% -10 C to +55 C Variation fnom 5 % 5% 5% harmonics to fcutoff (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 35 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.12.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Starter operate time 20 ms, 20 ms t op = char = IEC-NI, IEC-VI, IEC-EI, IEC-LTI top Operate time char = ANSI-MI, ANSI-VI, ANSI-EI, K [IsI ] - 1 for char = t op = x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, IEC-NI : IEC-VI : IEC-EI : IEC-LTI : A [IsI ]P K = 0.14, = 0.02 K = 13.5, = 1.0 K = 80.0, = 2.0 K = 120.0, = 1.0 + B x Tm , 5 % absolute or 30 ms, -1 for char = ANSI-MI : A = 0.0515, B = 0.114, P = 0.02 ANSI-VI : A = 19.61, B = 0.491, P = 2.0 ANSI-EI : A = 28.2, B = 0.1217, P = 2.0 char = DTL td, 1 % or tcycle tres = Reset time char = ANSI and = DECAYING tres tres DECAYING R [] I 2 Is -1 x Tm , for char = ANSI-MI : R = 4.85 ANSI-VI : R = 21.6 ANSI-EI : R = 29.1 tres, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms fnom 5 % Variation 5 % absolute or 30 ms, 5% harmonics to fcutoff (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 36 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.13 51V Voltage Controlled Overcurrent 2.13.1 Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting 60 V m multiplier 0.5 Is Setting 1 xIn 2.13.2 Operate and Reset Level Vop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs, 1 % or 0.25 V Reset level 105 % Vop Repeatability 1% -10 C to +55 C Variation fnom 5 % 5% 5% harmonics to fcutoff Operate and Reset Time As per Phase Fault Shaped Characteristic Element (ANSI 51). Where Pickup Level = Is for Voltage > Vs Pickup Level = (Is x m) for Voltage < Vs (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 37 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.14 59N Neutral Voltage Displacement 2.14.1 Reference (59NDT) Parameter Value Vs Setting 1, 1.5... 100 V td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 2.14.2 Operate and Reset Level (59NDT) Vop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V Reset level 95 % Vop or Vop 0.25 V Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% 2.14.3 Operate and Reset Time (59NDT) Attribute Value 0V to 1.5 xVs, 76 ms, 20 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms 0V to 10 xVs, 63 ms, 20 ms 2.14.4 Reference (59NIT) Parameter Value M Multiplier setting 0.1, 0.2... 10, 10.5... 140 Vs Setting 1, 1.5... 100 V td Delay setting 0, 0.01... 20 s tres Reset setting 0, 1...60 s 2.14.5 Operate and Reset Level (59NIT) Vop Attribute Value Operate level 105 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V Reset level 95 % Vop or Vop 0.25 V Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 38 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.14.6 Operate and Reset Time (59NIT) tbasic top Attribute Value Starter operate time ( 2 xVs) 65 ms, 20 ms Operate time Reset Time char = IDMTL t op = M [ ]-1 3V0 Vs , 5 % or 65 ms char = DTL td, 1 % or 40 ms char = IDMTL tres, 5 % or 65 ms char = DTL tres, 1 % or 40 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 39 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.15 64H Restricted Earth Fault Protection 2.15.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.006 ..0.100, 0.105... 0.95 xIn td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01... 20.0, 20.1... 100.0, 101....1000, 1010 ... 10000 , 10100 ... 14400 s 2.15.2 Operate and Reset Level Iop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% xIn Reset level 95 % Iop, 5 % or 0.1% xIn Repeatability 1% Transient overreach (X/R 100) -5 % Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% 2.15.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value 0 to 2 xIs, 40 ms, 10 ms tbasic Element basic operate time top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1% or 10 ms Repeatability 1% or 10 ms Overshoot time < 40 ms Disengaging time < 50 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 0 to 5 xIs, 30 ms, 10 ms Chapter 3 Page 40 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.16 67/67G/67SEF Directional Overcurrent & Earth Fault 2.16.1 Reference Parameter Value s Angle setting -95...+95 I Applied current In V Applied voltage 110 V phase-phase (63.5 V phase-earth) Vs Setting (V0) 0.33, 0.5, 1.0 ... 67 V 2.16.2 Operate Angle CA Attribute Value Characteristic angle (I with respect to V) s, 5 forward CA - 85 5 to CA + 85 5 reverse (CA - 180) - 85 5 to (CA - 180) + 85 5 Operating angle CA - 87.5 2.5 to CA + 87.5 2.5 Operating angle forward for SEF elements with Compensated reverse Networks Enabled Variation in characteristic angle (CA - 180) - 87.5 2.5 to (CA - 180) + 87.5 2.5 10C to +55C 5 fnom 5 % 5 2.16.3 Operate Threshold Attribute Minimum levels for operation Value I (p/f) > 5 % In I (e/f) > 0.5 % In V (p/f) >1V V (e/f) >1V 2.16.4 Minimum Polarising Voltage Level Vs Parameter Value Setting (V0) 100 % Vs, 2 % or 0.5 V 2.16.5 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Operate time typically 32 < 40 ms at characteristic angle Reset time typically < 65 ms at characteristic angle (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 41 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 2.17 81Under/Over Frequency 2.17.1 Reference Parameter Value Fs Setting 40, 40.01... 69.99 Hz Hyst Hysteresis setting 0, 0.1... 80 % td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01... 20.0, 20.5... 100.0, 101....1000, 1010 ... 10000 , 10100 ... 14400 s 2.17.2 Operate and Reset Level Fop Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Fs, 10 mHz Reset level overfrequency (100 % - hyst) xFop, 10 mHz underfrequency (100 % + hyst) xFop, 10 mHz 1% Repeatability Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% 2.17.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute Element basic operate time Value overfrequency Typically < 110 ms Maximum < 150 ms tbasic (for ROCOF between 0.1 underfrequency and 5.0 Hz/sec) Typically < 110 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Disengaging time < 100 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Maximum < 150 ms Chapter 3 Page 42 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 46BC Broken Conductor 3.1.1 Reference Parameter tf 3.1.2 Value NPS to PPS ratio 20...100 % Delay setting 0.02...1000 s Operate and Reset Level Attribute Icurr Value Operate level 100 % Iset 5 % Reset level 90 % Icurr , 5 % Repeatability 1% -10 C to +55 C Variation fnom 5 % 5% 5% harmonics to fcutoff 3.1.3 Operate and Reset Time Attribute tbasic Value Basic operate time 1x In to 0 A 40 ms Operate time tf + tbasic, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms fnom 5 % Variation 5% harmonics to fcutoff (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 43 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.2 50BF Circuit Breaker Fail 3.2.1 Reference Parameter Value Is Setting 0.005, 0.010... 2.0 xIn tCBF1 Stage 1 Delay setting 0, 2, 0.205... 60000 ms tCBF2 Stage 2 Delay setting 0, 2, 0.205... 60000 ms 3.2.2 Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Iop Operate level 100 % Is, 5 % or 1% In Ireset Reset level <100 % Iop, 5 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% 3.2.3 Operate and Reset Time tbasic top Attribute Value Element basic operate time < 20ms Stage 1 tCBF1, 1 % or 20 ms Stage 2 tCBF2, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms Overshoot < 2 x 20 ms Disengaging time < 20 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 44 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.3 60CTS Current Transformer Supervision 3.3.1 Reference Parameter Value Ithresh Current Threshold 0.05, 0.1... 1 xIn Vthresh Voltage Threshold 7, 8... 110 V td Delay setting 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 3.3.2 Iop Vop Current & Voltage Threshold Attribute Value CT failed current level 100 % Ithresh, 5% or 1% In Reset level 90 % Iop, 5% or 1% In CT failed voltage level 100 % Vthresh, 2% or 0.5 V Reset level 110 % Vop, 2 % or 0.5 V Repeatability 1% -10 C to +55 C Variation fnom 5 % 5% 5% harmonics to fcutoff 3.3.3 tbasic Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 30 ms 20 ms Operate time tbasic, 1 % or 20 ms Repeatability 1 % or 20 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 45 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.4 60VTS Voltage Transformer Supervision 3.4.1 Reference (60VTS) Parameter Value Vnps Vnps Level 7, 8 ... 110 V Inps Inps Level 0.05, 0.1 ... 1 x In Ipps Ipps Load Level 0.05, 0.1 ... 1 x In IFpps Ipps Fault Level 0.05, 0.1 ... 20 x In Vpps Vpps Level 1, 2 ... 110V td 60VTS Delay 0.00, 0.01...20.00, 20.50... 100, 101... 1000, 1010... 10000, 10100... 14400 s 3.4.2 VNPSop VPPSop INPSblk IPPSblk IPPSload Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Voltage NPS operate level 100 % Vnps, 5 % Vn Voltage NPS reset level 90 % VNPSop, 5 % Vn Voltage PPS operate level 100 % Vpps, 5 % Vn Voltage PPS reset level 110 % VPPSop, 5 % Vn Current NPS operate level 100 % Inps, 5 % xIn Current NPS reset level 90 % INPSblk, 5 % xIn Current PPS operate level 100 % IFpps, 5 % xIn Current PPS reset level 90 % IPPSblk, 5 % xIn Current PPS operate level 100 % Ipps, 5 % xIn Current PPS reset level 90 % IPPSload, 5 % xIn Repeatability 1% -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Variation 3.4.3 tbasic Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 0V to 2 x Vs 32 ms 10 ms Operate time tbasic, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 46 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.5 60VTF-BUS Voltage Transformer Supervision 3.5.1 Reference (60VTF) td 3.5.2 tbasic Parameter Value Operate time 0.1, 0.2 ... 100 s Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Basic operate time 30 ms 20 ms Operate time tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms 3.6 74TCS Trip Circuit Supervision 3.6.1 Reference td 3.6.2 Parameter Value Delay setting 0, 0.02...60 s Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 25ms 20 ms top Operate time following delay tbasic + td, 1 % or 10 ms Repeatability 1 % or 10 ms Variation - 10 C to + 55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 47 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 3.7 81HBL2 Inrush Detector 3.7.1 Reference Parameter Value Setting I (Ratio of 2nd Harmonic current to 0.10, 0.11... 0.5 Fundamental component current) 3.7.2 Iop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % I, 4 % or 1% In Reset level 100 % Iop, 4 % or 1% In Repeatability 1% Variation 3.7.3 tbasic -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% Operate and Reset Time Attribute Value Element basic operate time Will pick-up before operation of any protection element due to magnetic inrush Reset Time Will operation until drop-off of any protection element due to magnetic inrush (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 48 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Section 4: Control Functions 4.1 4.1.1 Check Synchronising Reference Parameter Value Vnom Nominal Voltage 40-160 V 1) fn Nominal Frequency 50/60 Hz Vlive Live Setting 10 % - 150 % Vdead Dead Setting 10 % - 150 % Vsl Line Voltage Setting 10 % - 150 % Vsb Bus Voltage Setting 10 % - 150 % Vdiff Voltage Differential Setting 5 % - 95 % cs CS Angle 1 - 90 ss SS Angle 1 - 90 fcoz COZ Slip 30 mHz - 250 mHz fcs CS Slip Freq 20 mHz - 250 mHz fss SS Slip Freq 10 mHz - 250 mHz tcs CS Timer 0-100 s tss SS Timer 0-1 s fsps Split Slip 20 mHz - 250 mHz tdlc/tdbc DLC/DBC Delays 0-60 s tcw Sync Close Window 1 s - 1200 s 1) Vz input of 6 VT devices has reduced operating range which is less than this setting and this hardware input should not be used for Check Synchronising if nominal voltage greater than 120 V is required. 4.1.2 Vlive,act Live/Dead Line/Bus Detector Elements Attribute Value Live operate level 100 % Vlive, 1 % Vn Live reset level Vdead,act, 1 % Vn Vdead,act Dead operate level Vlive,act, 1 % Vn Dead reset level 1% Repeatability Variation 100 % Vdead, 1 % Vn -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 1% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 49 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4.1.3 Vline Vbus Line and Bus Undervoltage Elements Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vsl, 1 % Vn Reset level Vline + 4 % Operate level 100 % Vsb, 1 % Vn Reset level Vbus + 4 % 1% Repeatability Variation 4.1.4 Vop 4.1.5 -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 1% Voltage Difference Attribute Value Operate level 100 % Vdiff, 1 % Vn Reset level Vop - 4 % Repeatability 2% General Autoreclose Timers Attribute Value tbasic Element basic operate time 20ms 20 ms top tdlc/tdbc/tcw top + tbasic 1% Repeatability 20 ms 4.1.6 op 4.1.7 fop 4.1.8 CS/SS/COZ Line and Bus Phase Angle Difference Attribute Value Operate angle diff, 1 Reset angle op, 1 Repeatability 1 CS/SS/COZ Slip Frequency Attribute Value Operate frequency fslip, 10 mHz Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz Repeatability 10 mHz CS/SS Timer Attribute Value top Operate time 1 , +20 ms Note: minimum synchronising time following restoration of voltage from a dead condition is 320ms. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 50 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4.1.9 op Split Angle Detector Attribute Value Operate angle split, 1 4.1.10 Split Slip Frequency Detector fop 4.2 4.2.1 Attribute Value Operate frequency fslip, 10 mHz Reset frequency fop, - 10 mHz Repeatability 10 mHz Live/Dead Reference Parameter Value Vs Setting (ABC side) 5, 5.5...200 V Vs Setting (XYZ side) 5, 5.5...120 V 4.2.2 Vlive,act Live/Dead Detector Elements Attribute Value Live operate level 100 % Vlive, 1 % Vn Live reset level Vdead,act, 1 % Vn Vdead,act Dead operate level 100 % Vdead, 1 % Vn Dead reset level Vlive,act, 1 % Vn Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 1% 4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function 4.3.1 Reference (LOV-A/X Dead/Live ) Parameter Value Setting 5, 5.5... 80 V Dead Vs Setting 5, 5.5... 80 V Live Vs 4.3.2 Vop Operate and Reset Level Attribute Value Operate level 100 % LiveVs, 2 % or 0.5 V Reset level 100 % DeadVs, 2 % or 0.5 V Repeatability 1% Variation -10 C to +55 C 5% fnom 5 % 5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 51 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification 4.3.3 Reference LOV Automation Timers Attribute Value top LOV Primed Time 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV Action Delay 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV-A Action Delay 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV-X Action Delay 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV Sequence Time 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV Reclose Delay 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV SOTF Time 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV Reclaim Time 0, 1 ... 600 s top LOV Memory Time 0, 1 ... 600 s 4.3.4 top Operate Time LOV Automation Timers Attribute Value Accuracy top, 1 % or 50 ms Repeatability 1 % or 50 ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 52 of 52 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2010/05. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2009/09 Second issue 2010/05 Third issue. Document reformatted due to rebrand Software Revision History The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Contents List of Figures Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Time Current Curve 101............................................................... Time Current Curve 102............................................................... Time Current Curve 103............................................................... Time Current Curve 104............................................................... Time Current Curve 105............................................................... Time Current Curve 106............................................................... Time Current Curve 107............................................................... Time Current Curve 111............................................................... Time Current Curve 112............................................................... Time Current Curve 113............................................................... Time Current Curve 114............................................................... Time Current Curve 115............................................................... Time Current Curve 116............................................................... Time Current Curve 117................................................................ Time Current Curve 118................................................................ Time Current Curve 119................................................................ Time Current Curve 120................................................................ Time Current Curve 121................................................................ Time Current Curve 122................................................................ Time Current Curve 131................................................................ Time Current Curve 132................................................................ Time Current Curve 133................................................................ Time Current Curve 134................................................................ Time Current Curve 135................................................................ Time Current Curve 136................................................................ Time Current Curve 137................................................................ Time Current Curve 138................................................................ Time Current Curve 139................................................................ Time Current Curve 140................................................................ Time Current Curve 141................................................................ Time Current Curve 142................................................................ Time Current Curve 151................................................................ Time Current Curve 152................................................................ Time Current Curve 161................................................................ Time Current Curve 162................................................................ Time Current Curve 163................................................................ Time Current Curve 164................................................................ Time Current Curve 165................................................................ Time Current Curve 200................................................................ Time Current Curve 201................................................................ Time Current Curve 202................................................................ Time Current Curve ANSI Extremely Inverse...................................... Time Current Curve ANSI Moderately Inverse.................................... Time Current Curve ANSI Very Inverse ............................................ Time Current Curve IEC Extremely Inverse........................................ Time Current Curve IEC Long Time Inverse....................................... Time Current Curve IEC Normal Inverse........................................... Time Current Curve IEC Very Inverse............................................... (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Chapter 3 Page 2 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 1. Time Current Curve 101 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 3 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 2. Time Current Curve 102 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 4 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 3. Time Current Curve 103 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 5 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 4. Time Current Curve 104 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 6 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 5. Time Current Curve 105 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 7 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 6. Time Current Curve 106 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 8 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 7. Time Current Curve 107 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 9 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 8. Time Current Curve 111 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 10 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 9. Time Current Curve 112 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 11 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 10. Time Current Curve 113 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 12 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 11. Time Current Curve 114 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 13 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 12. Time Current Curve 115 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 14 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 13. Time Current Curve 116 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 15 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 14. Time Current Curve 117 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 16 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 15. Time Current Curve 118 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 17 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 16. Time Current Curve 119 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 18 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 17. Time Current Curve 120 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 19 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 18. Time Current Curve 121 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 20 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 19. Time Current Curve 122 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 21 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 20. Time Current Curve 131 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 22 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 21. Time Current Curve 132 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 23 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 22. Time Current Curve 133 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 24 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 23. Time Current Curve 134 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 25 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 24. Time Current Curve 135 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 26 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 25. Time Current Curve 136 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 27 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 26. Time Current Curve 137 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 28 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 27. Time Current Curve 138 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 29 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 28. Time Current Curve 139 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 30 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 29. Time Current Curve 140 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 31 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 30. Time Current Curve 141 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 32 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 31. Time Current Curve 142 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 33 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 32. Time Current Curve 151 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 34 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 33. Time Current Curve 152 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 35 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 34.Time Current Curve 161 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 36 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 35. Time Current Curve 162 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 37 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 36. Time Current Curve 163 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 38 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 37. Time Current Curve 164 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 39 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 38. Time Current Curve 165 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 40 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 39. Time Current Curve 200 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 41 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 40. Time Current Curve 201 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 42 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 41. Time Current Curve 202 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 43 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 42. Time Current Curve ANSI Extremely Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 44 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 43. Time Current Curve ANSI Moderately Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 45 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 44. Time Current Curve ANSI Very Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 46 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 45. Time Current Curve IEC Extremely Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 47 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 46. Time Current Curve IEC Long Time Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 48 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 47. Time Current Curve IEC Normal Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 49 of 50 7SR224 Argus Performance Specification Appendix 1 Figure 48. Time Current Curve IEC Very Inverse (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 3 Page 50 of 50 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First Issue 2008/11 Second Issue 2009/09 Third Issue 2010/04 Fourth Issue 2010/05 Fifth Issue. Document reformatted due to rebrand. 2010/09 Sixth issue. Addition of IEC60870-5-101 communication protocol. 2012/09 IEC 61850 added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 DNP3 Obj.12 Close/Trip CROB added, Maintenance Release 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual. DNP3 analogue Battery Vaux added The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Contents Section 1: Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 3 Section 2: Physical Connection .......................................................................................................................... 4 2.1 Communication Ports......................................................................................................................... 4 2.1.1 DNP 3.0 Settings.................................................................................................................. 4 2.1.2 IEC60870-5-101 Settings ..................................................................................................... 5 2.1.3 USB Interface....................................................................................................................... 6 2.1.4 RS485 Interface ................................................................................................................... 7 2.1.5 Serial Fibre Optic Interface ................................................................................................... 8 2.1.6 Ethernet Interface............................................................................................................... 12 Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions ............................................................................................................ 13 3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 13 Section 4: Modbus Definitions .......................................................................................................................... 30 4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 30 Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions .......................................................................................................................... 46 5.1 Device Profile .................................................................................................................................. 46 5.2 Implementation Table ...................................................................................................................... 49 5.3 Point List ......................................................................................................................................... 59 5.3.1 Binary Input Points ............................................................................................................. 59 5.3.2 Double Bit Binary Input Points ............................................................................................ 69 5.3.3 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks ............................................. 70 5.3.4 Binary Counters ................................................................................................................. 73 5.3.5 Frozen Counters ................................................................................................................ 74 5.3.6 Analogue Inputs ................................................................................................................. 76 Section 6: IEC60870-5-101 .............................................................................................................................. 80 6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 80 Section 7: IEC 61850 ..................................................................................................................................... 100 7.1 IEC 61850 Points........................................................................................................................... 100 Section 8: Modems ........................................................................................................................................ 101 8.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s) ................................................................................ 101 8.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem .............................................................................................. 101 8.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem .................................................................................... 101 Section 9: Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 102 Section 10: Glossary ...................................................................................................................................... 103 List of Figures Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Communication to Front USB Port ................................................................................... 6 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485............................ 8 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network ..................... 11 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star Network....................................................................................... 11 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 2 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 1: Introduction The relay data communication facility is compatible with control and automation systems using Modbus RTU, DNP3. IEC 60870-5-101, IEC 60870-5-103 and IEC 61850 protocols. PCs running Reydisp software, can be connected to provide operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities. This section describes how to use the Communication Interface with a control system or interrogating computer. Appropriate software within the control system or on the interrogating computer (e.g. Reydisp Evolution or Reydisp Manager) is required to access data over the interface. This section specifies connection details and lists the events, commands and measurands available in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus RTU, DNP3.0 and optional IEC60870-5-101 and IEC61850 protocols. When IEC60870-5-103 protocol is selected the relay can communicate with PCs running Reydisp software which provides operational information, post-fault analysis, settings interrogation and editing facilities etc. Reydisp software can be downloaded from our website www.energy.siemens.com. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 3 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 2: Physical Connection The relay range provides one `Front' USB communication interface (Com2) located on the fascia and one RS485 (Com1) located on the `Rear' as standard. Optional serial fibre optic, RS232 and additional RS485 ports are available as ordering options and are also located on the rear. Optional Ethernet ports for IEC 61850 protocol are also fitted at the rear and replace the optional COM3/COM4 serial ports. 1. Com2-USB: this port is used for IEC60870-5-103 (default setting) communication with the Reydisp software. An ASCII protocol is also available through this port, the main use of this protocol is to allow firmware to be updated from the front connection. Access to the communication settings for the Com2-USB port is only available from the relay front fascia via the key pad setting menu COMMUNICATIONS MENU. 2. Com1-RS485: this port can be used for IEC60870-5-103, DNP-3, MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access. This port can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition. 3. Com3: Optional RS232 or additional RS485 ports, and Com3/Com4: optional dual fibre optic serial ports. These are located on the rear of the relay can be used for IEC60870-5-103, DNP3, MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 communications to a substation SCADA or integrated control system or engineer remote access point. These ports can also be used for connection to Reydisp Evoluition. Any or all serial ports can be mapped to the IEC60870-5-103, DNP3, MODBUS RTU or IEC60870-5-101 protocol at any one time, protocols available will depend upon relay model. The optional ethernet port uses IEC 61850 protocol and can also provide an IEC 60870-5-103 protocol connection to Reydisp. Siemens Protection Devices Limited can provide a range of interface devices, please refer to product catalogue. Full details of the interface devices can be found by referring to the website www.siemens.com/energy. 2.1 Communication Ports 2.1.1 DNP 3.0 Settings The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the DNP 3.0 implementation when available and are common to all ports using this protocol. Setting name Range Default Setting Unsolicited Mode DISABLED ENABLED DISABLED Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 Destination Address 0 ... 65534 0 Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 DNP3 Application Timeout 5, 6 ... 299, 300 10s Setting is only visible when As Required a port Protocol is set to DNP3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Notes Chapter 4 Page 4 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2.1.2 IEC60870-5-101 Settings The following relay settings are provided for configuration of the IEC60870-5-101 implementation when available and are common to all ports using this protocol. Setting name Range Default Setting I101 Link Mode Balanced, Unbalanced Unbalanced As Required I101 Link Address Field Not Present, 1 Octet, 2 Octets 1 Octet As Required I101 Common Address 1 Octet, 2 Octets of ASDU 2 Octet As Required I101 Cause of Trans (COT) 1 Octet As Required 2 Octet As Required 1 Octet, 2 Octets 1 Octet, 2 Octets, 3 I101 Info Obj Add (IOA) Octets I101 ASDU Address 0 .. 65535 3 As Required I101 Cyclic Period Off, 1 ..3600 seconds 60 Seconds As Required (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Notes Balanced transmission is used for point to point connection to one device. The controlled station (slave) may send link messages at any time. Unbalanced transmission is used for multi-drop connection, e.g. RS485, to one or more devices. The controlling station (master) send class 1 and 2 polls to each slave station. Size of link address in octets. Not Present - Only used with balanced transmission. 1 octet address range 0 - 254 2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Size of common address in octets. 1 octet address range 0 - 254 2 octets address range 0 - 65534 Size of cause of transmission in octets. 1 octet - COT code 2 octets - COT code + originator address or 0. Size of Info Object address in octets. 1 octet address range 1 - 255 2 octets address range 1 - 65535 3 octets used to generate structured address format. Address to use to identify ASDU layer Period device will generate cyclic data. Set to Off to disable generating of cyclic data. Only data points with the cyclic flag set will be generated cyclically. Chapter 4 Page 5 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Setting name Range I101 Background Period 2.1.3 Off, 1 ..1500 minutes Default Setting Notes Off Period device will generate background data. Set to Off to disable generating of background As Required data. Only data points with the background flag set will be generated in the background. USB Interface The USB communication port is connected using a standard USB cable with a type B connection to the relay and type A to the PC. The PC will require a suitable USB driver to be installed, this will be carried out automatically when the Reydisp software is installed. When the Reydisp software is running with the USB cable connected to a device an additional connection is shown. Connections to these devices are not shown when they are not connected. The USB communication interface on the relay is labelled Com 2 and its associated settings are located in the Data communications menu. When connecting to Reydisp using this connection the default settings can be used without the need to first change any settings, otherwise the Com 2 port must be set to IEC60870-5-103 (the relay address and baud rate do not need to be set). Setting name Range Default Setting Notes Station Address 1 ... 254 0 1-254 An address between 1 and 254 must be given to identify the relay COM2-USB Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5101, MODBUS-RTU, ASCII IEC60870-5103 IEC608705-103 Reydisp software uses IEC60870-5-103 to communicate. COM2 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Local Local Selects port mode USB Type A socket on PC USB Data Cable Local Engineer Access USB Type B USB Type A Figure 2-1 Communication to Front USB Port (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 6 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2.1.4 RS485 Interface The 2-wire RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 ohm screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master device driving the connection. This can be done via the internal 120 ohm terminating resistor, which can be connected between 14 (A) and 18 (B) by fitting an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 on the power supply module. The polarity of the signal terminals is marked as A and B in line with the RS485 standard. The polarity is that when the bus is in the quiescent state and no communication is taking place, the B terminal is more positive than A. This can be used to identify the polarity of any equipment to be connected, typically measured at each terminal in turn to ground. Connection of the device to a termination network at the end of the bus will also be to suit the quiescent state as shown in the diagram below. The polarity marking is often found to be reversed or marked as +/- on other equipment so care is required. If the devices are connected in reverse, communication to all devices will be disturbed but no damage will occur. If problems are experienced during commissioning, the connections should be tried in reverse. The maximum number of relays that can be connected to the bus is 64. The RS485 data comms link will be broken for that particular relay element if it is withdrawn from the case but the chain of communication to the other relays is maintained. An additional RS485 port is available as an ordering option. This port is wired to a dedicated terminal block at the relay rear. The following settings must be configured via the relay fascia or Reydisp when using the RS485 interface. The shaded settings are only visible when DNP3.0 is selected. Setting name Station Address Range Default Setting 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 1 An address within the range of the relevant protocol must As Required be given to identify the relay. Each relay must have a unique address. Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the RS485 connection. 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU 0 - 65534 for DNP3.0 OFF, IEC60870-5-103, COM1-RS485 Protocol MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 0 0 IEC60870-5103 Notes 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 19200 38400 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same RS485 bus must be the same as the one set on the master device. COM1-RS485 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same RS485 bus must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM1 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote Remote COM1-RS485 Baud Rate (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Selects port mode Chapter 4 Page 7 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Rear terminals To Control System Rear terminals 14 16 18 RS485 Screened twisted pair RS485 Screened twisted pair 14 16 18 14 16 18 20 Ext Wire loop (terminating resistance) added where permanent drive from master station available To Control System 16 18 20 Term. 14 A B 20 RS485 RS485 GND 18 Term. 14 A 16 20 B 18 Term. GND 16 B 14 A GND RS 485 Twisted pair Cable RS485 Bus Termination Polarity 5V B A GND Figure 2-2 2.1.5 Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System using RS485 Serial Fibre Optic Interface When connecting via the optional fibre optic interface the selection of fibre-optic cable is important. Fibres must TM be terminated with ST (BFOC/2.5) connectors. The recommended type is 62.5/125m glass fibre. Communication distances over 1 km are achievable using this type of fibre. A budget loss calculation should be made for all installations. The following table gives the Launch power and receiver sensitivity of each of the fibre optic communication ports on the Argus relay when used with specific fibre optic types. Fibre Type Tx Launch Power (dB) RX Receive Sensitivity (dB) Min Max Min Max 62.5/125m -11.7 -15.7 -24 -9.2 1mm Polymer -6.4 -10.4 -24 -9.2 200m PCS -2.8 -6.8 -24 -9.2 The main factors limiting transmission distances with fibre-optics are: Transmitter launch power. Attenuation, based on light frequency, fibre material and fibre diameter. (Consult fibre manufacturers' data for actual values of fibre attenuation). Number of intermediate connectors and splices. Fibre cables are supplied on reels of finite length which may necessitate additional jointing. Typical losses at connectors are 0.5-1.0dB each. This allows for normal age related deterioration. Typical losses at splices are <0.3dB. (Consult fibre manufacturers' data for actual values). Receiver sensitivity. The light power at the receiver must be above the sensitivity of the receiver in order that effective communication can occur. A 3dB safety margin is usually allowed after the budget calculation is performed. Following installation the actual losses should be measured for each fibre using a calibrated light source and meter and the measured values compared to the calculated estimate before the relay is applied. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 8 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms The following table can be used to record budget calculations: A Launch power dB B Fibre Type C Loss (dB/km) dB/km D Length km E Total fibre loss (CxD) dB F No. of Splices G Loss at each splice dB H Total loss at splices (FxG) dB I No. of connectors J Loss per connector dB K Total loss at connectors (IxJ) dB L Total losses (E+H+K) dB M Receive power budget (A-L) dB N Safety Margin dB O Device Receive Sensitivity dB (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 9 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms There are two optional fibre optic ports, com3 and com4, and when fitted the associated settings are available in the Data Communication menu. To allow communication using either or both of these ports the relay settings must be changed, via the fascia, in accordance with the method of connection and master device. Setting name Station Address Range Default Setting 1 - 254 for IEC60870-5103 or IEC60870-5-101 1 An address within the range of the relevant protocol must As Required be given to identify the relay. Each relay must have a unique address. Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the fibre optic connection - Com3 0 - 247 for Modbus RTU 0 - 65520 for DNP3.0 0 0 Notes COM3 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 COM3 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 57600 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same system must be the same as the one set on the master device. COM3 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the same fibre optic system As Required must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM3 Line Idle LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF Sets the idle state of the line As Required in accordance with master device COM3 Data Echo ON,OFF OFF Set to ON when relays are As Required connected in a ring configuration. COM3 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote Remote COM4 Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103, MODBUS-RTU, DNP3.0 or IEC60870-5-101 IEC60870-5103 Sets the protocol used to As Required communicate on the fibre optic connection - Com4. COM4 Baud Rate 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 57600 38400 The baud rate set on all of the relays connected to the As Required same system must be the same as the one set on the master device. COM4 Parity NONE, ODD, EVEN EVEN The parity set on all of the relays connected to the same fibre optic system As Required must be the same and in accordance with the master device. COM4 Line Idle LIGHT ON, LIGHT OFF LIGHT OFF Sets the idle state of the line As Required in accordance with master device COM4 Data Echo ON,OFF OFF Set to ON when relays are As Required connected in a ring configuration. COM4 Mode Local, Remote, Local Or Remote Remote Remote (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited IEC60870-5103 Selects port mode Selects port mode Chapter 4 Page 10 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Figure 2-3 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices using Fibre-optic Ring Network Figure 2-4 Serial Communication to Multiple Devices from Control System and Laptop using Fibre-optic Star Network (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 11 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 2.1.6 Ethernet Interface The optional ethernet interface is primarily provided for support of IEC 61850 protocol. Support for IEC 870-5-103 is also provided over this interface to allow connection with Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software for interrogation, editing and download of relay settings and other data. Ordering options are available with two RJ45 electrical connectors or with two duplex LC fibre optic connectors. Setting name Range Default LAN Protocol OFF, IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-103 Setting Notes If this setting is set to Off, access to relay data using Reydisp Evolution and Reydisp Manager software via the Ethernet interface is not available. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 12 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 3: IEC 60870-5-103 Definitions 3.1 Introduction This section describes the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in the relays. This protocol is used for the communication with Reydisp software and can also be used for communication with a suitable control system. The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the master's commands. The implementation provides event information, time synchronising, commands and measurands and also supports the transfer of disturbance records. This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic RS232 and RS485) and is the standard protocol used by the USB port. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate. Cause of Transmission The cause of transmission (COT) column of the `Information Number and Function' table lists possible causes of transmission for these frames. The following abbreviations are used: Abbreviation Description SE spontaneous event T test mode GI general interrogation Loc local operation Rem remote operation Ack command acknowledge Nak Negative command acknowledge Note: Events listing a GI cause of transmission can be raised and cleared; other events are raised only. ASDU Type Abbreviation Description 1 Time tagged message (monitor direction) 2 Time tagged message (relative time) (monitor direction) 3.1 Measurands I 4 Time-tagged measurands with relative time 5 Identification message 6 Time synchronisation 7 General Interrogation Initialization 9 Measurands II 20 General command (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 13 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Information Number and Function The following table lists information number and function definitions together with a description of the message and function type and cause of transmission that can result in that message. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI, 20 1 20 1 20 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Control Received Command Received 20 1 1 Ack, Nak SE SE 128 129 130 Cold Start Warm Start Re-start 1 1 1 SE SE SE 60 60 60 60 135 136 137 138 Trigger Storage Clear Waveform Records Clear Fault Records Clear Event Records 60 140 Reset Demand metering 60 60 141 142 27 Sag SARFI 59Swell SARFI 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 SE SE SE SE SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI, SE, GI, 60 60 60 143 150 151 Reset SagSwell Count Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail 1 1 1 SE SE SE 60 152 Battery Ohms High 1 SE 60 60 153 154 Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, 60 155 Battery Healthy 1 SE, GI, 60 156 Battery Recovery Fail 60 157 Battery Test 1 1 20 SE SE, GI, Ack, Nak 60 60 60 60 160 161 162 163 Capacitor Ready Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail 60 164 Capacitor Test 1 1 1 1 1 20 SE, GI, SE SE SE SE Ack, Nak 60 60 170 General Alarm 1 171 172 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, 173 174 General Alarm 4 General Alarm 5 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 60 4 Remote Mode 60 5 Out of Service Mode 60 6 Local Mode 60 7 Local & Remote Mode 60 60 12 13 60 60 60 60 60 60 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 14 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 60 Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI, 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 1 SE, GI, General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 183 Quick Logic E2 184 185 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, 186 187 188 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 1 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 189 Quick Logic E8 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 214 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 Function Key 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Function Key 9 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE SE SE SE SE SE 60 60 60 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE SE SE 60 60 60 70 223 224 225 5 Function Key 10 Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Binary Input 5 1 1 1 1 SE SE SE SE, GI, 70 70 70 6 7 8 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 9 Binary Input 9 1 SE, GI, 70 70 70 10 11 12 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 70 70 70 70 70 13 14 15 16 17 18 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 19 Binary Input 19 1 SE, GI, 175 176 177 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 60 178 179 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 60 60 60 180 181 182 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 15 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 70 Information Description Number 20 Binary Input 20 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI, 70 70 70 21 22 23 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 24 Binary Input 24 1 SE, GI, 70 70 70 25 26 27 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 70 28 29 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, 70 70 70 70 30 31 32 33 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 Binary Input 33 1 1 1 1 SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, SE, GI, 75 75 1 2 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 75 16 Virtual Input 16 80 1 Binary Output 1 1 1 20 SE, GI SE, GI, Ack, Nak 80 2 Binary Output 2 80 3 Binary Output 3 1 20 1 20 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 80 4 Binary Output 4 80 5 Binary Output 5 1 20 1 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak 80 6 Binary Output 6 80 7 Binary Output 7 1 20 1 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, 80 8 Binary Output 8 80 9 Binary Output 9 80 10 Binary Output 10 20 1 20 1 20 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 16 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI, 20 1 20 Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 SE, GI, 20 1 20 Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 1 20 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, 20 1 20 Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 1 20 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, Ack, Nak 1 20 1 SE, GI, Ack, Nak SE, GI, 20 Ack, Nak Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 4 5 6 7 8 9 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 10 Led 10 1 SE, GI 80 11 Binary Output 11 80 12 Binary Output 12 80 13 Binary Output 13 80 14 Binary Output 14 80 15 Binary Output 15 80 16 Binary Output 16 80 17 Binary Output 17 80 18 Binary Output 18 80 19 Binary Output 19 80 20 Binary Output 20 80 21 Binary Output 21 80 22 Binary Output 22 80 23 Binary Output 23 80 24 Binary Output 24 80 25 Binary Output 25 80 26 Binary Output 26 80 27 Binary Output 27 80 28 Binary Output 28 80 29 Binary Output 29 80 30 Binary Output 30 90 90 90 1 2 3 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited SE, GI SE, GI Chapter 4 Page 17 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 90 Information Description Number 11 Led 11 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI 90 90 90 12 13 14 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 90 15 Led 15 1 SE, GI 90 90 90 16 17 18 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 90 90 19 20 Led 19 Led 20 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI 90 90 90 90 21 22 23 24 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 90 90 25 26 Led 25 Led 26 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 27 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Led 27 Led 28 Led PU 1 Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 91 91 91 12 13 14 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 Led PU 14 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 91 91 91 91 15 16 17 18 Led PU 15 Led PU 16 Led PU 17 Led PU 18 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 91 91 91 19 20 21 Led PU19 Led PU 20 Led PU 21 1 1 1 91 22 Led PU 22 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 91 91 91 23 24 25 Led PU 23 Led PU 24 Led PU 25 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 91 91 91 160 160 160 26 27 28 2 3 4 Led PU 26 Led PU 27 Led PU 28 Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart 1 1 1 5 5 5 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart 160 5 Power On 5 SE (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 18 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI 20 1 20 Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak 1 SE 1 20 1 SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI 20 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI Binary Input 1 20 1 20 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI 30 36 38 51 52 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 Binary Input 4 Trip circuit fail VT Fuse Failure Earth Fault Forward/Line Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar Starter/Pick Up L1 Starter/Pick Up L2 Starter/Pick Up L3 Starter/Pick Up N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE 160 160 160 73 74 75 Fault Impedance (Secondary Ohms) Fault Forward/Line Fault Reverse/Busbar 4 2 2 SE SE, GI SE, GI 160 160 160 160 84 85 90 91 General Starter/Pick Up Circuit breaker fail Trip I> Trip I>> 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE SE SE 160 160 160 92 93 128 Trip In> Trip In>> CB on by auto reclose 2 2 1 SE SE SE, GI 160 130 Reclose Blocked 1 SE,GI 183 183 183 0 10 11 Data Lost 51-1 50-1 1 2 2 SE SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 183 183 14 15 16 17 20 21 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51G-2 50G-2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 22 51-3 2 SE, GI 160 16 Auto-reclose active (In/Out) 160 19 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs) 160 22 Settings changed 160 23 Settings Group 1 Select 160 24 Settings Group 2 Select 160 25 Settings Group 3 Select 160 26 Settings Group 4 Select 160 27 160 160 28 29 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 19 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 183 Information Description Number 23 50-3 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 2 SE, GI 183 183 183 26 27 28 51G-3 50G-3 51-4 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 29 50-4 2 SE, GI 183 183 183 32 33 34 51G-4 50G-4 50BF Stage 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 35 36 49 Alarm 49 Trip 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 40 41 42 43 CT Supervision 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 44 45 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 46 47 48 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 183 49 SEF Out/In 183 183 183 50 51 52 46IT 46DT 64H 183 53 EF Out/In 183 183 183 54 55 56 SEF Forward/Line SEF Reverse/Busbar 50BF Stage 1 2 2 2 1 20 2 2 2 1 20 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE.GI Ack,Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI Ack,Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 60 61 62 47-1 47-2 37-1 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 63 64 65 66 37-2 37G-1 37G-2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 67 70 81 37SEF-1 37SEF-2 46BC 27/59-1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 82 27/59-2 2 SE, GI 183 183 183 83 84 85 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 183 183 86 87 90 91 92 93 59NDT Vx27/59 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 2 2 2 2 2 2 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 96 81HBL2 1 SE, GI (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 20 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 183 Information Description Number 101 Trip Circuit Fail 1 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 2 SE, GI 2 2 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 20 Ack, Nak 1 20 1 SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI 20 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI Close CB Failed Open CB Failed Reclaim 20 1 1 1 Ack, Nak SE SE SE, GI 117 119 Lockout Successful DAR Close 1 1 SE, GI SE 183 120 Successful Man Close 183 121 Hotline Working 122 Inst Protection Out 183 123 124 125 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count to AR Block 183 126 Reset CB Trip Count Maint 183 127 Reset CB Trip Count Delta 183 128 Reset CB Trip Count AR Block 1 1 20 1 20 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 SE SE,GI Ack, Nak SE,GI Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE 183 129 I^2t CB Wear 183 130 Reset I^2t CB Wear 20 1 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI SE 183 183 131 132 79 AR In Progress CB Frequent Ops Count 183 133 Reset CB Frequent Ops Count 20 1 1 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE 183 134 CB LO Handle Ops Count 183 135 Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count 20 1 1 Ack, Nak SE, SE 20 Ack, Nak 183 183 183 136 140 141 CB On by Manual Close Cold Load Active P/F Inst Protection Inhibited 1 1 1 SE,G! SE,GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 183 183 142 143 144 150 151 152 E/F Inst Protection Inhibited SEF Inst Protection Inhibited Ext Inst Protection Inhibited LOV Primed LOV Trip LOV Close 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 153 LOV Inhibit Fast Protection 1 SE, GI 183 183 102 103 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 183 110 Settings Group 5 Selected 183 111 Settings Group 6 Selected 183 112 Settings Group 7 Selected 183 113 Settings Group 8 Selected 183 183 183 183 183 114 115 116 183 183 183 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 21 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 183 Information Description Number 154 LOV Force Fast Protection ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE, GI 183 183 183 155 156 157 LOV In Progress LOV Backfeed Fail LOV Successful 1 1 1 SE, GI SE SE 183 158 LOV 1x Trip and Lockout 1 SE, GI 183 183 183 159 160 161 LOV Fail LOV-A Live LOV-X Live 1 1 1 SE SE, GI SE, GI 183 162 LOV Out 1 20 SE, GI Ack, Nak 183 163 Trip Time Alarm 183 183 183 164 165 166 Close Circuit Fail 1 Close Circuit Fail 2 Close Circuit Fail 3 1 2 2 2 SE, GI SE SE SE 183 167 Close Circuit Fail 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 168 169 170 172 173 174 175 Distance To Fault Distance To Fault % Fault Reactance Act Energy Exp Act Energy Imp React Energy Exp React Energy Imp 2 4 SE SE, GI 183 176 Reset Energy Meters 183 183 183 183 183 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 Active Exp Meter Reset Active Imp Meter Reset Reactive Exp Meter Reset Reactive Imp Meter Reset CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 20 1 1 1 1 4 SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE SE Ack, Nak SE SE SE SE SE 4 4 4 SE SE SE 185 186 187 LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live 188 189 LOV X Live LOV Y Live 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 190 191 192 193 194 195 LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 1 SE, GI 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI LOV Z CB LO Handle Ops Count 25 Check Sync 1 1 183 196 197 198 183 183 183 183 199 200 201 202 25 System Sync 25 Close On Zero 25 System Split 25 Live Line 1 1 1 1 SE, GI SE SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 SE, GI Chapter 4 Page 22 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission SE, GI 183 183 183 203 204 205 25 Live Bus 25 Line U/V 25 Bus U/V 1 1 1 183 183 206 207 25 Voltage Dif > 25 CS Slip Freq > 1 1 183 183 183 208 209 210 25 SS Slip Freq > 25 COZ Slip Freq > 25 In Sync 1 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 183 211 25 CS In Progress 1 183 183 212 213 25 SS In Progress 25 COZ In Progress 1 1 SE, GI SE, GI 183 183 214 215 25 System Split LO 60VTF-Bus 183 217 Man Override Sync 1 1 1 20 183 218 79 Override Sync 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 219 220 221 222 223 224 231 232 233 234 235 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Dead Line Close Dead Bus Close Wattmetric Po> 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 50BF-PhA 50BF-PhB 50BF-PhC 50BF-EF 79 Last Trip Lockout In Fault Current Ia Fault Current Ib Fault Current Ic Fault Current Ig Fault Current Isef Fault Current Va Fault Voltage Vb Fault Voltage Vc Fault Voltage Close CB-A Failed Open CB-A Failed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Successful Close CB-A Successful DAR Close CB-A Successful Man Close CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block 184 11 Reset CB-A Total Trip Count 184 12 Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count 184 13 Reset CB-A Count to AR Block (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 20 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak Chapter 4 Page 23 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 184 Information Description Number 14 CB-A I^2t Wear 184 15 Reset CB-A I^2t Wear 184 184 16 17 CB-A 79 AR In progress CB-A Frequent Ops Count 184 18 Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count 184 19 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 184 20 Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 21 22 23 24 25 26 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited CB-A Blocked By Interlocking CB-A on by auto reclose CB-A Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A 184 27 CB-A Trip & Lockout 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 28 29 30 31 32 33 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Deadtime Running Close CB-B Failed Open CB-B Failed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Successful Close CB-B Successful DAR Close CB-B Successful Man Close CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block 184 61 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count 184 62 Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count 184 63 Reset CB-B Count to AR Block 184 64 CB-B I^2t Wear 184 65 Reset CB-B I^2t Wear 184 184 66 67 CB-B 79 AR In progress CB-B Frequent Ops Count 184 68 Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count 184 69 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 184 70 Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited CB-B Blocked By Interlocking CB-B on by auto reclose CB-B Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B CB-B Trip & Lockout (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ASDU Type 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cause of Transmission SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE Chapter 4 Page 24 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 78 79 80 81 82 83 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Deadtime Running Close CB-C Failed Open CB-C Failed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Successful Close CB-C Successful DAR Close CB-C Successful Man Close CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block 184 111 Reset CB-C Total Trip Count 184 112 Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count 184 113 Reset CB-C Count to AR Block 184 114 CB-C I^2t Wear 184 115 Reset CB-C I^2t Wear 184 184 116 117 CB-C 79 AR In progress CB-C Frequent Ops Count 184 118 Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count 184 119 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 184 120 Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 184 184 184 184 184 184 121 122 123 124 125 126 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited CB-C Blocked By Interlocking CB-C on by auto reclose CB-C Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C 184 127 CB-C Trip & Lockout 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 184 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 150 151 Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test Pole Discrepancy CB-C Deadtime Running Three Pole Trip Select Force 3Pole Trip 185 185 185 185 1 2 3 4 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count 185 5 Reset CB Phase A Trip Count (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited ASDU Type 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ack, Nak SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE, GI SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE Ack, Nak SE, GI SE SE SE SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI SE, GI 1 1 1 1 1 20 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE Ack, Nak Cause of Transmission Chapter 4 Page 25 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number ASDU Type Cause of Transmission CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count ABC Live A Live B Live C Live XYZ Live X Live Y Live Z Live ABC Dead A Dead B Dead C Dead XYZ Dead X Dead Y Dead Z Dead 1 20 1 20 1 20 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE SE SE SE SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 185 185 171 172 173 User Output 1 User Output 2 User Output 3 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 185 185 174 175 176 User Output 4 User Output 5 User Output 6 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 177 User Output 7 1 SE,GI 185 185 185 178 179 180 User Output 8 User Output 9 User Output 10 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 185 185 185 185 185 181 182 183 184 185 186 User Output 11 User Output 12 User Output 13 User Output 14 User Output 15 User Output 16 1 1 1 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 187 User Output 17 1 SE,GI 185 6 Reset CB Phase B Trip Count 185 7 Reset CB Phase C Trip Count 185 8 Reset CB E/F Trip Count 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 185 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 26 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function 185 Information Description Number 188 User Output 18 ASDU Type Cause of Transmission 1 SE,GI 185 185 185 189 190 191 User Output 19 User Output 20 User Output 21 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 192 User Output 22 1 SE,GI 185 185 185 193 194 195 User Output 23 User Output 24 User Output 25 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 185 196 197 User Output 26 User Output 27 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI 185 185 185 185 198 199 200 201 User Output 28 User Output 29 User Output 30 User Output 31 1 1 1 1 SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI SE,GI 185 202 User Output 32 1 SE,GI 200 1 CB 1 200 6 CB 1 Open 200 7 CB 1 Closed 200 11 CB-A 200 12 CB-B 200 13 CB-C 200 14 CB-A Open 200 15 CB-A Closed 200 16 CB-B Open 200 17 CB-B Closed 200 18 CB-C Open 200 19 CB-C Closed 200 150 User SP Command 1 200 151 User SP Command 2 200 152 User SP Command 3 200 153 User SP Command 4 200 154 User SP Command 5 200 155 User SP Command 6 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 27 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Function Information Description Number Cause of Transmission Blocked by Interlocking Time Synchronisation GI Initiation 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 20 1 6 7 SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE, GI Ack, Nak SE,GI Time Synchronisation End of GI End of GI 8 End of GI Description Function Cause of Transmission Type 200 156 User SP Command 7 200 157 User SP Command 8 200 158 User DP Command 1 200 159 User DP Command 2 200 160 User DP Command 3 200 161 User DP Command 4 200 162 User DP Command 5 200 163 User DP Command 6 200 164 User DP Command 7 200 165 User DP Command 8 200 200 CB 1 Trip & Reclose 200 201 CB 1 Trip & Lockout 200 252 Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO 200 253 Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO 200 254 Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO 200 255 255 255 0 0 255 0 Measurand Information Function Number ASDU Type Measurand IL1,2,3, V L1,2,3, P, Q, F, VL1-2,L2-3,L3-1 183 148 183 216 IL1 (2.4 x) IL2 (2.4 x) IL3 (2.4 x) VL1 (1.2 x) VL2 (1.2 x) VL3 (1.2 x) P (2.4 x) Q (2.4 x) F (1.2 x) VL1 -2(1.2 x) VL2 -3(1.2 x) VL3 -1(1.2 x) Measurand Vx, Bus Freq, Phase Diff, Diff Volts and Slip Freq (1.2 x) Note - Phase difference is stored as -1 to +1 as a multiple of 180deg nominal (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 9 9 Cyclic - Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1% Cyclic - Refresh rate 5 seconds or value change greater than 1% Chapter 4 Page 28 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Disturbance Recorder Actual Channel (ACC) Numbers Function 182 182 ACC Number 0 1 Description Global V1 182 182 182 182 182 182 2 3 V2 V3 4 5 6 7 Vx Ia Ib Ic 182 182 182 182 8 9 Ig1 Not Used 10 11 Vy Vz V1, V2 and V3 are dependent on Phase Voltage Config setting and represent Van, Vbn, Vcn or Vab, Vbc, V0 or Va, Vb, Vc (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 29 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 4: Modbus Definitions 4.1 Introduction This section describes the MODBUS-RTU protocol implementation in the relays. communication with a suitable control system. This protocol is used for This protocol can be set to use the Fibre Optic, RS232 and RS485 ports. The relay can communicate simultaneously on all ports regardless of protocol used. Each relay must be given an address to enable communication and can be set by the Communication Interface:Relay Address. A relay with the default address of 0 will not be able to communicate. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. Coils (Read Write Binary values) Address 00001 00002 00003 00004 00005 00006 00007 00008 00009 00010 00011 00012 00013 00014 00015 00016 00017 00018 00019 00020 00021 00022 00023 00024 00025 00026 00027 00028 00029 00030 00031 00032 00100 00101 00102 00103 00104 00105 00106 00107 00108 00109 Description Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 Binary Output 23 Binary Output 24 Binary Output 25 Binary Output 26 Binary Output 27 Binary Output 28 Binary Output 29 Binary Output 30 Binary Output 31 Binary Output 32 LED Reset (Write only location) Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 Circuit Breaker 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 30 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 00110 00111 00112 00113 00114 00115 00116 00117 00118 00119 00120 00121 00122 00123 00124 00125 00126 00127 00128 00129 00130 00131 00132 00133 00134 00135 00136 00137 00138 00139 00140 00141 00142 00143 00144 00145 00146 00147 00148 00149 00150 00151 00152 00153 00154 00155 00156 00157 00158 00159 00160 00161 00162 00163 00164 Description CB 1 Trip & Reclose (Write only location) CB 1 Trip & Lockout (Write only location) Auto-reclose on/off Hot Line Working on/off E/F off/on SEF off/on Inst Protection off/on LOV off/on Reset CB Total Trip Count (write only location) Reset CB Delta Trip Count (write only location) Reset CB Count To AR Block (write only location) Reset CB Frequent Ops Count (write only location) Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count (write only location) Reset I^2t CB Wear (write only location) Battery Test (write only location) Capacitor Test (write only location) Reset Demand Metering (write only location) CB-A CB-B CB-C CB-A Trip & Lockout CB-B Trip & Lockout CB-C Trip & Lockout Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Reset CB-A Total Trip Count Reset CB-B Total Trip Count Reset CB-C Total Trip Count Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count Reset CB-A Count To AR Block Reset CB-B Count To AR Block Reset CB-C Count To AR Block Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-A I^2t Wear Reset CB-B I^2t Wear Reset CB-C I^2t Wear Reset Energy Metering (write only location) Remote Mode Service Mode Local Mode Local & Remote Manual Override Synchronising On/Off 79 Override Synchronising On/Off Reset CB Phase A Trip Count, write only location Reset CB Phase B Trip Count, write only location Reset CB Phase C Trip Count, write only location Reset E/F Trip Count, write only location 00180 00181 CB 1 Open CB 1 Closed 00200 00201 00202 00203 User SP Command 1 User SP Command 2 User SP Command 3 User SP Command 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 31 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 00204 00205 00206 00207 00208 00209 00210 00211 00212 00213 00214 00215 Description User SP Command 5 User SP Command 6 User SP Command 7 User SP Command 8 User DP Command 1 User DP Command 2 User DP Command 3 User DP Command 4 User DP Command 5 User DP Command 6 User DP Command 7 User DP Command 8 Inputs (Read Only Binary values) Address 10001 10002 10003 10004 10005 10006 10007 10008 10009 10010 10011 10012 10013 10014 10015 10016 10017 10018 10019 10020 10021 10022 10023 10024 10025 10026 10027 10028 10029 10030 10031 10032 10033 10034 10035 10036 10037 10038 10039 10040 10041 10042 10043 10044 10045 10046 Description Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 Binary Input 20 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 Binary Input 24 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 Binary Input 33 Binary Input 34 Binary Input 35 Binary Input 36 Binary Input 37 Binary Input 38 Binary Input 39 Binary Input 40 Binary Input 41 Binary Input 42 Binary Input 43 Binary Input 44 Binary Input 45 Binary Input 46 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 32 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10047 10048 10049 10050 10102 10103 10104 10105 10111 10112 10113 10114 10115 10116 10117 10118 10119 10120 10121 10122 10123 10126 10127 10128 10129 10132 10133 10134 10135 10138 10139 10140 10141 10144 10145 10146 10147 10148 10149 10150 10151 10152 10153 10154 10155 10156 10157 10158 10159 10160 10161 10162 10163 10164 10167 10168 10169 10170 10171 10172 10173 10174 10175 Description Binary Input 47 Binary Input 48 Binary Input 49 Binary Input 50 Remote mode Service mode Local mode Local & Remote mode Trip Circuit Fail A-Starter B-Starter C-Starter General Starter VTS Alarm Earth Fault Forward/Line Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar Start/Pick Up N Fault Forward/Line Fault Reverse/Busbar 51-1 50-1 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51G-2 50G-2 51-3 50-3 51G-3 50G-3 51-4 50-4 51G-4 50G-4 50BF Stage 2 49 Alarm 49 Trip 60 CTS 46IT 46DT 47-1 47-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 64H 37-1 37-2 Vx27/59 AR Active CB on by AR Reclaim Lockout Hot Line Working (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 33 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10176 10177 10178 10179 10180 10181 10182 10183 10184 10185 10186 10187 10189 10190 10191 10192 10193 10194 10195 10196 10197 10198 10199 10200 10201 10202 10203 10204 10205 10206 10207 10208 10209 10210 10211 10212 10213 10214 10215 10216 10217 10218 10219 10220 10221 10222 10223 10224 10225 10226 10227 10228 10229 10230 10231 10232 10233 10234 10235 Description Inst Protection Out CB Trip Count Maint CB Trip Count Delta CB Trip Count Lockout I^2t CB Wear 79 AR In Progress Cold Load Active E/F Protection Out P/F Inst Protection Inhibited E/F Inst Protection Inhibited SEF Inst Protection Inhibited Ext Inst Protection Inhibited Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy Battery Recovery Fail Battery Test Capacitor Ready Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail Capacitor Test 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 SEF Out Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count to AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count I^2t CB Wear CB Open CB Closed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block CB-A I^2t Wear CB-A Frequent Ops Count CB-A LO Handle Ops Count CB-A 79 AR In progress PhA Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 34 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10236 10237 10238 10239 10240 10241 10242 10243 10244 10245 10246 10247 10248 10249 10250 10251 10252 10253 10254 10255 10256 10257 10258 10259 10260 10261 10262 10263 10264 10265 10266 10267 10268 10269 10270 10271 10272 10273 10274 10275 10276 10277 10278 10279 10280 10281 10282 10288 10289 10290 10291 10292 10293 10294 10295 10296 10297 10298 10299 10300 10301 10302 10303 Description Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Open CB-A Closed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block CB-B I^2t Wear CB-B Frequent Ops Count CB-B LO Handle Ops Count CB-B 79 AR In progress PhB Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Open CB-B Closed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block CB-C I^2t Wear CB-C Frequent Ops Count CB-C LO Handle Ops Count CB-C 79 AR In progress PhC Inst Protection Inhibited 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test CB-C Open CB-C Closed Pole Discrepancy LOV Primed LOV Trip LOV Close LOV In Progress SEF Forward/Line SEF Reverse/Busbar General Alarm 1 General Alarm 2 General Alarm 3 General Alarm 4 General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 35 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10304 10305 10306 10307 10308 10309 10310 10311 10312 10313 10314 10315 10316 10317 Description Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 10335 10336 10337 10338 10339 81HBL2 37G-1 37G-2 37SEF-1 37SEF-2 10340 10341 10342 10343 10344 10345 10346 10347 10348 10349 10350 10351 10352 10353 10354 10355 10356 10357 10358 10359 10360 10361 10362 10363 10364 10365 10366 LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y LOV Z 25 System Split 25 Live Line 25 Live Bus 25 Line U/V 25 Bus U/V 25 Voltage Dif > 25 CS Slip Freq > 25 SS Slip Freq > 25 COZ Slip Freq > 25 In Sync 25 CS In Progress 25 SS In Progress 25 COZ In Progress 25 System Split LO 60VTF-Bus 10367 10368 10369 10370 10371 50BF-1 Wattmetric Po> 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 10382 Last Trip Lockout 10386 10387 10388 10389 10390 10391 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase CTrip Count CB E/F Trip Count Trip PhA Trip PhB (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 36 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10392 Description Trip PhC 10397 10398 10399 10400 10401 10402 10403 10404 10405 10406 10407 10408 10409 Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout B 79 Last Trip Lockout C 10501 10502 10503 10504 10505 10506 10507 10508 10509 10510 10511 10512 10513 10514 10515 10516 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 Virtual Input 11 Virtual Input 12 Virtual Input 13 Virtual Input 14 Virtual Input 15 Virtual Input 16 10601 10602 10603 10604 10605 10606 10607 10608 10609 10610 10611 10612 10613 10614 10615 10616 10617 10618 10619 10620 10621 10622 10623 10624 10625 10626 10627 10628 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 Led 25 Led 26 Led 27 Led 28 10701 Led PU 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 37 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 10702 10703 10704 10705 10706 10707 10708 10709 10710 10711 10712 10713 10714 10715 10716 10717 10718 10719 10720 10721 10722 10723 10724 10725 10726 10727 10728 Description Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 Led PU 14 Led PU 15 Led PU 16 Led PU 17 Led PU 18 Led PU 19 Led PU 20 Led PU 21 Led PU 22 Led PU 23 Led PU 24 Led PU 25 Led PU 26 Led PU 27 Led PU 28 10800 10801 10802 10803 10804 10805 10806 Cold Start Warm Start Re-Start Power On SW Forced Restart Unexpected Restart Reset Start Count 11020 11021 11022 11023 11024 11025 11026 11027 11028 11029 11030 11031 11032 11033 11034 11035 11036 11037 11038 11039 11040 11041 11042 11043 11044 11045 11046 User Output 1 User Output 2 User Output 3 User Output 4 User Output 5 User Output 6 User Output 7 User Output 8 User Output 9 User Output 10 User Output 11 User Output 12 User Output 13 User Output 14 User Output 15 User Output 16 User Output 17 User Output 18 User Output 19 User Output 20 User Output 21 User Output 22 User Output 23 User Output 24 User Output 25 User Output 26 User Output 27 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 38 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 11047 11048 11049 11050 11051 Description User Output 28 User Output 29 User Output 30 User Output 31 User Output 32 Input Registers Address Name 30001 No.of Events In Store 30002 Event Record 30010 Vab Primary 30012 Vbc Primary 30014 Vca Primary 30016 Phase A Primary Volt 30018 Phase B Primary Volt 30020 Phase C Primary Volt 30022 Phase a Secondary Volt 30024 Phase b Secondary Volt 30026 Phase c Secondary Volt 30034 Phase ab Nominal Volt 30036 Phase bc Nominal Volt 30038 Phase ca Nominal Volt 30040 Phase a Nominal Volt 30042 Phase b Nominal Volt 30044 Phase c Nominal Volt 30048 Vzps 30050 Vpps 30052 Vnps 30054 Vzps 30056 Vpps 30058 Vnps 30060 Frequency 30064 Phase A Primary Curr 30066 Phase B Primary Curr 30068 Phase C Primary Curr 30070 Phase a Secondary Curr 30072 Phase b Secondary Curr 30074 Phase c Secondary Curr 30076 Phase A Nominal 30078 Phase B Nominal 30080 Phase C Nominal 30082 Phase A Nominal 30084 Phase B Nominal 30086 Phase C Nominal 30088 In Primary 30090 In Secondary 30092 In Nominal 30094 Ig Primary 30096 Ig Secondary 30098 Ig Nominal 30100 Izps Nominal 30102 Ipps Nominal 30104 Inps Nominal 30106 Izps Nominal 30108 Ipps Nominal 30110 Inps Nominal 30112 Active Power A 30114 Active Power B 30116 Active Power C 30118 3P Power 30120 Reactive Power A 30122 Reactive Power B (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Format 1 Register 3 8 Registers 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 Description Vab kV Vbc kV Vca kV Va kV Vb kV Vc kV Va V Vb V Vc V Vab Degrees Vbc Degrees Vca Degrees Va Degrees Vb Degrees Vc Degrees Vzps xVnom Vpps xVnom Vnps xVnom Vzps Degrees Vpps Degrees Vnps Degrees Hz Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Ia A Ib A Ic A Ia x Inom Ib x Inom Ic x Inom Ia Degrees Ib Degrees Ic Degrees IN kA IN A IN xInom IG kA IG A IG xInom Izps xIn Ipps xIn Inps xIn Izps Degrees Ipps Degrees Inps Degrees A Phase MW B Phase MW C Phase MW 3 Phase MW A Phase MVAr B Phase MVAr Chapter 4 Page 39 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30124 30126 30128 30130 30132 30134 30136 30138 30140 30142 30144 30146 30148 30150 30152 30153 30154 30167 30168 30169 30170 30172 30174 30176 30178 30180 30182 30184 30186 30193 30195 30197 30199 30201 30203 30205 30207 30209 30211 Name Reactive Power C 3P Reactive Power Q Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C 3P Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C 3P Power Factor Active Energy Export Active Energy Import Reactive Energy Export Reactive Energy Import Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Volt Vbc Secondary Volt Vca Secondary Volt VN Primary VN Secondary VN Secondary Vx Primary Vx Secondary Vx Secondary Ia Max Demand Ib Max Demand Ic Max Demand P 3P Max Q 3P Max Ig Max I sef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal Format 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 UINT162 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 Description C Phase MVAr 3 Phase MVAr A Phase MVA B Phase MVA C Phase MVA 3 Phase MVA Phase A Phase B Phase C 3 Phase 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh % % % No. of Fault Records No. of Event Records No. of Waveform Recs Vab V Vbc V Vca V VN kV VN V VN Degrees Vx kV Vx V Vx Degrees Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Power Max Demand VARs Max Demand Ig Max Demand Isef Max Demand Isef A Isef A Isef xIn 30213 30215 30217 30219 30223 30225 30229 30231 30233 30235 30237 30239 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary Vz Primary Vz Secondary Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Nominal Vyz Nominal Vzx Nominal FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy kV Vy V Vz kV Vz V Vxy kV Vyz kV Vzx kV Vxy Degrees Vyz Degrees Vzx Degrees 30241 30243 30245 30247 30249 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops 30251 30253 30255 30257 Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Chapter 4 Page 40 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30259 30261 30263 30265 30267 30269 30271 30273 30275 30277 30279 30281 30283 30285 30287 30289 30291 Name Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 Format UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 P1 Interrupts P2 Interrupts P3 Interrupts Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 30293 30295 30297 30299 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 Vx Frequency 25 Phase Diff 25 Slip Freq 25 Voltage Diff 30301 30303 30305 30307 30309 30311 30313 30317 30319 30321 30323 30325 30327 30329 30331 30333 30335 30337 Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Isef Last Trip V Phase A Max V Phase B Max V Phase C Max V Phase AB Max V Phase BC Max V Phase CA Max CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph BTrip Count CB Ph CTrip Count CB E/F Trip Count FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Isef Fault Va Max Demand Vb Max Demand Vc Max Demand Vab Max Demand Vbc Max Demand Vca Max Demand CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB EF Trip Count 30341 30342 30343 30344 30345 30346 30347 30348 30349 30350 30352 LED1-n LED1-n INP1-n INP1-n OUT1-n OUT1-n VRT1-n VRT1-n EQN1-n EQN1-n Fault Distance PerUnit BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 5 BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 5 BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 30354 30356 30358 30360 30362 30364 30366 30380 30382 CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum StartCount Start Count Target FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 Led 1-16 status Led 17-32 status Input 1-16 status Input 17-32 status Output 1-16 status Output 17-32 status Virtual 1-16 status Virtual 17-32 status Equation 1-16 status Equation 17-32 status Units defined in relay setting CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Start Count Start Count Target (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 41 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 30392 30400 30402 Name Active Setting Group Frequency Max S 3P Max Holding Registers Address Name 40001 Time Meter 40010 40012 40014 40016 40018 40020 40022 40024 40026 40034 40036 40038 40040 40042 40044 40048 40050 40052 40054 40056 40058 40060 40064 40066 40068 40070 40072 40074 40076 40078 40080 40082 40084 40086 40088 40090 40092 40094 40096 40098 40100 40102 40104 40106 40108 40110 40112 40114 40116 40118 40120 40122 40124 40126 Vab Primary Vbc Primary Vca Primary Phase A Primary Volt Phase B Primary Volt Phase C Primary Volt Phase a Secondary Volt Phase b Secondary Volt Phase c Secondary Volt Phase ab Nominal Volt Phase bc Nominal Volt Phase ca Nominal Volt Phase a Nominal Volt Phase b Nominal Volt Phase c Nominal Volt Vzps Vpps Vnps Vzps Vpps Vnps Frequency Phase A Primary Curr Phase B Primary Curr Phase C Primary Curr Phase a Secondary Curr Phase b Secondary Curr Phase c Secondary Curr Phase A Nominal Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal Phase A Nominal Phase B Nominal Phase C Nominal In Primary In Secondary In Nominal Ig Primary Ig Secondary Ig Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C 3P Power Reactive Power A Reactive Power B Reactive Power C 3P Reactive Power Q (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Format 2 UINT16 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP Multiplier 1 1 1 Description Active Setting Group Frequency Max S 3P Max Format Time Meter Multiplier 0 Description FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 Vab kV Vbc kV Vca kV Va kV Vb kV Vc kV Va V Vb V Vc V Vab Degrees Vbc Degrees Vca Degrees Va Degrees Vb Degrees Vc Degrees Vzps xVnom Vpps xVnom Vnps xVnom Vzps Degrees Vpps Degrees Vnps Degrees Hz Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Ia A Ib A Ic A Ia x Inom Ib x Inom Ic x Inom Ia Degrees Ib Degrees Ic Degrees IN kA IN A IN xInom IG kA IG A IG xInom Izps xIn Ipps xIn Inps xIn Izps Degrees Ipps Degrees Inps Degrees A Phase MW B Phase MW C Phase MW 3 Phase MW A Phase MVAr B Phase MVAr C Phase MVAr 3 Phase MVAr Chapter 4 Page 42 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40128 40130 40132 40134 40136 40138 40140 40142 40144 40146 40148 40150 40152 40153 40154 40167 40168 40169 40170 40172 40174 40176 40178 40180 40182 40184 40186 40193 40195 40197 40199 40201 40203 40205 40207 40209 40211 Name Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C 3P Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C 3P Power Factor Active Energy Export Active Energy Import Reactive Energy Export Reactive Energy Import Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Volt Vbc Secondary Volt Vca Secondary Volt VN Primary VN Secondary VN Secondary Vx Primary Vx Secondary Vx Secondary Ia Max Demand Ib Max Demand Ic Max Demand P 3P Max Q 3P Max Ig Max I sef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal Format 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT162 UINT162 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 2 UINT16 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 Multiplier 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 Description A Phase MVA B Phase MVA C Phase MVA 3 Phase MVA Phase A Phase B Phase C 3 Phase 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh 3 Phase MWh % % % No. of Fault Records No. of Event Records No. of Waveform Recs Vab V Vbc V Vca V VN kV VN V VN Degrees Vx kV Vx V Vx Degrees Ia kA Ib kA Ic kA Power Max Demand VARs Max Demand Ig Max Demand Isef Max Demand Isef A Isef A Isef xIn 40213 40215 40217 40219 40223 40225 40229 40231 40233 40235 40237 40239 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary Vz Primary Vz Secondary Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Nominal Vyz Nominal Vzx Nominal FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy kV Vy V Vz kV Vz V Vxy kV Vyz kV Vzx kV Vxy Degrees Vyz Degrees Vzx Degrees 40241 40243 40245 40247 40249 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops 40251 40253 40255 40257 40259 40261 Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Chapter 4 Page 43 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40263 40265 40267 40269 40271 40273 40275 40277 40279 40281 40283 40285 40287 40289 40291 Name Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 Format UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 Multiplier 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 P1 Interrupts P2 Interrupts P3 Interrupts Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 Swell STARFI Pole3 40293 40295 40297 40299 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP 1 1 1 1 Vx Frequency 25 Phase Diff 25 Slip Freq 25 Voltage Diff 40301 40303 40305 40307 40309 40311 40313 40317 40319 40321 40323 40325 40327 40329 40331 40333 40335 40337 Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Isef Last Trip V Phase A Max V Phase B Max V Phase C Max V Phase AB Max V Phase BC Max V Phase CA Max CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph BTrip Count CB Ph CTrip Count CB E/F Trip Count FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 UINT32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Isef Fault Va Max Demand Vb Max Demand Vc Max Demand Vab Max Demand Vbc Max Demand Vca Max Demand CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB EF Trip Count 40341 40342 40343 40344 40345 40346 40347 40348 40349 40350 40352 LED1-n LED1-n INP1-n INP1-n OUT1-n OUT1-n VRT1-n VRT1-n EQN1-n EQN1-n Fault Distance PerUnit BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 5 BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING 5 BITSTRING BITSTRING5 BITSTRING5 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 40354 40356 40358 40360 40362 40364 40366 40380 40382 CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum StartCount Start Count Target FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 1 FP_32BITS_3DP FP_32BITS_3DP1 1 FP_32BITS_3DP 0.000001 0.000001 0.000001 1 1 1 1 1 1 Led 1-16 status Led 17-32 status Input 1-16 status Input 17-32 status Output 1-16 status Output 17-32 status Virtual 1-16 status Virtual 17-32 status Equation 1-16 status Equation 17-32 status Units defined in relay setting CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Start Count Start Count Target 40401 No.of Events In Store 1 Register 0 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 5 1 Chapter 4 Page 44 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Address 40402 Name Event Record Format 3 8 Registers Multiplier 0 Description 1) FP_32BITS_3DP: 2 registers - 32 bit fixed point, a 32 bit integer containing a value to 3 decimal places e.g. 50000 sent = 50.000 2) UINT16: 1 register - standard 16 bit unsigned integer 3) Sequence of 8 registers containing an event record. Read address 30002 for 8 registers (16 bytes), each read returns the earliest event record and removes it from the internal store. Repeat this process for the number of events in the register 30001 or 40401, or until no more events are returned. (the error condition exception code 2) Event Format The format of the event record is defined by the zero byte. It signifies the type of record which is used to decode the event information. The zero byte can be one of the following. Type 1 2 4 Description Event Event with Relative Time Measurand Event with Relative Time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 45 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 5: DNP3.0 Definitions 5.1 Device Profile The following table provides a "Device Profile Document" in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a "Document," it is in fact a table, and only a component of a total interoperability guide. The table, in combination with the Implementation Table provided and the Point List Tables provided should provide a complete configuration/interoperability guide for communicating with a device implementing the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library. DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table Section 5.2.) Vendor Name: Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. Device Name: 7SR224 , using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP3 Slave Source Code Library, Version 3. Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function: For Requests: Level 3 Master For Responses: Level 3 Slave Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete list is described in the attached table): For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. 16-bit, 32-bit and Floating Point Analog Change Events with Time may be requested. Analog Input Deadbands, Object 34, variations 1 through 3, are supported. Output Event Objects 11, 13, are supported. Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets): Transmitted: 256 Received 256 Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Transmitted: 2048 Received 2048 Maximum Application Layer Re-tries: None Fixed (3) Configurable from 0 to 65535 Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: None Configurable Never Always Sometimes Configurable as: Never, Only for multi-frame messages, or Always Requires Application Layer Confirmation: Never Always When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only) When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only) Sometimes Configurable as: "Only when reporting event data", or "When reporting event data or multi-fragment messages." (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 46 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table Section 5.2.) Timeouts while waiting for: Data Link Confirm: Complete Appl. Fragment: Application Confirm: Complete Appl. Response: None None None None Fixed at 2sec Fixed at ____ Fixed at 10sec Fixed at ____ Variable Variable Variable Variable Configurable. Configurable Configurable. Configurable Others: Transmission Delay, (0 sec) Select/Operate Arm Timeout, (5 sec) Need Time Interval, (30 minutes) Application File Timeout, (60 sec) Unsolicited Notification Delay, (5 seconds) Unsolicited Response Retry Delay, (between 3 - 9 seconds) Unsolicited Offline Interval, (30 seconds) Binary Change Event Scan Period, (Polled, Not Applicable) Double Bit Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Analog Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Frozen Counter Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) String Change Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Virtual Terminal Event Scan Period, (Unsupported - Not Applicable) Sends/Executes Control Operations: WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT/OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Count > 1 Pulse On Pulse Off Latch On Latch Off Never Never Never Never Never Always Always Always Always Always Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Sometimes Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Configurable Queue Clear Queue Never Never Always Always Sometimes Configurable Sometimes Configurable Attach explanation if 'Sometimes' or 'Configurable' was checked for any operation. Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested: Never Only time-tagged Only non-time-tagged Configurable to send one or the other Sends Unsolicited Responses: Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes (attach explanation) ENABLE/DISABLE UNSOLICITED Function codes supported Default Counter Object/Variation: No Counters Reported Configurable Default Object Default Variation: Point-by-point list attached (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Never Binary Input Change With Time Binary Input Change With Relative Time Configurable Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses: Never When Device Restarts When Status Flags Change No other options are permitted. Counters Roll Over at: No Counters Reported Configurable (attach explanation) 16 Bits 32 Bits Other Value: _____ Point-by-point list attached Chapter 4 Page 47 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT (Also see the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table Section 5.2.) Sends Multi-Fragment Responses: Yes No Configurable Sequential File Transfer Support: File Transfer Support Append File Mode Custom Status Code Strings Permissions Field File Events Assigned to Class File Events Send Immediately Multiple Blocks in a Fragment Max Number of Files Open (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Yes No 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No Chapter 4 Page 48 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.2 Implementation Table The following table identifies which object variations, function codes, and qualifiers the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library supports in both request messages and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded. In the table below, text shaded as 00, 01 (start stop) indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond Subset Level 2). In the table below, text shaded as 07, 08 (limited qty) indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3. OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 1 0 Description Binary Input - Any Variation REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 22 (read) (assign Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) class) 07,08(limited qty) 17,27,28 1 1 Binary Input 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (default - see note 1) (start-stop) 2 129 (response) (no range, or all) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 2) 07,08(limited qty) 17,27,28 1 (index) Binary Input with Status 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (index) (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 17, 28 (no range, or all) (start-stop) (index - see note 2) 07,08(limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 2 2 0 1 2 Binary Input Change - Any Variation 1 Binary Input Change without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) (no range, or all) 07, 08 Binary Input Change with Time 1 (read) 06 07, 08 2 3 (default - see note 1) 3 0 Binary Input Change with Relative Time 1 Double Bit Input - Any Variation 1 22 (read) (read) (assign 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) class) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 3 1 Double Bit Input (default - see note 1) 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index - see note 1) 17, 27, 28 (index) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 49 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 3 2 Description Double Bit Input with Status REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 4 4 4 4 0 1 2 3 (default - see note 1) 10 0 Double Bit Input Change - Any 1 Variation Double Bit Input Change without Time 1 Double Bit Input Change with Time 1 Double Bit Input Change with Relative Time 1 Binary Output - Any Variation 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 07, 08 22 (read) (read) (assign 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (no range, or all) class) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 10 1 Binary Output 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (write) 00, 01 (start-stop) 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (default - see note 1) 11 0 07, 08 1 (default - see note 1) 11 2 Binary Output Change - Any Variation 1(read) Binary Output Change without Time 1(read) 06 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (limited qty) see note 2) (index) (no range, or all) 07, 08 06 (response) (no range, or all) 17,27,28 11 129 (limited qty) (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index ) 130 (unsol. resp) Binary Output Change with Time 1(read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 (limited qty) (response) 17, 28 (index ) 130 (unsol. resp) 12 0 Control Relay Output Block 22 00, 01 (assign class) 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 50 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 12 1 Description Control Relay Output Block REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 3 (select) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 17, 28 (index) echo of request 129 (response) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 12 2 Pattern Control Block (dir. op, noack) 3 (select) 7 (limited quantity) echo of request 129 (response) 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. noack) 12 3 Pattern Mask op, 3 (select) 00, 01 129 (response) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) (start-stop) echo of request 4 (operate) 5 (direct op) 6 (dir. noack) 13 13 13 20 0 1 2 0 op, Binary Output Command Event 1 - Any Variation (read) Binary Output Command Event 1 without Time (read) Binary Output Command Event 1 with Time (read) Binary Input - Any Variation 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) 22 (assign 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 17, 28 (index ) 17, 28 (index ) 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) class) 07, 08 (limited qty 17, 27, 28 (index) 7 (freeze) 8 (freeze noack) 9 (freeze clear) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 10 (frz. cl. noack) 20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 06 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00, 01 17, 28 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 3 32-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 51 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 20 4 16-Bit Delta Counter (with Flag) 20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 06 (default - see note 1) (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 20 7 32-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 20 8 16-Bit Delta Counter without Flag 21 0 Frozen Counter - Any Variation 1 22 (read) (assign class) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter (with Flag) 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) 21 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter (with Flag) 21 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1 Freeze (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 07, 08 00, 01(start-stop 17, 28 (no range, or all) (index - see note 1) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 6 16-Bit Frozen Counter with Time Of 1 Freeze (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00, 01(start-stop 17, 28 (index - see note 1) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze 21 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter with Time Of Freeze (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 52 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 21 9 Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) (default - see note 1) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 21 11 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 21 12 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter without Flag 22 0 Counter Change Event - Any Variation 22 1 (default - see note 1) 22 2 32-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event without Time 1 1 1 22 4 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 22 5 32-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 Time 16-Bit Counter Change Event with 1 Time 22 7 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 22 8 16-Bit Delta Counter Change Event with Time 23 0 Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 1 is used to request default variation) 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event (read) (read) 1 (read) 2 06 06 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 07, 08 (read) 06 06 1 (read) 06 07, 08 23 3 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 4 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event 23 5 32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 (read) 06 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (no range, or all) 07, 08 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event (limited qty) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (read) (limited qty) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (default - see note 1) 23 06 07, 08 32-Bit Delta Counter Change Event without Time 23 (no range, or all) 07, 08 3 6 06 07, 08 22 22 (read) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17,28 (index) 17,28 (index) 17, 28 (index) Chapter 4 Page 53 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number 23 6 Description 16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time 23 7 32-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 23 8 16-Bit Frozen Delta Counter Event with Time 30 0 Analog Input - Any Variation REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 1 22 (read) (read) (assign class) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index) 00, 01 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 17, 28 (index - (limited qty) see note 2) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 3 (default - see note 1) 32-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 4 16-Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 5 short floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 30 6 long floating point 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index - see note 1) 17, 27, 28 (index) 31 0 Frozen Analog Input - Any Variation 31 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog input 31 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze 31 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog input with Time of freeze (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 54 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 31 5 32-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 31 6 16-Bit Frozen Analog input without Flag 32 0 Analog Change Event - Any Variation 32 1 (default - see note 1) 32 32 2 3 32-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) 06 07, 08 1 (read) 06 (limited qty) 07, 08 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 32 4 16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 32 5 short floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 32 6 long floating point Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 129 17, 28 (index) (limited qty) (response) 130 (unsol. resp) 32 32 7 8 short floating point Analog Change Event with Time long floating point Analog Change Event with Time 33 0 Frozen Analog Event - Any Variation 33 1 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 2 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event without Time 33 3 32-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 4 16-Bit Frozen Analog Event with Time 33 5 Short Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 33 6 Long Floating Point Frozen Analog Event (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 (read) 06 129 (response) (limited qty) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 129 (response) 130 (unsol. resp) (no range, or all) 07, 08 1 (read) 06 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 28 (index) 17, 28 (index) Chapter 4 Page 55 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 33 7 Extended Floating Point Frozen Analog Event 34 0 Analog Input Deadband (Variation 0 is used to request default variation) REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) 1 (read) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) (no range, or all) 07, 08 (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 34 1 16 bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) (write) 17, 27, 28 (index) 34 2 32 bit Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (default - see note 1) (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) (write) 17, 27, 28 (index) 34 3 Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband 1 (read) 00, 01 06 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17, 28 (no range, or all) 07, 08 00, 01 (start-stop) (index - see note 2) (limited qty) 17, 27, 28 (index) 2 00, 01 (start-stop) 07, 08 (limited qty) (write) 17, 27, 28 (index) 50 0 Time and Date 50 1 Time and Date 1(read) 07, (limited qty = 1) 2(write) 07 (limited qty = 1) 2 (write) 07 (limited qty) 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) (default - see note 1) 50 3 Time and Date Last Recorded Time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 130 (unsol. Resp) 51 2 Unsychronised Time and Date CTO 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 130 (unsol. Resp) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 56 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited qty = 1) 60 0 Not Defined 60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 07, 08 20 (enbl. (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) unsol.) 21 (dab. unsol.) 22 (assign class) 60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 07, 08 20 (enbl. (limited qty) 06 (no range, or all) 06 (no range, or all) unsol.) 21 (dab. unsol.) 22 (assign class) 60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 07, 08 20 (enbl. 06 (limited qty) (no range, or all) unsol.) 21(dab. unsol.) 22 (assign class) 70 1 File Transfer 80 1 Internal Indications 81 1 Storage Object 82 1 Device Profile 83 1 Private Registration Object 83 2 Private Registration Object Descriptor 90 1 Application Identifier 100 1 Short Floating Point 100 2 Long Floating Point 100 3 Extended Floating Point (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 2 00 (write) (see note 3) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop) (start-stop) index = 7 Chapter 4 Page 57 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms OBJECT Object Variation Number Number Description 101 1 Small Packed Binary-Coded Decimal 101 2 Medium Packed Binary-Coded Decimal 101 3 Large Packed Binary-Coded Decimal REQUEST RESPONSE (Library will parse) (Library will respond with) Function Codes (dec) No Object (function code only) 13 No Object (function code only) 14 Qualifier Function Qualifier Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex) (cold restart) (warm restart) No Object (function code only) 23 No Object (function code only) 24(record current (delay meas.) Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Default variations are configurable; however, default settings for the configuration parameters are indicated in the table above. Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.) Note 3: Writes of Internal Indications are only supported for index 7 (Restart IIN1-7) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 58 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.3 Point List The tables below identify all the default data points provided by the implementation of the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library. Note, not all points listed here apply to all builds of devices. 5.3.1 Binary Input Points The default binary input event buffer size is set to allow 100 events. Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1 Binary Input 1 2 2 Binary Input 2 2 3 Binary Input 3 2 4 Binary Input 4 2 5 Binary Input 5 2 6 Binary Input 6 2 7 Binary Input 7 2 8 Binary Input 8 2 9 Binary Input 9 2 10 Binary Input 10 2 11 Binary Input 11 2 12 Binary Input 12 2 13 Binary Input 13 2 14 Binary Input 14 2 15 Binary Input 15 2 16 Binary Input 16 2 17 Binary Input 17 2 18 Binary Input 18 2 19 Binary Input 19 2 20 Binary Input 20 2 21 Binary Input 21 2 22 Binary Input 22 2 23 Binary Input 23 2 24 Binary Input 24 2 25 Binary Input 25 2 26 Binary Input 26 2 27 Binary Input 27 2 28 Binary Input 28 2 29 Binary Input 29 2 30 Binary Input 30 2 31 Binary Input 31 2 32 Binary Input 32 2 33 Binary Input 33 2 35 36 Remote mode Service mode (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2 2 Chapter 4 Page 59 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 37 Local mode 2 38 Local & Remote 2 41 Trip Circuit Fail 2 42 A-Starter 2 43 B-Starter 2 44 C-Starter 2 45 General Starter 2 46 VTS Alarm 2 47 Earth Fault Forward/Line 2 48 Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 49 Start/Pick-up N 2 50 Fault Forward/Line 2 51 Fault Reverse/Busbar 2 52 51-1 2 53 50-1 2 56 57 58 59 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 2 2 2 2 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 51G-2 50G-2 CTS Alarm 46IT 46DT 47-1 47-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 Auto-reclose active CB on by auto reclose Reclaim Lockout 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 86 87 90 91 51-3 50-3 51G-3 50G-3 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 60 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 92 51-4 2 93 50-4 2 2 96 51G-4 2 97 50G-4 2 98 Cold Load Active 2 99 E/F Protection Out 2 100 P/F Inst Protection Inhibited 2 101 E/F Inst Protection Inhibited 2 102 SEF Inst Protection Inhibited 2 103 Ext Inst Protection Inhibited 2 105 106 107 Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High 2 2 2 108 109 110 Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy 2 2 2 112 Capacitor Ready 2 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 SEF Out Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count I^2t CB Wear 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block CB-A I^2t Wear CB-A Frequent Ops Count CB-A LO Handle Ops Count CB-A 79 AR In progress 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 61 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 2 143 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited 2 144 50BF-1 Pole A 2 145 50BF-2 Pole A 2 146 Cap-A Ready 2 147 Cap-A Test Pass 2 148 Cap-A Test Fail 2 149 Cap-A Recovery Fail 2 150 Cap-A Test 2 151 CB-B Reclaim 2 152 CB-B Lockout 2 153 CB-B Total Trip Count 2 154 CB-B Delta Trip Count 2 155 CB-B Count To AR Block 2 156 CB-B I^2t Wear 2 157 CB-B Frequent Ops Count 2 158 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 2 159 CB-B 79 AR In progress 2 160 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited 2 161 50BF-1 Pole B 2 162 50BF-2 Pole B 2 163 Cap-B Ready 2 164 Cap-B Test Pass 2 165 Cap-B Test Fail 2 166 Cap-B Recovery Fail 2 167 Cap-B Test 2 168 CB-C Reclaim 2 169 CB-C Lockout 2 170 CB-C Total Trip Count 2 171 CB-C Delta Trip Count 2 172 CB-C Count To AR Block 2 173 CB-C I^2t Wear 2 174 CB-C Frequent Ops Count 2 175 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 2 176 CB-C 79 AR In progress 2 177 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited 2 178 50BF-1 Pole C 2 179 50BF-2 Pole C 2 180 Cap-C Ready 2 181 Cap-C Test Pass 2 182 Cap-C Test Fail 2 183 Cap-C Recovery Fail 2 184 Cap-C Test 2 185 Pole Discrepancy 2 186 LOV Primed 2 187 LOV Trip 2 188 LOV Close 2 189 LOV In Progress 190 BI 34 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 62 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 191 BI 35 2 192 BI 36 2 193 BI 37 2 194 BI 38 2 195 BI 39 2 196 BI 40 2 197 BI 41 2 198 BI 42 2 199 BI 43 2 207 Close Circuit Fail 1 2 208 Close Circuit Fail 2 2 209 Close Circuit Fail 3 2 210 Close Circuit Fail 2 211 50BF-1 2 212 50BF-2 2 213 49-Alarm 2 214 49-Trip 2 215 64H 2 216 Vx27/59 2 217 37-1 2 218 37-2 2 219 Cold Load Active 2 220 CB LO Handle Ops Count 2 221 Battery Recovery Fail 2 222 Trip Time Alarm 2 223 SEF Forward/Line 2 224 SEF Reverse/Busbar 2 225 General Alarm 1 2 226 General Alarm 2 2 227 General Alarm 3 2 228 General Alarm 4 2 229 General Alarm 5 2 230 General Alarm 6 2 231 General Alarm 7 2 232 General Alarm 8 2 233 General Alarm 9 2 234 General Alarm 10 2 235 General Alarm 11 2 236 General Alarm 12 2 237 Quick Logic E1 2 238 Quick Logic E2 2 239 Quick Logic E3 2 240 Quick Logic E4 2 241 Quick Logic E5 2 242 Quick Logic E6 2 243 Quick Logic E7 2 244 Quick Logic E8 2 245 Quick Logic E9 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 63 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 246 Quick Logic E10 2 247 Quick Logic E11 2 248 Quick Logic E12 2 249 Quick Logic E13 2 250 Quick Logic E14 2 251 Quick Logic E15 2 252 Quick Logic E16 2 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 283 284 285 286 287 81HBL2 37G-1 37G-2 Wattmetric Po> 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 50BF-PhA 50BF-PhB 50BF-PhC 50BF-EF 79 Last Trip Lockout 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 291 292 293 Trip-PhA Trip-PhB Trip-PhC 2 2 2 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y LOV Z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 64 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 387 25 System Split 2 388 25 Live Line 2 389 25 Live Bus 2 390 25 Line U/V 2 391 25 Bus U/V 2 392 25 Voltage Dif > 2 393 25 CS Slip Freq > 2 394 25 SS Slip Freq > 2 395 25 COZ Slip Freq > 2 396 25 In Sync 2 397 25 CS In Progress 2 398 25 SS In Progress 2 399 25 COZ In Progress 2 400 25 System Split LO 2 401 60VTF-Bus 2 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 420 422 425 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 79 AR in Progress Hot Line Working On/Off Inst Protection Off/On CB 1 CB-A CB-B CB-C Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Man Override Synch on/off 79 Override Synch on/off 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 Virtual Input 1 Virtual Input 2 Virtual Input 3 Virtual Input 4 Virtual Input 5 Virtual Input 6 Virtual Input 7 Virtual Input 8 Virtual Input 9 Virtual Input 10 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 65 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 511 Virtual Input 11 2 512 Virtual Input 12 2 513 Virtual Input 13 2 514 Virtual Input 14 2 515 Virtual Input 15 2 516 Virtual Input 16 2 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 Led 1 Led 2 Led 3 Led 4 Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Led 9 Led 10 Led 11 Led 12 Led 13 Led 14 Led 15 Led 16 Led 17 Led 18 Led 19 Led 20 Led 21 Led 22 Led 23 Led 24 Led 25 Led 26 Led 27 Led 28 Led PU1 Led PU 2 Led PU 3 Led PU 4 Led PU 5 Led PU 6 Led PU 7 Led PU 8 Led PU 9 Led PU 10 Led PU 11 Led PU 12 Led PU 13 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Chapter 4 Page 66 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 714 Led PU 14 2 715 Led PU 15 2 716 Led PU 16 2 717 Led PU 17 2 718 Led PU 18 2 719 Led PU 19 2 720 Led PU 20 2 721 Led PU 21 2 722 Led PU 22 2 723 Led PU 23 2 724 Led PU 24 2 725 Led PU 25 2 726 Led PU 26 2 727 Led PU 27 2 728 Led PU 28 2 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB EF Trip Count 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 Binary Output 23 Binary Output 24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 67 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 825 Binary Output 25 2 826 Binary Output 26 2 827 Binary Output 27 2 828 Binary Output 28 2 829 Binary Output 29 2 830 Binary Output 30 2 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 Cold start Warm Start Re-Start Power On SW Forced Restart Unexpected Restart Reset Start Count 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 890 891 CB-1 Open CB-1 Closed 2 2 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 User SP Event 1 User SP Event 2 User SP Event 3 User SP Event 4 User SP Event 5 User SP Event 6 User SP Event 7 User SP Event 8 User Output 1 User Output 2 User Output 3 User Output 4 User Output 5 User Output 6 User Output 7 User Output 8 User Output 9 User Output 10 User Output 11 User Output 12 User Output 13 User Output 14 User Output 15 User Output 16 User Output 17 User Output 18 User Output 19 User Output 20 User Output 21 User Output 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 68 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1 Change Event Object Number: 2 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with flags) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with absolute time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 1032 User Output 23 2 1033 User Output 24 2 1034 User Output 25 2 1035 User Output 26 2 1036 User Output 27 2 1037 User Output 28 2 1038 User Output 29 2 1039 User Output 30 2 1040 User Output 31 2 1041 User Output 32 2 5.3.2 Double Bit Binary Input Points Double Bit Binary Inputs are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. Double Bit Input Points Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 3 Change Event Object Number: 4 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Double Bit Binary Input packed format) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 3 (Double Bit Binary Input Event with relative time) Default Point Change Event Name/Description Index Assigned Class (1, 2, 3 or none) 0 CB 1 2 1 CB-A 2 2 CB-B 2 3 CB-C 2 10 User DP Event 1 2 11 User DP Event 2 2 12 User DP Event 3 2 13 User DP Event 4 2 14 User DP Event 5 2 15 User DP Event 6 2 16 User DP Event 7 2 17 User DP Event 8 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 69 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.3.3 Binary Output Status Points and Control Relay Output Blocks The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output Blocks (Object 12). While Binary Output Status Points are included here for completeness, they are not often polled by DNP 3.0 Masters. It is recommended that Binary Output Status points represent the most recent DNP "commanded" value for the corresponding Control Relay Output Block point. Because many, if not most, Control Relay Output Block points are controlled through pulse mechanisms, the value of the output status may in fact be meaningless. Binary Output Status points are not recommended to be included in class 0 polls. As an alternative, it is recommended that "actual" status values of Control Relay Output Block points be looped around and mapped as Binary Inputs. (The "actual" status value, as opposed to the "commanded" status value, is the value of the actuated control. For example, a DNP control command may be blocked through hardware or software mechanisms; in this case, the actual status value would indicate the control failed because of the blocking. Looping Control Relay Output Block actual status values as Binary Inputs has several advantages: * it allows actual statuses to be included in class 0 polls, * it allows change event reporting of the actual statuses, which is a more efficient and time-accurate method of communicating control values, * and it allows reporting of time-based information associated with controls, including any delays before controls are actuated, and any durations if the controls are pulsed. The default select/control buffer size is large enough to hold 10 of the largest select requests possible. Binary Outputs are by default set to be returned in a class zero interrogation. Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Binary Output 1 Binary Output 2 Binary Output 3 Binary Output 4 Binary Output 5 Binary Output 6 Binary Output 7 Binary Output 8 Binary Output 9 Binary Output 10 Binary Output 11 Binary Output 12 Binary Output 13 Binary Output 14 Binary Output 15 Binary Output 16 Binary Output 17 Binary Output 18 Binary Output 19 Binary Output 20 Binary Output 21 Binary Output 22 Binary Output 23 Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 70 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Binary Output 24 Binary Output 25 Binary Output 26 Binary Output 27 Binary Output 28 Binary Output 29 Binary Output 30 Binary Output 31 Binary Output 32 LED reset Settings Group 1 Settings Group 2 Settings Group 3 Settings Group 4 Settings Group 5 Settings Group 6 Settings Group 7 Settings Group 8 Auto-reclose on/off 43 Hot Line Working on/off 44 E/F off/on 45 SEF off/on 46 Inst Protection off/on 47 LOV off/on 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Reset CB Total Trip Count Reset CB Delta Trip Count Reset CB Count To AR Block Reset CB Frequent Ops Count Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count Reset I^2t CB Wear CB 1 55 56 57 58 59 CB 1 Trip & Reclose CB 1 Trip & Lockout Battery Test Capacitor Test Demand metering reset 60 CB-A 61 CB-B 62 CB-C (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Chapter 4 Page 71 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 CB-A Trip & Lockout CB-B Trip & Lockout CB-C Trip & Lockout Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO Reset CB-A Total Trip Count Reset CB-B Total Trip Count Reset CB-C Total Trip Count Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count Reset CB-A Count To AR Block Reset CB-B Count To AR Block Reset CB-C Count To AR Block Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count Reset CB-A I^2t Wear Reset CB-B I^2t Wear Reset CB-C I^2t Wear Reset Energy Meters Remote Mode Service Mode Local Mode Local & Remote Man Override Sync on/off 93 79 Override Sync on/off 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Reset CB Phase A Trip Count Reset CB Phase B Trip Count Reset CB Phase C Trip Count Reset CB EF Trip Count Reset Start Count (Action) User SP Command 1 User SP Command 2 User SP Command 3 User SP Command 4 User SP Command 5 User SP Command 6 User SP Command 7 User SP Command 8 User DP Command 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off Chapter 4 Page 72 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Binary Output Status Points Static Object Number: 10 Change Event Object Number: 11 Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output with flags) Default Change Event variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output absolute time) Control Relay Output Blocks Object Number: 12 All objects are default class 0 Point Index Name/Description 108 User DP Command 2 109 User DP Command 3 110 User DP Command 4 111 User DP Command 5 112 User DP Command 6 113 User DP Command 7 114 User DP Command 8 115 116 CB-1 Open CB-1 Close 5.3.4 Supported Control Relay Output Block Fields /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On / Pulse Off / Latch On / Latch Off /Close/Trip Pulse On/Latch On/Close Pulse On/Latch On/Close Binary Counters The following table lists both the Counters (Object 20) and Counter change events (Onbject 22). The "Default Deadband," and the "Default Change Event Assigned Class" columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before a Counter change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported. Counters are by default returned in a class zero interrogation. Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Deadband Class Variant Variant 0 3 5 1 Waveform Records 1 1 3 5 1 Fault Records 1 2 3 5 1 Event Records 1 3 3 5 1 Data Log Records 1 4 3 5 1 Number User Files 1 5 3 5 1 Start Count 1 6 3 5 1 Start Count Target 1 7 3 5 1 Active Setting Group 1 11 3 5 1 CB Total Trip Count 1 12 3 5 1 CB Ph A Trip Count 1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 73 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20 Change Event Object Number: 22 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Deadband Class Variant Variant 13 3 5 1 CB Ph B Trip Count 1 14 3 5 1 CB Ph C Trip Count 1 15 3 5 1 CB EF Trip Count 1 16 3 5 1 CB Delta Trip Count 1 17 3 5 1 CB Count To AR Block 1 18 3 5 1 CB Frequent Ops Count 1 19 3 5 1 CB LO Handle Ops 1 21 3 5 1 E1 Counter 1 22 3 5 1 E2 Counter 1 23 3 5 1 E3 Counter 1 24 3 5 1 E4 Counter 1 25 3 5 1 E5 Counter 1 26 3 5 1 E6 Counter 1 27 3 5 1 E7 Counter 1 28 3 5 1 E8 Counter 1 29 3 5 1 E9 Counter 1 30 3 5 1 E10 Counter 1 31 3 5 1 E11 Counter 1 32 3 5 1 E12 Counter 1 33 3 5 1 E13 Counter 1 34 3 5 1 E14 Counter 1 35 3 5 1 E15 Counter 1 36 3 5 1 E16 Counter 1 5.3.5 Frozen Counters The following table lists both the Frozen Counters (Object 21) and Frozen Counter Change Events (Object 23). The "Default Change Event Assigned Class" column is used to define which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) the change event will be reported. Note the point number of the Frozen Counter must match that of the corresponding Counter. Frozen Counters are by default not returned in a class zero interrogation. Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Resettable Class Variant Variant 0 2 9 1 Waveform Records (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 74 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Frozen Counters Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21 Change Event Object Number: 23 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Counter without Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Change Event with Flag) Default Default Default Point # Static Event Name Resettable Class Variant Variant 1 2 9 1 Fault Records 2 2 9 1 Event Records 3 2 9 1 Data Log Records 4 2 9 1 Number User Files 5 2 9 1 Start Count 6 2 9 1 Start Count Target 7 2 9 1 Active Setting Group 11 2 9 1 CB Total Trip Count 12 2 9 1 CB Ph A Trip Count 13 2 9 1 CB Ph B Trip Count 14 2 9 1 CB Ph C Trip Count 15 2 9 1 CB EF Trip Count 16 2 9 1 CB Delta Trip Count 17 2 9 1 CB Count To AR Block 18 2 9 1 CB Frequent Ops Count 21 2 9 1 E1 Counter 22 2 9 1 E2 Counter 23 2 9 1 E3 Counter 24 2 9 1 E4 Counter 25 2 9 1 E5 Counter 26 2 9 1 E6 Counter 27 2 9 1 E7 Counter 28 2 9 1 E8 Counter 29 2 9 1 E9 Counter 30 2 9 1 E10 Counter 31 2 9 1 E11 Counter 32 2 9 1 E12 Counter 33 2 9 1 E13 Counter 34 2 9 1 E14 Counter 35 2 9 1 E15 Counter 36 2 9 1 E16 Counter (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 75 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 5.3.6 Analogue Inputs The following table lists Analogue Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of Analogue Inputs, Analogue Output Control Blocks, and Analogue Output Statuses are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. The "Default Deadband," and the "Default Change Event Assigned Class" columns are used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an analogue change event will be generated, and once generated in which class poll (1, 2, 3, or none) will the change event be reported. The default analogue input event buffer size is set 30. Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def. Def. Def/ Point Scaling Class Static Event Name/Description Deadband Index Factor Object Object 0 Frequency (Hz) 100.0 1 3 2 4 1 Vab Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 2 Vbc Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 3 Vca Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 4 Va Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 5 Vb Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 6 Vc Primary (V) 0.01 100 3 2 4 7 Va Secondary (V) 10.0 1 3 2 4 8 Vb Secondary (V) 10.0 1 3 2 4 9 Vc Secondary (V) 10.0 1 3 2 4 21 22 23 Vzps Magnitude (V) Vpps Magnitude (V) Vnps Magnitude (V) 10.0 10.0 10.0 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Ia Primary (A) Ib Primary (A) Ic Primary (A) Ia Secondary (A) Ib Secondary (A) Ic Secondary (A) Ia Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ib Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ic Nominal Magnitude (xIn) 0.001 0.001 0.001 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 43 44 45 46 47 48 In Primary (A) In Secondary (A) In Nominal (xIn) Ig Primary (A) Ig Secondary (A) Ig Nominal (xIn) 1 100.0 100.0 1 100.0 100.0 100 1 1 100 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 51 52 53 57 58 59 Izps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Ipps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Inps Nominal Magnitude (xIn) Active Power A Phase W Active Power B Phase W Active Power C Phase W 100.0 100.0 100.0 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 1 1 1 1000000 1000000 1000000 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 60 61 62 63 3 Phase Real Power (P) (W) Reactive Power A Phase VAr Reactive Power B Phase VAr Reactive Power C Phase VAr 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 76 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def. Def. Def/ Point Scaling Class Static Event Name/Description Deadband Index Factor Object Object 64 3 Phase Reactive Power (Q) (VAr) 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 65 Apparent Power A Phase VA 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 66 Apparent Power B Phase VA 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 67 Apparent Power C Phase VA 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 68 3 Phase Apparent Power (S) (VA) 0.00001 1000000 3 2 4 71 Power Factor(PhA) (Cos ) 1000 0.1 3 2 4 72 Power Factor(PhB) (Cos ) 1000 0.1 3 2 4 73 Power Factor(PhC) (Cos ) 1000 0.1 3 2 4 74 Power Factor(3P) (Cos ) 1000 0.1 3 2 4 75 Act Energy Exp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 76 Act Energy Imp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 77 React Energy Exp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 78 React Energy Imp (MWh) 1 -1 3 2 4 81 82 83 Thermal Status Ph A (%) Thermal Status Ph B (%) Thermal Status Ph C (%) 100.0 100.0 100.0 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 95 Active Settings Group 1 1 3 2 4 99 100 101 102 103 Vab Secondary (V) Vbc Secondary (V) Vca Secondary (V) Vn Primary (V) Vn Secondary (V) 100.0 100.0 100.0 0.01 10.0 1 1 1 100 1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 105 106 Vx Primary (kV) Vx Secondary Magnitude (V) 0.01 10.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 108 109 110 111 112 111 118 119 Ia Max Demand (kA) Ib Max Demand (kA) Ic Max Demand (kA) Power Max Demand (W) VARs Max Demand (VAr) Power Max Demand (W) Fault Distance Percentage Fault Reactance (Seconsary Ohms) 1 1 1 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 100 1000 100 100 100 1000000 1000000 1000000 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 120 121 Vy Primary (V) Vy Secondary (V) 0.01 10.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 123 124 Vz Primary (V) Vz Secondary (V) 0.01 10.0 100 1 3 3 2 2 4 4 126 127 128 129 130 131 Vxy Primary (V) Vyz Primary (V) Vzx Primary (V) Vxy Secondary (V) Vyz Secondary (V) Vzx Secondary (V) 0.01 0.01 0.01 10.0 10.0 10.0 100 100 100 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 135 136 137 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 4 4 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 77 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def. Def. Def/ Point Scaling Class Static Event Name/Description Deadband Index Factor Object Object 138 CB Frequent Ops Count 1 1 3 2 4 139 CB LO Handle Ops 1 1 3 2 4 140 Sag SIARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 141 Sag SMARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 142 Sag STARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 143 Sag SIARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 144 Sag SMARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 145 Sag STARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 146 Sag SIARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 147 Sag SMARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 148 Sag STARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 149 Interrupt Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 150 Interrupt Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 151 Interrupt Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 152 Swell SIARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 153 Swell SMARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 154 Swell STARFI Pole1 1 1 3 2 4 155 Swell SIARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 156 Swell SMARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 157 Swell STARFI Pole2 1 1 3 2 4 158 Swell SIARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 159 Swell SMARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 160 Swell STARFI Pole3 1 1 3 2 4 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Phase Diff (deg) Slip Freq (Hz) Voltage Diff (V) Ia Fault Last Trip (A) Ib Fault Last Trip (A) Ic Fault Last Trip (A) Va Fault Last Trip (V) Vb Fault Last Trip (V) Vc Fault Last Trip (V) In Fault Last Trip (A) Ig Fault Last Trip (A) 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 Va Max Demand (V) Vb Max Demand (V) Vc Max Demand (V) Vab Max Demand (V) Vbc Max Demand (V) Vca Max Demand (V) CB Ph A Trip count CB Ph B Trip count CB Ph C Trip count CB EF Trip count CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A percent remaining CB Wear B percent remaining CB Wear C percent remaining CB Wear Minimum (%) Fault Distance Per-unit 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 1 0.00001 0.00001 0.00001 1 1 1 1 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 1 1 1 1000000 1000000 1000000 1 1 1 1 -1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 7 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 78 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Analog Inputs Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30 Change Event Object Number: 32 Default Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input with Flag) Default Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 4 (16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time) Def. Def. Def/ Point Scaling Class Static Event Name/Description Deadband Index Factor Object Object 196 197 Frequency Max S 3P Max 100 0.00001 1 1000000 3 3 2 2 4 4 338 Battery VAux 10 1 3 2 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 79 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 6: IEC60870-5-101 6.1 Introduction This section describes the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol implementation in the relays. The control system or local PC acts as the master in the system with the relay operating as a slave responding to the master's commands. This protocol can be set to use any or all of the relays hardware interfaces (USB, Fibre Optic, RS232 and RS485). Cause of Transmission Shaded boxes are not required. Blank = function or ASDU is not used. Mark type identification/cause of transmission combinations: "X" if used only in the standard direction <1> activation confirmation deactivation deactivation confirmation activation termination return info caused by a remote cmd return info caused by a local cmd file transfer 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X M_SP_NA_1 <2> M_SP_TA_1 <3> M_DP_NA_1 <4> M_DP_TA_1 <5> M_ST_NA_1 <6> M_ST_TA_1 <7> M_BO_NA_1 <8> M_BO_TA_1 <9> M_ME_NA_1 <10> M_ME_TA_1 <11> M_ME_NB_1 <12> M_ME_TB_1 <13> M_ME_NC_1 <14> M_ME_TC_1 <15> M_IT_NA_1 <16> M_IT_TA_1 <17> M_EP_TA_1 <18> M_EP_TB_1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20 37 to to 36 41 unknown information object address activation 5 unknown common address of ASDU request or requested 4 unknown cause of transmission initialized 3 unknown type identification spontaneous 2 request by group <n> counter request background scan 1 interrogated by group <number> periodic, cyclic The cause of transmission (COT) for each information object type is listed below. 44 45 46 47 X X X X X X X X X Chapter 4 Page 80 of 104 <19> M_EP_TC_1 <21> M_ME_ND_1 <30> M_SP_TB_1 <31> M_DP_TB_1 <32> M_ST_TB_1 <33> M_BO_TB_1 <34> M_ME_TD_1 <35> M_ME_TE_1 <36> M_ME_TF_1 <37> M_IT_TB_1 <38> M_EP_TD_1 <39> M_EP_TE_1 <40> M_EP_TF_1 <45> C_SC_NA_1 <46> C_DC_NA_1 <47> C_RC_NA_1 <70> M_EI_NA_1 <100> C_IC_NA_1 <101> C_CI_NA_1 <102> C_RD_NA_1 <103> C_CS_NA_1 <104> C_TS_NA_1 <105> C_RP_NA_1 <106> C_CD_NA_1 activation confirmation deactivation deactivation confirmation activation termination return info caused by a remote cmd return info caused by a local cmd file transfer 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 20 37 to to 36 41 unknown information object address activation 5 unknown common address of ASDU request or requested 4 unknown cause of transmission initialized 3 unknown type identification spontaneous 2 request by group <n> counter request background scan 1 interrogated by group <number> periodic, cyclic 7SR224 Argus Data Comms 44 45 46 47 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Definitions Process Information Object Type in Monitor Direction Abbreviation Description M_SP_NA_1 Single point information M_SP_TA_1 Single point information with time tag M_DP_NA_1 Double point information M_DP_TA_1 Double point information with time tag M_ST_NA_1 Step position information M_ST_TA_1 Step position information with time tag (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 81 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms M_BO_NA_1 Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_TA_1 Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_ME_NA_1 Measured value, normalized value M_ME_TA_1 Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_NB_1 Measured value, scaled value M_ME_TB_1 Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_NC_1 Measured value, short floating point number M_ME_TC_1 Measured value, short floating point number with time tag M_IT_NA_1 Integrated totals M_IT_TA_1 Integrated totals with time tag M_EP_TA_1 Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TB_1 Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_ME_ND_1 Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_SP_TB_1 Single point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_DP_TB_1 Double point information with time tag CP56Time2A M_ST_TB_1 Step position information with time tag CP56Time2A M_BO_TB_1 Bit string of 32 bit with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TD_1 Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TE_1 Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2A M_ME_TF_1 Measured value, short floating point number with time tag CP56Time2A M_IT_TB_1 Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TD_1 Packed start of events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TE_1 Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A M_EP_TF_1 Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2A Process Information Object Type in the Control Direction Abbreviation Description C_SC_NA_1 Single command C_DC_NA_1 Double command C_RC_NA_1 Regulating step command System Information Object Type in the Monitor Direction Abbreviation Description ME_EI_NA_1 End of initialization System Information Object Type in the Control Direction Abbreviation Description C_IC_NA_1 Interrogation command C_CI_NA_1 Counter interrogation C_RD_NA_1 Read command C_CS_NA_1 Clock Synchronisation command C_TS_NB_1 Test command C_RP_NC_1 Reset process command C_CD_NA_1 Delay acquisition command (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 82 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Information Object Addresses (IOA) The following table lists information object address (IOA) definitions together with a description of the message and default function type of that message. Definitions with shaded area are not available on all relay models. The Default type is given below but all items are user configurable. IOA Description Default Type 1 Data Lost M_SP_TB_1 4 Remote Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 5 Service Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 6 Local Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 7 Local & Remote Mode M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Control Received Command Received Cold Start Warm Start Re-start Trigger Storage Clear Waveform Records Clear Fault Records Clear Event Records 21 Reset Demand metering 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 27 Sag SARFI 59Swell SARFI Reset SagSwell Count Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Battery Volts Low Battery Volts High Battery Healthy Battery Recovery Fail 32 Battery Test 33 34 35 36 Capacitor Ready Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail 37 Capacitor Test 38 39 40 41 General General General General Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 Alarm 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 83 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Description Default Type General Alarm 5 General Alarm 6 General Alarm 7 General Alarm 8 General Alarm 9 General Alarm 10 General Alarm 11 General Alarm 12 Quick Logic E1 Quick Logic E2 Quick Logic E3 Quick Logic E4 Quick Logic E5 Quick Logic E6 Quick Logic E7 Quick Logic E8 Quick Logic E9 Quick Logic E10 Quick Logic E11 Quick Logic E12 Quick Logic E13 Quick Logic E14 Quick Logic E15 Quick Logic E16 Quick Logic E17 Quick Logic E18 Quick Logic E19 Quick Logic E20 Quick Logic E21 Quick Logic E22 Quick Logic E23 Quick Logic E24 Quick Logic E25 Quick Logic E26 Quick Logic E27 Quick Logic E28 Quick Logic E29 Quick Logic E30 Quick Logic E31 Quick Logic E32 Function Key 1 Function Key 2 Function Key 3 Function Key 4 Function Key 5 Function Key 6 Function Key 7 Function Key 8 Function Key 9 Function Key 10 Function Key 11 Function Key 12 Function Key 13 Function Key 14 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 84 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Description Default Type Function Key 15 Function Key 16 Function Key 17 Function Key 18 Function Key 19 Function Key 20 Function Key 21 Function Key 22 Function Key 23 Function Key 24 Function Key 25 Function Key 26 Function Key 27 Binary Input 1 Binary Input 2 Binary Input 3 Binary Input 4 Binary Input 5 Binary Input 6 Binary Input 7 Binary Input 8 Binary Input 9 Binary Input 10 Binary Input 11 Binary Input 12 Binary Input 13 Binary Input 14 Binary Input 15 Binary Input 16 Binary Input 17 Binary Input 18 Binary Input 19 Binary Input 20 Binary Input 21 Binary Input 22 Binary Input 23 Binary Input 24 Binary Input 25 Binary Input 26 Binary Input 27 Binary Input 28 Binary Input 29 Binary Input 30 Binary Input 31 Binary Input 32 Binary Input 33 Binary Input 34 Binary Input 35 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 85 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 Description Default Type Binary Input 36 Binary Input 37 Binary Input 38 Binary Input 39 Binary Input 40 Binary Input 41 Binary Input 42 Binary Input 43 Binary Input 44 Binary Input 45 Binary Input 46 Binary Input 47 Binary Input 48 Binary Input 49 Binary Input 50 Binary Input 51 Binary Input 52 Binary Input 53 Binary Input 54 Binary Input 55 Binary Input 56 Binary Input 57 Binary Input 58 Binary Input 59 Binary Input 60 Binary Input 61 Binary Input 62 Binary Input 63 Binary Input 64 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 173 Binary Output 1 174 Binary Output 2 175 Binary Output 3 176 Binary Output 4 177 Binary Output 5 178 Binary Output 6 179 Binary Output 7 180 Binary Output 8 181 Binary Output 9 182 Binary Output 10 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 86 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 183 Binary Output 11 184 Binary Output 12 185 Binary Output 13 186 Binary Output 14 187 Binary Output 15 188 Binary Output 16 189 Binary Output 17 190 Binary Output 18 191 Binary Output 19 192 Binary Output 20 193 Binary Output 21 194 Binary Output 22 195 Binary Output 23 196 Binary Output 24 197 Binary Output 25 198 Binary Output 26 199 Binary Output 27 200 Binary Output 28 201 Binary Output 29 202 Binary Output 30 203 Binary Output 31 204 Binary Output 32 205 206 207 208 Reset FCB Reset CU Start/Restart Power On 209 Auto-reclose active (In/Out) 210 LEDs reset (Reset Flag & Outputs) 211 Settings changed (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 87 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 212 Settings Group 1 Select 213 Settings Group 2 select 214 Settings Group 3 Select 215 Settings Group 4 Select 216 Settings Group 5 Selected 217 Settings Group 6 Selected 218 Settings Group 7 Selected 219 Settings Group 8 Selected 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 Trip circuit fail VT Fuse Failure Earth Fault Forward/Line Earth Fault Reverse/Busbar Starter/Pick Up L1 Starter/Pick Up L2 Starter/Pick Up L3 Starter/Pick Up N General Trip Trip L1 Trip L2 Trip L3 Fault Impedance Fault Forward/Line Fault Reverse/Busbar General Starter/Pick Up Circuit breaker fail Trip I> Trip I>> Trip In> Trip In>> CB on by auto reclose Reclose blocked 51-1 50-1 51N-1 50N-1 51G-1 50G-1 51-2 50-2 51N-2 50N-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 Chapter 4 Page 88 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 Description Default Type 51G-2 50G-2 51-3 50-3 51N-3 50N-3 51G-3 50G-3 51-4 50-4 51N-4 50N-4 51G-4 50G-4 50BF Stage 2 49 Thermal Alarm 49 Thermal Trip 51V-PhA 51V-PhB 51V-PhC 60 CT Supervision 51SEF-1 50SEF-1 51SEF-2 50SEF-2 51SEF-3 50SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-4 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 282 SEF Out/In 283 46IT 284 46DT 285 64H 286 EF Out/In 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 SEF Forward/Line SEF Reverse/Busbar 47-1 47-2 37-1 37-2 37G-1 37G-2 37SEF-1 37SEF-2 46BC 27/59-1 27/59-2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 89 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 Description Default Type 27/59-3 27/59-4 59NIT 59NDT Vx27/59 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 81HBL2 Trip Circuit Fail 1 Trip Circuit Fail 2 Trip Circuit Fail 3 Close CB Failed Open CB Failed Reclaim Lockout Successful Close Successful DAR Close Successful Man Close M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 326 Hotline Working 327 Inst Protection Out 328 CB Total Trip Count 329 CB Delta Trip Count 330 CB Count to AR Block 331 Reset CB Trip Count Maint 332 Reset CB Trip Count Delta 333 Reset CB Trip Count Lockout 334 I^2t CB Wear 335 Reset I^2t CB Wear 336 79 AR In Progress 337 CB Frequent Ops Count 338 Reset CB Frequent Ops Count 339 CB LO Handle Ops Count 340 Reset CB LO Handle Ops Count 341 342 343 344 345 CB On By Manual Close Cold Load Active P/F Inst Protection Inhibited E/F Inst Protection Inhibited SEF Inst Protection Inhibited (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 90 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 346 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 Description Default Type Ext Inst Protection Inhibited LOV Primed LOV Trip LOV Close LOV Inhibit Fast Protection LOV Force Fast Protection LOV In Progress LOV Backfeed Fail LOV Successful LOV 1x Trip and Lockout LOV Fail LOV-A Live LOV-X Live M_EP_TD_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 360 LOV Out 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 Trip Time Alarm Close Circuit Fail 1 Close Circuit Fail 2 Close Circuit Fail 3 Close Circuit Fail Distance To Fault Distance To Fault % Fault Reactance 60 CTS-I Act Energy Exp Act Energy Imp React Energy Exp React Energy Imp 374 Reset Energy Meters 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 Active Exp Meter Reset Active Imp Meter Reset Reactive Exp Meter Reset Reactive Imp Meter Reset CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Freq Ops Count LOV A Live LOV B Live LOV C Live LOV X Live LOV Y Live LOV Z Live LOV A LOV B LOV C LOV X LOV Y LOV Z CB LO Handle Ops Count 25 Check Sync 25 System Sync (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 91 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 25 Close On Zero 25 System Split 25 Live Line 25 Live Bus 25 Line U/V 25 Bus U/V 25 Voltage Dif > 25 CS Slip Freq > 25 SS Slip Freq > 25 COZ Slip Freq > 25 In Sync 25 CS In Progress 25 SS In Progress 25 COZ In Progress 25 System Split LO 60VTF-Bus M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 Man Override Sync 79 Override Sync Dead Line Close Dead Bus Close Wattmetric Po> Close CB-A Failed Open CB-A Failed CB-A Reclaim CB-A Lockout CB-A Successful Close CB-A Successful DAR Close CB-A Successful Man Close CB-A Total Trip Count CB-A Delta Trip Count CB-A Count To AR Block M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 430 Reset CB-A Total Trip Count 431 Reset CB-A Delta Trip Count 432 Reset CB-A Count to AR Block 433 CB-A I^2t Wear 434 Reset CB-A I^2t Wear 435 CB-A 79 AR In progress 436 CB-A Frequent Ops Count 437 Reset CB-A Frequent Ops Count 438 CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 439 Reset CB-A LO Handle Ops Count 440 441 442 443 444 445 PhA Inst Protection Inhibited CB-A Blocked By Interlocking CB-A on by auto reclose CB-A Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole A 50BF-2 Pole A (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 92 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 446 CB-A Trip & Lockout 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 Cap-A Ready Cap-A Test Pass Cap-A Test Fail Cap-A Recovery Fail Cap-A Test CB-A Deadtime Running Close CB-B Failed Open CB-B Failed CB-B Reclaim CB-B Lockout CB-B Successful Close CB-B Successful DAR Close CB-B Successful Man Close CB-B Total Trip Count CB-B Delta Trip Count CB-B Count To AR Block 463 Reset CB-B Total Trip Count 464 Reset CB-B Delta Trip Count 465 Reset CB-B Count to AR Block 466 CB-B I^2t Wear 467 Reset CB-B I^2t Wear 468 CB-B 79 AR In progress 469 CB-B Frequent Ops Count 470 Reset CB-B Frequent Ops Count 471 CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 472 Reset CB-B LO Handle Ops Count 473 474 475 476 477 478 PhB Inst Protection Inhibited CB-B Blocked By Interlocking CB-B on by auto reclose CB-B Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole B 50BF-2 Pole B 479 CB-B Trip & Lockout 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 Cap-B Ready Cap-B Test Pass Cap-B Test Fail Cap-B Recovery Fail Cap-B Test CB-B Deadtime Running Close CB-C Failed Open CB-C Failed CB-C Reclaim CB-C Lockout CB-C Successful Close CB-C Successful DAR Close (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Default Type M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 93 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 492 493 494 495 Description Default Type CB-C Successful Man Close CB-C Total Trip Count CB-C Delta Trip Count CB-C Count To AR Block M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 M_DP_TB_1 C_DC_NA_1 496 Reset CB-C Total Trip Count 497 Reset CB-C Delta Trip Count 498 Reset CB-C Count to AR Block 499 CB-C I^2t Wear 500 Reset CB-C I^2t Wear 501 CB-C 79 AR In progress 502 CB-C Frequent Ops Count 503 Reset CB-C Frequent Ops Count 504 CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 505 Reset CB-C LO Handle Ops Count 506 507 508 509 510 511 PhC Inst Protection Inhibited CB-C Blocked By Interlocking CB-C on by auto reclose CB-C Trip & Reclose 50BF-1 Pole C 50BF-2 Pole C 512 CB-C Trip & Lockout 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 Cap-C Ready Cap-C Test Pass Cap-C Test Fail Cap-C Recovery Fail Cap-C Test CB-C Deadtime Running Pole Discrepancy Three Pole Trip Select Force 3Pole Trip 522 CB 1 527 CB-A 528 CB-B 529 CB-C 550 CB 1 Trip & Reclose 551 CB 1 Trip & Lockout 552 Mode A - 3PTrip3PLO 553 Mode B - 1PTrip3PLO (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 Chapter 4 Page 94 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 Blocked by Interlocking 50BF-1 37-PhA 37-PhB 37-PhC 50 LC-1 50 LC-2 50G LC-1 50G LC-2 50SEF LC-1 50SEF LC-2 50BF-PhA 50BF-PhB 50BF-PhC 50BF-EF 79 Last Trip Lockout Auto-reclose active CB on by auto reclose Battery Test Pass Battery Test Fail Battery Ohms High Capacitor Test Pass Capacitor Test Fail Capacitor Recovery Fail M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 Ia Fault Ib Fault Ic Fault Va Fault Vb Fault Vc Fault In Fault Ig Fault Isef Fault M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_ME_NC_1 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 Frequency Vab Primary Vbc Primary Vca Primary Va Primary Vb Primary Vc Primary Va Secondary Vb Secondary Vc Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 554 Mode C - 1PTrip1PLO 621 Vzps 622 Vpps 623 Vnps (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 Chapter 4 Page 95 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 Ia Primary Ib Primary Ic Primary Ia Secondary Ib Secondary Ic Secondary Ia Nominal Ib Nominal Ic Nominal M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 In Primary In Secondary In Nominal Ig Primary Ig Secondary Ig Nominal Izps Nominal Ipps Nominal Inps Nominal M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C P (3P) Reactive Power A Reactive Power B Reactive Power C Q (3P) Apparent Power A Apparent Power B Apparent Power C S (3P) Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C Power Factor(3P) Act Energy Exp Act Energy Imp React Energy Exp React Energy Imp Thermal Status Ph A Thermal Status Ph B Thermal Status Ph C Fault Records Event Records Waveform Records Vab Secondary Vbc Secondary Vca Secondary Vn Primary Vn Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_IT_TB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 96 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description Default Type 683 Vx Primary 684 Vx Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 I Phase A Max I Phase B Max I Phase C Max P 3P Max Q 3P Max Ig Max Isef Max Isef Primary Isef Secondary Isef Nominal Fault Distance Percent Fault Reactance Vy Primary Vy Secondary 701 Vz Primary 702 Vz Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 704 705 706 707 708 709 Vxy Primary Vyz Primary Vzx Primary Vxy Secondary Vyz Secondary Vzx Secondary M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 CB Total Trip Count CB Delta Trip Count CB Count To AR Block CB Frequent Ops Count CB LO Handle Ops Sag SIARFI Pole1 Sag SMARFI Pole1 Sag STARFI Pole1 Sag SIARFI Pole2 Sag SMARFI Pole2 Sag STARFI Pole2 Sag SIARFI Pole3 Sag SMARFI Pole3 Sag STARFI Pole3 Interrupt Pole1 Interrupt Pole2 Interrupt Pole3 Swell SIARFI Pole1 Swell SMARFI Pole1 Swell STARFI Pole1 Swell SIARFI Pole2 Swell SMARFI Pole2 Swell STARFI Pole2 Swell SIARFI Pole3 Swell SMARFI Pole3 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 97 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 749 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 Description Default Type Swell STARFI Pole3 Bus Freq Phase Diff Slip Freq Voltage Diff Ia Last Trip Ib Last Trip Ic Last Trip Va Last Trip Vb Last Trip Vc Last Trip In Last Trip Ig Last Trip Isef Last Trip CB Phase A Trip Count CB Phase B Trip Count CB Phase C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count Reset CB Phase A Trip Count 760 761 762 763 CB Ph A Trip Count CB Ph B Trip Count CB Ph C Trip Count CB E/F Trip Count M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 785 785 786 787 788 Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 27/59 PhA 27/59 PhB 27/59 PhC Vx 27/59 PhA Vx 27/59 PhB Vx 27/59 PhC CB Wear A CB Wear B CB Wear C CB Wear A Remaining CB Wear B Remaining CB Wear C Remaining CB Wear Minimum Fault Distance Per-unit 79 Last Trip Lockout A 79 Last Trip Lockout B 79 Last Trip Lockout C M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_EP_TD_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NB_1 M_ME_NC_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 757 Reset CB Phase B Trip Count 758 Reset CB Phase C Trip Count 759 Reset CB E/F Trip Count 801 Binary Inputs 1-8 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited M_BO_TB_1 Chapter 4 Page 98 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms IOA Description 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 Binary Inputs 9-16 Binary Inputs 17-24 Binary Inputs 25-32 Binary Outputs 1-8 Binary Outputs 9-16 Binary Outputs 17-24 Binary Outputs 25-32 Default Type M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 M_BO_TB_1 903 Trip-PhA 904 Trip-PhB 905 Trip-PhC M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 M_SP_TB_1 921 User SP Command 1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 M_SP_TB_1 C_SC_NA_1 922 User SP Command 2 923 User SP Command 3 924 User SP Command 4 925 User SP Command 5 926 User SP Command 6 927 User SP Command 7 928 User SP Command 8 929 User DP Command 1 930 User DP Command 2 931 User DP Command 3 932 User DP Command 4 933 User DP Command 5 934 User DP Command 6 935 User DP Command 7 936 User DP Command 8 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 99 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 7: IEC 61850 7.1 IEC 61850 POINTS IEC 61850 information can be found in the following documents: 1. Model Implementation Conformance Statement, 7SR224 MICS 2. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement, 7SR224 PICS 3. Protocol Implementation Extra Information for Testing, 7SR224 PIXIT (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 100 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 8: Modems The communications interface has been designed to allow data transfer via modems. However, IEC 60870-5-103 defines the data transfer protocol as an 11 bit format of 1 start, 1 stop, 8 data and even parity, which is a mode most commercial modems do not support. High performance modems will support this mode, but are expensive. For this reason, a parity setting is provided to allow use of easily available and relatively inexpensive commercial modems. This will result in a small reduction in data security and the system will not be compatible with true IEC 60870-5-103 control systems. 8.1.1 Connecting a Modem to the Relay(s) RS232C defines devices as being either Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) e.g. computers, or data Communications Equipment (DCE), e.g. modems, where one is designed to be connected to the other. In this case, two DCE devices (the modem and the fibre-optic converter) are being connected together, so a null terminal connector is required, which switches various control lines. The fibre-optic converter is then connected to the relay Network Tx to Relay Rx and Network Rx to Relay Tx. 8.1.2 Setting the Remote Modem The exact settings of the modem are dependent on the type of modem. Although most modems support the basic Hayes `AT' command format, different manufacturers use different commands for the same functions. In addition, some modems use DIP switches to set parameters, others are entirely software configured. Before applying settings, the modem's factory default settings should be applied, to ensure it is in a known state. Several factors must be considered to allow remote dialling to the relays. The first is that the modem at the remote end must be configured as auto answer. This will allow it to initiate communications with the relays. Next, the user should set the data configuration at the local port, i.e. baud rate and parity, so that communication will be at the same rate and format as that set on the relay and the error correction is disabled. Auto-answer usually requires two parameters to be set. The auto-answer setting should be switched on and the number of rings after which it will answer. The Data Terminal Ready (DTR) settings should be forced on. This tells the modem that the device connected to it is ready to receive data. The parameters of the modem's RS232C port are set to match those set on the relay, set baud rate and parity to be the same as the settings on the relay and number of data bits to be 8 and stop bits 1. Note, although the device may be able to communicate with the modem at say 19200 bps, the modem may only be able to transmit over the telephone lines at 14400 bps. Therefore, a baud rate setting on which the modem can transmit should be chosen. In this example, a baud rate of 9600 should be chosen. As the modems are required to be transparent, simply passing on the data sent from the controller to the device and vice versa, error correction and buffering is turned off. If possible, Data Carrier Detect (DCD) should be forced on, as this control line will be used by the Fibre-optic converter. Finally, these settings should be stored in the modem's memory for power on defaults. 8.1.3 Connecting to the Remote Modem Once the remote modem has been configured correctly, it should be possible to dial up the modem and make connection to the relay. As the settings on the remote modem are fixed the local modem should negotiate with it on connection, choosing suitable matching settings. If it cannot do this, the local modem should be set with settings equivalent to those of the remote modem as described above. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 101 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 9: Configuration The data points and control features which are possible within the relay is fixed and can be transmitted over the communication channel(s) protocols in the default format described earlier in this section. The default data transmitted is not always directly compatible with the needs of the substation control system and will require some tailoring, this can be done by the user with the Reydisp software comms editor tool. The Comms Editor is provided to allow its users to configure the Communications Files Protocols in Reyrolle brand Relays manufactured by Siemens Protection Devices Limited (SPDL). The editor supports configuring DNP3, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-101 and MODBUS protocols. The editor allows configuration files to be retrieved from the relay, edited, then uploaded back to the relay. Files may also be saved/loaded from disc to work offline. The protocols will be stored in a Reyrolle Protection Device Comms file (RPDC), which will be stored locally, so that the editor can be used when the relay is not connected. DNP3 The tool will allow: * Data Points to be enabled or disabled. * Changing the point numbers for the Binary Inputs, Binary Outputs and Analogue Inputs. * Changing their assigned class and variants for Object 10, 11 & 13 and specifying inclusion in a Class 0 poll. * Setting Binary points to be inverted before transmission. * Setting the Control Relay Output Block (CROB) commands that can be used with a Binary Output (Object 12). * Specifying a dead-band outside which Analogue Events will be generated. * Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission. IEC60870-5-103 The tool will allow: * Data Points to be enabled or disabled. * Changing the point numbers Function Type (FUN) and Information (INF), returned by each point. * Changing the text returned to Reydisp for display in its event viewer. IEC60870-5-101 The tool will allow: * Data Points to be enabled or disabled. * Changing the Information Object Address (IOA) and information type returned by each point. MODBUS-RTU Note, as MODBUS points are polled they do not need to be enabled or disabled. The tool will allow: * Changing the Addresses for the Coils, Inputs and Registers. * Changing the format of the instrument returned in a register, e.g. 16 or 32 bit. * Specifying a multiplier that will be applied to an analogue value before transmission. The user can check if the relay contains user configured communication files via a meter in the relay menus. Pressing the Enter and down arrow buttons on the fascia, then scrolling down, the number of files stored in the relay is displayed. The file name can also be viewed by pressing the Cancel and Test/Reset buttons together when in the relay Instruments menu. The user must ensure when naming the file, they use a unique file name including the version number. Please refer to the Comms Editor User Guide for further guidance. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 102 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms Section 10: Glossary Baud Rate Data transmission speed. Bit The smallest measure of computer data. Bits Per Second (bps) Measurement of data transmission speed. Data Bits A number of bits containing the data. Sent after the start bit. Data Echo When connecting relays in an optical ring architecture, the data must be passed from one relay to the next, therefore when connecting in this method all relays must have the Data Echo ON. Half-Duplex Asynchronous Communications Communications in two directions, but only one at a time. Hayes `AT' Modem command set developed by Hayes Microcomputer products, Inc. Line Idle Determines when the device is not communicating if the idle state transmits light. Modem MOdulator / DEModulator device for connecting computer equipment to a telephone line. Parity Method of error checking by counting the value of the bits in a sequence, and adding a parity bit to make the outcome, for example, even. Parity Bit Bit used for implementing parity checking. Sent after the data bits. RS232C Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 232, Revision C. RS485 Serial Communications Standard. Electronic Industries Association Recommended Standard Number 485. Start Bit Bit (logical 0) sent to signify the start of a byte during data transmission. Stop Bit Bit (logical 1) sent to signify the end USB Universal Serial Bus standard for the transfer of data. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 103 of 104 7SR224 Argus Data Comms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 4 Page 104 of 104 7SR224 Argus Installation 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2016/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First Issue 2008/11 Second Issue. Additional I/O connections added 2009/09 Third Issue. Core Balance CT arrangement & Comms options added. 2010/04 Fourth Issue. Check Synchronising added 2010/05 Fifth issue. Document reformat due to rebrand. 2012/09 Ethernet interface added 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/12 RS485 bus polarity note added 5.1. Software revisions moved to front of manual. IEC 61850 redundancy added 2016/11 Ethernet redundancy added to electrical interface (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 1 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Contents Section 1: Installation ......................................................................................................................................... 4 1.1 Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 4 1.2 Unpacking, Storage and Handling ...................................................................................................... 4 1.3 Recommended Mounting Position ...................................................................................................... 4 1.4 Wiring................................................................................................................................................ 4 1.5 Earthing ............................................................................................................................................ 4 1.6 Ancillary Equipment ........................................................................................................................... 4 1.7 Disposal ............................................................................................................................................ 5 1.8 Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer Circuits ............................................................ 5 1.9 Fibre Optic Communication ................................................................................................................ 5 1.10 Front Cover ....................................................................................................................................... 5 Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings ........................................................................................................... 6 2.1 Relay Dimensions and Weight............................................................................................................ 6 2.2 Fixings .............................................................................................................................................. 7 2.2.1 Crimps ................................................................................................................................. 7 2.2.2 Panel Fixings ....................................................................................................................... 7 Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings .................................................................................................................... 8 3.1 Case ................................................................................................................................................. 8 Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams ............................................................................................................ 11 4.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay.......................................................................... 11 4.2 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay ...................................................................... 13 Section 5: Data Comms Connections ............................................................................................................... 14 5.1 RS485 Connection........................................................................................................................... 14 5.2 RS232 Connections ......................................................................................................................... 15 5.3 IRIG-B Connections ......................................................................................................................... 15 5.4 Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections.................................................................................................. 15 5.5 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 .................................................................. 16 5.6 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850........................................................................................ 17 5.6.1 RSTP - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol ............................................................................... 18 5.6.2 PRP - Parallel Redundancy Protocol .................................................................................. 18 5.6.3 HSR - High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol ..................................................... 20 Section 6: Connection Diagrams ...................................................................................................................... 21 6.1 Typical A.C. Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser Control Relay .............................................. 21 6.2 Voltage Transformer Configurations ................................................................................................. 24 List of Figures Figure 2.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case ..................................................... 6 Figure 2.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case ..................................................... 7 Figure 3.1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.e. USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) ...................................... 8 Figure 3.1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS + IRIG-B ....................... 8 Figure 3.1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B.................................................. 9 Figure 3.1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B.................................................. 9 Figure 3.1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS ...................................................... 9 Figure 4.1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 .............................................................................................................. 11 Figure 4.1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 .................................................................... 12 Figure 4.2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224........................................................................................................... 13 Figure 5.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays ....................................................................... 14 Figure 5.4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network......................................... 15 Figure 5.4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using F.O. Ring Network ............................................................ 16 Figure 5.5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) ..................................................................... 16 Figure 5.5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) .................................................... 17 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 2 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Figure 6.1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit.................................................................................. 21 Figure 6.1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT ........................................................... 22 Figure 6.1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT .................................................. 23 Figure 6.2-1 7SR224 VT Connections .............................................................................................................. 24 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 3 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 1: Installation 1.1 Packaging Relays are supplied in packaging designed to mechanically protect them while in both transit and storage. This packaging should be recycled where systems exist, or disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. 1.2 Unpacking, Storage and Handling On receipt remove the relay from the container in which it was received and inspect it for obvious damage. It is recommended that the relay not be removed from its case. If damage has been sustained a claim should immediately be made against the carrier, also inform Siemens Protection Devices Limited, and the local Siemens agent, using the Defect Report Form in the Maintenance section of this manual. When not required for immediate use, the relay should be returned to its original carton and stored in a clean, dry place. The relay contains static sensitive devices, which are susceptible to damage due to static discharge. The relay's electronic circuits are protected from damage by static discharge when the relay is housed in its case. The relay element should not be withdrawn or reinserted into the relay case while auxiliary voltage is present. There can be no requirement to disassemble any relay, since there are no user serviceable parts in the relay. If any modules have been tampered with, then the guarantee will be invalidated. Siemens Protection Devices Limited reserves the right to charge for any subsequent repairs. 1.3 Recommended Mounting Position The relay uses a liquid crystal display (LCD) which is used in the programming and for operation. The LCD has a vertical viewing angle of 30 and is back-lit. However, the best viewing position is at eye level, and this is particularly important given its control features. The relay should be mounted on the circuit breaker (or protection panel) to allow the operator the best access to the relay functions 1.4 Wiring The product should be wired according to the scheme requirements, with reference to the appropriate wiring diagram. Refer to the appropriate Diagrams and Parameters document for a cross reference of wiring diagrams and models. Note that when the relay is powered-up for the first time, it is good practice to do so with the trip and control links removed. This limits potential damage caused by incorrect scheme wiring. 1.5 Earthing Terminal 28 of the PSU (Power Supply Unit) should be solidly earthed by a direct connection to the panel earth. The Relay case earth stud connection should be connected to terminal 28 of the PSU. It is normal practice to additionally 'daisy chain' together the case (safety) earths of all the Relays installed in a panel to prevent earth current loops posing a risk to personnel. 1.6 Ancillary Equipment The relay can be interrogated locally or remotely. For local interrogation a portable PC with suitable version of MS Windows (XP SP2, Windows 7-32bit or Windows7-64bit) and Reydisp Evolution or Reydisp Manager software (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 4 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation is required. The PC is normally locally connected to the front USB port of the relay but can be connected to other ports. 1.7 Disposal The Relay should be disposed of in a manner which does not provide a threat to health or the environment. All laws and regulations specific to the country of disposal should be adhered to. The relays and protection systems manufactured under the Reyrolle brand currently do not come within the scope of either the European WEEE or RoHS directives as they are equipment making up a fixed installation. 1.8 ! Equipment Operating Conditions Current Transformer Circuits The secondary circuit of a live CT must not be open circuited. Non-observance of this precaution can result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment ! 1.9 Fibre Optic Communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. 1.10 Front Cover ! The front cover provides additional securing of the relay element within the case. The relay cover should be in place during normal operating conditions. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 5 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 2: Dimensions and Panel Fixings 2.1 Relay Dimensions and Weight Relays are supplied in size E10 and E12 cases. The following drawing is available which gives panel cut-out and mounting details. Figure 2.1-1 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E10 Epsilon case 9.25 74.25 MINIMUM CLEARANCES: 178.25 243.25 260 177 SIDE VIEW Case Earth connection FRONT VIEW 75 mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR ETHERNET COMMS WIRING Typical when fitted 216.5 151.5 PANEL CUT-OUT 31 11 159 168 252.75 25mm FOR TERMINAL WIRING 45mm FOR ETHERNET COMMS MODULE 70mm FOR F/O COMMS CABLE Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note) Optional ethernet comms module Case Earth connection TOP VIEW See note 2 FRONT TOP VIEW NOTES: 1. THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT). 2. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO ETHERNET VERSION RETAINING SCREW WHICH MUST BE REMOVED TO ALLOW RELAY MODULE TO BE WITHDRAWN. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 6 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Figure 2.1-2 Overall Dimensions and panel Drilling for Size E12 Epsilon case SIDE VIEW 9.25 100.25 204.25 295.25 MINIMUM CLEARANCES: 25mm FOR TERMINAL WIRING 45mm FOR ETHERNET COMMS MODULE 70mm FOR F/O COMMS CABLE Case Earth connection 311.5 177 Typical when fitted 216.5 FRONT VIEW 75 mm MIN CLEARANCE FOR ETHERNET COMMS WIRING 159 168 PANEL CUT-OUT 31 151.5 11 304.5 Diameter 3.6 - 8 holes (see note) Optional ethernet comms module Case Earth connection TOP VIEW See note 2 FRONT TOP VIEW NOTE: 1. THE 3.6 HOLES ARE FOR M4 THREAD FORMING (TRILOBULAR) SCREWS. THESE ARE SUPPLIED AS STANDARD AND ARE SUITABLE FOR USE IN FERROUS / ALUMINIUM PANELS 1.6mm THICK AND ABOVE. FOR OTHER PANELS, HOLES TO BE M4 CLEARANCE (TYPICALLY 4.5 DIAMETER) AND RELAYS MOUNTED USING M4 MACHINE SCREWS, NUTS AND LOCKWASHERS (SUPPLIED IN PANEL FIXING KIT). 2. ADDITIONAL CLEARANCE REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO ETHERNET VERSION RETAINING SCREW WHICH MUST BE REMOVED TO ALLOW RELAY MODULE TO BE WITHDRAWN. 2.2 2.2.1 Fixings Crimps M4 Ring tongued crimps with 90 bend are recommended for connection to the standard M4 terminal screws including the standard RS485 port connections. 2.2.2 Panel Fixings Typical mounting screw kit per Relay) Consists of 8 off M4x10mm Screws 8 off M4 Nuts 8 off M4 Lock Washer Typical rear terminal block fixing kit (1kit per terminal block fitted to relay) Consists of: 28 x M4, 8mm Screws 28 x M4 Lock Washer (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 7 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 3: Rear Terminal Drawings 3.1 Case Figure 3.1-1 E10 STANDARD COMMS i.e. USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) Figure 3.1-2 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL SERIAL FIBRE OPTIC PORTS + IRIG-B i.e.:- USB FRONT PORT, RS485 (SEE NOTE 2) IRIG B, 2 X Serial F.O. (S.T. CONNECTORS) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 8 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Figure 3.1-3 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS485 PORT + IRIG-B Figure 3.1-4 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL RS232 PORT + IRIG-B Figure 3.1-5 E10 STANDARD COMMS + ADDITIONAL ETHERNET PORTS (RJ45 shown, Fibre optic LC similar) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 9 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Notes 1) RECOMMENDED TERMINATIONS ARE PRE-INSULATED & MUST BE CRIMPED USING APPROVED TOOLING. 2) RS485 (BLOCK"B"TERMS 14, 16, 18, 20) CONNECTIONS TO THIS COMMUNICATION FACILITY IS BY SCREENED, TWISTED PAIR CABLE. CABLE SHOULD BE RS485 COMPLIANT. ON SITE WHEN WIRING OTHER FACILITIES ENSURE THAT THESE TERMINALS AND OTHER COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES ARE NOT OBSCURED BY OTHER WIRING RUNS. 3) REQUIRED CLEARANCES FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN ABOVE IN 2.1 RELAY DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT. (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 10 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 4: Connection/Wiring/Diagrams 4.1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 22 24 28 7SR224 +ve -ve BI 4 BO 7 BI 5 BO 8 +ve -ve +ve BI 6 BO 9 BI 7 BO 10 +ve +ve BI 8 6 8 10 12 +ve BI 10 1 BI 13 -ve 15 BO 12 19 BO 13 23 BO 14 25 D C B A (Optional) I/O I/O PSU Analogue 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 Rear View Arrangement of terminals and modules NOTES Binary Input Binary Output C 1 BO 1 3 5 +ve 11 BO 3 +ve BI 2 -ve 13 15 +ve BO 4 BI 3 -ve 7 9 BI 1 -ve 17 19 BO 5 21 23 BO 6 27 25 B 26 Alternative Voltage Input Connections for 6VT Models. Note re-allocation of Terminals 1A 2 5A VL1 (VA) IL1 (IA) 4 1A 6 5A IL2 (IB) 8 VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 22 17 18 VL2 (VB) 19 VL3 (VC) 21 V4 (VX) 23 V5 (VY) 25 20 22 1A 10 5A IL3 (IC) 12 VL3 (VC) 1A 14 16 Data Comms (Optional) Shows contacts internal to relay case assembly. Contacts close when the relay chassis is withdrawn from case GND. Term. 15 2 E BI = BO = VAUX -ve 20 13 1 13 27 +ve B 11 2 BI 12 Screen 9 1 2 (Optional) I/O +ve 18 7 1 +ve 16 5 2 11 BI 11 A 3 7 9 +ve 14 1 2 21 BI 9 RS485 4 5 17 BO 2 2 1 3 BO 11 +ve -ve 1 5A I4 (IG/ISEF) A V4 (VX) 24 25 26 27 28 A V6 (VZ) 24 26 27 28 Figure 4.1-1 Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 11 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Optional Additional I/O for (23 Inputs 22 Outputs) and (33 Inputs 30 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve BI 14 1 BO 15 3 +ve -ve BI 15 5 BO 16 7 +ve BI 16 9 BO 17 11 +ve BI 17 13 BO 18 15 +ve BI 18 BO 19 BI 19 BO 20 21 BO 21 23 17 19 +ve -ve +ve BI 20 25 BO 22 +ve 27 BI 21 +ve 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 BI 22 +ve -ve 2 BI 23 26 D 28 +ve -ve BI 24 1 BO 23 3 +ve -ve BI 25 5 BO 24 7 +ve BI 26 9 BO 25 11 +ve BI 27 13 BO 26 15 +ve BI 28 BO 27 BI 29 BO 28 17 19 +ve -ve 21 BO 29 +ve 23 BI 30 25 BO 30 +ve 27 BI 31 +ve BI 32 +ve -ve BI 33 E Optional Additional I/O for (33 Inputs 14 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve +ve BI 14 BI 24 +ve -ve +ve BI 15 BI 25 +ve BI 16 BI 26 BI 17 BI 27 BI 18 BI 28 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve BI 19 BI 29 +ve -ve +ve BI 20 BI 30 BI 21 BI 31 BI 22 BI 32 +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve -ve +ve +ve -ve -ve +ve +ve BI 23 BI 33 D -ve 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Optional Additional I/O for (43 Inputs 22 Outputs) Models 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 +ve -ve BI 14 BO 15 +ve -ve BI 15 BO 16 +ve BI 16 BO 17 +ve BI 17 BO 18 +ve BO 19 BI 18 3 5 7 9 BO 20 BI 19 BO 21 +ve BI 20 4 6 8 10 11 13 12 15 17 21 23 25 BO 22 +ve 14 18 20 22 +ve 24 BI 22 +ve BI 23 16 27 BI 21 -ve 2 19 +ve -ve 1 D 26 28 +ve +ve -ve BI 24 BI 34 +ve +ve -ve BI 25 BI 35 BI 26 BI 36 BI 27 BI 37 BI 28 BI 38 BI 29 BI 39 BI 30 BI 40 BI 31 BI 41 +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve -ve +ve +ve +ve +ve +ve BI 42 BI 32 +ve -ve -ve +ve +ve -ve -ve BI 33 E BI 43 +ve +ve -ve 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 Figure 4.1-2 Additional Inputs & Outputs Wiring Diagram: 7SR224 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 12 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Interface Diagram: 7SR224 Recloser Controller Relay 2 4 6 8 Aux. Sw. `b' Aux. Sw. `a' CB Lockout Relay BI CB Open Relay BI CB Closed Relay BI CB Lockout 10 12 14 16 Actuator PB - Close PB - Trip Sw. - Hot Line Working 18 Relay BI Close Relay BI Trip Relay BI Hot Line Working 20 22 24 26 Panel 28 22 24 28 Switch Unit Driver & Monitoring 2 4 6 Relay BI Capmon 2 8 10 Relay BI Reclose Block -ve BI 4 BO 7 BI 5 BO 8 BI 6 BO 9 BI 7 BO 10 +ve -ve +ve +ve +ve BI 8 12 BI 9 9 11 13 15 BO 12 19 BI 10 BO 13 23 BO 14 25 Relay BO Trip Close Coil Relay BO Close Actuator 27 BI 11 +ve BI 12 +ve BI 13 -ve C 1 +ve BO 1 VAUX -ve 3 GND. 5 +ve BO 3 +ve BI 2 -ve Screen 18 B 20 Term. 11 Relay BO Battery Test Relay BO Battery Load Test Relay BO Capacitor Test Active BI 3 BO 4 BO 5 13 BO 6 17 19 21 23 27 25 B Alternative Voltage Input Connections for 6VT Models. Note re-allocation of Terminals 26 1A 2 5A IL1 (IA) 6 5A IL2 (IB) VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 8 9 1A 10 11 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 VL1 (VA) 17 VL2 (VB) 19 VL3 (VC) 21 V4 (VX) 23 V5 (VY) 25 18 20 1A 5A 16 I4 (IG) A V4 (VX) 24 26 27 28 VOLTAGE INPUTS CURRENT INPUTS 4 7 Switch Unit Driver & Monitoring 15 +ve -ve 7 9 BI 1 -ve 16 5 Trip Coil +ve A 3 7 21 +ve 14 1 5 17 +ve -ve 1 3 BO 11 BO 2 Relay BI External Power Good Relay BI Capmon 1 7SR224 +ve RS485 4.2 V6 (VZ) 22 24 26 27 28 A Figure 4.2-1 Interface Diagram: 7SR224 (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 13 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 5: Data Comms Connections 5.1 RS485 Connection The RS485 communication port is located on the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS485 120 screened twisted pair cable. The RS485 electrical connection can be used in a single or multi-drop configuration. The RS485 master must support and use the Auto Device Enable (ADE) feature. The last device in the connection must be terminated correctly in accordance with the master driving the connection. A terminating resistor is fitted in each relay, when required this is connected in circuit using an external wire loop between terminals 18 and 20 of the power supply module. The polarity of the signal terminals is marked as A and B in line with the RS485 standard. The polarity is that when the bus is in the quiescent state and no communication is taking place, the B terminal is more positive than A. This can be used to identify the polarity of any equipment to be connected, typically measured at each terminal in turn to ground. Connection of the device to a termination network at the end of the bus will also be to suit the quiescent state as shown below. The polarity marking is often found to be reversed or marked as +/- on other equipment so care is required. If the devices are connected in reverse, communication to all devices will be disturbed but no damage will occur. If problems are experienced during commissioning, the connections should be tried in reverse. Up to 64 relays can be connected to the RS485 bus. The RS485 data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case. The relay is available with an additional RS485 port as an ordering option. The terminal arrangement for this port are shown in Section 3: of this document. Connections shown below are duplicated on these ports to provide a separate, parallel, interface. Ext Wire loop to Include line terminating Res To Control System 14 16 18 14 16 18 Rear terminals 14 16 18 20 RS485 Screened twisted pair RS485 Screened twisted pair To Control System Rear terminals RS485 Twisted pair screened cable 14 B GND A Term. 16 20 A 18 14 Term. B 20 A GND 14 B GND 16 16 18 18 20 Bus Termination Polarity 5V Term. B RS485 RS485 RS485 A GND Figure 5.1-1 RS485 Data Comms Connections Between Relays (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 14 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation 5.2 RS232 Connections The additional (optional) RS232 (9 pin plug) (DTE) communication port is located at the rear of the relay and can be connected using a suitable RS232 cable. Pinout is shown in the table below. RTR/RTS and CTS pins are connected together but Hardware Flow Control and RTS/CTS Handshaking are not provided. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Relay Function Not Connected Receive Data (RXD) Transmit Data (TXD) Input Supply +5 V Signal Ground (GND) Input Supply +5 V Linked to 8 (volts free) Linked to 7 (volts free) Output Supply +5 V 50mA Where there is a requirement for multi-drop RS232 connection, a suitable device to facilitate this should be obtained. 5.3 IRIG-B Connections A BNC plug is provided to connect a co-axial cable carrying IRIG-B time synchronisation signals. Ensure that the stub length is minimised by connecting the tee-connector directly to the rear of the relay. A suitable co-axial cable would be type RG 58 50ohms. 5.4 Fibre Optic Serial Port Connections Rear Serial Com ports 3 and 4 comprise Fibre-Optic STTM (BFOC/2.5) bayonet connectors-4 per product. 62.5 / 125m glass fibre is recommended for all distances. When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres' bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable. To Control System Serial Hub Tx Master Rx Rx Rx Tx Tx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer or Control System RS232 straight through cable 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62.5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 5.4-1 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using Sigma 1 and F.O. Star Network (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 15 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Rx Rx Tx Tx RS232/F.O. Converter USB or 9 pin male D connector Laptop computer or Control System RS 232 straight through cable 25 pin male D connector Tx Rx Rx Tx 62 .5/125m fibre optic with ST connectors Figure 5.4-2 Data Comms to Multiple Devices Using F.O. Ring Network The fibre optic data comms link will be broken if the relay element is withdrawn from the case. 5.5 Additional (Optional) Ethernet Connection for IEC 61850 Rear Ethernet Comms port Ch 1 and Ch 2 comprises Fibre-Optic Duplex LC connectors or electrical RJ45 connectors. When installing fibre, ensure that the fibres' bend radii comply with the recommended minimum for the fibre usedtypically 50mm is acceptable, 62.5 / 125m glass fibre is recommended for all distances. Figure 5.5-1 Ethernet connection for IEC 61850 (star connection) (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 16 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation To Control System Switch Input Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch n Ch 1 Ch 2 62.5/125m fibre optic with Duplex LC connectors or RJ45 electrical connectors Figure 5.5-2 Ethernet connection for Fibre Optic IEC 61850 (ring connection) 5.6 Ethernet Network Redundancy IEC 61850 The EN100+ module is used on current Reyrolle devices (from 7SR224 hardware /EE) to provide Ethernet/IEC61850 functionality and supports RSTP, PRP and HSR redundancy protocols. Earlier 7SR224 (/DD) devices were manufactured with the EN100 (not EN100+) module and the electrical version cannot support redundancy. The optical version can support PRP and HSR redundancy if firmware is updated to version 4.2 or later and FPGA is updated to version 515 or later. Earlier 7SR224 devices do not support the EN100+ module and cannot be updated by simply exchanging the EN100 module. All current 7SR224 IEC61850 variants are delivered with the EN100+ (Plus) module and firmware 4.24 or later. The EN100 module firmware and FPGA can be updated by connecting to the relay via the rear Ethernet port. For more information on connecting to the relay via the Ethernet port, please see the Reydisp Manager Userguide or the Guidance Note available from the product website. Depending on the EN100 module type and Firmware version, the following protocol options are available, Interface Type Electrical RJ45 EN100+ Optical EN100+ Electrical RJ45 EN100+ Optical EN100+ Electrical RJ45 EN100 Optical EN100 Electrical RJ45 EN100 Optical EN100 EN100 Firmware 4.21and later 4.21and later 4.08 or earlier 4.08 or earlier 4.21and later 4.21and later 4.08 or earlier 4.08 or earlier Line Mode RSTP Switch Mode OSM PRP HSR Table 1: EN100 Redundancy availability (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 17 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation 5.6.1 RSTP - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a redundancy protocol with a minimal response time that has been standardized in IEEE-802.1D (2004). The reconfiguration time depend on the topology and start at 50ms. RSTP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide). Network rings with up to 30 devices is possible. Figure: 5.6-1 RSTP Ethernet Network Ring Configuration 5.6.2 PRP - Parallel Redundancy Protocol The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network, as is the case for RSTP. PRP need to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager userguide). (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 18 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Figure: 5.6-2 PRP Ethernet Network Configuration (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 19 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation 5.6.3 HSR - High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol The HSR redundancy protocol according to the IEC 62439-3 standard is based on double transmission of message frames over ring-topology networks in both directions. In the case of an error, the message frame will be transmitted without any delay. No reconfiguration time is necessary for the network. HSR needs to be enabled on the device within Reydisp Manager (See Reydisp Manager user guide). Network rings with up to 50 devices is possible. Figure: 5.6-3 HSR Ethernet Network Ring Configuration (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 20 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation Section 6: Connection Diagrams 6.1 Typical A.C. Connections: 7SR224 DOC/DEF Recloser Control Relay L1 L2 L3 P1 1 1A 2 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 8 9 1A 10 11 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 5A 16 I4 (IG/ISEF) V4 (VX) A 24 26 27 28 B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap - use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs. 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only. 3) Line side Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn 4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1, L2 & L3. 5) Bus side Voltage Config:- for optional Synchronising function. Vbn shown, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc, or Vca can be used. Figure 6.1-1 Typical 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 21 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation L1 L2 L3 P1 1 1A 2 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) VL1 (VA) 21 VL2 (VB) 23 VL3 (VC) 25 22 8 9 1A 10 Core Balance CT 11 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 5A 16 I4 (IG/ISEF) V4 (VX) A 24 26 27 28 B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap - use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs. 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only. 3) Phase Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn 4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1, L2 & L3. 5) Bus voltage connections for optional Check Synchronising feature are not shown. Figure 6.1-2 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with Core Balance CT (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 22 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation L1 L2 L3 1 1A 2 P1 3 S1 4 S2 5 5A 1A 6 P2 7 VL4 (VX) IL1 (IA) 5A IL2 (IB) 8 9 5A IL3 (IC) 12 13 1A 14 15 18 VL5 (VY) 19 VL6 (VZ) 21 VL1 (VA) 23 VL2 (VB) 25 VL3 (VC) 27 20 22 1A 10 11 17 5A I4 (IG/ISEF) 16 24 26 28 A B C NOTES 1) CT circuits are shown connected to 1A tap - use alternative tap for 5A rated CTs. 2) CT and Earth connections are typical only. 3) Voltage Config:-Van,Vbn,Vcn is shown. 4) Allocation of A,B,C phase references can be adjusted by user settings to suit actual connections of L1/L4, L2/L5 & L3/L6. Figure 6.1-3 7SR224 Connections to OHL Circuit with 3 phase supply side VT (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 23 of 24 7SR224 Argus Installation 6.2 Voltage Transformer Configurations Relay Voltage Configuration Setting Van, Vbn, Vcn Description Connection 67 & 67N & 67G 47, 27/59 & 81 Phase - Neutral Phase - Phase Calculated NPS ZPS Va A21 A22 Vb A23 A24 A B C Vc A25 A26 Va, Vb, Vc 67 67N (NPS polarising) 47, 27/59 & 81 Phase - Phase Calculated NPS Va A21 A22 Vb A23 A24 A B C Vc A25 A26 Vab, Vbc, 3V0 67 & 67N & 67G 47, 59N, 27/59 & 81 Phase - Neutral Calculated Phase - Phase Phase Vca Calculated NPS ZPS Va A21 A22 Vb A23 Vc A B C Dn Da A24 A25 A26 Figure 6.2-1 7SR224 VT Connections (c)2016 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 5 Page 24 of 24 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2009/09 Third issue 2010/04 Fourth issue 2010/05 Fifth issue. Document reformatted due to rebrand. 2012/09 Eighth Issue. Addition of IEC 61850 communication protocol. 2012/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2013/12 Addition of Software version only, no changes to contents 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Contents Section 1: Common Functions .........................................................................................................5 1.1 Overview..............................................................................................................................5 1.2 Before Testing......................................................................................................................5 1.2.1 Safety ......................................................................................................................5 1.2.2 Sequence of Tests ...................................................................................................5 1.2.3 Test Equipment........................................................................................................6 1.2.4 Precautions..............................................................................................................6 1.2.5 Applying Settings .....................................................................................................6 1.3 Tests ....................................................................................................................................8 1.3.1 Inspection ................................................................................................................8 1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests ........................................................................................8 1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests.............................................................................................8 1.3.4 Putting into Service ..................................................................................................8 1.4 AC Energising Quantities .....................................................................................................9 1.5 Binary Inputs ...................................................................................................................... 10 1.6 Binary Outputs ................................................................................................................... 11 1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts............................................................................................ 12 Section 2: Protection Functions..................................................................................................... 13 2.1 Phase Directional Polarity Check........................................................................................ 14 2.1.1 2 out of 3 logic ....................................................................................................... 16 2.2 Phase Overcurrent (67/50,67/51) ....................................................................................... 16 2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) ............................................................................ 17 2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) ............................................................................. 17 2.3 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) ................................................................................. 19 2.4 Cold Load (51C) ................................................................................................................. 21 2.4.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C) ........................................................................... 22 2.5 Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N) ....................................................................... 24 2.6 Measured Earth fault (67/50G,67/51G) ............................................................................... 25 2.6.1 Directional Polarity ................................................................................................. 26 2.6.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (67/50G)..................................................................... 26 2.6.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G) ...................................................................... 26 2.7 Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S,67/51S) ................................................................................. 29 2.7.1 Directional Polarity ................................................................................................. 30 2.7.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (50SEF) ..................................................................... 30 2.7.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF)....................................................................... 30 2.8 Restricted Earth fault (64H) .............................................................................................. 33 2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS)................................................................ 35 2.9.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) ............................................................... 36 2.9.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) .................................................................. 36 2.10 Undercurrent (37) ............................................................................................................. 38 2.11 Thermal Overload (49) ....................................................................................................... 40 2.12 Over/Under Voltage............................................................................................................ 42 2.12.1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59) ....................................................................... 42 2.12.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) ........................................................................... 44 2.12.3 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59) ................................................ 45 2.12.4 Vx Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59) ................................................ 46 2.13 NPS Overvoltage (47) ........................................................................................................ 48 2.14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N).................................................................................................. 50 2.14.1 Definite Time (59NDT) ........................................................................................... 50 2.14.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) ............................................................................................. 51 2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) ................................................................................................ 52 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 2 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 3: Supervision Functions .................................................................................................. 54 3.1 CB Fail (50BF) .................................................................................................................. 54 3.2 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS)........................................................................ 56 3.2.1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail ............................................................................................... 56 3.2.2 3 Phase VT fail ...................................................................................................... 57 3.3 Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus) .................................................... 58 3.4 3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X) ................................................... 59 3.4.1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail ............................................................................................... 59 3.4.2 3 Phase VT fail ...................................................................................................... 60 3.5 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS)........................................................................ 61 3.6 Broken Conductor (46BC) ................................................................................................ 63 3.7 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ...................................................................................... 65 3.8 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ............................................................................. 66 Section 4: Control & Logic Functions ............................................................................................ 67 4.1 Autoreclose (79) ................................................................................................................. 67 4.2 Synchronising .................................................................................................................... 67 4.3 Live/Dead........................................................................................................................... 68 4.4 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function............................................................... 69 4.5 Quick Logic ........................................................................................................................ 69 Section 5: Testing and Maintenance .............................................................................................. 70 5.1 Periodic Tests .................................................................................................................... 70 5.2 Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 70 5.3 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................. 71 Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions........................................................................... 72 6.1 General .............................................................................................................................. 72 6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site ............................................................... 72 6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded .......................................................... 72 6.2.2 Overall Software Information .................................................................................. 72 6.2.3 Product Configuration Information .......................................................................... 72 6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software........................................... 73 6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front usb port ................................................................... 73 6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems ........................................................................ 73 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 3 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide List of Figures Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles ......................................................... 15 Phase Overcurrent ........................................................................................................ 16 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent ..................................................................................... 19 Cold Load ..................................................................................................................... 21 Cold Load Logic diagram ............................................................................................... 22 Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles ........................................................... 24 Measured Earth Fault .................................................................................................... 25 Sensitive Earth Fault ..................................................................................................... 29 Restricted Earth Fault.................................................................................................... 33 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent ......................................................................... 35 Undercurrent ................................................................................................................. 38 Thermal Overload.......................................................................................................... 40 Phase Under/Over Voltage ............................................................................................ 42 Vx Under/Over Voltage.................................................................................................. 45 Vx Under/Over Voltage.................................................................................................. 46 NPS Overvoltage .......................................................................................................... 48 Neutral Overvoltage ...................................................................................................... 50 Under/Over Frequency .................................................................................................. 52 CB Fail .......................................................................................................................... 54 Voltage Transformer Supervision................................................................................... 56 Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail ...................................................................... 58 3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision ................................................................. 59 Current Transformer Supervision ................................................................................... 61 Broken Conductor ......................................................................................................... 63 Trip Circuit Supervision ................................................................................................. 65 Magnetising Inrush Detector .......................................................................................... 66 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 4 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 Overview Commissioning tests are carried out to prove: a) Equipment has not been damaged in transit. b) Equipment has been correctly connected and installed. c) Prove characteristics of the protection and settings which are based on calculations. d) Confirm that settings have been correctly applied. e) To obtain a set of test results for future reference. 1.2 1.2.1 Before Testing Safety The commissioning and maintenance of this equipment should only be carried out by skilled personnel trained in protective relay maintenance and capable of observing all the safety precautions and regulations appropriate to this type of equipment and also the associated primary plant. Ensure that all test equipment and leads have been correctly maintained and are in good condition. It is recommended that all power supplies to test equipment be connected via a Residual Current Device (RCD), which should be located as close to the supply source as possible. The choice of test instrument and test leads must be appropriate to the application. Fused instrument leads should be used when measurements of power sources are involved, since the selection of an inappropriate range on a multi-range instrument could lead to a dangerous flashover. Fused test leads should not be used where the measurement of a current transformer (C.T.) secondary current is involved, the failure or blowing of an instrument fuse or the operation of an instrument cut-out could cause the secondary winding of the C.T. to become an open circuit. Open circuit secondary windings on energised current transformers are a hazard that can produce high voltages dangerous to personnel and damaging to equipment, test procedures must be devised so as to eliminate this risk. 1.2.2 Sequence of Tests If other equipment is to be tested at the same time, then such testing must be co-ordinated to avoid danger to personnel and equipment. When cabling and wiring is complete, a comprehensive check of all terminations for tightness and compliance with the approved diagrams must be carried out. This can then be followed by the insulation resistance tests, which if satisfactory allows the wiring to be energised by either the appropriate supply or test supplies. When primary injection tests are completed satisfactorily, all remaining systems can be functionally tested before the primary circuit is energised. Some circuits may require further tests before being put on load. Protection relay testing will require access to the protection system wiring diagrams, relay configuration information and protection settings. The following sequence of tests is loosely based on the arrangement of the relay menu structure. A test log based on the actual tests completed should be recorded for each relay tested. A typical example of this Site Test Sheet is included. The `Description of Operation' section of this manual provides detailed information regarding the operation of each function of the relay. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 5 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.2.3 Test Equipment Required test equipment is: 1. Secondary injection equipment with integral time interval meter The secondary injection equipment should be appropriate to the protection functions to be tested 2. Primary injection equipment 3. A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. auxiliary supply rating 4. A d.c. supply with nominal voltage within the working range of the relay's d.c. binary input rating 5. Other equipment as appropriate to the protection being commissioned - this will be specified in the product specific documentation. Additional equipment for general tests and for testing the communications channel is: 6. Portable PC with appropriate interface equipment. 7. Printer to operate from the above PC (Optional). USE OF PC TO FACILITATE TESTING The functions of Reydisp Evolution (see Section 2: Settings and Instruments) can be used during the commissioning tests to assist with test procedures or to provide documentation recording the test and test parameters. One method is to clear both the waveform and event records before each test is started, then, after the test upload from the relay the settings, events and waveform files generated as a result of application of the test. These can then be saved off to retain a comprehensive record of that test. Relay settings files can be prepared on the PC (offline) or on the relay before testing commences. These settings should be saved for reference and compared with the settings at the end of testing to check that errors have not been introduced during testing and that any temporary changes to settings to suit the test process are returned to the required service state. A copy of the Relay Settings as a Rich Text Format (.rtf) file suitable for printing or for record purposes can be produced from Reydisp as follows. From the File menu select Save As, change the file type to Export Default/Actual Setting (.RTF) and input a suitable filename. When testing is completed the event and waveform records should be cleared and the settings file checked to ensure that the required in-service settings are being applied. 1.2.4 Precautions Before electrical testing commences the equipment should be isolated from the current and voltage transformers. The current transformers should be short-circuited in line with the local site procedure. The tripping and alarm circuits should also be isolated where practical. The provision and use of secondary injection test sockets on the panel simplifies the isolation and test procedure. Ensure that the correct auxiliary supply voltage and polarity is applied. See the relevant scheme diagrams for the relay connections. Check that the nominal secondary current rating of the current and voltage transformers has been correctly set in the System Config. menu of the relay. 1.2.5 Applying Settings The relay settings for the particular application should be applied before any secondary testing occurs. If they are not available then the relay has default settings that can be used for pre-commissioning tests. See the Relay Settings section of this manual for the default settings. Note that the tripping and alarm contacts for any function must be programmed correctly before any scheme tests are carried out. Relays feature multiple settings groups, only one of which is active at a time. In applications where more than one settings group is to be used it may be necessary to test the relay in more than one configuration. Note. One group may be used as a `Test' group to hold test-only settings that can be used for regular maintenance testing, eliminating the need for the Test Engineer to interfere with the actual in-service settings in the normally active group. This Test group may also be used for functional testing where it is necessary to disable or change settings to facilitate testing. When using settings groups it is important to remember that the relay need not necessarily be operating according to the settings that are currently being displayed. There is an `active settings group' on which the relay operates and an `edit/view settings group' which is visible on the display and which can be altered. This allows the (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 6 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide settings in one group to be altered from the relay fascia while the protection continues to operate on a different unaffected group. The `Active Settings Group' and the `Edit Settings Group' are selected in the `System Configuration Menu'. The currently Active Group and the group currently Viewed are shown at the top of the display in the Settings display screen. If the View Group is not shown at the top of the display, this indicates that the setting is common to all groups. CT/VT ratio, I/O mapping and other settings which are directly related to hardware are common to all groups. If the relay is allowed to trip during testing then the instruments display will be interrupted and replaced by the `Trip Alert' screen which displays fault data information. If this normal operation interferes with testing then this function can be temporarily disabled for the duration of testing by use of the Trip Alert Enabled/Disabled setting in the System Config Menu. After applying a settings change to the relay, which may involve a change to the indication and output contacts, the TEST/RESET key should be pressed to ensure any existing indication and output is correctly cleared. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 7 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.3 Tests 1.3.1 Inspection Ensure that all connections are tight and correct to the relay wiring diagram and the scheme diagram. Record any deviations. Check that the relay is correctly programmed and that it is fully inserted into the case. Refer to `Section 2: Settings and Instruments' for information on programming the relay. 1.3.2 Secondary Injection Tests Select the required relay configuration and settings for the application. Isolate the auxiliary D.C. supplies for alarm and tripping from the relay and remove the trip and intertrip links. Carry out injection tests for each relay function, as described in this document For all high current tests it must be ensured that the test equipment has the required rating and stability and that the relay is not stressed beyond its thermal limit. 1.3.3 Primary Injection Tests Primary injection tests are essential to check the ratio and polarity of the transformers as well as the secondary wiring. Note. If the current transformers associated with the protection are located in power transformer bushings it may not be possible to apply test connections between the current transformer and the power transformer windings. Primary injection is needed, however, to verify the polarity of the CTs. In these circumstances primary current must be injected through the associated power transformer winding. It may be necessary to short circuit another winding in order to allow current to flow. During these primary injection tests the injected current is likely to be small due to the impedance of the transformer. 1.3.4 Putting into Service After tests have been performed satisfactorily the relay should be put back into service as follows:Remove all test connections. Replace all secondary circuit fuses and links, or close m.c.b. Ensure the Protection Healthy LED is on, steady, and that all LED indications are correct. If necessary press CANCEL until the Relay Identifier screen is displayed, then press TEST/RESET to reset the indication LEDs. The relay meters should be checked in Instruments Mode with the relay on load The relay settings should be downloaded to a computer and a printout of the settings produced. The installed settings should then be compared against the required settings supplied before testing began. Automated setting comparison can be carried out by Reydisp using the Compare Settings Groups function in the Edit menu. Any modified settings will be clearly highlighted. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 8 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.4 AC Energising Quantities Voltage and current measurement for each input channel is displayed in the Instrumentation Mode sub-menus, each input should be checked for correct connection and measurement accuracy by single phase secondary injection at nominal levels. Ensure that the correct instrument displays the applied signal within limits of the Performance Specification. Phase references A, B & C are allocated to the hardware inputs by user configurable settings. This allows the 7SR224 to be wired to the primary CT and VT without prior knowledge of the customers preference for phase letter allocation. Current and voltage injection test wiring connections must be adjusted to suit in order that phases are indicated correctly. Applied Current........................ IA IB IC IG Applied Voltage..................... ISEF VA/VAB VB/VBC VC/VCB VX Secondary Primary Apply 3P balanced Current and Voltage at nominal levels and ensure that the measured Zero Phase Sequence and Negative Phase Sequence quantities are approximately zero. Phase rotation sequence is adjustable by user setting. Test equipment must be set to reflect this setting to provide correct results for directional protection and any feature which uses positive and negative phase sequence components. ZPS NPS Voltage Current (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 9 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.5 Binary Inputs The operation of the binary input(s) can be monitored on the `Binary Input Meters' display shown in `Instruments Mode'. Apply the required supply voltage onto each binary input in turn and check for correct operation. Depending on the application, each binary input may be programmed to perform a specific function; each binary should be checked to prove that its mapping and functionality is as set as part of the Scheme Operation tests. Where the pick-up timers associated with a binary input are set these delays should be checked either as part of the scheme logic or individually. To check a binary pick-up time delay, temporarily map the binary to an output relay that has a normally open contact. This can be achieved in the Output Matrix sub-menu by utilising the BI n Operated settings. Use an external timer to measure the interval between binary energisation and closure of the output contacts. Similarly, to measure the drop-off delay, map to an output relay that has a normally closed contact, time the interval between binary de-energisation and closure of the output contacts. Note. The time measured will include an additional delay, typically less than 20ms, due to the response time of the binary input hardware, software processing time and the operate time of the output relay. BI Tested DO Delay Measured PU Delay Measured Notes (method of initiation) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 10 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.6 Binary Outputs A minimum of six output relays are provided. Two of these have change over contacts, BO2 & BO3, one has a normally closed contact, BO1 and the remainder have normally open contacts. Care should be observed with regard to connected devices when forcing contacts to operate for test purposes. Short duration energisation can cause contact failure due to exceeding the break capacity when connected to inductive load such as electrically reset trip relays. Close each output relay in turn from the Reydisp Evolution PC programme, Relay - Control - Close output relay. This function will energise the output for its minimum operate time. This time is specified in the Output Config Binary Output Config menu for each output relay and may be too short to measure with a continuity tester. An alternative method of energising an output permanently so that wiring can be checked is to temporarily map the relay being tested to the `Protection Healthy' signal in the Output Matrix, as this signal is permanently energised the mapped relay will be held energised, normally open contacts will be closed and vice versa. BO Checked Notes (method of test) 1NC 2NO 2NC 3NO 3NC 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 11 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 1.7 Relay Case Shorting Contacts CT inputs and terminals B25-B26 (Relay Withdrawn Alarm) are fitted with case mounted shorting contacts which provide a closed contact when the relay is withdrawn from the case. The operation of these contacts should be checked. CT Shorting contacts checked Relay Withdrawn Alarm Checked (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 12 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 2: Protection Functions This section details the procedures for testing each protection function of the 7SR224 relay. These tests are carried out to verify the accuracy of the protection pick-ups and time delays at setting and to confirm correct operation of any associated input and output functionality. Guidance for calculating test input quantities is given in the relevant test description where required. In many cases it may be necessary to disable some functions during the testing of other functions, this prevents any ambiguity caused by the operation of multiple functions from one set of input quantities. The `Function Config' Menu provides a convenient high level point at which all elements of a particular function can be Enabled/Disabled to suit testing. The `Config' tab in `Reydisp Evolution' can be used to `Enable/Disable' individual elements. Note that this screen disables functions by applying setting changes to the relay and that any changes must be sent to the relay to take effect and settings must be returned to their correct value after testing. Phase Overcurrent O Voltage Cont O/C O Cold Load O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Restricted E/F O O O O Undercurrent O O O O O O O O Phase U/O voltage O O O O O Vx U/O voltage NPS Overvoltage O U/O Frequency CB Fail O O O O O O O O O VT Supervision O O CT supervision Broken Conductor O O O O Trip cct Inrush Detector The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of functions during testing if other functions are disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified. Voltage inputs may not be required for testing of non-directional Overcurrent elements but it may be advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid inadvertent operation of other functions. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. It should be considered that where several overlapping elements are used simultaneously, the overall protection operate time may be dependent on the operation of different individual elements at the various levels of applied (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 13 of 74 Inrush Detector Trip cct Supervision Broken Conductor CT supervision VT Supervision CB Fail U/O Frequency NPS Overvoltage Vx U/O voltage Phase U/O voltage Thermal O Sensitive E/F Thermal Undercurrent Restricted E/F Sensitive E/F Measured E/F Cold Load O Measured E/F NPS Overcurrent NPS Overcurrent Under Test Voltage Cont O/C Function Phase Overcurrent The table below indicates functions where function conflicts may occur during testing, consideration should be given to disabling functions to avoid interference. 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide current or voltage. The resulting composite characteristic may be tested by enabling all of the relevant applicable elements or the element operations can be separated or disabled and tested individually. All relay settings should be checked before testing begins. It is recommended that the relay settings are extracted from the relay using Reydisp Evolution software and a copy of these settings is stored for reference during and after testing. It may be necessary to disable some protection functions during the testing of other functions to allow unambiguous results to be obtained. Care must be taken to reset or re-enable any settings that have been temporarily altered during the testing before the relay can be put into service. At the end of testing the relay settings should be compared to the file extracted at the start to ensure that errors have not been introduced. An example `Test Sheet' summary document is included at the end of this Guide. 2.1 Phase Directional Polarity Check If the relay has Directional Overcurrent elements, the common direction polarising can be checked independently from the individual overcurrent elements and their settings. In the INSTRUMENTS MODE display, indication is provided in the DIRECTIONAL METERS menu which displays current direction under P/F Dir as forward or reverse based on the output states of the directional elements, i.e. whether they see forward current, reverse current or neither for each pole with respect to the 67 Char Angle setting in the Phase Overcurrent menu. This display and the equivalent Measured and Calculated Earth Fault direction meters can be used as an aid to commissioning testing. The tests below show directional polarising for convention A-B-C positive phase sequence. In the unusual case of A-C-B positive phase sequence applications, the polarising voltages are inverted to suit the actual conditions for such a system as shown below. 1. Check the direction of each pole in turn by connecting to the appropriate terminals. The table below shows the polarising quantity for each pole. Connections for Directional Polarity Overcurrent pole Polarising voltage Phase A VBC Phase B VCA Phase C VAB Connections for non standard A-C-B positive phase sequence applications. Overcurrent pole Polarising voltage Phase A VCB Phase B VAC Phase C VBA 2. Inject single phase rated current and apply single phase-phase rated voltage at the Char Angle (MTA) phase angle setting, to each phase in turn. For each pole, monitor the directional display in the instrument menu and check that indication of forward current (FWD) is displayed. To achieve the required forward Characteristic Angle, the phase angle of the current should be greater than that of the polarising voltage by the angle setting. 3. Repeat all of the above with the current connections reversed. Indication should now be given of reverse (REV) current flow. Phase A B C Forward FWD FWD FWD Reverse REV REV REV 4. Apply balanced 3 phase rated voltage and current with Vbc (or Vcb for non standard A-C-B system applications) voltage as a 0deg reference and Ia at the characteristic angle. Increase current phase angle until the `Fwd' indication is extinguished. Record this angle in the table below (Forward lead DO). Continue (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 14 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide to increase/decrease the angle until the instrument reads `Rev'. Record the angle (Reverse lead PU). Reduce the current angle until the 'Rev' extinguishes (Reverse lead DO). and the `Fwd' subsequently returns (Forward lead PU), recording the angles. Repeat the above tests, starting from the Characteristic Angle, but reducing the current phase angle to record the directional boundaries in the opposite (lag) direction. The recorded angle should be the angle at which the phase current leads the phase-phase polarising voltage. This measurement is greatly simplified if the polarising reference voltage is set to 0deg and the current phase angle is measured with respect to this reference. Alternatively, the instrument can be checked at the 4 points marked a,b,c & d on Figure 2-1 only. Forward Lag (point C) Pick-up MTA Reverse Lead (point A) Drop-off Pick-up MTA-85 Drop-off MTA+85 Lead(point B) Pick-up MTA-85 Drop-off Lag (point D) Pick-up Drop-off MTA-85 Phase A Phase B Phase C VA a With balanced 3-phase system quantities: +900 +600 A B Adjust the phase angle of the currents relative to the voltages: IA FWD +300 Verify directional pick-up and drop off at points A, B, C and D b 00 +1800 Alternatively, VBC Verify correct directional indication at points a, b, c and d (C.A +750, +950, -750, -950) c +2100 C REV VC +2400 +2700 Figure 2-1 d D VB Standard phase sequence A-B-C is shown, for A-C-B sequence, VB & VC are exchanged. Directional Phase Fault Boundary System Angles 5. With the instrument reading `Fwd' or `Rev', reduce the voltage until the element resets. Record the minimum phase-phase operate voltage. Minimum Voltage Setting (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Chapter 6 Page 15 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.1.1 2 out of 3 logic Ensure that at least 1 Phase Overcurrent element is set to Directional. Apply balanced nominal voltage. Apply current at a level above on phase A only at the characteristic angle for forward operation, normally 45 lagging. Ensure no Directional Phase Overcurrent element operation occurs. Note that non-directional Phase Overcurrent and Non-direction Earth Fault elements may operate unless disabled. Repeat the test with Phase A current as above but also with equal current in the B phase at 180 to that in the A phase. 1 phase current 2 phase current No 50/51-n Operation 50/51-n operation 2.2 Phase Overcurrent (67/50,67/51) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-2 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Phase Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements. Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51V, 51C, 46, 49, 50CBF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. It should be particularly noted that if the function is enabled, the 51C Cold Load settings may modify the normal 50-n and 51-n settings if the CB is open during testing. Voltage inputs may not be required for this function if the Phase Overcurrent functions are not directional but it may be advantageous to apply balanced 3 phase nominal rated voltage to the VT inputs during testing to avoid inadvertent operation of other functions. Particular care should be taken when testing overcurrent functions that the thermal rating of the current inputs is not exceeded. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 16 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.2.1 Definite Time Overcurrent (50) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phase Dir. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.2.2 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph. P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Dir Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 17 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.2.2.1 Element Blocking The Phase Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation, as well as 79 Autoreclose settings for Inst/Delayed. The Characteristic can be modified by Cold Load (51-n only) and Voltage Controlled Overcurrent and can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VTS action Inrush Detector 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 50-1 50-2 50-3 50-4 2.2.2.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have an ANSI (decaying) reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and Time multiplier (TM) = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 18 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.3 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent (51V) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) OC Phase Control Voltage IL1(IA) V12(VAB) IL2(IB) V23(VBC) IL3(IC) V31(VCA) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 47 (x2) Figure 2-3 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Voltage Controlled Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51C, 46, 37, 49, 50CBF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n/50-n - Self Reset Shaped Phase Overcurrent elements 51-n should be tested for pick-up and timing before this function is tested. The General Pickup LED can be used to assess operation of this function if other functions are disabled or if the setting allocating General Pickup is temporarily modified. Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. Apply 3 phase balanced current at a level below the normal 51-n setting but above the effective 51V-n setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded. Gradually reduce the voltage until the a-b voltage is less than the Voltage setting. Pickup LED operation can be used to confirm the Voltage setting. If the 51V-n current setting is above the continuous rating of the relay an alternative procedure should be used, apply test current in short duration shots with applied voltage being gradually reduced for each subsequent shot Apply nominal 3 phase balanced voltage. Reduce the voltage such that the a-b voltage is 110% of the Voltage setting Gradually increase the a-b phase current or balanced 3P current until Pickup LED operates. Confirm result of Phase O/C test above. Reduce the applied voltage to a level such that V12(VAB) phase-phase voltage is less than 90% of the setting. Gradually increase the I12(IAB) phase-phase current until Pickup LED operates. Note that these elements may be set as directional. If this is the case, the phase angle of the current must be set with respect to the voltage to produce operation of the elements. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 19 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Voltage Setting (V, p-p) I Setting Measured (V, p-p) Multiplier Calculated PU Measured 51-1 Pickup 51-2 Pickup 51-3 Pickup 51-4 Pickup 2.3.1.1 Element Blocking The Voltage Controlled Overcurrent function can be set to Inhibit for VT Supervision operation. This functionality should be checked. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase 3P current until the element operates at its full setting, i.e. 51V settings are not used. Element VTS action 51-1 51-2 51-3 51-4 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 20 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.4 Cold Load (51C) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-4 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Cold Load Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51V, 46, 49, 50CBF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 51-n - Self Reset The CB must be open for more than the Cold Load Pick-up Time to allow testing of this function. It may be convenient to reduce this setting to suit the test procedure. If the CB is open throughout the tests, the Cold Load protection settings can be tested provided that the current is not allowed to fall below the level of the Reduced Current Level for more than the Reduced Current Time during testing. It may be convenient to set the Reduced Current setting to Disabled for the duration of the test. The Cold Load Active output is provided and can be used as an indication during testing. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 21 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Cold Load Enabled Disabled Pick-up Time & CB Open Drop-off Time 51c See Delayed Overcurrent (51-n) CB Closed S 1 Q 51c-n Setting R 51c-n Charact 51c-n Time Mult Reduced Current 51c-n Delay (DTL) Reduced Current Level 51c-n Min. Operate Time Reduced Current DTL c Enabled 51c-n Follower DTL Disabled & 51c-n Reset c < IL1 start L1 Dir En c 1 General Starter 1 51-n trip < IL2 start L2 Dir En c trip < IL3 start L3 Dir En Figure 2-5 c trip Cold Load Logic diagram Ensure that the Cold load active is not raised. This can be reset by CB closed for more than the Cold Load Dropoff Time or current less than the Reduced Current Level for greater than the Reduced Current Time. Check the Cold Load Pick-up Delay by applying or simulating CB Open. Measure the time delay before Cold Load Active is raised. Apply current above the Reduced Current Level if this functionality is Enabled before applying CB Closed. Measure the time for Cold Load Active to reset. 2.4.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51C) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph. P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Dir Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 22 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. 2.4.1.1 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 23 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.5 Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check (67N) Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be set as directional. These are polarised from residual voltage, calculated from the 3 phase voltage inputs or the 3Vo input depending on the Phase Voltage Config setting in the CT/VT Config menu. The relay Char Angle setting is the Characteristic Phase angle of the fault impedance i.e. the phase angle of the fault current with respect to the voltage driving the current. The earth fault functions are polarised from the residual voltage which is in anti-phase with the fault voltage for a single-phase to earth fault. Care is required when testing by secondary injection with regard to current and voltage polarity. To simulate an earth fault on a relay with 3 phase-phase or 3 phase-neutral connected voltage inputs, defined by the Phase Voltage Config setting of Van,Vbn,Vcn or Va,Vb,Vc, proceed as follows. Balanced 3P voltage should first be applied, then the phase-neutral voltage magnitude on the faulted phase should be reduced in magnitude with no change in phase angle to produce Vres and simulate the fault. The fault current, on the faulted phase only, should be set at the MTA with respect to the phase-neutral voltage on the faulted phase, e.g. for a relay setting of -15, set the phase current to lag the ph-n voltage by 15. Alternatively, a single phase voltage source can be used in the above test. The polarity of this voltage, applied to the faulted phase-neutral alone, must be reversed to produce the same residual voltage (Vres) phase direction as that produced by the 3P voltage simulation described above. For the Phase Voltage Config of Vab, Vbc, Vo, the single phase voltage applied to the Vo input is used as the polarising quantity. The inversion is once again required since this input is designed to measure the residual voltage directly, as produced by an `open delta VT' arrangement. The current must be set at the MTA with respect to the inversion of this voltage. e.g. for a relay setting of -15, the phase current must lag the (Vo+180) voltage by 15, i.e. if Vo is set at 180, set Iph at -15. If the Pickup of one directional Earth Fault element is mapped to an LED, this can be used to check directional boundaries for pickup and drop-off as the current phase angle is increased and decreased. Note that the Measured Earth Fault and Sensitive Earth Fault have separate directional settings and must be tested individually. 0 a The diagram opposite shows a Phase A - Earth fault. 0 -300 A FWD Apply residual voltage either directly to input or by reducing voltage of faulted phase. B -600 VRES b IC IB +900 -900 C.A. IPHASE c IA +1200 C Adjust the phase angle of the phase current relative to the voltage: Verify directional pick-up and drop off at points A, B, C and D Alternatively, REV D +1500 d 180 Figure 2-6 0 Verify correct directional indication at points a, b, c and d (C.A +750, +950, -750, -950) Directional Earth Fault Boundary System Angles (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 24 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6 Measured Earth fault (67/50G,67/51G) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 49 50 BF 51V 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 67/ 50G (x4) 64 H 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 67/ 50G (x4) * Figure 2-7 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) I4 (IG/ISEF) VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 67/ 51 (x4) 67/ 50 (x4) * * 67/ 51G (x4) * * 67/ 51G (x4) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive. 67/51G(x4) can be selected as I4 or derived from IL1-IL3 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Measured Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: IL1-IL3 (IA-Ic) or I4 (IG) (selectable) Disable: 50CBF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 51G-n/50G-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF, Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the `Function Config' menu. The operating current source for these elements is selectable and may be either measured directly on current input I4 or the calculated residual current derived from the sum of current inputs IL1 -IL3. This selection is specified by the 50/51G Measurement setting in the Measured E/F sub-menu of the Current Prot'n menu. Tests must be applied using the correct analogue inputs. If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce an operation of those elements. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 25 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6.1 Directional Polarity See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details. Forward MTA Lag (point C) Pick-up ............. Drop-off Reverse Lead (point A) Pick-up Lead(point B) Drop-off Pick-up Lag (point D) Drop-off Pick-up MTA-85 MTA+85 MTA-85 MTA-85 ........... ............ ............ ............ Drop-off Measured EF 2.6.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (67/50G) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e * I1/I4 Dir. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES * Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting. Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. Note that these elements can be set to directional. If VTS action is set to BLOCK, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. 2.6.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (67/51G) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times P.U. D.O. & TIMIN G TESTS Ph. (I1 or * I4) Dir Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) T.M. Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOT ES * Current source selection depends on 50/51G Measurement setting. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 26 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. If VTS action is set to BLOCK, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. 2.6.3.1 Element Blocking The Measured Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit, VT Supervision and Inrush Detector operation. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VTS action Inrush Detector 51G-1 51G-2 51G-3 51G-4 50G-1 50G-2 50G-3 50G-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 27 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.6.3.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 28 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.7 Sensitive Earth fault (67/50S,67/51S) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-8 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Sensitive Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) for directional elements Current Inputs: I4 (ISEF) Disable: 64H, 50CBF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 51SEF-n/50SEF-n - Self Reset Other protection functions may overlap with these functions during testing, it may be useful to disable some functions to avoid ambiguity. Measured EF, Sensitive EF & Restricted EF protections can be Enabled/Disabled individually or as groups in the `Function Config' menu. If any of these elements are defined as directional the correct voltage phase direction will be required to produce an operation of those elements. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 29 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.7.1 Directional Polarity See section Directional Earth Fault Polarity Check above for testing details. Forward MTA Lag (point C) Pick-up ............. Drop-off Reverse Lead (point A) Pick-up Lead(point B) Drop-off MTA Pick-up Lag (point D) Drop-off Pick-up MTA Drop-off MTA MTA -85/87.5 +85/87.5 -85/87.5 -85/87.5 ........... ............ ............ ............ SEF 2.7.2 Definite Time Overcurrent (50SEF) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e I4(ISE F) Dir. Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. Note that these elements can be set to directional. If VTS action is set to BLOCK, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. 2.7.3 Inverse Time Overcurrent (51SEF) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Ph. Dir Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) T.M. Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES I4(ISEF) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 30 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI Curve 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. If VTS action is set to BLOCK, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element does not operate. If VTS action is set to Non-Directional, this option should be tested. Apply balanced voltage and current. Reduce a-phase voltage to cause a VTS condition. Increase a-phase current and check that the element operates at its normal setting. Reverse the voltage phase direction whilst checking that the element does not reset. 2.7.3.1 Element Blocking The Sensitive Earth Fault elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. The Characteristic can be made non-directional by VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VTS action 51SEF-1 51SEF-2 51SEF-3 51SEF-4 50SEF-1 50SEF-2 50SEF-3 50SEF-4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 31 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.7.3.2 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 32 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.8 Restricted Earth fault (64H) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-9 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Restricted Earth Fault Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: I4 (IREF) Disable: 51SEF, 50SEF, 79 Map Pickup LED: 64H - Self Reset The setting resistance should be measured and the value compared to that specified in the settings data. Both values should be recorded. Settings Data Resistor Value Measured The high value of setting resistance R will often interfere with secondary current injection when using a digital test set. It is normal practice in these cases to short out the resistor to allow testing, the shorting link should be removed after testing. Since the DTL setting is generally small the pick-up setting can be tested by gradually increasing current until element operates. The relay should be disconnected from the current transformers for this test. Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 33 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Phas e REF Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES It is also desirable to check the operating voltage achieved with the setting resistor and all parallel CTs connected but de-energised. A higher capacity test set will be required for this test. Adequate current must be supplied to provide the magnetising current of all connected CTs. Precautions should be taken to ensure that no personnel are at risk of contact with any of the energised secondary wiring during the test. Settings Data Voltage Setting Measured To complete testing of the REF requires primary injection through the phase and residual (REF) CT in series to simulate an out of zone fault and ensure stability of the relay. The test can then be repeated with the REF CT secondary connections reversed to prove operation. 2.8.1.1 Element Blocking The Restricted Earth Fault element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 64H Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. Check that any shorting links are removed after testing. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 34 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-10 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51, 51V, 51C, 37, 49, 50CBF, 60CTS, 46BC Map Pickup LED: 46IT/46DT - Self Reset Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. The Thermal withstand limitations of the current inputs, stated in the Performance Specification should always be observed throughout testing. NPS Overcurrent can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase current connections should be reversed so that the applied balanced 3P current is Negative Phase Sequence. For relay applications on non standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B, NPS current is provided by a 3 phase source with conventional A-B-C phase sequence (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 35 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.9.1 Definite Time NPS Overcurrent (46DT) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase current until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 2 x Is NOTES NPS Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.9.2 Inverse Time NPS Overcurrent (46IT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase current until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting current and record operating time, Apply 5x setting current and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times Ph. P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Char. (NI EI VI LTI, DTL) Is (A) TM Operate Current P.U. D.O. (Amps) (Amps) Operate Time 2 x Is 5 x Is (sec) (sec) NOTES NPS Calculated Timing values in seconds for TM =1.0 Curve 2 xIs 5 xIs IEC-NI 10.03 4.28 IEC-VI 13.50 3.38 IEC-EI 26.67 3.33 IEC-LTI 120.00 30.00 ANSI-MI 3.80 1.69 ANSI-VI 7.03 1.31 ANSI-EI 9.52 1.30 Note that the operate time may be subject to the Minimum op time setting for the element and/or may have a Follower DTL applied. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 36 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.9.2.1 ANSI Reset If the element is configured as an ANSI characteristic, it may have a reset delay applied. If ANSI reset is selected for an IEC characteristic element, the reset will be instantaneous. ANSI reset times from operated condition to fully reset are as follows for zero applied current and TM = 1.0. The reset curve characteristic type and TM is defined by the operating characteristic. Curve Fully operated to reset with Zero current applied & TM=1 (secs) ANSI-MI 4.85 ANSI-VI 21.6 ANSI-EI 29.1 Apply current in the following sequence, a) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation, b) Zero current for the reset time above (xTM), c) 2x setting for a time to ensure element operation. Check that the second operation (c) is similar to the first (a) and in line with the expected operate time for the element at this current level. Repeat the test with the reset time (b) reduced to 50% of the previous value. Ensure that the second operate time (c) is 50% of the first (a) operate time. Operate time (expected) Reset time (calculated) Operate time (measured) 50% Reset Time (calculated) First test (c) 2.9.2.2 50% operate time (calculated) 50% operate time (measured) Second Test (c) Element Blocking The NPS Overcurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 46IT 46DT Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 37 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.10 Undercurrent (37) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-11 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Undercurrent Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51N, 51G, 46, 60CTS, 46BC Map Pickup LED: 37-n - Self Reset If two Undercurrent 37 elements are used with different settings, it is convenient to test the element with the lowest setting first. The higher setting element can then be tested without interference from the other element. Apply 3P balanced current at a level above the Undercurrent 37-n setting until the element resets. If DTL setting is small, gradually reduce any each phase current in turn until element operates. If DTL is large apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation Testing of this element phase by phase may cause inadvertent operation of the 46 NPS Overcurrent elements. Apply 0.5x setting current and record operating time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 38 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Phase Is (Amps) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Amps Operate Time 0.5 x Is NOTES IL1(IA) IL2(IB) IL3(IC) 2.10.1.1 Element Blocking The Undercurrent elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 37-1 37-2 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 39 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.11 Thermal Overload (49) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-12 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Thermal Overload Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51, 50, 37, 50CBF Map Pickup LED: 49Alarm The current can be applied from a 3P balanced supply or phase by phase from a 1P supply. Alternatively the 3 phase current inputs can be connected in series and injected simultaneously from a single 1P source. The Thermal Overload Setting and Time Constant Setting can be considered together to calculate the operating time for a particular applied current. The following table lists operate times for a range of Time Constant Settings for an applied current of 2x the Thermal Overload setting. Ensure that the thermal rating of the relay is not exceeded during this test. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 40 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Time Constant (mins) Operate Time (sec) 1 17.3 2 34.5 3 51.8 4 69 5 86.3 10 173 15 259 20 345 25 432 30 51.8 50 863 100 1726 The Thermal State must be in the fully reset condition in order to measure the operate time correctly. This can be achieved by setting change in the Thermal protection settings menu or by pressing the Test/Reset button when the Thermal Meter is shown in the Instruments Mode. Reset the thermal State then apply 2x the Overload Setting current. Calculated Operate Time (s) Measured Operate Time (s) If the Thermal Overload Capacity Alarm is used, this can be tested by monitoring the Thermal Capacity in the instruments menu. If the Thermal time constant is longer than a few minutes, this can be assessed during the timing test above. If the Time Constant is less than a few minutes, a lower multiple of current will be required such that the rate of capacity increase is slowed to allow monitoring of the instrument to be accurate. Capacity Alarm Setting 2.11.1.1 Measured Element Blocking The Thermal element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 49 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 41 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12 Over/Under Voltage 2.12.1 Phase Under/Over Voltage (27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-13 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Phase Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 47, 59N, 60VTS Map Pickup LED: 27/59-n - Self Reset Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. Note that if the voltage is reduced below the 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. VTS operation may also block the 27 Undervoltage function. Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing. If the `O/P Phases' is set to `All', the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL is long, the operate level level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 42 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the higher settings. If the `O/P Phases' is set to `All', the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the applied 3P or VL1 test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs VL2 and VL3 by repeating the above if necessary. Phase 27/59 setting (Volts) U / O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calc.) P.U. Volts D.O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V1(VA) V2(VB) V3(VC) 2.12.1.1 Element Blocking The 27/59 Under/Over Voltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision 27/59-1 27/59-2 27/59-3 27/59-4 When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 43 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12.2 Undervoltage Guard (27/59UVG) If any 27 Undervoltage element is set to be inhibited by the 27 Undervoltage Guard element, this function should be tested. Connect the test voltage inputs to suit the installation wiring diagram utilising any test socket facilities available. It may be useful to temporarily map an LED as `General Pickup' to assist during testing. 27UVG operation will reset the General Pickup if no other element is operated. This LED should not be set as `Hand Reset' in the Output matrix. Starting from nominal voltage, apply a step decrease to the applied voltage to a level below the 27 Undervoltage setting but above the 27UVG setting such that an Undervoltage element operation occurs. Slowly reduce the applied voltage until the 27 Undervoltage element resets, this can be detected by the General Pickup LED reset if no other element is operated (this includes any Undervoltage element which is not UV Guarded). Phas e Vs (Volts) V element Used for test Blocked Volts NOTES UVG (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 44 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12.3 VX Under/Over Voltage for 4VT devices (Vx 27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-14 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Vx Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: V4 (VX) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: Vx 27/59 - Self Reset If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage applied to Vx input until element operates if the element is Overvoltage. Alternatively, if the element is Undervoltage, decrease single phase voltage applied to Vx input until element operates. If DTL is large, for Overvoltage elements, apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation. For Undervoltage elements, apply 1.1x setting, check for no operation, apply 0.9x setting, check operation. Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 27/59 Hysteresis setting. Phase 27/59 setting (Volts) U DTL / (sec) O Hyst. D.O. (calc.) P.U. Volts D.O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V4(Vx) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 45 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.12.3.1 Element Blocking The Vx Under/Over Voltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision 27/59x Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. 2.12.4 VX Under/Over Voltage for 6VT devices (Vx 27/59) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive Figure 2-15 VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Vx Under/Over Voltage Voltage Inputs: V4 (VX), V5 (VY), V6(VZ) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: Vx 27/59-1, Vx 27/59-2, Vx 27/59-3, Vx 27/59-4, - Self Reset (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 46 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Where more than one Undervoltage (27) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the lowest settings first. The elements with higher settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. Note that if the voltage is reduced below the Vx 27UVG setting, the function may be blocked. VTS operation may also block the 27 Undervoltage function. Current inputs are not normally required to stabilise the relay during voltage element testing. If the `O/P Phases' is set to `All', the voltage on all phases must be reduced simultaneously. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly decrease the applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. Record the operate voltage. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5%. Slowly increase the input voltage until the LED extinguishes. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL is long, the operate level level should be checked by applying a voltage of 90% of setting voltage. Check Hysteresis by resetting element to the operate level setting plus the hysteresis setting. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level below the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. Where more than one overvoltage (59) elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the higher settings. If the `O/P Phases' is set to `All', the voltage on all phases must be increased simultaneously. Otherwise the 3 phases should be tested individually. If the DTL setting is short, starting from nominal voltage, slowly increase the applied 3P or V4(VX) test voltage until the Pickup LED (temporarily mapped) is lit. The LED should light at setting Volts +/-5% Decrease the input voltage to nominal Volts and the LED will extinguish. Record the reset voltage to check the `Hysteresis' setting. If the DTL setting is long, the operate level can be checked by applying 100% of setting to cause operation followed by setting minus the Hysteresis setting to cause reset. Connect the relevant output contact(s) to stop the test set. Step the applied voltage to a level above the setting. The test set should be stopped at the operate time setting +/-5% Test inputs V5(VY) and V6(Vz) by repeating the above if necessary. Phase Vx 27/59 setting (Volts) U / O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calc.) P.U. Volts D.O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs (OV) 0.5x Vs (UV) UV Guard NOTES V4(VX) V5(VY) V6(VZ) 2.12.4.1 Element Blocking The Vx Under/Over Voltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit and VT Supervision. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits VT Supervision Vx 27/59-1 Vx 27/59-2 Vx 27/59-3 Vx 27/59-4 When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 47 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.13 NPS Overvoltage (47) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-16 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 NPS Overvoltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 27/59, 59N, 60VTS Map Pickup LED: 47-n - Self Reset Where two NPS elements are being used with different settings, it is convenient to test the elements with the highest settings first. The elements with lower settings can then be tested without disabling the lower settings. NPS Overvoltage can be tested using a normal 3P balanced source. Two phase voltage connections should be reversed so that the applied balanced 3P voltage is Negative Phase Sequence. For relay applications on non standard networks with positive phase sequence A-C-B, NPS voltage is provided by a 3 phase source with conventional A-B-C phase sequence If the 47-n delay is small, gradually increased the applied balanced 3P voltage until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting current if possible and record operating time Phas e 27/59 setting (Volts) U/O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calculated) P.U. Volts D.O Volts Op. Time 2x Vs NOTES NPS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 48 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.13.1.1 Element Blocking The NPS Overvoltage element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 47-1 47-2 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 49 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.14 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC 37 (x2) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-17 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Neutral Overvoltage Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: 27/59, 47, 60VTS Map Pickup LED: 59N-n - Self Reset The voltage source for the Neutral Overvoltage 59N function can be set as either Vn , calculated from the applied 3 phase voltage inputs or Vx, the V4 input. Apply test voltage to 1 phase input or V4 input to suit. 2.14.1 Definite Time (59NDT) If DTL setting is small, gradually increase single phase voltage until element operates. If DTL is large apply 0.9x setting, check for no operation, apply 1.1x setting, check operation Apply 2x setting voltage if possible and record operating time Phase Vs (Volts) DTL (sec) P.U. Current Volts Operate Time 2 x Vs NOTES E Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 50 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.14.2 Inverse Time (59NIT) It will be advantageous to map the function being tested to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. Gradually increase voltage until Pickup LED operates. Apply 2x setting voltage and record operating time, Apply a higher multiple of setting voltage and record operating time. Compare to calculated values for operating times from: 1 top (sec onds ) ) = M Vn [Vs ] - 1 Where M = Time multiplier and Vn/Vs = multiple of setting. P.U. D.O. & TIMING TESTS Ph. Vs (V) TM Operate Voltage P.U. (Volts) D.O. (Volts) Operate Time 2 x Vs (sec) NOTES x Vs (sec) E 2.14.2.1 Element Blocking The Neutral Overvoltage elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 59NIT 59NDT Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 51 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 2-18 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Under/Over Frequency Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: n/a apply zero current to stabilize other functions Disable: Map Pickup LED: 81-n - Self Reset This function can be tested by application of 1P or 3P voltage. For Over-frequency, the elements with the highest setting should be tested first and for Under-frequency the elements with the lowest settings should be tested first. The elements with other settings can then be tested without need to disable the elements already tested. Note that the relay is designed to track the gradual changes in power system frequency and that sudden step changes in frequency during testing do not reflect normal system operation. Normal `instantaneous' operation of the frequency element is 140-175ms in line with the Performance Specification. Application of sudden step changes to frequency can add additional delay which can produce misleading test results. Gradually increase/decrease applied voltage frequency until 81-n operation occurs. Elements set for more extreme frequency fluctuation should be tested first with lesser elements disabled. If the 81-n Delay setting is long it will be advantageous to map the function to temporarily drive the relevant Pickup output in the Pickup Config sub-menu in the Output Config menu as this will allow the Pick-up led to operate for the function. If the delay setting is short the operation of the element can be easily checked directly. The frequency should then be gradually decreased/increased until the element resets. The reset frequency can be used to check the Hysteresis setting. If the element is set as 81-n U/V Guarded, The applied voltage must be above the 81 UV Guard Setting in the U/O Frequency menu. Apply setting frequency +0.5Hz for Over-frequency or -0.5Hz for Under-frequency and record operating time. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 52 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Starting with the element in the operated condition, gradually increase or decrease the applied voltage until the element resets. Measure the reset voltage level to check the 81 Hysteresis setting. F (Hertz) U/O DTL (sec) Hyst. D.O. (calc.) P.U. Freq Hertz D.O. Freq. Hertz Operate Time +/- 0.5Hz UV Guard NOTES If the element is set as 81-nU/V Guarded, this setting can be tested by applying the test voltage at a level below the 81 U/V Guard Setting at a frequency in the operate range. Increase the voltage until the relay operates. UVG UVG Setting (Volts) Freq element Used for test Blocked Volts (D.O.) Unblocked Volts (P.U.) NOTES U/O Freq 2.15.1.1 Element Blocking The U/O Frequency elements can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 81-1 81-2 81-3 81-4 81-5 81-6 Check correct indication, trip output, alarm contacts, waveform record. When testing is complete reinstate any of the disabled functions. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 53 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 3: Supervision Functions 3.1 CB Fail (50BF) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC 37 (x2) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-1 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 CB Fail Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: Map Pickup LED: 50BF-n - Self Reset The circuit breaker fail protection time delays are initiated either from: A binary output mapped as Trip Contact in the OUTPUT CONFIG>BINARY OUTPUT CONFIG menu, or A binary input mapped as 50BF Ext Trip in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. Apply a trip condition by injection of current to cause operation of a suitable protection element. Allow current to continue after the trip at a level of 110% of the 50BF Setting current level on any phase. Measure the time for operation of operation of 50BF-1 Delay and 50BF-2 Delay. Repeat the sequence with current at 90% of the 50BF Setting current level after the element trip and check for no CB Fail operation. 50BF Setting (xIn) Test Current 50BF-1 Delay............... 50BF-2 Delay................... No Operation No Operation (110%)............. (90%)............... (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 54 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.1.1.1 Element Blocking The CB Fail function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 50BF (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 55 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.2 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC 37 (x2) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 3.2.1 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-2 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Voltage Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 27, 47, 59N Map Pickup LED: 60VTS - Self Reset 1 or 2 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal current and voltage. Reduce 1 phase voltage until VTS operates, record voltage reduction level. 60VTS V Setting Setting x 3 Measured Voltage Reduction Increase the voltage until VTS resets. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for no operation. Return voltage to nominal. Increase current on 1 phase by 90% of 3x the 60VTS I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation 60VTS I Setting Setting x 3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 110% of Setting x 3 90% of Setting x 3 No VTS VTS operation Chapter 6 Page 56 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.2.2 3 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS Ipps Load setting and the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the 60VTS Vpps setting. Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets. Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS Ipps Load setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test. Increase the 3P balanced current to a level above the 60VTS Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Setting Measured 60VTS Vpps 60VTS Ipps Load 60VTS Ipps Fault If the VTS can be started from a status input fed from an external source, this functionality should be tested. Ext_Trig 60VTS Operation 3.2.2.1 Not Applicable Element Blocking The VT Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 60VTS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 57 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.3 Single Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail (60VTF-Bus) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) Note: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-3 Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 60 VTF Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Single pole Bus Voltage Transformer Fail Voltage Inputs: Vx, VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: Disable: Vx27/59 Map Pickup LED: 60VTS - Self Reset This feature is supplied in devices with the optional Check Synchronising feature. With the CB in the closed position, apply nominal voltage to the Vx input and to the corresponding synchronising voltage input. Remove voltage from the Vx input and measure time delay to 60VTF-Bus alarm. Alarm Time Setting(s) (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Alarm Time (s) Chapter 6 Page 58 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.4 3 Pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS-X) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 60 VTS X 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive Figure 3-4 VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) 27 59 (x4) V5 (VY) 27 59 (x4) V6 (VZ) 27 59 (x4) 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 3 pole Bus Voltage Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL4 (VX), VL5 (VY), VL6 (VZ) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 27/59-X Map Pickup LED: 60VTS-X - Self Reset This feature is provided in devices with six VT inputs. 3.4.1 1 or 2 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal current and 3 phase balanced voltage to the Vxyz inputs. Reduce 1 phase voltage until VTS-X operates, record voltage reduction level. 60VTS-X V Setting Setting x 3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Voltage Reduction Chapter 6 Page 59 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Increase the voltage until VTS-X resets. Increase current on 1 phase by 110% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for no operation. Return voltage to nominal. Increase current on 1 phase by 90% of 3x the 60VTS-X I setting. Reduce voltage as above and check for VTS operation 60VTS-X I Setting 3.4.2 Setting x 3 110% of Setting x 3 90% of Setting x 3 No VTS VTS operation 3 Phase VT fail Apply 3P balanced nominal voltage and 3P balanced current at a level between the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting and the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the balanced Voltage on all 3 phases until the VTS operates at the 60VTS-X Vpps setting. Return the voltage to nominal and ensure that VTS resets. Reduce the 3P balanced current to a level below the 60VTS-X Ipps Load setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually increase the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Check that the thermal rating of the relay current inputs is not exceeded during the following test. Increase the 3P balanced current to a level above the 60VTS-X Ipps Fault setting. Reduce the 3P balanced voltage to a level below the operate level above. Gradually reduce the 3P balanced current until the VTS operates. Setting Measured 60VTS-X Vpps 60VTS-X Ipps Load 60VTS-X Ipps Fault 3.4.2.1 Element Blocking The VT-X Supervision can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 60VTS-X (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 60 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.5 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-5 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Current Transformer Supervision Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC) Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51N, 46IT, 46DT, 46BC Map Pickup LED: 60CTS - Self Reset The presence of NPS current without NPS voltage is used to indicate a current transformer failure. Apply normal 3P balanced current with a crossover of any two phases at a level above 60CTS Inps setting. Measure the delay to operation. Apply 3P balanced voltage with a similar phase crossover to the current. Increase the applied 3P voltage until the CTS element resets. Reduce the 3P voltage to cause CTS operation again. Gradually reduce the 3P current until the element resets. Setting Measured 60CTS Delay 60CTS Inps 60CTS Vnps (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 61 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.5.1.1 Element Blocking The CT Supervision function can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 60CTS (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 62 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.6 Broken Conductor (46BC) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 37 (x2) 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 BC 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) I4 (IG/ISEF) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-6 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Broken Conductor Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: 51N, 46IT, 46DT Map Pickup LED: 46BC - Self Reset Broken Conductor uses the ratio of NPS current to PPS current to detect an open circuit conductor. These quantities can be produced directly from many advanced test sets but with limited equipment the following approach can be applied. Apply 3P balanced current with normal phase rotation direction. This current will consist of PPS alone, no NPS or ZPS. Increase 1 phase current magnitude in isolation to produce NPS. The single phase unbalance current will contain equal quantities of ZPS, NPS and PPS. The NPS component will be 1/3 of the unbalance current and the total PPS component will be value of the original balanced 3P current plus 1/3 of the additional unbalance current. i.e. as the single phase unbalance current increases, the ratio of NPS to PPS will also increase. The levels of each sequence component current can be monitored in the Current Meters in Instruments Mode. Note that if the relay is applied on a non-standard A-C-B networks, the positive and negative sequences are reversed and the 3 phase test supply must be arranged to suit. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 63 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Inject 1A of balanced current. Gradually increase imbalance current, operating level should be as follows: 46BC Setting 1P unbalance current (% of 3P current) 20% 75% 25% 100% 30% 129% 35% 161% 40% 200% 46BC Setting 3P balanced current (A) 1P unbalance current (A) Measured Unbalance current Apply 1A 1P unbalance current without 3P balanced current. Measure 46BC operating time. 46BC Delay setting 3.6.1.1 Measured Element Blocking The Broken Conductor element can be blocked by Binary Input Inhibit. This functionality should be checked. Element BI Inhibits 46BC (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 64 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.7 Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC 37 (x2) I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S 81 (x4) 59N (x2) 27 59 V4 (VX) Figure 3-7 47 (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Trip Circuit Supervision Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: n/a Disable: Map Pickup LED: 74TCS-n - Self Reset The TCS-n Delay can be initiated by applying an inversion to the relevant status input and measured by monitoring of the alarm output. TCS-n Delay setting (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Measured Chapter 6 Page 65 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 3.8 Magnetising Inrush Detector (81HBL2) 7SR224 IL1 (IA) IL2 (IB) IL3 (IC) 37 (x2) 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 49 50 BF 51V 67/ 50 (x4) 67/ 51 (x4) 81 HBL 2 46 NPS (x2) 60 CTS 60 VTS 64 H 67/ 50G (x4) 67/ 51G (x4) 67/ 50S (x4) 67/ 51S (x4) 49 50 BF 37 (x2) 49 37 (x2) 46 BC I4 (IG/ISEF) NOTE: The use of some functions are mutually exclusive VL1 (VA) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL2 (VB) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S VL3 (VC) 27 59 (x4) 27S 59S V4 (VX) Figure 3-8 27 59 47 (x2) 81 (x4) 59N (x2) Note: Example shows Voltage Config = Van, Vbn, Vcn Batt Test 74 TCS (x3) Cap. Test 79 Magnetising Inrush Detector Voltage Inputs: n/a Current Inputs: IL1 (IA), IL2 (IB), IL3 (IC), Disable: Map Pickup LED: Logical operation of the harmonic blocking can be tested by current injection at 100Hz to cause operation of the blocking signals. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 66 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 4: Control & Logic Functions 4.1 Autoreclose (79) Autoreclose sequences can be specified differently for Phase, Earth, Externally Initiated and SEF faults. Sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type with the actual relay settings required for service installed in the relay. The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the autoreclose sequence to provide a realistic simulation of the actual system conditions. The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No. which are useful during sequence testing. The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring equipment or complex connections. 4.2 Synchronising The optional Synchronising function provides (Re)closure modes which utilise the synchronising voltages to impose restrictions on the closing of the recloser to allow co-ordination with other devices in the network. Correct operation of the application of blocking for all combinations of live and dead line and bus voltage should be checked for manual closing operations and during the testing of autoreclose. Enabled/Disabled Tested Notes DLC DBC CS DLDB Apply 3 phase nominal voltage to the relay and single phase voltage to the Vx Synchronising input. Ensure that the synchronising voltage is of the correct phase to represent an `In Sync' condition. Check the Line Volts and Bus Volts voltage magnitudes are displayed correctly on the Sync Meters and that the Voltage Diff and Phase Diff are shown as approximately zero. Voltage (Vb/Vab etc) Applied Line Volts Measured Line Volts Applied Bus Volts Measured Bus Volts ............................. Magnitude Phase Reduce Line and Bus voltages from nominal in turn to measure the Dead Line and Dead Bus settings. Increase the voltages in turn to measure the Live Line and Live Bus settings. Live Setting Dead Setting Live Pickup Dead Pickup Line Volts Bus Volts (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 67 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Repeat the reduction of Bus and Line voltages to check the pickup and drop off of the Bus Undervolts, Line Undervolts and Voltage Diff settings, if enabled. Outputs signals are available in the Output Matrix to allow leds or Binary Outputs to be allocated to these functions. Setting Pickup Reset Line Undervolts Bus Undervolts Voltage Diff Test voltages can be manipulated to test the Check Synchronising window parameters using the Voltage Check and In Sync outputs. The In Synch output is raised when all voltage conditions are met such that a close will be issued during an autoreclose sequence. In Synch monitors voltage magnitude, phase difference and Slip Frequency conditions. Voltage Check is raised when voltage magnitude conditions alone are met such that a close will be issued if phase requirements are additionally met during an autoreclose sequence which will allow. Voltage Check is useful during testing and fault finding but is not used in service. Setting Pickup Reset Setting Pickup Reset Setting Pickup Reset CS phase leading CS phase lagging CS Slip Split Angle Split Slip SS phase leading SS phase lagging SS Slip Following controller commissioning, when the circuit is live with test connections removed, the Synchronising Meters should be checked to ensure primary voltages are correct. With the circuit breaker closed, Bus and Line voltages should have equal magnitudes, differential voltage and phase difference should be zero. Expected Voltage diff 0V Phase Diff 0 Slip 0 mHz 4.3 Measured Notes Live/Dead Voltage Inputs: VL1 (VA), VL2 (VB), VL3 (VC), VL4 (VX), VL5 (VY), VL6 (VZ) Current Inputs: n/a Disable: 27/59, 27/59-Vx, 59N, 47 Map Pickup LED: A,B,C Live, A,B,C Dead, ABC Live, ABC Dead This feature can be tested using a dual or single three phase AC voltage supply or from a single phase supply. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 68 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Apply a voltage at a level below the Dead setting of the side to be tested. Check indication for that phase indicates dead. Increase the voltage level to above the Live setting. Check pickup of Live indication and reset of Dead indication. Decrease voltage to below the relevant Dead setting. Check change-over of indication. 3 phase indication ABC Live and ABC Dead and XYZ Live and XYZ Dead can be tested by connection of a single phase supply to all inputs in parallel. The output indicates that all phases are below the dead setting and the Live setting indicates that all phases are above the Live setting. A Live setting A Dead Setting Dead to Live transition Live to Dead transition Indication & outputs X Live setting X Dead Setting Dead to Live transition Live to Dead transition Indication & outputs Phase A Phase B Phase C ABC Phase X Phase Y Phase Z XYZ 4.4 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation sequences should be simulated for each applicable different fault type with the actual relay settings required for service installed in the relay. The relay requires that the correct indications are received at the CB auxiliary contact inputs and that the injected current and voltage used to generate protection operations are timed to the LOV autoreclose sequence to provide a realistic simulation of the actual system conditions. The Instruments Menu contains Autoreclose Meters for the Autoreclose State and the Shot No. which are useful during sequence testing. The time stamped Events listing can be downloaded from the relay to a PC to allow diagnosis of the sequence including measurements of sequence Dead Times and other timing without the use of external measuring equipment or complex connections. 4.5 Quick Logic If this functionality is used, the logic equations may interfere with testing of other protection functions in the relay. The function of the Quick Logic equations should be tested conjunctively with connected plant or by simulation to assess suitability and check for correct operation on an individual basis with tests specifically devised to suit the particular application. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 69 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 5: Testing and Maintenance These relays are maintenance free, with no user serviceable parts. 5.1 Periodic Tests During the life of the relay, it should be checked for operation during the normal maintenance period for the site on which the product is installed. It is recommended the following tests are carried out:Visual inspection of the metering display 1. Operation of output contacts 2. Secondary injection of each element 5.2 Maintenance Relay failure will be indicated by the `Protection Healthy' LED being off or flashing. A message may also be displayed on the LCD. In the event of failure contact the local Siemens office or the manufacturer - see defect report sheet in section 5.3. The relay unit comprises an outer case and the withdrawable relay element. The relay should be returned as a complete unit. No attempt should be made to disassemble the unit to isolate and return only the damaged subassembly. It may however be convenient to fit the withdrawable relay to the outer case from a spare relay, to avoid the disturbance of relay panel wiring. The withdrawable relay should never be transported without the protection of the outer case. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 70 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 5.3 Table 5-1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guide Observation Action Relay does not power up. Check that the correct auxiliary DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. Relay won't accept the password. The Password being entered is wrong. Enter correct password. If correct password has been forgotten, note down the Numeric Code which is displayed at the Change Password screen e.g. Change password = 1234567 To retrieve the password, communicate this code to a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. Protection Healthy LED flashes General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. LCD screen flashes continuously. The LCD has many possible error messages which when displayed will flash continuously. These indicate various processor card faults. General failure. Contact a Siemens Protection Devices Ltd. representative. Backlight is on but no text can be seen. Adjust the contrast. Scrolling text messages are unreadable. Adjust the contrast. Relay displays one instrument after another with no user intervention. This is normal operation, default instruments are enabled. Remove all instruments from the default list and only add those that are required. (See Section 2: Settings and Instruments). Cannot communicate with the relay. Check that all of the communications settings match those used by ReyDisp Evolution. Check that the Tx and Rx fibre-optic cables are connected correctly. ( Tx -> Rx and Rx -> Tx ). Check that all cables, modems and fibre-optic cables work correctly. Ensure that IEC 60870-5-103 is specified for the connected port (COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4). Relays will not communicate in a ring network. Check that the Data Echo setting on all relays is set to ON. Check that all relays are powered up. Check that all relays have unique addresses. Status inputs do not work. Check that the correct DC voltage is applied and that the polarity is correct. Check that the status input settings such as the pick-up and dropoff timers and the status inversion function are correctly set. Relay instrument displays show small currents or voltages even though the system is dead. This is normal. The relay is displaying calculation noise. This will not affect any accuracy claims for the relay. If the above checklist does not help in correcting the problem please contact the local Siemens office or contact PTD 24hr Customer Support, Tel: +49 180 524 7000, Fax: +49 180 524 2471, e-mail: support.energy@siemens.com. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 71 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide Section 6: Relay Software Upgrade Instructions 6.1 General Please read thoroughly all of the instructions supplied with the firmware upgrade before starting the download process. * * If you are loading firmware into a product that is already installed on site then follow the instructions in section 2, 3 and 4. Otherwise skip directly to section 3 to load firmware into the device. 6.2 Replacing firmware on a product installed on site 6.2.1 Identify Which Software Is Currently Loaded With the relay connected to a suitable DC supply. Press CANCEL several times to ensure that you are at the root of the menu system. The relay will typically display the relay model name or circuit name. On newer relay models press CANCEL and TEST to bring up the SOFTWARE VERSION menu. While still pressing TEST release the other keys. On older relay models press and hold CANCEL, press and hold TEST, press and hold ENTER then "Build Version --> to view" should appear. While still pressing ENTER release the other keys. Navigate to the software information screen using the TEST/RESET-> button. The following typical information uniquely identifies a particular relay model. (Older relay models may only display a subset of this information). 6.2.2 Overall Software Information Software Art No Build Date Build Time Code CRC Boot Block Art No 6.2.3 This is the application software code used which may common to many relay variants. This is the date when the software was compiled. This is time when the software was compiled. This is the CRC check code of the software code. This is the boot block software code responsible for loading in new application software code. Product Configuration Information Product Art No Product Name Release Date Release Time This is the Products unique configuration article number. This is the Products unique model name. This is the date when this particular configuration was released. This is the time when this particular configuration was released. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 72 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide 6.2.4 Things To Do Before Loading New Firmware/Software Ensure that a secure copy of relay settings is available as all settings will be lost during the code upload process. A hard copy is useful for checking purposes. It is usually possible to download the existing settings into Reydisp Evolution, save the file and then reload these settings into the relay following the upgrade. Reydisp will highlight any changes that it cannot automatically resolve for you to manually correct when re-installing the settings.. If the relay is in service then it is advisable to remove any TRIP LINKS to prevent in-advertent mal-operation due to incorrect settings being applied. The attachments are password protected self extracting zip files to prevent email systems discarding them or modifying them which should be saved with the "EX" extension renamed to be "EXE". The password that is applied to this zip file is "REYROLLE" in capital letters. 6.2.5 Loading Firmware using front usb port New firmware/software may be loaded via the USB port on the front Fascia. Check compatibility of software before starting the procedure. The relay will not accept firmware/software for which the MLFB ordering code is not supported. Installation instructions are provided with the upgrade firmware and should be studied before the procedure is attempted.. A USB connection between a PC and the relay front port is required. The process may take several minutes to complete at which time the relay will restart. Please make note of any warning or error messages that appear on the Reyfresh terminal window as the relay restarts. 6.2.6 Solving Software Upload Problems The relay will auto detect the download baud rate and will use whatever baud rate set within Reyfresh. However the default and maximum baud rate of 460800 bits/sec is preferred The download procedure has been tested on Windows 98, NT and XP. On Windows 98 it may be necessary to add the line :shell=C:\COMMAND.COM C:\ /e:4056 /p to the file C:\CONFIG.SYS to increase the environment space. When the relay restarts, messages appear on the LCD to confirm the number of I/O modules fitted, please press the ENTER key when requested if the details displayed are correct. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 73 of 74 7SR224 Argus Commissioning & Maintenance Guide (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 6 Page 74 of 74 7SR224 Argus Applications 7SR224 Recloser Controller Overcurrent Relay Document Release History This document is issue 2015/11. The list of revisions up to and including this issue is: 2008/03 First issue 2008/06 Second issue 2008/11 Third issue. Single/Triple Autoreclose added 2009/09 Fourth issue. Maintenance release 2010/04 Fifth issue. Synchronising added. 2010/09 Sixth Issue. TCS updated 2015/11 Software revisions moved to front of manual The copyright and other intellectual property rights in this document, and in any model or article produced from it (and including any registered or unregistered design rights) are the property of Siemens Protection Devices Limited. No part of this document shall be reproduced or modified or stored in another form, in any data retrieval system, without the permission of Siemens Protection Devices Limited, nor shall any model or article be reproduced from this document unless Siemens Protection Devices Limited consent. While the information and guidance given in this document is believed to be correct, no liability shall be accepted for any loss or damage caused by any error or omission, whether such error or omission is the result of negligence or any other cause. Any and all such liability is disclaimed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 7SR224 Argus Applications Contents Section 1: Common Functions............................................................................................................................ 4 1.1 Multiple Settings Groups .................................................................................................................... 4 1.2 Binary Inputs ..................................................................................................................................... 5 1.2.1 Alarm and Tripping Inputs..................................................................................................... 5 1.2.2 Control and tripping circuits .................................................................................................. 6 1.3 Binary Outputs................................................................................................................................... 8 1.4 LEDs ................................................................................................................................................. 8 1.5 Phase Allocation and Rotation............................................................................................................ 8 Section 2: Protection Functions .......................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N) ............................................................................................. 9 2.1.1 Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics ............................................................................. 10 2.1.2 Reset Delay ....................................................................................................................... 11 2.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) ............................................................................................... 12 2.3 Cold Load Settings (51c).................................................................................................................. 12 2.4 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N) ......................................................................................... 13 2.4.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes ........................................................................... 13 2.5 Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF) ........................................................................................... 15 2.6 Directional Protection (67) ................................................................................................................ 16 2.6.1 2 Out of 3 Logic.................................................................................................................. 18 2.7 Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G, 50/51N, 51/51SEF) ......................................................................... 19 2.8 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H) ................................................................... 20 2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) .............................................................................. 22 2.10 Undercurrent (37) ............................................................................................................................ 22 2.11 Thermal Overload (49) ..................................................................................................................... 22 2.12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59) ............................................................................................. 23 2.13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) ............................................................................................................... 24 2.13.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units ................................................................................. 25 2.13.2 Derived NVD Voltage ......................................................................................................... 25 2.14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) .................................................................................... 25 2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81).............................................................................................................. 26 Section 3: CT Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 27 3.1 CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection ............................................................ 27 3.1.1 Overcurrent Protection CTs ................................................................................................ 27 3.1.2 Earth Fault Protection CTs.................................................................................................. 27 3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection............................................ 28 Section 4: Control Functions ............................................................................................................................ 29 4.1 Auto-reclose Applications................................................................................................................. 29 4.1.1 Auto-Reclose Example 1 .................................................................................................... 30 4.1.2 Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR) .......................................................... 31 4.2 Synchronising.................................................................................................................................. 32 4.2.1 Check Sync, System Sync.................................................................................................. 32 4.2.2 Rated Voltage Setting - V.T. Connection ............................................................................ 32 4.2.3 Bus/Line Undervolts Settings .............................................................................................. 32 4.2.4 Voltage Differential Settings................................................................................................ 33 4.2.5 Synchronising Bypass Logic ............................................................................................... 33 4.2.6 Slip and Phase Angle Relationship ..................................................................................... 33 4.2.7 Check Synchronising Settings ............................................................................................ 34 4.2.8 System Synchronising Settings........................................................................................... 34 4.2.9 Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer ....................................................................... 35 4.2.10 Close on Zero .................................................................................................................... 36 4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function ............................................................................. 36 4.4 Single/Triple Autoreclose ................................................................................................................. 40 4.4.1 System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose ....................................... 40 4.4.2 Triple/Single Modes of Operation ........................................................................................ 41 4.4.3 Pole Discrepancy ............................................................................................................... 43 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 2 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.4.4 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example ................................................................................... 43 Section 5: Supervision Functions...................................................................................................................... 44 5.1 Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF)............................................................................................................... 44 5.1.1 Settings Guidelines ............................................................................................................ 44 5.2 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) ........................................................................................ 46 5.3 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) ........................................................................................ 47 5.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS) ...................................................................................................... 48 5.4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections................................................................................... 48 5.5 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) ................................................................................................................ 50 5.6 Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC) ..................................................................................... 50 5.7 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance ............................................................................................................ 50 List of Figures Figure 1.1-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups.................................................................... 4 Figure 1.2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring .......................................................... 5 Figure 1.2-2 - Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2...............................................................................................................7 Figure 2.1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied ........................................... 9 Figure 2.1-2 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied ............................................ 10 Figure 2.4-1 General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic ................................................................. 13 Figure 2.4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements ....................................... 14 Figure 2.5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application................................................................... 15 Figure 2.6-1 Directional Characteristics ............................................................................................ 16 Figure 2.6-2 Phase Fault Angles ....................................................................................................... 16 Figure 2.6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection ........................................................... 17 Figure 2.6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network ....................................................................... 18 Figure 2.7-1 Earth Fault Angles......................................................................................................... 19 Figure 2.8-1 Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers ................................... 20 Figure 2.8-2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection........................................ 21 Figure 2.11-1 Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic ........................................... 22 Figure 2.13-1 NVD Application .......................................................................................................... 24 Figure 2.13-2 NVD Protection Connections ....................................................................................... 24 Figure 2.15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements ......................................... 26 Figure 4.1-1 Sequence Co-ordination ................................................................................................ 29 Figure 4.3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point ................................................... 36 Figure 4.3-2 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. ...................................................................... 39 Figure 4.4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers. ........................... 40 Figure 4.4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic.......................................................................................... 43 Figure 5.1-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail...................................................................................................... 44 Figure 5.1-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing...................................................................... 45 Figure 5.1-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing......................................................................... 45 Figure 5.4-1:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) ......................................................................... 48 Figure 5.4-2:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) ......................................................................... 49 Figure 5.4-3:Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) ......................................................................... 49 List of Tables Table 2-1 Table 4-1 Table 4-2 Table 5-1 Table 5-2 Table 5-3 Table 5-4 Application of IDMTL Characteristics ............................................................................. 11 Typical Check Synchronising Settings ........................................................................... 34 Typical System Synchronising Settings ......................................................................... 35 Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) .................................................................. 46 Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) .................................................................. 47 Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases) ......................................................................... 47 Magnetic Inrush Bias ..................................................................................................... 50 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 3 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Section 1: Common Functions 1.1 Multiple Settings Groups Alternate settings groups can be used to reconfigure the relay during significant changes to system conditions e.g. Primary plant switching in/out. Summer/winter or day/night settings. switchable earthing connections. Loss of Grid connection (see below) Start generators Trip non-essential loads Local Generation Industrial system draws power from grid system during normal operation Select alternate settings group Relays normally use settings group 1 On loss of mains: Local generation switched in. Non essential loads tripped Relays on essential circuits switched to settings group 2 to reflect new load and fault currents RADIAL SUBSTATION Non-essential loads Figure 1.1-1 Example Use of Alternative Settings Groups (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 4 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 1.2 Binary Inputs Each Binary Input (BI) can be programmed to operate one or more of the relay functions, LEDs or output relays. These could be used to bring such digital signals as Inhibits for protection elements, the trip circuit supervision status, autoreclose control signals etc. into the Relay. 1.2.1 Alarm and Tripping Inputs A common use of binary inputs is to use the 7SR224 to provide indication of alarm or fault conditions from an external device which does not itself provide indication or recording facilities. The Binary Inputs are mapped to LED(s), waveform storage trigger and binary outputs. Note that external device outputs which require high speed tripping, should be wired to a binary input to provide LED indication and also have a parallel connection wired to directly trip the circuit via a blocking diode, see fig. 1.2-1: + - 7SR224 Alarm 1 BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n Tripping Element 1 BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n Alarm 1 BO n +ve -ve BI n BO n BO n Tripping Element 2 BO n +ve -ve BI n Alarm 3 +ve -ve BI n Tripping Element 3 +ve -ve External Device BI n Blocking Diodes TRIP CIRCUIT Figure 1.2-1 Example of External Device Alarm and Trip Wiring (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 5 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 1.2.2 Control and tripping circuits Where a binary input is used to as part of a control function, for example tripping or closing a circuit breaker, it may be desirable to provide an enhanced level of immunity to prevent maloperation due to induced voltages. This is most important where cross-site cabling is involved, as this is susceptible to induced voltages and will contribute to capacitive discharge currents under DC system earth fault conditions. One method of enhancing the immunity of the binary input is to switch both positive and negative connections; however this is often not possible or desirable. Where the battery voltage allows its use, the 88V binary input will give an added measure of immunity, compared to the 19V binary input, due to its higher minimum pickup voltage. As a guide to suitable degrees of enhanced immunity, we have adopted the parameters laid down in U.K. standard EATS 48-4. This standard identifies two levels of immunity: Category ESI 1 may be adopted for connections which do not include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. Category ESI 2 should be used for connections which include significant wiring runs or cabling outside the relay enclosure. This category also gives immunity to capacitive discharge currents. The following diagrams show the external resistors which should be fitted to allow the binary input to comply with either of the above categories. Fitting these components will raise the current required to operate the binary input, and hence makes it less susceptible to maloperation. Where required, the minimum pickup delay for the binary input is stated on the diagram. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 6 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications ESI-1 + 470 + ESI-2 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 10mA 220 30V DC Nominal (24 - 37.5V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) 1K5 BI (19V) 820 - + 1K6 - + 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 10mA 820 48V DC Nominal (37.5 - 60V Operative) IOP > 20mA BI (19V) BI (19V) 820 1K5 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 60V Capacitance discharge) + 2K2 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA 1K2 BI (19V) BI (19V) 330 560 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 25mA + 110V DC Nominal (87.5 - 137.5V Operative) IOP > 50mA BI (88V) BI (88V) 1K3 2K7 - - BI DTL = 10ms (10F, 150V Capacitance discharge) Resistor power ratings: 30V DC Nominal 48V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal 110V DC Nominal >3W >3W >10W (ESI- 1) >20W (ESI-2) Resistors must be wired with crimped connections as they may run hot Figure 1.2-2 - Binary Input Configurations Providing Compliance with EATS 48-4 Classes ESI 1 and ESI 2 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 7 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 1.3 Binary Outputs Binary Outputs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to bring out such digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc. All Binary Outputs are Trip rated Each can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Self-reset contacts are applicable to most protection applications. Hand-reset contacts are used where the output must remain active until the user expressly clears it e.g. in a control scheme where the output must remain active until some external feature has correctly processed it. Case contacts 26 and 27 will automatically short-circuit when the relay is withdrawn from the case. This can be used to provide an alarm that the Relay is out of service. Notes on Self Reset Outputs With a failed breaker condition the relay may remain operated until current flow in the primary system is interrupted by an upstream device. The relay will then reset and attempt to interrupt trip coil current flowing through an output contact. Where this level is above the break rating of the output contact an auxiliary relay with heavy-duty contacts should be utilised. 1.4 LEDs Output-function LEDs are mapped to output functions by means of settings. These could be used to display such digital signals as trips, a general pick-up, plant control signals etc. User Defined Function LEDs are used to indicate the status of Function Key operation. These do not relate directly to the operation of the Function Key but rather to its consequences. So that if a Function Key is depressed to close a Circuit-Breaker, the associated LED would show the status of the Circuit-Breaker closed Binary Input. Each LED can be defined as Self or Hand Reset. Hand reset LEDs are used where the user is required to expressly acknowledge the change in status e.g. critical operations such as trips or system failures. Self-reset LEDs are used to display features which routinely change state, such as Circuit-Breaker open or close. The status of hand reset LEDs is retained in capacitor-backed memory in the event of supply loss. 1.5 Phase Allocation and Rotation Settings are provided in the CT/VT Config menu to allow the phase letter references to be allocated to any of the three physical current or voltage input channels. This means that the three Recloser mechanisms 1, 2 and 3 can be pre-wired to the controller inputs V1 V2 V3 and I1 I2 I3 and the phase references A, B and C can be allocated later during commissioning when settings are installed to suit customer requirements. This feature allows for physical transposing of phases and different direction orientation of the Recloser installation without changes to secondary wiring and simply allocates the physical connections to be selected by the controller. If this setting is set incorrectly, metering and instrumentation will be incorrect and protection operation may be affected. The electrical (phasor) sequence can also be selected as A-B-C or A-C-B by a separate setting. This setting is used to select the positive phasor rotation sequence as either standard (A-B-C) or reverse sequence (A-C-B). If this setting is set incorrectly, directional polarizing of overcurrent protection will be incorrect and cause incorrect directional operation. Negative and positive sequence components will also be exchanged, for both current and voltage. This will cause incorrect metering as well as distortion to elements utilizing these components for measurement or polarizing. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 8 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Section 2: Protection Functions 2.1 Time delayed overcurrent (51/51G/51N) The 51-n characteristic element provides a number of time/current operate characteristics. The element can be defined as either an Inverse Definite Minimum Time Lag (IDMTL) or Definite Time Lag (DTL) characteristic. If an IDMTL characteristic is required, then IEC, ANSI/IEEE and a number of manufacturer specific curves are supported. IDMTL characteristics are defined as "Inverse" because their tripping times are inversely proportional to the Fault Current being measured. This makes them particularly suitable to grading studies where it is important that only the Relay(s) closest to the fault operate. Discrimination can be achieved with minimised operating times. To optimise the grading capability of the relay additional time multiplier, `Follower DTL' (Fig. 2.1-1) or `Minimum Operate Time' (Fig. 2.1-2) settings can be applied. 1000.00 1000.00 100.00 100.00 10.00 Operating Time (Seconds) Operating Time (Seconds) 10.00 Time Multiplier = 1 Follower DTL 1.00 1.00 Increasing Time Multiplier 0.10 0.10 0.01 0.01 1 10 100 1000 1 Current (x Is) 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Figure 2.1-1 IEC NI Curve with Time Multiplier and Follower DTL Applied (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 9 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 1000.00 OPERATE ZONE 100.00 Operating Time (Seconds) 10.00 Min Operate Time = 4sec IEC NI Curve: TM = 1 1.00 0.10 0.01 1 10 100 1000 Current (x Is) Figure 2.1-2 IEC NI Curve with Minimum Operate Time Setting Applied To increase sensitivity, dedicated Earth fault elements are used. There should be little or no current flowing to earth in a healthy system so such relays can be given far lower pick-up levels than relays which detect excess current ( > load current) in each phase conductor. Such dedicated earth fault relays are important where the fault path to earth is a high-resistance one (such as in highly arid areas) or where the system uses high values of earthing resistor / reactance and the fault current detected in the phase conductors will be limited. 2.1.1 Selection of Overcurrent Characteristics Each pole has two independent over-current characteristics. Where required the two curves can be used: To produce a composite curve To provide a two stage tripping scheme Where one curve is to be directionalised in the forward direction the other in the reverse direction. The characteristic curve shape is selected to be the same type as the other relays on the same circuit or to grade with items of plant e.g. fuses or earthing resistors. The application of IDMTL characteristic is summarised in the following table: (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 10 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications OC/EF Curve Characteristic IEC Normal Inverse (NI) Application Generally applied ANSI Moderately Inverse (MI) IEC Very Inverse (VI) Used with high impedance paths where there is a significant difference between fault levels at protection points ANSI Very Inverse (VI) IEC Extreme Inversely (EI) Grading with Fuses ANSI Extremely Inverse (EI) IEC Long Time Inverse (LTI) Used to protect transformer earthing resistors having long withstand times Recloser Specific Use when grading with specific recloser Table 2-1 2.1.2 Application of IDMTL Characteristics Reset Delay The increasing use of plastic insulated cables, both conventionally buried and aerial bundled conductors, have given rise to the number of flashing intermittent faults on distribution systems. At the fault position, the plastic melts and temporarily reseals the faulty cable for a short time after which the insulation fails again. The same phenomenon has occurred in compound-filled joint boxes or on `clashing' overhead line conductors. The repeating process of the fault can cause electromechanical disc relays to "ratchet" up and eventually trip the faulty circuit if the reset time of the relay is longer than the time between successive faults. To mimic an electromechanical relay the relay can be user programmed for an ANSI DECAYING characteristic when an ANSI operate characteristic is applied. Alternatively a DTL reset (0 to 60 seconds) can be used with other operate characteristics. For protection of cable feeders, it is recommended that a 60 second DTL reset be used. On overhead line networks, particularly where reclosers are incorporated in the protected system, instantaneous resetting is desirable to ensure that, on multiple shot reclosing schemes, correct grading between the source relays and the relays associated with the reclosers is maintained. R3 R1 R2 FAULT Clashing conductors or re-sealing cable TRIP Argus (Inst. Reset) % of Algorithm Disc Travel Electro-mechanical Relay Time (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Argus (DTL Reset) TRIP Time Chapter 7 Page 11 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) Reduced voltage can indicate a fault on the system, it can be used to make the 51 elements more sensitive. Typically Voltage Dependent Over-current (51V) is applied to: Transformer Incomers: Where the impedance of the transformer limits fault current the measured voltage level can be used to discriminate between load and fault current. Long lines: Where the impedance of the line limits fault current the measured voltage level can be used to discriminate between load and fault current. Generator circuits: When a Generator is subjected to a short circuit close to its terminals the shortcircuit current follows a complex profile. After the initial "sub-transient" value, generally in the order of 7 to 10 times full load current, it falls rapidly (around 10 to 20ms) to the "transient" value. This is still about 5 to 7 times full load and would be sufficient to operate the protection's over-current elements. However the effect on armature reactance of the highly inductive short-circuit current is to increase significantly the internal impedance to the synchronous reactance value. If the Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR) system does not respond to increase the excitation, the fault current will decay over the next few seconds to a value below the full load current. This is termed the steady state fault current, determined by the Generator's synchronous reactance (and pre-fault excitation). It will be insufficient to operate the protection's over-current elements and the fault will not be detected. Even if AVR is active, problems may still be encountered. The AVR will have a declared minimum sustained fault current and this must be above the protection over-current settings. Close-in short circuit faults may also cause the AVR to reach its safety limits for supplying maximum excitation boost, in the order of several seconds, and this will result in AVR internal protection devices such as diode fuses to start operating. The generator excitation will then collapse, and the situation will be the same as when no AVR was present. The fault may again not be detected. Current grading remains important since a significant voltage reduction may be seen for faults on other parts of the system. An inverse time operating characteristic must therefore be used. The VDO Level - the voltage setting below which the more sensitive operating curve applies - must be set low enough to discriminate between short-circuits and temporary voltage dips due to overloads. However, it must also be high enough to cover a range of voltage drops for different circuit configurations, from around 0.6Vn to almost zero. Typically it will be set in the range 0.6 to 0.8Vn. 2.3 Cold Load Settings (51c) Once a Circuit-Breaker has been open for a period of time ed, higher than normal levels of load current may flow following CB re-closure e.g. heating or refrigeration plant. The size and duration of this current is dependent upon the type of load and the time that the CB is open. The feature allows the relay to use alternative Shaped Overcurrent (51c) settings when a Cold Load condition is identified. The cold load current and time multiplier settings will normally be set higher than those of the normal overcurrent settings. The relay will revert to its usual settings (51-n) after elapse of the cold load period. This is determined either by a user set delay, or by the current in all 3-phases falling below a set level (usually related to normal load levels) for a user set period. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 12 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.4 Instantaneous Overcurrent (50/50G/50N) Each instantaneous element has an independent setting for pick-up current and a follower definite time lag (DTL) which can be used to provide time grading margins, sequence co-ordination grading or scheme logic. The "instantaneous" description relates to the pick-up of the element rather than its operation. Operating time Operating Characteristic: 50-n Current Figure 2.4-1 General Form of DTL Operate Characteristic Instantaneous elements can be used in current graded schemes where there is a significant difference between the fault current levels at different relay point. The Instantaneous element is set to pick up at a current level above the maximum Fault Current level at the next downstream relay location, and below its own fault current level. The protection is set to operate instantaneously and is often termed `Highset Overcurrent'. A typical application is the protection of transformer HV connections - the impedance of the transformer ensuring that the LV side has a much lower level of fault current. The 50-n elements have a very low transient overreach i.e. their accuracy is not appreciably affected by the initial dc offset transient associated with fault inception. 2.4.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection Schemes A combination of instantaneous and DTL elements can be used in blocked overcurrent protection schemes. These protection schemes are applied to protect substation busbars or interconnectors etc. Blocked overcurrent protection provides improved fault clearance times when compared against normally graded overcurrent relays. The blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar protection shown in Figure 2.2-2 illustrates that circuit overcurrent and earth fault protection relays can additionally be configured with busbar protection logic. The diagram shows a substation. The relay on the incomer is to trip for busbar faults (F1) but remain inoperative for circuit faults (F2). In this example the overcurrent and earth fault settings for the incomer 50-1 element are set to below the relevant busbar fault levels. 50-1 time delay is set longer than it would take to acknowledge receipt of a blocking signal from an outgoing circuit. Close up faults on the outgoing circuits will have a similar fault level to busbar faults. As the incomer 50-1 elements would operate for these faults it is necessary to provide a blocking output from the circuit protections. The 50-1 elements of the output relays are given lower current settings than the incomer 50-1 settings, the time delay is set to 0ms. The output is mapped to a contact. The outgoing relay blocking contacts of all circuits are wired in parallel and this wiring is also connected to a BI on the incomer relay. The BI on the incomer relay is mapped to block its 50-1 element. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 13 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications INCOMER Power flow Block 50-1 51-1 50-1 (100ms) 51-1 F1 50-1 (0ms) 50-1 (0ms) 50-1 (0ms) 50-1 (0ms) Blocking outputs for circuit faults F2 Figure 2.4-2 Blocking Scheme Using Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements Typically a time delay as low as 50ms on the incomer 50-1 element will ensure that the incomer is not tripped for outgoing circuit faults. However, to include for both equipment tolerances and a safety margin a minimum time delay of 100ms is recommended. This type of scheme is very cost effective and provides a compromise between back-up overcurrent busbar protection and dedicated schemes of busbar protection. Instantaneous elements are also commonly applied to autoreclose schemes to grade with downstream circuit reclosers and maximise the probability of a successful auto-reclose sequence - see section 4 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 14 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.5 Sensitive Earth-fault Protection (50SEF) Earth fault protection is based on the assumption that fault current levels will be limited only by the earth fault impedance of the line and associated plant. However, it may be difficult to make an effective short circuit to earth due to the nature of the terrain e.g. dry earth, desert or mountains. The resulting earth fault current may therefore be limited to very low levels. Sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is used to detect such faults. This range of relays have a low burden, so avoiding unacceptable loading of the CTs at low current settings. SEF provides a backup to the main protection. A DTL characteristic with a time delay of several seconds is typically applied ensuring no interference with other discriminative protections. A relatively long time delay can be tolerated since fault current is low and it is impractical to grade SEF protection with other earth fault protections. Although not suitable for grading with other forms of protection SEF relays may be graded with each other. Where very sensitive current settings are required then it is preferable to use a core balance CT rather than wire into the residual connection of the line CTs. The turns ratio of a core balance CT can be much smaller than that of phase conductors as they are not related to the rated current of the protected circuit and are not required to measure the higher currents associated with phase to phase faults. Since only one core is used, the CT magnetising current losses are also reduced by a factor of three. If a core balance CT is applied to a network where high earth fault currents can occur, these currents can cause saturation of the core leading to reduced CT output. In this case it is recommended that the SEF protection is applied with support from Earth Fault protection with less sensitive settings. This lower level of sensitivity is easily achieved by Derived Earth Fault protection which uses the calculated sum of the three phase currents as its operating quantity. The 7SR224 provides this feature by allowing the 50/51G Measured earth fault elements to alternatively use a calculated quantity whilst the 50/51SEF elements use the I4 measured quantity. INCOMER Core Balance CT Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Figure 2.5-1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection Application There are limits to how sensitive an SEF relay may be set since the setting must be above any line charging current levels that can be detected by the relay. On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault e.g. on circuit 3 the elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively earthed system can result in a zero sequence current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the relay location. The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes transients. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging current. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 15 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.6 Directional Protection (67) Each overcurrent stage can operate for faults in either forward or reverse direction. Convention dictates that forward direction refers to power flow away from the busbar, while reverse direction refers to power flowing towards the busbar. The directional phase fault elements, 67/50 and 67/51, work with a Quadrature Connection to prevent loss of polarising quantity for close-in phase faults. That is, each of the current elements is directionalised by a voltage derived from the other two phases. This connection introduces a 90 Phase Shift (Current leading Voltage) between reference and operate quantities which must be allowed for in the Characteristic Angle setting. This is the expected fault angle, sometimes termed the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) as an analogy to older Electro-mechanical type relays Example: Expected fault angle is -30 (Current lagging Voltage) so set Directional Angle to: +90 -30 = +60. A fault is determined to be in the selected direction if its phase relationship lies within a quadrant +/- 85 either side of the Characteristic Angle setting. Current - operating quantity Characteristic Angle OPERATE Volts - polarising quantity OPERATING BOUNDARY (Zero Torque Line) INHIBIT Figure 2.6-1 Directional Characteristics A number of studies have been made to determine the optimum MTA settings e.g. W.K Sonnemann's paper "A Study of Directional Element Connections for Phase Relays". Figure 2 10 shows the most likely fault angle for phase faults on Overhead Line and Cable circuits. Current lagging Voltage V - 300 MTA V MTA - 450 I Plain Feeders (Overhead Lines) I Transformer Feeders (Cable Circuits) Figure 2.6-2 Phase Fault Angles (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 16 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Directional overcurrent elements allow greater fault selectivity than non-directional elements for interconnected systems where fault current can flow in both directions through the relaying point. Consider the network shown in fig. 2.6-3. The Circuit breakers at A, B, E and G have directional overcurrent relays fitted since fault current can flow in both directions at these points. The forward direction is defined as being away from the busbar and against the direction of normal load current flow. These forward looking IDMTL elements can have sensitive settings applied i.e. low current and time multiplier settings. Note that 7SR22 relays may be programmed with forward, reverse and non-directional elements simultaneously when required by the protection scheme. A B C D E G Load Figure 2.6-3 Application of Directional Overcurrent Protection (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 17 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications A B C D Fault 1 E G Load Figure 2.6-4 Feeder Fault on Interconnected Network Considering the D-G feeder fault shown in fig. 2.6-4: the current magnitude through breakers C and D will be similar and their associated relays will similar prospective operate times. To ensure that only the faulted feeder is isolated G FWD must be set to be faster than C. Relay G will thus Trip first on FWD settings, leaving D to operate to clear the fault. The un-faulted Feeder C-E maintains power to the load. Relays on circuits C and D at the main substation need not be directional to provide the above protection scheme. However additional directional elements could be mapped to facilitate a blocked overcurrent scheme of busbar protection. At A and B, forward looking directional elements enable sensitive settings to be applied to detect transformer faults whilst reverse elements can be used to provide back-up protection for the relays at C and D. By using different settings for forward and reverse directions, closed ring circuits can be set to grade correctly whether fault current flows in a clockwise or counter clockwise direction i.e. it may be practical to use only one relay to provide dual directional protection. 2.6.1 2 Out of 3 Logic Sensitive settings can be used with directional overcurrent relays since they are directionalised in a way which opposes the flow of normal load current i.e. on the substation incomers as shown on fig. 2.6-4. However on occurrence of transformer HV or feeder incomer phase-phase faults an unbalanced load current may still flow as an un balanced driving voltage is present. This unbalanced load current during a fault may be significant where sensitive overcurrent settings are applied - the load current in one phase may be in the operate direction and above the relay setting. Where this current distribution may occur then the relay is set to CURRENT PROTECTION>PHASE OVERCURRENT> 67 2-out-of-3 Logic = ENABLED Enabling 2-out-of-3 logic will prevent operation of the directional phase fault protection for a single phase to earth fault. Dedicated earth-fault protection should therefore be used if required. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 18 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.7 Directional Earth-Fault (50/51G, 50/51N, 51/51SEF) The directional earth-fault elements, either measure directly or derive from the three line currents the zero sequence current (operate quantity) and compare this against the derived zero phase sequence voltage (polarising quantity). Section 1 of the Technical Manual `Description of Operation' details the method of measurement. The required setting is entered directly as dictated by the system impedances. Example: Expected fault angle is -45 (i.e. residual current lagging residual voltage) therefore 67G Char Angle = -45 However directional earth elements can be selectable to use either ZPS or NPS Polarising. This is to allow for the situation where ZPS voltage is not available; perhaps because a 3-limb VT is being used. Care must be taken as the Characteristic Angle will change if NPS Polarising is used. Once again the fault angle is completely predictable, though this is a little more complicated as the method of earthing must be considered. MTA (I wrt V) 0 O -15 0 Resistive Neutral -900 -650 -450 Reactive Neutral VRES VRES VRES VRES VRES IRES Resistance Earthed Systems IRES Earthing Transformer with Resistor IRES Distribution System - Solidly Earthed IRES IRES Transmission System - Solidly Earthed Reactance Earthed Systems Figure 2.7-1 Earth Fault Angles (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 19 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.8 High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64H) Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection is applied to Transformers to detect low level earth faults in the transformer windings. Current transformers are located on all connections to the transformer. During normal operation or external fault conditions no current will flow in the relay element. When an internal earth fault occurs, the currents in the CTs will not balance and the resulting unbalance flows through the relay. The current transformers may saturate when carrying high levels of fault current. The high impedance name is derived from the fact that a resistor is added to the relay leg to prevent relay operation due to CT saturation under through fault conditions. The REF Trip output is configured to provide an instantaneous trip output from the relay to minimise damage from developing winding faults. The application of the element to a Delta-Star transformer is shown in Figure 2-5. Although the connection on the delta winding is more correctly termed a Balanced Earth-Fault element, it is still usually referred to as Restricted Earth Fault because of the presence of the transformer. Balanced Earth Fault Figure 2.8-1 Restricted Earth Fault Balanced and Restricted Earth-fault protection of Transformers The calculation of the value of the Stability Resistor is based on the worst case where one CT fully saturates and the other balancing CT does not saturate at all. A separate Siemens Protection Devices Limited Publication is available covering the calculation procedure for REF protection. To summarise this: The relay Stability (operating) Vs voltage is calculated using worst case lead burden to avoid relay operation for through-fault conditions where one of the CTs may be fully saturated. The required fault setting (primary operate current) of the protection is chosen; typically, this is between 10 % and 25 % of the protected winding rated current. The relay setting current is calculated based on the secondary value of the operate current, note, however, that the summated CT magnetising current @ Vs must be subtracted to obtain the required relay operate current setting. Since the relay operate current setting and stability/operating voltage are now known, a value for the series resistance can now be calculated. A check is made as to whether a Non-Linear Resistor is required to limit scheme voltage during internal fault conditions - typically where the calculated voltage is in excess of 2kV. The required thermal ratings for external circuit components are calculated. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 20 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Composite overcurrent and REF protection can be provided using a multi-element relay as. overcurrent elements series stabilising resistor 25 REF element non-linear resistor Figure 2.8-2 Composite Overcurrent and Restricted Earth-fault Protection Although core-balance CTs are traditionally used with elements requiring sensitive pickup settings, cost and size usually precludes this on REF schemes. Instead single-Phase CTs are used and their secondary's connected in parallel. Where sensitive settings are required, the setting must be above any line charging current levels that can be detected by the relay. On occurrence of an out of zone earth fault the elevation of sound phase voltage to earth in a non-effectively earthed system can result in a zero sequence current of up 3 times phase charging current flowing through the relay location. The step change from balanced 3-phase charging currents to this level of zero sequence current includes transients. It is recommended to allow for a transient factor of 2 to 3 when determining the limit of charging current. Based on the above considerations the minimum setting of a relay in a resistance earthed power system is 6 to 9 times the charging current per phase. High impedance differential protection is suitable for application to auto transformers as line currents are in phase and the secondary current through the relay is balanced to zero by the use of CTs ratios at all three terminals. High impedance protection of this type is very sensitive and fast operating for internal faults. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 21 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.9 Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent (46NPS) The presence of Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) current indicates an unbalance in the phase currents, either due to a fault or unbalanced load. NPS current presents a major problem for 3-phase rotating plant. It produces a reaction magnetic field which rotates in the opposite direction, and at twice the frequency, to the main field created by the DC excitation system. This induces double-frequency currents into the rotor which cause very large eddy currents in the rotor body. The 2 resulting heating of the rotor can be severe and is proportional to (I2) t. Generators and Motors are designed, manufactured and tested to be capable of withstanding unbalanced current for specified limits. Their withstand is specified in two parts; continuous capability based on a figure of I2, and 2 short time capability based on a constant, K, where K = (I2) t. NPS overcurrent protection is therefore configured to match these two plant characteristics. 2.10 Undercurrent (37) Undercurrent elements are used in control logic schemes such as Auto-Changeover Schemes, Auto-Switching Interlock and Loss of Load. They are used to indicate that current has ceased to flow or that a low load situation exists. For this reason simple Definite Time Lag (DTL) elements may be used. For example, once it has been determined that fault current has been broken - the CB is open and no current flows - an auto-isolation sequence may safely be initiated. 2.11 Thermal Overload (49) The element uses measured 3-phase current to estimate the real-time Thermal State, , of cables or transformers. The Thermal State is based on both past and present current levels. = 0% for unheated equipment, and = 100% for maximum thermal withstand of equipment or the Trip threshold. 100% Trip Thermal Equilibrium Overload ? 0% Figure 2.11-1 Thermal Overload Heating and Cooling Characteristic TIME For given current level, the Thermal State will ramp up over time until Thermal Equilibrium is reached when Heating Effects of Current = Thermal Losses. The heating / cooling curve is primarily dependant upon the Thermal Time Constant. This must be matched against that quoted for the item of plant being protected. Similarly the current tripping threshold, I , is related to the thermal withstand of the plant. Thermal Overload is a slow acting protection, detecting faults or system conditions too small to pick-up fast acting protections such as Phase Overcurrent. An Alarm is provided for at or above a set % of capacity to indicate that a potential trip condition exists and that the system should be scrutinised for abnormalities. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 22 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.12 Under/Over Voltage Protection (27/59) Power system under-voltages on may occur due to: System faults. An increase in system loading, Non-energized power system e.g. loss of an incoming transformer During normal system operating conditions regulating equipment such as transformer On Load Tap Changers (OLTC) and generator Automatic Voltage Regulators (AVR) ensure that the system runs within acceptable voltage limits. 7SR24 undervoltage/DTL elements can be used to detect abnormal undervoltage conditions due to system overloads. Binary outputs can be used to trip non-essential loads - returning the system back to its normal operating levels. This `load shedding' should be initiated via time delay elements so avoiding operation during transient disturbances. An under voltage scheme (or a combined under frequency/under voltage scheme) can provide faster tripping of non-essential loads than under-frequency load shedding so minimising the possibility of system instability. Where a transformer is supplying 3-phase motors a significant voltage drop e.g. to below 80% may cause the motors to stall. An undervoltage element can be set to trip motor circuits when the voltage falls below a preset value so that on restoration of supply an overload is not caused by the simultaneous starting of all the motors. A time delay is required to ensure voltage dips due to remote system faults do not result in an unnecessary disconnection of motors. To confirm presence/loss of supply, the voltage elements should be set to values safely above/below that where a normal system voltage excursion can be expected. The switchgear/plant design should be considered. The `Dead' level may be very near to the `live' level or may be significantly below it. The variable hysteresis setting allows the relay to be used with all types of switchgear. System over-voltages can damage component insulation. Excessive voltage may occur for: Sudden loss of load A tap changer run-away condition occurs in the high voltage direction, Generator AVR equipment malfunctions or Reactive compensation control malfunctions. System regulating equipment such as transformer tap changers and generator AVRs may correct the overvoltage - unless this equipment mal-functions. The 7SR24 overvoltage/DTL elements can be used to protect against damage caused by system overvoltages. If the overvoltage condition is small a relatively long DTL time delay can be used. If the overvoltage is more severe then another element, set at a higher pickup level and with a shorter DTL can be used to isolate the circuit more quickly. Alternatively, elements can be set to provide alarm and tripping stages, with the alarm levels set lower than the tripping stages. The use of DTL settings allows a grading system to be applied to co-ordinate the network design, the regulating plant design, system plant insulation withstand and with other overvoltage relays elsewhere on the system. The DTL also prevents operation during transient disturbances. The use of IDMTL protection is not recommended because of the difficulty of choosing settings to ensure correct co-ordination and security of supply. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 23 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.13 Neutral Overvoltage (59N) Neutral Overvoltage Displacement (Residual Overvoltage) protection is used to detect an earth fault where little or no earth current flows. This can occur where a feeder has been tripped at its HV side for an earth fault, but the circuit is still energised from the LV side via an unearthed transformer winding. Insufficient earth current would be present to cause a trip, but residual voltage would increase significantly; reaching up to 3-times the normal phase-earth voltage level. If Neutral Overvoltage protection is used, it must be suitably time graded with other protections in order to prevent unwanted tripping for external system earth faults. EHV/HV HV/MV Transformer Feeder HV CB OC/EF HV CB Tripped by local protection MV CB Earth fault NVD MV CB tripped by: 1) Feeder unit protection or 2) Intertrip from HV feeder protection or 3) NVD protection Figure 2.13-1 NVD Application Typically NVD protection measures the residual voltage (3V0) directly from an open delta VT or from capacitor cones - see fig. 2.13-2 below. VT with Open Delta Secondary Capacitor Cone Unit Capacitor Cone Adaptor Unit 3Vo Relay 3Vo Relay Figure 2.13-2 NVD Protection Connections (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 24 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.13.1 Application with Capacitor Cone Units Capacitor cones provide a cost effective method of deriving residual voltage. The wide range of capacitor cone component values used by different manufacturers means that the relay cannot be connected directly to the cones. The external adaptor unit contains parallel switched capacitors that enable a wide range of values to be selected using a DIL switch and hence the Capacitor Cone output can be scaled to the standard relay input range. 2.13.2 Derived NVD Voltage Alternatively NVD voltage can be derived from the three phase to neutral voltages, this setting is available within the relay. Note with this method the NVD protection may mal-operate during a VT Fail condition. 2.14 Negative Phase Sequence Overvoltage (47) Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection detects phase unbalances and is widely used in protecting rotating plant such as motors and generators. However such protection is almost universally based on detecting NPS Current rather than Voltage. This is because the NPS impedance of motors etc. is much less than the Positive Phase Sequence (PPS) impedance and therefore the ratio of NPS to PPS Current is much higher than the equivalent ratio of NPS to PPS Voltage. NPS Voltage is instead used for monitoring busbar supply quality rather than detecting system faults. The presence of NPS Voltage is due to unbalanced load on a system. Any system voltage abnormality is important since it will affect every motor connected to the source of supply and can result in mass failures in an industrial plant. The two NPS Voltage DTL elements should therefore be used as Alarms to indicate that the level of NPS has reached abnormal levels. Remedial action can then be taken, such as introducing a Balancer network of capacitors and inductors. Very high levels of NPS Voltage indicate incorrect phase sequence due to an incorrect connection. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 25 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 2.15 Under/Over Frequency (81) During normal system operation the frequency will continuously vary over a relatively small range due to the changing generation/load balance. Excessive frequency variation may occur for: Loss of generating capacity, or loss of mains supply (underfrequency): If the governors and other regulating equipment cannot respond to correct the balance, a sustained underfrequency condition may lead to a system collapse. Loss of load - excess generation (overfrequency): The generator speeds will increase causing a proportional frequency rise. This may be unacceptable to industrial loads, for example, where the running speeds of synchronous motors will be affected. In the situation where the system frequency is falling rapidly it is common practise to disconnect non-essential loads until the generation-load balance can be restored. Usually, automatic load shedding, based on underfrequency is implemented. Underfrequency relays are usually installed on the transformer incomers of distribution or industrial substations as this provides a convenient position from which to monitor the busbar frequency. Loads are disconnected from the busbar (shed) in stages until the frequency stabilises and returns to an acceptable level. The 7SR24 has six under/over frequency elements. An example scheme may have the first load shedding stage set just below the nominal frequency, e.g. between 49.0 - 49.5Hz. A time delay element would be associated with this to allow for transient dips in frequency and to provide a time for the system regulating equipment to respond. If the first load shedding stage disconnects sufficient plant the frequency will stabilise and perhaps return to nominal. If, however, this is not sufficient then a second load shedding stage, set at a lower frequency, will shed further loads until the overload is relieved. This process will continue until all stages have operated. In the event of the load shedding being unsuccessful, a final stage of underfrequency protection should be provided to totally isolate all loads before plant is damaged, e.g. due to overfluxing. An alternative type of load shedding scheme would be to set all underfrequency stages to about the same frequency setting but to have different length time delays set on each stage. If after the first stage is shed the frequency doesn't recover then subsequent stages will shed after longer time delays have elapsed. Network Incomer STAGE 1: Least important STAGE 2 STAGE 3 STAGE 4 Generator G59 300/5 STAGE 5 STAGE 6 5 1 2 6 5 3 4 2 4 Essential Load Figure 2.15-1 Load Shedding Scheme Using Under-Frequency Elements (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 26 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Section 3: CT Requirements 3.1 CT Requirements for Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection 3.1.1 Overcurrent Protection CTs a) For industrial systems with relatively low fault current and no onerous grading requirements - a class 10P10 with VA rating to match the load. b) For utility distribution networks with relatively high fault current and several grading stages - a class 5P20, with VA rating to match the load. Note: if an accuracy limit factor is chosen which is much lower than the maximum fault current it will be necessary to consider any effect on the protection system performance and accuracy e.g. grading margins. For i.d.m.t.l. applications, because the operating time at high fault current is a definite minimum value, partial saturation of the CT at values beyond the overcurrent factor has only a minimal effect. However, this must be taken into account in establishing the appropriate setting to ensure proper grading. Definite Time and Instantaneous Overcurrent a) For industrial systems with requirements as for i.d.m.t.l. relays item (a) above, a class 10P10 (or 20). b) For utilities as for (b) above - a class 5P10 (or 20), with rated burden to suit the load. Note: Overcurrent factors do not need to be high for definite time protection because once the setting is exceeded magnitude accuracy is not important. Often, however, there is also the need to consider instantaneous HighSet overcurrent protection as part of the same protection system and the settings would normally be of the order of 10x the CT rating or higher. Where higher settings are to be used then the overcurrent factor must be raised accordingly, e.g. to P20. 3.1.2 Earth Fault Protection CTs Considerations and requirements for earth fault protection are the same as for Phase fault. Usually the relay employs the same CT's e.g. three phase CTs star connected to derive the residual earth fault current. The accuracy class and overcurrent accuracy limit factors are therefore already determined and for both these factors the earth fault protection requirements are normally less onerous than for overcurrent. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 27 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 3.2 CT Requirements for High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault Protection For high impedance schemes it is necessary to establish characteristics of the CT in accordance with Class `PX' to IEC 60044. The basic requirements are: All CT's should, if possible have identical turns ratios. The knee point voltage of each CT, should be at least 2 x Vs. The knee point voltage is expressed as the voltage applied to the secondary circuit with the primary open circuit which when increased by 10% causes the magnetizing current to increase by 50%. Where the REF function is used then this dictates that the other protection functions are also used with class PX CTs. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 28 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Section 4: Control Functions 4.1 Auto-reclose Applications Automatic circuit reclosing is extensively applied to overhead line circuits where a high percentage of faults that occur are of a transient nature. By automatically reclosing the circuit-breaker the feature attempts to minimise the loss of supply to the customer and reduce the need for manual intervention. The Recloser supports up to 4 ARC sequences. That is, 4 x Trip / Recloses followed by a Trip & Lockout. A lockout condition prevents any further attempts, automatic or manual, to close the circuit-breaker. The number of sequences selected depends upon the type of faults expected. If there are a sufficient percentage of semipermanent faults which could be burnt away, e.g. fallen branches, a multi shot scheme would be appropriate. Alternatively, if there is a high likelihood of permanent faults, a single shot scheme would minimise the chances of causing damage by reclosing onto a fault. In general, 80% of faults will be cleared by a single Trip and Reclose sequence. A further 10% will be cleared by a second Trip and Reclose. Different sequences can be selected for different fault types (Phase/Earth/Sensitive Earth faults). The Deadtime is the interval between the trip and the CB close pulse being issued. This is to allow for the line to go `dead' after the fault is cleared. The delay chosen is a compromise between the need to return the line to service as soon as possible and prevented unnecessary trips through re-closing too soon. The Reclaim Time is the delay following a re-closure before the line can be considered back in service. This should be set long enough to allow for protection operation for the same fault, but not so long that two separate faults could occur in the same Autoreclose (ARC) sequence and cause unnecessary lockouts. The Sequence Fail Timer provides an overall maximum time limit on the ARC operation. It should therefore be longer than all the set delays in a complete cycle of ARC sequences; trip delays, Deadtimes, Reclaim Time etc. Generally this will only be exceeded if the circuit-breaker has either failed to open or close. Since large fault currents could potentially damage the system during a prolonged ARC sequence, there are also settings to identify which protection elements are High-sets and these can cause an early termination of the sequence. Where a relay is to operate as part of an ARC scheme involving a number of other relays, the feature attempts to clear any faults quickly without regard to normal fault current grading. It does this by setting each Trip element to be either Delayed or Instantaneous. Instantaneous Trips are set to operate at just above maximum load current with small delays while Delayed Trips are set to suit actual fault levels and with delays suitable for current grading. A typical sequence would be 2 Instantaneous Trips followed by a Delayed Trip & Lockout: * When any fault occurs, the relay will trip instantaneously and then reclose. * If this does not clear the fault, the relay will do the same again. * If this still does not clear the fault, the fault is presumed to be permanent and the next Trip will be Delayed and so suitable for grading with the rest of the network. Thus allowing downstream protection time to operate. * This Trip will Lockout the ARC sequence and prevent further recloses. It is important that all the relays in an ARC scheme shadow this process - advancing through their own ARC sequences when a fault is detected by an element pickup even though they are not actually causing a trip or reclose. This is termed Sequence Co-ordination and prevents an excessive number of recloses as each successive relay attempts to clear the fault in isolation. For this reason each relay in an ARC scheme must be set with identical Instantaneous and Delayed sequence of trips. A B C D Figure 4.1-1 Sequence Co-ordination (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 29 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications The relay closest to the fault (D) would step through its Instantaneous Trips in an attempt to clear the fault. If unsuccessful, the relay would move to a Delayed Trip sequence. The other relays in the network (A, B and C) would recognise the sequence of Pick-up followed by current switchoff as ARC sequences. They would therefore also step to their Delayed Trip to retain co-ordination with the respective downstream devices. The next Trip would be subject to current grading and Lockout the ARC sequence such that the fault is cleared by the correct CB. 4.1.1 Auto-Reclose Example 1 Requirement: Settings shall provide four phase fault recloses - two instantaneous and two delayed - and only two recloses for faults detected by the SEF protection. Proposed settings include: CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROT'N: 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1 79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1 79 SEF Delayed Trips: 51SEF-1 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG 79 Num Shots: 4 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 1 : Inst 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 2 : Inst 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 3 : Delayed 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 : Delayed 79 P/F Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > SEF SHOTS 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 1 : Delayed 79 SEF Prot'n Trip 2 : Delayed 79 SEF Delayed Trips to Lockout : 3 Note that Instantaneous' shots are inhibited if the shot is defined as `Delayed' (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 30 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.1.2 Auto-Reclose Example 2 (Use of Quicklogic with AR) A TIME B 51-1 50-1 I1 I2 CURRENT Requirement: The relay at location `A' it is required to provide a reclose sequence of 2 Instantaneous followed by 2 delayed recloses. Where the fault current level is between the values `I1' and `I2' and the first trip is initiated from the 51-1 (IDMT) element, the IDMT characteristic should trip the CB and lockout the auto-reclose. Typical settings are: CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE PROT'N: 79 P/F Inst Trips: 50-1 79 P/F Delayed Trips: 51-1 CONTROL & LOGIC > AUTORECLOSE CONFIG > P/F SHOTS 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 1 : Inst 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 2 : Inst 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 3 : Delayed 79 P/F Prot'n Trip 4 : Delayed The above settings are suitable at values of fault current above `I2' however were a fault to occur with a current value between `I1' and `I2' this would be detected by the 51-1 element only. As Prot'n Trip 1 = Inst then the relay would trip and reclose whereas it is required to lockout for this occurrence. To provide a lockout for the above faults an additional element 50-2 with identical settings to 50-1 is assigned as a Delayed Trip and is used in conjunction with the Quick Logic feature i.e. OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 51-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 50-2 = V2 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = V3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = V1.!V2 INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX: 79 Lockout = V3 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 31 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.2 Synchronising The 7SR224 includes an optional Synchronising function which can be incorporated into the autoreclose and manual close sequences. The device provides a combined check and system synchronising function which can automatically select check or system synchronise, as appropriate, from measurements of the relative phase angles between the line and bus voltages. The relay will prevent closure of the circuit breaker if the phase angle, slip frequency or the voltage magnitudes of the incoming and running voltages fall outside prescribed limits. Both the check and system synchronise functions have independent settings and blocking features. Synchronising bypass logic is provided to close or block close when the circuit breaker is dead on the line side, bus side or both. 4.2.1 Check Sync, System Sync The function can be used as a check and system synchronising relay for applications where two power systems are to be connected. The following examples show various ways that the relay can be enabled for different applications. The device will switch between check sync (CS) and system sync (SS) modes to suit system conditions. If the requirement is for the relay to be used as a check before closing or reclosing a normal distribution network, then system sync consideration is not required: Set MC Split Mode to CS Set DAR Split Mode to CS This specifies that when a system split is detected during a MC or DAR operation, the CS mode will be retained and the split detection ignored. If the possibility of a system split is applicable but the network should not be reclosed by DAR in these circumstances then: Set DAR Split Mode to LO (Lockout) If the independent System Sync settings are to be used following a Split detection during DAR, then: Set DAR Split Mode to SS The reaction to a split detection during a Manual Close operation can be specified separately: Set MC Split Mode to SS Similarly, the device can be set to use Close On Zero (COZ) for either or both modes following a split detection. 4.2.2 Rated Voltage Setting - V.T. Connection The Vx analogue voltage input is used for the synchronising Bus voltage and can be either Van, Vbn, Vcn, Vab, Vbc or Vca. The voltage is compared to the respective Line voltage connected to the V1-V3 analogue voltage inputs. V.T. ratings for secondary connections are normally either 100V or 110V for phase-phase, with the associated phase-neutral ratings being 57.7V and 63.5V respectively. For phase-neutral connections the Vx Nom Voltage setting in the CT/VT Config menu should be set to 63.5V. For phase-phase connections the Rated Voltage setting should be set to 110V etc. Voltage element settings are a percentage of this setting.. 4.2.3 Bus/Line Undervolts Settings The relay undervoltage blocking elements, if enabled, can be used to block the close operation if either the line (incoming) or bus (running) voltages fall below a certain percentage of rated voltage. Typically, the undervoltage elements are set between 80% and 90% of rating. Note : when using the undervoltage elements care should be taken to ensure that the reset of the element occurs at below the expected minimum normal operating voltage of the system. The undervoltage elements reset at <103% of the operate level. If the system is expected to run at less than the rated voltage, the undervoltage element reset level must be set to operate at a value below this plus a discrimination margin. e.g. - for a phase to neutral connection nominally at 63.5 Vrms but which can run as low as 59 Vrms, the undervoltage setting should be set no higher than 59 V - 1 V (margin) = 58V / 103% = 56.31V (the actual setting would have to be 56.5V). This is equivalent to approximately 89% of rated voltage. If the setting is set higher than this then the element may never reset and will continuously block. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 32 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.2.4 Voltage Differential Settings A differential voltage detector is incorporated and this, if enabled, blocks the synchronising function if the difference between the measured bus and line voltages is greater than the setting. This is used to prevent closing of the circuit breaker with a large voltage differential between the line (incoming) or bus (running) voltages, which could overstress the electrical systems. Typically, the differential voltage elements are set below 10% of rated voltage. 4.2.5 Synchronising Bypass Logic The relay Dead and Live voltage monitors are used along with corresponding internal logic to bypass the synchronising operation of the relay. Typically, anywhere above 80% to 90% of rating can be classed as a live line or live bus. The dead voltage monitors should be set to somewhere above the expected level of induced voltages on the line or bus. It should be noted that a dead line or dead bus can have a considerable potential induced onto it from a parallel line or via capacitance across open breaker contacts. This potential on some networks can be as high as 30% of rated voltage. The synchronising Bypass logic can be enabled, if required, to provide the following: * Line charging and/or Bus charging, from the other side which is live. * Close with both sides dead, * Synchronising check with both sides live. * Unconditional Close (ignore all voltage conditions) Different options can be enabled for Manual Closing and DAR operations. This can be used for example to allow MC operations to be carried out with both sides dead for normal operational switching but prevent closing if the condition occurred during DAR. Alternatively, the device at one line end can be set to provide line charging whilst the other only Check Sync, i.e. after the line has been restored and become live. Additional DLC and DBC delays are provided to allow co-ordination of devices whilst also allowing a close applied conditions after a delay if the normally expected conditions are not met. For example, a device which will usually be the second end to close, thus operating in Check Sync mode, can allow Dead Line Close after a further delay, thus charging the line if the first end fails to close. 4.2.6 Slip and Phase Angle Relationship Slip frequency is defined as the difference between two frequencies. Where a slip frequency exists between two separate systems, during a `slip' cycle the two voltage vectors will be in anti-phase at one point in time. The phase angle difference will vary between being in phase and anti-phase. The relay can be set to measure slip frequency in two ways. One way is to measure the two system frequencies directly and calculate the difference. Another way is to measure the phase difference between the two systems and check that the phase angle change in a defined time period is less than a predetermined value. If F1 and F2 represent the frequencies of two systems then it can be shown that for check synchronising operation, F = F1 - F2 = 1 x Td 180 where Td = time delay setting and = phase angle setting. For system synchronising operation the following formula is used because in this mode the relay will only issue a close signal if the phase angle is decreasing in value. It will not issue a close if the phase angle is increasing in value. F = F1 - F2 = 1 x Td 360 where Td = time delay setting and = phase angle setting. The relay has both a frequency measuring element and phase detector and so can be set up to measure slip either directly or by the phase detector plus timer method. Use of either method is perfectly valid, as is use of both at the same time. Note : if using both the slip frequency detector and the phase angle plus slip timer for a particular scheme then care has to be taken in setting selection. It is possible to set the relay up with an incorrect slip timer setting which will prevent the relay from issuing a valid close signal. e.g. - a system with a high rate of slip which is within the allowable slip frequency limit, could be set up with too long a slip timer setting. This would mean that the incoming vector could pass through the valid close window too quickly and not allow the slip timer to time out and give a valid output. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 33 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.2.7 Check Synchronising Settings The check synchronising operation of the relay is used mainly in switching operations which link two parts of a system which are weakly tied via other paths elsewhere in the system. In this synchronous system there should be no frequency difference across the breaker but significant differences in phase angle and voltage magnitude may exist due to the transmission line characteristics such as its length and type of loading. For check synchronising operation the relay should be set to the maximum phase angle and maximum voltage differences which still permit the circuit breaker to close without causing large disturbances to the system. For most systems the phase angle can be set between 20 and 30. There should not be any slip frequency but a setting of 50mHz is typically applied as a check against loss of synchronism due to tripping of all parallel interconnections. Table 2 shows some possible check synchronising settings when using the phase detector plus time delay method. This shows a range of phase angles and the required slip timer settings to achieve a slip frequency limit of 50mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 50mHz slip limit is not always achievable. CS Phase Angle Setting ( ) CS Slip Timer Setting Slip Frequency (sec) Limit (mHz) 10 1.1 50.51 15 1.7 49.02 20 2.2 50.51 25 2.8 49.60 30 3.3 50.51 35 3.9 49.86 40 4.4 50.51 45 5.0 50.00 Table 4-1 Typical Check Synchronising Settings Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, a setting of 50mHz could be applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends. Note : in check synchronising mode the valid phase difference window for closing is actually twice the phase angle setting value because the valid Check Sync close can be given when the phase angle is either decreasing or increasing. 4.2.8 System Synchronising Settings The changeover to system synchronising operation will occur automatically if set, if the two systems become asynchronous i.e. there are no ties between the two systems and one system is effectively `islanded'. If this situation occurs the frequencies will slip past each other and may cause the phase angle to come into the system split limits. The system split detector can be set to operate on a differential angle anywhere from 90 to 175 and is typically set to 170. Alternatively, the change to System Sync can be made based on Slip frequency using a high value of typically 125mHz or more. When there are high rates of slip between the two systems greater care is needed when closing the breaker and for this reason the system synchronising mode has independent settings from the check synchronising mode. The allowable phase angle close window is usually set much narrower than for check synchronising operation. Also, the close decision from the relay is only given in the case of the phase angle decreasing. It will not issue a close if the phase angle is increasing in value. Typically the slip frequency will be set to a limit of 250mHz or less and the phase angle to 10 or 15. Table 4-2 shows some possible system synchronising settings for limits of 100mHz and 250mHz. Note that due to the step resolution of the timer, an exact 100mHz or 250mHz slip limit is not always achievable. SS Phase Angle Setting SS Slip Timer Slip Frequency Limit ( Setting (mHz) (sec) 10 0.3 92.59 15 0.4 104.17 10 0.1 277.78 (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 34 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 15 0.2 Table 4-2 208.33 Typical System Synchronising Settings Alternatively, if the slip frequency detector is used and the slip timer turned OFF, settings of 100mHz or 250mHz could be applied to the slip frequency detector directly to achieve the same ends. The relay will automatically revert to Check Synchronising mode when zero slip is applied. 4.2.9 Example Setting Calculations For Slip Timer In Check Synchronising operation the relay will issue a Check Sync close if the system conditions are such that the phase angle and slip frequency are within limits. There is a possibility, however, that a Check Sync close could be issued at a point where the phase angle is approaching the angular limits, say + 20, and the slip frequency is at the maximum allowable value. The consequence of this is that due to the inherent closing time of the CB the actual CB close occurs outside of the phase angle limits. The angle overshoot being dependent on the actual slip frequency and the total CB closing delay. The total delays involved in this process include the main software timing loop which issues the close command, the output relay time to pick up and the actual breaker closing time delays. To reduce the risk of a late closure it is common practice to set the slip timer setting (Td) to typically 10x the CB closing time. This will ensure that the CB will close no later than 1.2x the actual phase angle setting of the relay e.g. 24 for a 20 setting. e.g. :The change in phase angle between two waveforms is directly related to the frequency difference, or slip, between them. The change in phase angle Change in phase angle for a system with 1Hz slip is 360 in 1 second. Thus, = (Slip x 360 ) /sec. The distance the phasor can travel during the breaker close time can therefore be given by, = (Slip x 360 x t CB ) - where tCB is the breaker close time in seconds. Using the equation given in section 2.7 for check synchronising, Slip = = 1 x Td 180 and substituting this into 1 x x 360 x t CB Td 180 = (Slip x 360 x t CB ) = 2 x x which gives gives the following, t CB Td It was stated that the slip timer setting Td should be set to 10x the breaker closing time tCB. Substituting for this in the above equation gives, = (2 x ) 10 or = 0.2 x Thus for a slip timer setting (Td) of 10x breaker closing time (tCB) the actual change in phase angle will be 20% of the phase angle setting. The maximum closing angle will be 120% of phase angle setting. In practice, however, the relay operating times need to be taken into consideration. A typical example now follows : - Maximum allowed phase angle for closure = 30. - Circuit breaker closure time = 150ms. Maximum relay delays : Software timing loop + Output relay delays = 5ms + 7ms = 12ms. Therefore slip timer time delay should be set to 10x (150ms + 12ms) = 1.62sec. In practice this will have to be set to 1.6sec due to the resolution of the slip timer. The phase angle setting should be set to 80% of the maximum allowable closing angle, which is 24. If the relay was to issue a close right on the boundary of 24then the breaker will not close outside of 30. With an angle of 24 and a slip timer delay (Td) of 1.6sec, using the equation from section 2.7, the slip is therefore, (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 35 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 24 / (1.6 x 180) = 83mHz. If the relay were to close on the boundary the phase angle traversed in the 160ms total delay time is given by, = (Slip x 360 ) x (t CB + t RELAY ) = 0.083 x 360 x 0.16 = 4.80. Therefore the CB will close at 24 + 4.80 = 28.80. 4.2.10 Close on Zero Close on zero is the preferred method of some customers for restoration of a split system. The relay uses the measured slip frequency and the typical closing time of the circuit breaker to issue a close pulse, as the phase difference is reducing, which will close the circuit breaker when the phase difference is zero. High accuracy is not required regarding the CB Close Time. 4.3 Loss of Voltage (LOV) Loop Automation Function This additional functionality is available as an ordering option when required to suit application requirements. The LOV Automation function is applied by Reclosers at the sectioning points along a feeder and by a Normally Open Point (NOP) at the junction of two feeders, see , the purpose is to ensure the automatic restoration of system supply to as many customers as is possible following the lockout of a source Recloser and de-energisation of a feeder due to a permanent fault. The resultant permanent loss of supply to healthy sections of the faulted feeder can be avoided by the sequential closure of the NOP (TIE) Recloser and multiple Line Reclosers to back feed supply and isolate the faulted section. This sequence can be triggered by Loss Of Voltage to automatically and relatively quickly, restore the power to healthy sections and thus limit the disruption to Customers and minimising the Customer Minutes Lost (CML) metric. LOV Automation should be considered as a one shot automated sequence after which, the normal NOP having been closed, manual operations should be taken to clear the fault and restore the system to its normal configuration. The LOV Function described does however have the capability of reconfiguration after other permanent fault(s) occurring, after the first-fault LOV automation sequence, depending on their location within the system. However, if no manual action is to be taken the increase of load level on the back-feed feeder(s) must be considered. Feeder 1 1A A Vabc B 1B Vabc C 1C Vabc `Vabc' NOP (TIE) `Vxyz' Feeder 2 2A Vabc 2B Vabc 2C Vabc Figure 4.3-1 Sysyem Diagram showing Normally Open (TIE) Point Reclosers in the network must be designated as one of 3 different types: Recloser: If a LOV condition is diagnosed when the recloser is in the closed state, the controller issues a trip then subsequently recloses on restoration of voltage as part of an automated sequence to provide sectioning points along the feeder. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 36 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications NOP (Tie): This device operates as a normally open point in the network which is closed automatically as part of the sequence to provide a backfeed from a different, unfaulted feeder when voltage is detected as lost. Feeder: The controller issues a trip on detection of LOV, followed by no further action to establish a new normally open point in the network arrangement which results from the automated sequence. The starting point is that on a normal healthy system all Reclosers A, B & C on both Feeders will be closed as shown in and the NOP will be open. All Devices will have the same voltage on their upstream and downstream sides and voltage will be present on both sides of the NOP (TIE) point. It should be noted that Reclosers at different points in the system are programmed to give the optimum, different, reaction to Loss Of Voltage and that their response is not conditional on seeing fault current, only on detection of loss of voltage. An LOV sequence starts to operate due to prolonged absence of voltage which occurs when a CB or Recloser goes to Lockout after a persistent fault is isolated from the supply i.e. fault current no longer flows, following a complete but unsuccessful autoreclose sequence. The actual cause of the fault still remains but is isolated on its normal source side from the supply and from adjacent feeders by the NOP. For a fault at the position shown on the Feeder 1- A section, the 1A CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast plus Delayed trips to attempt to clear the fault. For a permanent fault the outcome will be that 1A goes to Lockout and Feeder 1 will be left totally dead. Feeder 1 does however have healthy sections e.g. 1B to 1C and 1C to the NOP which can be given back-feed supply from Feeder 2 if a structured restoration cycle is initiated by the automatic closure of the NOP. This is achieved as follows;- following the Lockout of the Source Recloser/CB-1A, the Line Reclosers 1B and 1C will both see permanent Loss Of voltage (LOV), (this may also have occurred temporarily, more than once during or for the whole, of the 1A recloser sequence). 1B and 1C can be set as type Recloser in the LOV Automation menu. In this case if LOV Recloser Opening in each is set to Enabled and they see permanent LOV on both sides for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 60 seconds, set by the user to cover a complete upstream sequence, then their LOV Elements will each take action and give a 3 pole Trip output, both 1B and 1C will therefore Trip and Lockout at about the same time. The NOP, which is set as type NOP (Tie) in the LOV Automation menu, in example 1, will see LOV on its Feeder 1 side and will have normal system voltage available on its Feeder 2 side; if the NOP's LOV Element sees permanent LOV on either side i.e. lasting for more than a user set LOV Action Delay e.g. 75 seconds to give a grading margin to allow time for Reclosers 1A and 1B to open at, for example, 60 seconds, then the NOP LOV Element will take action and issue a NOP Close. A type NOP (Tie) has separate settings for LOV-A Action Delay and LOV-X Action Delay to allow different delays to be applied for Loss of voltage action on either side of the Recloser. For this NOP Close action the NOP Protection must be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if the NOP closes onto a permanent fault or a fault appears during a set LOV SOTF Time (e.g. 5 seconds), on section 1C then the NOP will perform a Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the NOP close is successful and no fault appears, the C section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The NOP Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. Recloser 1C will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C's LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1C will close. Note that the 1C Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout, thus, if 1C closes onto a permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1C will Fast Protection Trip and Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful the B section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1C Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV SOTF Time but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. Recloser 1B will now see voltage on its downstream side and if that voltage is present for the user set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B's LOV Element in turn will then issue a Reclose and 1B will close. Note the 1B Protection will be primed to perform one Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout thus if 1B closes onto a permanent fault, or a fault appears during its set LOV SOTF Time e.g. 5 seconds, then 1B will Fast Protection Trip & Lockout. If the Recloser close is successful then the A section of Feeder 1 will thus be back-fed. The 1B Line Check mode must be maintained as Fast Protection during its LOV Reclose reclaim Delay but must then be changed to Delayed for the Recloser's LOV Reclaim Time. For the example shown 1B will be reclosed onto a permanent fault and will therefore perform its Fast Line Check Trip & Lockout with 1C now applying only Delayed protection. This will leave the healthy 1B and 1C sections backfed via the NOP. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 37 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications As can be seen from the above, the NOP and each Recloser will close sequentially at the User set (e.g. 5 seconds) intervals and each Recloser when it Closes will be primed to perform a single Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout for its Close whilst all other Reclosers/NOP have had their protection changed from Fast Protection Line Check Trip & Lockout to a Delayed Line Check Trip & Lockout; this ensures that the Recloser closing onto a faulted section will trip Fast Protection and clear the fault leaving all the other proven, unfaulted, sections energised. This mode of operation does impose a fault, which will be cleared by a single high-speed Fast-Protection Trip, onto an otherwise healthy system but it does result in `as much of the System being maintained in-service as possible'. If, following a Loss of Voltage and LOV Automation initiation, a type Recloser does not see Voltage re-appear on one side to allow the LOV Automation process to proceed, then on expiry of the LOV Sequence Time i.e. the LOV Automation time-allowed-to-live timer, the LOV Sequence will be terminated and the Recloser will go to Lockout. The NOP and the Reclosers involved in the restoration sequence must have their LOV Reclaim Time settings set to a longer time, with grading margin > 5 secs, than the maximum time taken for the last Recloser X in the LOV Sequence to complete its LOV sequence and Reclose, tripping to clear any permanent fault which presents itself as necessary. This is necessary to ensure that the NOP and all Reclosers, which will see fault current when the last Recloser in the sequence closes, remain programmed to perform a Delayed Trip without reclose until after all Reclosers have completed their part in the Automation sequence and the system is restored unfaulted. Once the NOP and feeder Reclosers have completed their LOV sequences and have LOV Reclaimed then they must now have co-ordinated grading to be able to deal correctly with a second fault on one of the healthy sections. This co-ordinated grading, under back-feed conditions following NOP(TIE) closure, is achieved by programming all the Reclosers in the LOV back-feed loops to be bi-directional, their settings in both directions can be co-ordinated by a Grading Study to ensure correct grading for faults fed from either the normal Forward or NOP(TIE) Closed back-feed, Reverse directions. LOV Element has two main outputs i.e. three pole LOV Trip and three pole LOV Close these can be mapped to the existing CB Open and 79 AR Close outputs, it is not necessary to create new outputs in the output matrix, all other outputs are intended for alarm/indication purposes. It should be noted that in a typical interconnected system at each feeder end there could be up to 3 NOP (TIE) at that node anyone of which could be closed to back feed supply to that feeder, therefore, there must be a user-set pecking order. The NOP LOV Action Delay timer User settings with grading margins e.g. 75 s - 80 s - 85 s, ensures that the optimum reconfiguration of the system occurs but with redundancy built-in to ensure that supply is restored via a third path should the first or second, choice path not be available or fails, see Error! Reference source not found. . Loss of Voltage at the NOP on VA/VB/VC selects the LOVa Action Delay timer setting; Loss of voltage on VX/VY/VZ selects the LOVx Action Delay timer setting. As can be seen the result is that each Feeder can have a preferential first choice, a second choice and third choice back-feed feeder, the user can set these independently to suit his system. NOP (TIE) to Feeders from other Sub/Stations will typically always be set to third choice e.g. 85 second Action Delay time. NB the NOP LOV Automation Action Delay on either side can be set to OFF which means that the User can select NOP LOV Close so as to supply power in a single first required direction only, not a second. The bubbles show examples of the flexibility of the grading arrangement at the node on the end of each feeder, st nd rd showing how the user can select the 1 , 2 and 3 choice back-feed feeders for each feeder. Other arrangements can be set-up by User. Note the NOP (TIE) feeders between Sub/Stations end up with the same Action Delay time settings on both sides. The LOV Automation function can be Enabled or Disabled, by the User setting and can be switched In/Out dynamically via any Binary Inputs, LOV can also be switched In/Out by Function Key or SCADA General Commands. LOV is automatically inhibited by Voltage Transformer Supervision if a VTS failure is detected. For a controller with LOV Plant Device Type set as Recloser to perform its LOV Automation sequence, only the downstream voltage needs to be monitored and therefore addition primary voltage transformers are not required. Reclosers should be mounted and connected so that the standard Voltage measuring devices are on the downstream side as this voltage is monitored for voltage recovery to prompt reclosure. The controller monitors will respond to voltage restoration on either side of the recloser and therefore connections can be made to the `A' or `X' side. For a NOP (TIE) to perform its LOV Automation sequence, the voltage levels on both sides of the NOP i.e. both downstream and upstream voltages, must be monitored. Voltage levels must be continuously monitored as preLOV memory of condition states is necessary. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 38 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications LOV ACTION Delay = XX Seconds S/STN 2 S/STN 1 85 s 1st 75 s 80 s 80 s 2nd 3rd 85 s 1st 75 s 85 s 75 s 80 s 2nd 3rd 85 s 1st 75 s OFF 2nd 85 s 1st 75 s 80 s 2nd Figure 4.3-2 Typical System Interconnections showing Normally Open (TIE) Points and LOV Action Delay timer grading margins. An LOV close is blocked by the Block Reclose input in the same way as any autoreclose close. The setting of the Block Reclose Delay should be considered in the setting of the LOV timing. The LOV function is set to `Out' by default and must be switched `In'. The voltages and open/closed state of the recloser is checked when an attempt is made to switch the function `In'. A type Feeder or Recloser must be Closed with voltage present on at least 1 side. A type NOP(Tie) must be Open with Live voltage on both sides. This condition must be retained for the LOV Primed Time before the `primed' staus is achieved. The device must be in the `primed' state for loss of voltage to start any LOV Action. The enable/disable setting LOV Primed Interlock can be used to disable the voltage check but the relevant open/closed state is still required. The NOP(Tie) device includes a LOV Memory Time which provides a reset delay for the primed condition when voltage conditions of dead both sides is applied. This allows for the fact that during a fault the voltage on the unfaulted side may be depressed by the proximity of the fault. The devices can be set to start the LOV sequence from loss of voltage on either all three phases or loss of voltage on any single phase. The single phase option can be used to restore load on a system where single pole tripping is permitted. The LOV system can be set to operate as a single or multi-shot sequence. When selected as Single mode, the LOV Automation function will be automatically switched Out following a successful or unsuccessful LOV sequence and the LOV In signal must be raised by the operator before a further sequence will be executed following a subsequent loss of voltage. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 39 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 4.4 4.4.1 Single/Triple Autoreclose System Arrangement for Application of Single/Triple AutoReclose In countries, such as the USA, where the distribution network is 4 wire i.e. three phase plus neutral, a three phase feeder may run out from a sub/station and then at some point be split into three separate single phase plus neutral feeders where, for example, each line can go up a separate valley and thus be subjected separately to lightning strikes or single phase to Earth (Ground) or Neutral, Faults. Loads can thus be entirely single pole or a mix of three pole and single pole. Some utilities are upgrading their systems to improve the quality of supply to customers by installing three separate single pole Reclosers plus a Controller that can selectively apply Single or Triple AutoReclose sequences to each pole asynchronously. Each pole has its own separate fault detection/Trip and AutoReclose sequencing capability. Different modes of operation can be set by the user to cater for the basic and or seasonal requirements of different types of load on the three phases. The Controller provides settings to enable the user to set the required options of Single/Triple Trip/Close and Single/Triple Lockout combinations including the option of what must happen under two-pole faults. Before setting the controller to Single pole Trip/Single pole Lockout mode the user must ensure that no plant is connected for which a three phase supply is essential e.g. three phase motor. A typical application is feeders supplying Oil Rig pumping motors, single pole ARC can be beneficially applied provided the motor is not run on two poles for extended periods otherwise NPS induced overheating and failure could result, the Single pole Trip - Three pole Lockout, Mode B, provides for this by allowing single pole trips followed by reclose but issues only three pole trips when a reclose is not started. An additional subsequent three pole trip is issued in this Mode if single pole autoreclose fails. If Single pole Trip is set then each Recloser can each be independently Tripped and Closed as a single pole circuit breaker, however, in some circumstances all three Reclosers must be Tripped and Closed as a three pole device. Each Single pole Recloser, therefore, has its own independent Trip/Close circuits and CB Open/Closed Auxiliary contacts; also, its own Manual Trip & Lockout handle, with auxiliary T&LO contacts, operated by a HotLine working tool. The Control Cubicle must have pole by pole external push button switches to provide local electrical Trip/Close controls for each Recloser. The Controller provides pole by pole logic and interlocking to ensure that correct operation occurs in all modes and for all complex fault conditions. Three instances of the Capacitor Monitor/Test element are included to allow for the additional capacitor networks required by the phase segregated system. Phase-Neutral Loads Separate routes Single/Triple recloser A Valley A Valley B B C N 4 CTs essential Valley C Figure 4.4-1 System Diagram showing application of Single/Triple pole Reclosers. Single pole tripping is not normally applied where three-phase loads, or delta connected loads are connected. It is only applied to Reclosers on systems which allow Single pole to Neutral load connection, e.g. 4 wire, 3Phase + Neutral, systems, as typically used in the USA and South America. In such systems the routing and loading cab be such that loads can tolerate running for short periods on only two phases, the third being temporarily dead. As a simplified model consider that pole A is routed up valley A, Pole B is routed up valley B and pole C is routed up (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 40 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications valley C; all with single phase to Neutral loads. A permanent phase to neutral fault and single pole Recloser sequence to Lockout on pole A will not, therefore, affect the supply to customers in valleys B and C. For a fault at the position shown on Phase A, the A pole CB/Source Recloser will go through a sequence of Fast plus Delayed Trips to attempt to clear the A-G(N) fault. For a permanent A-G fault the outcome will be that pole A goes to Lockout and phase A will be left totally dead. Customers on Phases B and C will continue to receive uninterrupted supply, they will not suffer interruptions. It should be noted that Single/Triple operation of Reclosers is applied to Rural Feeders and for these Loss Of Voltage (LOV) automation is not applied, (to do so would require a very complex LOV scheme requiring single pole closure of the NOP (TIE) and Feeder Reclosers with resultant single pole back-feed.). In the MLFB LOV Automation is not to be made available with Single /Triple Software. Single-phase Tripping/Reclosing improves system reliability by maintaining supply to customers who are not on the faulted phase of a feeder. When a permanent fault occurs on one of the phases e.g. on the B phase, only the B pole Recloser performs a Trip and Reclose sequence, A and C phases, if unaffected, stay Closed maintaining supply to the Customers on poles A and C. If a single-phase reclosing sequence is unsuccessful because of a permanent fault, only the customers on the B phase are left without power, rather than all three-phases locking out. Single-phase operation will be applied, especially in rural areas where the majority of loads are single phase L-N and manual restoration can take longer because of the greater travel distances. Note:- All unbalance Protection elements i.e. NPS, Broken Conductor, Loss of Phase, VTS, CTS, etc. algorithms have to be inhibited or pre-set to a long ride-through delay, BEFORE a single pole Recloser Trip is issued to prevent false operation during single-phase sequence Dead-Times, or inhibited when a single-phase Lockout state is reached. Because of the inherent unbalanced nature of three poles of single pole to neutral loads the NPS levels will be high on such systems and even higher when one pole trips out leaving only two poles energized, therefore, when Single pole Trip is selected all Unbalance protection elements are usually Inhibited. The ZPS will also be high, same level, but a considerable percentage will return via the Neutral conductor, therefore, a Neutral CT is essential, the rest via the multiple Ground paths. 4.4.2 Triple/Single Modes of Operation The User may select one of three modes for the Single/Triple operation to suit the system load characteristics and thus avoid subjecting loads to conditions which could cause damage to plant. The settings of the Trip-RecloseLockout operation modes for the Recloser provide for three Modes of Trip Sequences to Lockout for a permanent fault. Mode selection can be via Settings menu to provide default mode, via Control Mode Menu, or via Settings Group change either in response to a General Command via SCADA or by Binary Input selection. If more than one mode is selected simultaneously, the priority is Mode A over B over C with Modes as defined below. When a binary input mapped to this function is energised, the setting is changed to the selected Mode. The setting does not revert to its previous state when the input is reset. The additional LEDs available on E12 Controllers can be used to show which Mode is ON. Only the selected Mode LED will be ON. Single Pole Reclosers can be operated by the User in any one of the following modes as and when the application requires it. Three single pole Reclosers connected in a full single pole wired scheme may thus be operated individually or together as a three pole Recloser as system operations require. [It should be noted that Single/Triple operation only applies to Phase Fault elements and not to Earth Faults nor to Sensitive Earth faults. The use of three CTs, one per pole, and a single neutral CT i.e. 4 CTs, only allows detection that an SEF/Earth Fault has occurred but not on which pole. This determination is only possible if a Phase to Earth Fault current is above the Phase Fault Overcurrent setting, it is then possible to single pole trip and reclose as per the logic shown in tables in the Description of Operation section of this manual. Therefore, in the absence of any supplementary data, an SEF trip and/or Earth fault trip must cause Three pole Trip and Three pole Reclose. MODE A 3PTrip-3PLO This is the standard Three pole only mode of operation, only three pole Trip/Close sequences are performed and all three poles are Locked Out together when the Lockout state is reached. This mode is used where three phase loads such as motors cannot be allowed to on two phases, even for the duration of the autoreclose deadtime. In this mode any pole CB Trip or CB Close Command must operate all three Reclosers. In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 41 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications MODE B 1PTrip-3PLO In this mode Controller can perform independent single pole TRIP sequences up to the point at which the Lockout state is reached on any one pole, it then performs a final three pole TRIP and all three poles are Locked Out together. Controller only goes to 3PTrip-3PLO if and when a 3P Trip and Lockout has to be performed. If at any point during an AutoReclose sequence a Phase-to-Phase or 3-Phase Fault condition develops and exists when a Trip output has to be issued i.e. if at the point at which a first pole element operates a starter is also raised on any other pole, then the Controller reverts to 3 pole Trip and 3 pole Close sequencing and 3PTrip-3PLO as applicable at that point in the sequence. This mode prevents detrimental LONG TERM 2 phase energisation of three phase loads e.g. motors. In this mode 2 pole trips are never issued, any fault diagnosed as affecting more than 1 pole will cause a 3 pole trip which may be followed by 3 pole reclose. Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase will cause a 3 pole trip which may be followed by 3 pole reclose. In this mode any single pole CB Trip or CB Close Command is considered to be a long term action and is therefore diverted to operate all three Reclosers. In this mode a Line Check Trip or Trip & Lockout Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. In this mode any single manual Lockout Lever Command causes a 3PTrip-3PLO. In this mode, the single pole Trip and Reclose Command remains pole segregated. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3PTrip-3PLO. If ARC OFF is selected in Mode B all trips will be 3PTrip-3PLO. MODE C 1PTrip-1PLO Mode C applies single pole tripping for all Phase Fault fault combinations. Each pole of the Recloser Controller follows its own settings and sequence independently. This is the equivalent of having three separately mounted single pole Reclosers each with its own Controller, each Recloser Controller is, therefore, unaware of the state of the Reclosers & Controllers on the other poles. This does mean that the sequences on each pole are not synchronous and are not interlocked, therefore, a fault scenario can develop where for a Phase to Phase fault one pole could be performing a Fast Trip the other could be performing a Delayed Trip, this is not an issue, one pole will initiate the tripping action(s) and if unsuccessful eventually both sequences will be doing delayed. Also different Dead times could be applicable on each of the poles at that point in the two sequences but Close commands issued by the Sequences are co-ordinated so that both poles close at the same time. In this mode the Controller performs independent single pole Trip and Reclose sequences, each pole will Lockout independently. The Controller operates to drive each Recloser pole as an independent Circuit Breaker. Normal system operating modes will thus be 3P or 2P or 1P for extended periods, this determines the type of protection elements which can be enabled, Frequency elements and Voltage elements must track the remaining in-service phase(s). Controller does NOT revert to three-pole Trip and Close sequencing or three pole Lockout if a Phase to Phase Fault condition exists at any Trip point in the sequence. In this mode all unbalance protection elements would usually be inhibited, i.e. NPS Overcurrent, NPS OverVoltage, VT Supervision, CT Supervision, and Broken Conductor. It is NOT expected that Directional elements will be applied as single pole tripping will change the polarising conditions for the sound poles. In this mode a CBA Trip or CBA Close Command operates only on the A Pole Recloser, ditto for B and C poles. In this mode 2 pole trips can be issued, any fault diagnosed as affecting 2 poles simultaneously will cause a 2 separate single pole trips which will be followed by two separate single pole reclose sequences. Close pulses to the two poles are aligned so that if the 2 trips were resultant from the same fault, re-strike does not occur from the two phases individually such that the fault is perpetuated by passing it from one phase to the other. Any fault on a healthy phase during a single pole reclose sequence on another phase can cause a separate single pole trip which will be followed by separate single pole recloses with close pulses aligned. In this mode any Line Check Trip will result in a 1PT - 1PLO In this mode a manual Lockout Lever Command on one pole only acts on that pole, there is no cross linking action to other poles. A Binary Input `79 Lockout' is required for each pole and each pole has its own manual Lockout counter. In this mode the Hot Line On Command primes a single 3Pole Trip and Lockout 3PT - 3PLO. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 42 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications If ARC OFF is selected Modes A & B do 3P Trip & Lockout. Mode C does pole by pole 1PT - 1PLO. 4.4.3 Pole Discrepancy In Modes A and B the Recloser should not be left with 1 pole open for extended periods. This can occur if a single pole is opened in Mode C then the Mode is changed to A or B. A Pole Discrepancy output is available which is driven in Mode A and B only, to indicate that all poles of the recloser are not in the same state. An associated timer, PD Time Delay is set in the Circuit Breaker menu. This output can be used as an alarm or to cause a three pole trip.Quick Logic Applications 4.4.4 Auto-Changeover Scheme Example INCOMER 1 INCOMER 2 Start On-Load Change-over Start On-Load Change-over BI 1 BO3 CB1 CB2 VT1 CB1 OPEN VT2 V1 Vx Busbar 1 Busbar 2 CB3 LOADS LOADS Figure 4.4-2 Example Use of Quick Logic The MV installation illustrated above is fed from two incomers. To limit the substation fault level the busbar is run with CB3 open. When a fault occurs on one of the incomers it is isolated by the circuit protection. To re-supply the disconnected loads from the remaining incomer CB3 is closed. If the line fault occurs on incomer 1 it must be confirmed that CB 1 has opened before CB3 can be closed. The relay on incomer 1 confirms that a trip has been issued to CB1 (e.g. Binary Output 2), that CB 1 has opened (e.g. Binary Input 1) and that no current flows in the circuit (e.g. 37-1 = Virtual 1): Incomer 1 Relay is Configured: CB1 Open auxiliary switch wired to B.I. 1 Trip output to CB1 = B.O. 2 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 37-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = O2.I1.V1 The output from Incomer 1 (BO3) relay is input to the relay on CB 3 (Binary Input 1). A panel switch may be used to enable the On-Load Change-over scheme (Binary Input 2). Before Closing CB3 a check may be made that there is no voltage on busbar 1 (27/59-1 = Virtual 1). CB 3 is closed from Binary Output 3. CB3 Relay is Configured: Panel switch (ON-Load Change-over Enabled) wired to B.I. 1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: 27/59-1 = V1 OUTPUT CONFIG>OUTPUT MATRIX: E1 = BO3 CONTROL & LOGIC>QUICK LOGIC: E1 = I1.I2.V1 If required a time delay can be added to the output using the CONTROL & LOGIC > QUICK LOGIC: E1 Pickup Delay setting. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 43 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Section 5: Supervision Functions 5.1 Circuit-Breaker Fail (50BF) Where a circuit breaker fails to operate to clear fault current the power system will remain in a hazardous state until the fault is cleared by remote or back-up protections. To minimise any delay, CB Failure protection provides a signal to either re-trip the local CB or back-trip `adjacent' CBs. The function is initiated by the operation of user selectable protection functions or from a binary input. Current flow is monitored after a tripping signal has been issued if any of the 50BF current check elements have not reset before the timers have expired an output is given. The relay incorporates a two-stage circuit breaker fail feature. For some systems, only the first will be used and the CB Failure output will be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s). On other systems, however, this output will be used to re-trip the local CB to minimise potential disruption to the system; if possible via a secondary trip coil and wiring. The second CB Failure stage will then be used to back-trip the adjacent CB(s). BACK-TRIP RE-TRIP 50 BF Figure 5.1-1 - Circuit Breaker Fail 5.1.1 Settings Guidelines 50BF Setting The current setting must be set below the minimum protection setting current. 50BF DTL1/50BF DTL2 The time delay setting applied to the CB Fail protection must be in excess of the longest CB operate time + relay reset time + a safety margin. First Stage (Retrip) Trip Relay operate time 10ms 7SR224 Reset Time 20ms CB Tripping time 80ms Safety Margin 40ms Overall First Stage CBF Time Delay 150ms (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 44 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Second Stage (Back Trip) First CBF Time Delay 120ms Trip Relay operate time 10ms 7SR224 Reset Time 20ms CB Tripping time 80ms Margin 60ms Overall Second Stage CBF Time Delay 290ms The safety margin is extended by 1 cycle for the second CBF stage as this will usually involve a back-trip of a Busbar tripping scheme. The timing sequence for each stage of the circuit breaker fail function is as below. Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started System Fault Main Trip Relay Operation 20 Backtrip Trip Relay Reset of CBF elements does not occur Backtrip Operation Failure of CB to trip 40 60 80 CB Backtrip Sucessful 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 ms from fault occuring 340 CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 120ms Figure 5.1-2 - Single Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing Relay Operation and CBF Timer Started System Fault Backtrip Trip Relay Operation CBF Retrip Trip Relay Main Trip Relay Operation 40 CB's Fails to Trip 60 80 No Reset of CBF elements No Reset of CBF elements CBF Retrip Operation 120 140 160 180 200 220 Reset of CBF elements CBF Back trip Operation Failed CB Retrip Operation 100 Operation of all BB CB's 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 ms from occuri CB Operate Time Stage 1 CBF Timer (Retrip) = 120ms Stage 2 CBF Timer (Backtrip) = 250ms Figure 5.1-3 - Two Stage Circuit Breaker Fail Timing (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 45 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 5.2 Current Transformer Supervision (60CTS) When a CT fails, the current levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. A large level of NPS current is therefore detected - around 0.3 x In for one or two CT failures. However this condition would also occur for a system fault. To differentiate between the two conditions, the element uses NPS voltage to restrain the CTS algorithm as show in the accompanying table. Table 5-1 NPS Current NPS Voltage Decision > Setting > Setting System Fault > Setting < Setting CT Failure Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) Following a CT Failure, there should be little or no NPS voltage. Perhaps 0.1 x Vn as a maximum. Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects. A 3-phase CT failure is considered so unlikely (these being independent units) that this condition is not tested for. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 46 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 5.3 Voltage Transformer Supervision (60VTS) Although VTs rarely fail themselves, VT Supervision presents a common application because of the failure of protective Fuses connected in series with the VTs. When a VT failure occurs on one or two phases, the voltage levels seen by the protection become unbalanced. A large level of NPS voltage is therefore detected - around 0.3 x Vn for one or two VT failures. However this condition would also occur for a system fault. To differentiate between the two conditions, the element uses NPS current to restrain the VTS algorithm as show in the accompanying table. Table 5-2 NPS Voltage NPS Current Decision > Setting > Setting System Fault > Setting < Setting VT Failure Determination of VT Failure (1 or 2 Phases) Following a VT Failure, the level of NPS current would be dependent solely upon load imbalance - perhaps 0.1 x In as a maximum. Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects. NPS voltage and current quantities are used rather than ZPS since the latter makes it difficult to differentiate between a VT failure and a Phase-Phase fault. Both conditions would generate little or no ZPS current. However the element provides an option to use ZPS quantities to meet some older specifications. There are possible problems with using NPS quantities due to load imbalances. These would also generate significant levels of NPS current and so possibly cause a VT failure to be missed. This problem can be overcome by careful selection of settings, however, setting the NPS current threshold above the level expected for imbalance conditions. If a failure occurs in all 3 Phases of a Voltage Transformer, then there will be no NPS or ZPS voltage to work with. However the PPS Voltage will fall below expected minimum measurement levels. This could also be due to a `close in' fault and so PPS Current must remain above minimum load level BUT below minimum fault level. PPS Voltage PPS Current Decision < Setting > Minimum Fault Level System Fault < Setting Minimum Load Level < VT Failure AND < Minimum Fault Level Table 5-3 Determination of VT Failure (3 Phases) Operation is again subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects. Alternatively a 3 Phase VT failure can be signalled to the relay via a Binary Input taken from the Trip output of an external MCB. This can also be reset by a Binary Input signal. VTS would not normally be used for tripping - it is an alarm rather than fault condition. However the loss of a VT would cause problems for protection elements that have voltage dependant functionality. For this reason, the relay allows these protection elements - under-voltage, directional over-current, etc. - to be inhibited if a VT failure occurs. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 47 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 5.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision (74TCS) Binary Inputs may be used to monitor the integrity of the CB trip circuit wiring. A small current flows through the B.I. and the trip circuit. This current operates the B.I. confirming the integrity of the auxiliary supply, CB trip coil, auxiliary switch, C.B. secondary isolating contacts and associated wiring. If monitoring current flow ceases, the B.I. drops off and if it is user programmed to operate one of the output relays, this can provide a remote alarm. In addition, an LED on the relay can be programmed to operate. A user text label can be used to define the operated LED e.g. "Trip CCT Fail". The relevant Binary Input is mapped to 74TCS-n in the INPUT CONFIG>INPUT MATRIX menu. To avoid giving spurious alarm messages while the circuit breaker is operating the input is given a 0.4s Drop-off Delay in the INPUT CONFIG>BINARY INPUT CONFIG menu. To provide an alarm output a normally open binary output is mapped to 74TCS-n. 5.4.1 Trip Circuit Supervision Connections The following circuits are derived from UK ENA S15 standard schemes H5, H6 and H7. For compliance with this standard: Where more than one device is used to trip the CB then connections should be looped between the tripping contacts. To ensure that all wiring is monitored the binary input must be at the end of the looped wiring. Resistors must be continuously rated and where possible should be of wire-wound construction. Scheme 1 (Basic) + 52a - Circuit Breaker R BO TRIP COIL 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve -ve BO n BO 1 7SR24 Remote Alarm H5 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply) BI = 88V (110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Figure 5.4-1: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 1 (H5) Scheme 1 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. Where a `Hand Reset' Trip contact is used measures must be taken to inhibit alarm indications after a CB trip. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 48 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications Scheme 2 (Intermediate) + 52a TRIP COIL - 52a Circuit Breaker BO 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Remote Alarm H6 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (30, 48, 110, 220V supply) BI = 88V (110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical Figure 5.4-2: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 2 (H6) Scheme 2 provides continuous Trip Circuit Supervision of trip coil with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. It does not provide pre-closing supervision of the connections and links between the tripping contacts and the circuit breaker and may not therefore be suitable for some circuits which include an isolating link. Scheme 3 (Comprehensive) + 52a TRIP COIL - Circuit Breaker BO 52b TRIP CCT n FAIL R BI +ve R -ve BI +ve H7 Scheme Notes: BI = 19V (48, 110, 220V supply) R = 3K3 typical -ve BO 1 BO n 7SR24 Remote Alarm Figure 5.4-3: Trip Circuit Supervision Scheme 3 (H7) Scheme 3 provides full Trip and Close supervision with the circuit breaker Open or Closed. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 49 of 50 7SR224 Argus Applications 5.5 Inrush Detector (81HBL2) This element detects the presence of high levels of 2nd Harmonic current which is indicative of transformer Inrush current at switch-on. These currents may be above the operate level of the overcurrent elements for a short duration and it is important that the relay does not issue an incorrect trip command for this transient network condition. If a magnetic inrush condition is detected operation of the overcurrent elements can be blocked. nd Calculation of the magnetising inrush current level is complex. However a ratio of 20% 2 Harmonic to Fundamental current will meet most applications without compromising the integrity of the Overcurrent protection. There are 3 methods of detection and blocking during the passage of magnetising inrush current. Phase Blocking only occurs in those phases where Inrush is detected. Large, Single Phase Transformers - Auto-transformers. Cross All 3-phases are blocked if Inrush is detected in any phase. Traditional application for most Transformers but can give delayed operation for Switch-on to Earth Fault conditions. Sum Composite 2nd Harmonic content derived for all 3-phases and then compared to Fundamental current for each individual phase. Provides good compromise between Inrush stability and fast fault detection. Table 5-4 5.6 Magnetic Inrush Bias Broken Conductor / Load Imbalance (46BC) Used to detect an open circuit condition when a conductor breaks or a mal-operation occurs in phase segregated switchgear. There will be little or no fault current and so overcurrent elements will not detect the condition. However the condition can be detected because there will be a high content of NPS (unbalance) current present. An NPS / PPS ratio > 50% will result from a Broken Conductor condition. Operation is subject to a time delay to prevent operation for transitory effects. 5.7 Circuit-Breaker Maintenance The Relay provides Total, Delta and Frequent CB Operation Counters alongwith an I2t Counter to estimate the amount of wear and tear experienced by a Circuit-Breaker. Alarm can be provided once set levels have been exceeded. Typically estimates obtained from previous circuit-breaker maintenance schedules are used for setting these alarm levels. The relay instrumentation provides the current values of these counters. (c)2015 Siemens Protection Devices Limited Chapter 7 Page 50 of 50 Siemens Protection Devices Limited 1 Siemens Protection Devices Limited P.O. Box 8, North Farm Road Hebburn, Tyne & Wear NE31 1TZ United Kingdom Phone: +44 (0)191 401 7901 Fax: +44 (0)191 401 5575 E-mail: marketing.spdl.gb@siemens.com For enquires please contact our Customer Support Center Phone: +49 180/524 8437 (24hrs) Fax: +49 180/524 2471 E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com EMEA-T10051-00-76GB November 16 www. siemens.com/energy Siemens Protection Devices Limited 2